Ec PDF

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM GI
SECTION EC MA
EM
LC
CONTENTS FE
GENERAL - QG Idle Air Volume Learning ...........................................43

CL
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ..................................15
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................46 MT
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC .........................15
Introduction ................................................................46
PRECAUTIONS .............................................................17
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................................46
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) ..............................48 AT
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″.............17
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)..............................48
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
CONSULT-II ...............................................................53
System of Engine ......................................................17
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION..................62
AX
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System ..................18
Introduction ................................................................62
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...................20
Work Flow..................................................................64 SU
PREPARATION .............................................................21
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION ...........66
Special Service Tool ..................................................21
Preparation ................................................................66
Commercial Service Tools .........................................21
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
Basic Inspection.........................................................66 BR
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
SYSTEM.........................................................................22
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................85
Engine Control Component Parts Location...............22 ST
DTC Inspection Priority Chart....................................85
Circuit Diagram ..........................................................25
Fail-safe Chart ...........................................................85
System Diagram - QG13DE without Three Way
Symptom Matrix Chart...............................................86
Catalyst ......................................................................26 RS
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
System Diagram - Except QG13DE without
Mode ..........................................................................90
Three Way Catalyst ...................................................27
Vacuum Hose Drawing ..............................................28
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor BT
Mode ..........................................................................92
System Chart .............................................................29
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .......................95
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL HA
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE ..103
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...............................................30
Description ...............................................................103
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .......................30
Testing Condition .....................................................103
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ..................................32
Inspection Procedure...............................................103
SC
Air Conditioning Cut Control......................................33
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................104
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT EL
speed) ........................................................................34
INCIDENT.....................................................................107
Evaporative Emission System ...................................34
Description ...............................................................107
Positive Crankcase Ventilation ..................................38
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................107 IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ...................................39
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........108
Fuel Pressure Release ..............................................39
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..................108
Fuel Pressure Check .................................................39
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)......116
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check ................................40
Component Description ...........................................116
Injector .......................................................................40
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..........42
Mode ........................................................................116
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................116 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................148
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................116 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................149
Fail-Safe Mode ........................................................117 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................149
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................117 Wiring Diagram ........................................................150
Wiring Diagram ........................................................119 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................151
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................120 Component Inspection.............................................153
Component Inspection.............................................122 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (CMPS) (PHASE).........................................................154
SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT) .......................................123 Component Description ...........................................154
Component Description ...........................................123 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................154
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................155
Mode ........................................................................123 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................155
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................123 Wiring Diagram ........................................................156
Fail-Safe Mode ........................................................124 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................157
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................124 Component Inspection.............................................160
Wiring Diagram ........................................................125 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) .........161
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................126 Component Description ...........................................161
Component Inspection.............................................127 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................161
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ...........128 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................161
Component Description ...........................................128 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................161
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Overall Function Check ...........................................162
Mode ........................................................................128 Wiring Diagram ........................................................164
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................129 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................166
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................129 DTC P0600 A/T CONTROL.........................................167
Fail-Safe Mode ........................................................129 System Description..................................................167
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................129 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................167
Wiring Diagram ........................................................131 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................167
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................132 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................167
Component Inspection.............................................133 Wiring Diagram ........................................................168
DTC P0130 FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................169
(FRONT HO2S) (CIRCUIT)..........................................135 DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM) .........170
Component Description ...........................................135 System Description..................................................170
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................135 Mode ........................................................................171
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................136 Overall Function Check ...........................................173
Overall Function Check ...........................................137 Wiring Diagram ........................................................174
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................139 Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................186
Component Inspection.............................................142 Component Inspection.............................................186
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) ...........................144 DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL...................................188
Component Description ...........................................144 Component Description ...........................................188
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................144 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................144 Mode ........................................................................188
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................192
(POS)............................................................................148 Component Inspection.............................................197
Component Description ...........................................148 EGR SYSTEM..............................................................198
EC-2
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Description (Model with EGR valve) .......................198 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................236 GI
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Wiring Diagram ........................................................237
Mode ........................................................................199 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................238
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................199 Component Inspection.............................................240 MA
Wiring Diagram ........................................................200 FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER ........241
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................201 Wiring Diagram ........................................................241
Component Inspection.............................................204 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................242
EM
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL Component Inspection.............................................243
SOLENOID VALVE......................................................206 START SIGNAL...........................................................244 LC
Description ...............................................................206 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................244
Mode ........................................................................206 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................244
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................207 Wiring Diagram ........................................................245
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................209 FUEL PUMP.................................................................248 FE
Component Inspection.............................................211 System Description..................................................248
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) - AUXILIARY Component Description ...........................................248 CL
AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE ....................................212 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Description ...............................................................212 Mode ........................................................................248
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................249 MT
Wiring Diagram ........................................................214 Component Inspection.............................................253 AT
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................215 POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.........254
Component Inspection.............................................219 Component Description ...........................................254
AX
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH ................220 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Component Description (Model with TP switch) .....220 Mode ........................................................................254
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................220 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................254 SU
Wiring Diagram ........................................................221 Wiring Diagram ........................................................255
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................222 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................256
Component Inspection.............................................225 Component Inspection.............................................257 BR
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ......................259
VALVE..........................................................................226 Description ...............................................................259
ST
Operation .................................................................226 Wiring Diagram ........................................................260
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................261 RS
Mode ........................................................................226 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL.....................................263
Wiring Diagram ........................................................227 Mode ........................................................................263 BT
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................228 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................263
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH ............231 Diagnostic Procedure - Load Signal - .....................266 HA
Component Description ...........................................231 Diagnostic Procedure - Heater Control Panel
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor (Fan Switch) - ..........................................................270
SC
Mode ........................................................................231 Component Inspection.............................................271
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................231 MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ............................272
Wiring Diagram ........................................................232 Wiring Diagram ........................................................272 EL
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................233 CO ADJUSTMENT RESISTOR...................................273
INJECTOR ...................................................................236 Wiring Diagram ........................................................273
Component Description ...........................................236 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......274 IDX
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Fuel Pressure Regulator..........................................274
Mode ........................................................................236 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing................................274
EC-3
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Mass Air Flow Sensor..............................................274 Work Flow................................................................320
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ......................274 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION .........322
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater......................274 Basic Inspection.......................................................322
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)..........................274 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .......................275 DESCRIPTION .............................................................327
EGRC-Solenoid Valve (If so equipped)...................275 Symptom Matrix Chart.............................................327
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Valve ..........275 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
IACV-AAC Valve ......................................................275 Mode ........................................................................337
Injector .....................................................................275 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Ignition Coil with Power Transistor ..........................275 Mode ........................................................................339
Condenser ...............................................................275 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................340
Fuel Pump ...............................................................275 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT.....................................................................346
GENERAL - YD Description ...............................................................346
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ................................276 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........347
Alphabetical & Numerical Index for DTC ................276 Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..................347
PRECAUTIONS ...........................................................278 DTC 0102 MASS AIR FLOW SEN..............................353
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR Component Description ...........................................353
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...........278 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System ................279 Mode ........................................................................353
Precautions ..............................................................280 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................353
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis.................281 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................353
PREPARATION ...........................................................282 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................353
Special Service Tools ..............................................282 Wiring Diagram ........................................................355
Commercial Service Tool.........................................282 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................356
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL DTC 0103 COOLANT TEMP SEN ..............................359
SYSTEM.......................................................................283 Description ...............................................................359
ECCS-D Component Parts Location .......................283 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................359
Circuit Diagram ........................................................286 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................359
System Diagram ......................................................287 Wiring Diagram ........................................................361
Vacuum Hose Drawing ............................................288 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................362
System Chart ...........................................................289 DTC 0104 VEHICLE SPEED SEN ..............................364
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL Description ...............................................................364
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................................290 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................364
Fuel Injection Control System .................................290 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................364
Fuel Injection Timing Control System......................292 Overall Function Check ...........................................365
Air Conditioning Cut Control....................................292 Wiring Diagram ........................................................366
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................367
speed) ......................................................................292 DTC 0208 OVER HEAT...............................................368
Crankcase Ventilation System.................................293 Description ...............................................................368
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE .................................294 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Injection Tube and Injection Nozzle ........................294 Mode ........................................................................368
Electronic Control Fuel Injection Pump ...................299 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................368
Fuel Filter.................................................................305 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................369
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM Overall Function Check ...........................................370
DESCRIPTION .............................................................307 Wiring Diagram ........................................................371
DTC and MIL Detection Logic .................................307 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................372
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ..............................307 Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................383
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)............................308 DTC 0301 ECM 2, DTC 0901 ECM 12 .......................384
CONSULT-II .............................................................312 Description ...............................................................384
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION................318 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................384
Introduction ..............................................................318
EC-4
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................384 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................418 GI
DTC 0402 P9.FUEL TEMP SEN .................................386 Wiring Diagram ........................................................420
Description ...............................................................386 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................421 MA
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC 0704 P4.SPILL/V CIRC, DTC 0706 P6.SPILL
Mode ........................................................................386 VALVE ..........................................................................423
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................387 Description ...............................................................423
EM
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................387 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................387 Mode ........................................................................423 LC
Wiring Diagram ........................................................389 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................424
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................390 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................424
DTC 0403 ACCEL POS SENSOR ..............................392 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................424
Description ...............................................................392 Wiring Diagram ........................................................426
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................427
Mode ........................................................................392 DTC 0705 P5.PUMP C/MODULE................................429 FE
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................393 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor CL
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................393 Mode ........................................................................429
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................395 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................430 MT
DTC 0407 CRANK POS SEN (TDC) ..........................399 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................430
Description ...............................................................399 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................431
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC 0707 P7.F/INJ TIMG FB .....................................432 AT
Mode ........................................................................399 Description ...............................................................432
AX
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................399 Mode ........................................................................432
Wiring Diagram ........................................................401 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................433 SU
DTC 0701 P1.CAM POS SEN.....................................405 Wiring Diagram ........................................................435
Description ...............................................................405 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................436 BR
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC 0802 ECM 10.......................................................438
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................406 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................438
ST
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................406 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................438
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................406 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................439 RS
Wiring Diagram ........................................................408 DTC 0807 ECM 14.......................................................440
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................409 Description ...............................................................440
DTC 0702 P2.TDC PULSE SIG ..................................411 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................440 BT
Description ...............................................................411 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................440
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................440
Mode ........................................................................411 Wiring Diagram ........................................................441 HA
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................412 DTC 0902 ECM RLY....................................................444
SC
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................415 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................444 EL
DTC 0703 P3.PUMP COMM LINE ..............................417 Wiring Diagram ........................................................445
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC 0903 ECM 15.......................................................448 IDX
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................418 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................448
EC-5
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................448 General Specifications.............................................497
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................449 Injection Pump Numbers .........................................497
DTC 1004 FUEL CUT SYSTEM1................................450 Injection Nozzle .......................................................497
Description ...............................................................450 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ......................497
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC) ..........................497
Mode ........................................................................450 Glow Plug ................................................................497
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................451 Accelerator Position Sensor ....................................497
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................451 EGR Volume Control Valve .....................................497
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................451
Wiring Diagram ........................................................453 EUROPE - QG
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................456 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ................................498
Description ...............................................................456 Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC .......................498
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................457 PRECAUTIONS ...........................................................504
Wiring Diagram ........................................................458 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................459 BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...........504
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM ..........................465 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
Description ...............................................................465 System of Engine and A/T.......................................504
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Engine Fuel & Emission Control System ................505
Mode ........................................................................466 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis.................507
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................466 PREPARATION ...........................................................508
Wiring Diagram ........................................................467 Special Service Tools ..............................................508
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................468 Commercial Service Tools .......................................508
START SIGNAL...........................................................477 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
Wiring Diagram ........................................................477 SYSTEM.......................................................................509
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................478 Engine Control Component Parts Location.............509
ACCELERATOR POSITION SWITCH ........................480 Circuit Diagram ........................................................513
Description ...............................................................480 System Diagram ......................................................515
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Vacuum Hose Drawing ............................................516
Mode ........................................................................480 System Chart ...........................................................517
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................480 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL
Wiring Diagram ........................................................481 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................................518
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................482 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .....................518
ACCELERATOR SWITCH (F/C) .................................486 Electronic Ignition (EI) System ................................520
Description ...............................................................486 Air Conditioning Cut Control....................................521
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
Mode ........................................................................486 speed) ......................................................................522
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................486 Evaporative Emission System .................................522
Wiring Diagram ........................................................487 Positive Crankcase Ventilation ................................525
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................488 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE .................................526
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH ............491 Fuel Pressure Release ............................................526
Description ...............................................................491 Fuel Pressure Check ...............................................526
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Fuel Pressure Regulator Check ..............................527
Mode ........................................................................491 Injector .....................................................................527
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................491 How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing........529
Wiring Diagram ........................................................492 Preparation ..............................................................530
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................493 Inspection Procedure...............................................533
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL ..................................495 Idle Air Volume Learning .........................................543
Wiring Diagram ........................................................495 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ............................496 DESCRIPTION .............................................................545
Wiring Diagram ........................................................496 Introduction ..............................................................545
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......497 Two Trip Detection Logic .........................................545
Emission-related Diagnostic Information .................546
EC-6
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) ............................560 DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GI
Malfunction Indicator (MI) ........................................560 SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT) .......................................644
OBD System Operation Chart (With Euro-OBD Component Description ...........................................644
Models Only)............................................................564 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor MA
CONSULT-II .............................................................569 Mode ........................................................................644
Generic Scan Tool (GST) ........................................580 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................644
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION................582 Fail-safe Mode .........................................................645
EM
Introduction ..............................................................582 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................645
Work Flow................................................................584 Wiring Diagram ........................................................646 LC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION .........586 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................647
Basic Inspection.......................................................586 Component Inspection.............................................648
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ...........649
DESCRIPTION .............................................................601 Component Description ...........................................649
DTC Inspection Priority Chart..................................601 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Fail-safe Chart .........................................................602 Mode ........................................................................649 FE
Symptom Matrix Chart.............................................603 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................650
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................650 CL
Mode ........................................................................607 Fail-safe Mode .........................................................650
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................650
Mode ........................................................................609 Wiring Diagram ........................................................652 MT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE ..620 Component Inspection.............................................655
Description ...............................................................620 DTC P0130 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 AT
Testing Condition .....................................................620 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT).....................................................657
Inspection Procedure...............................................620 Component Description ...........................................657
AX
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................621 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT Mode ........................................................................657
INCIDENT.....................................................................624 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................657 SU
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........625 Overall Function Check ...........................................659 BR
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..................625 Wiring Diagram ........................................................660
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)......633 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................661
Component Description ...........................................633 Component Inspection.............................................662
ST
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P0131 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Mode ........................................................................633 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT MONITORING) .....................664 RS
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................633 Component Description ...........................................664
Fail-safe Mode .........................................................634 Mode ........................................................................664 BT
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................636 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................665 HA
Component Inspection.............................................638 Overall Function Check ...........................................666
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................666
SC
SENSOR ......................................................................639 Component Inspection.............................................668
Component Description ...........................................639 DTC P0132 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................639 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT MONITORING) ......................670 EL
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................639 Component Description ...........................................670
Wiring Diagram ........................................................641 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................642 Mode ........................................................................670 IDX
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................671
EC-7
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Overall Function Check ...........................................672 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................672 Mode ........................................................................705
DTC P0133 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................705
(FRONT) (RESPONSE MONITORING).......................676 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................706
Component Description ...........................................676 Overall Function Check ...........................................707
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................676 Component Inspection.............................................711
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................677 DTC P0139 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................677 (REAR) (RESPONSE MONITORING).........................713
Overall Function Check ...........................................678 Component Description ...........................................713
DTC P0134 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................713
(FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)........................................685 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................714
Component Description ...........................................685 Overall Function Check ...........................................715
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................685 Component Inspection.............................................720
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................686 DTC P0140 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................686 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE) ..........................................722
Wiring Diagram ........................................................687 Component Description ...........................................722
Component Inspection.............................................689 Mode ........................................................................722
DTC P0135 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................722
(FRONT) HEATER.......................................................691 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................722
Description ...............................................................691 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................723
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Overall Function Check ...........................................723
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................691 Component Inspection.............................................726
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................692 DTC P0141 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Wiring Diagram ........................................................693 HEATER (REAR) .........................................................728
Component Inspection.............................................695 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC P0137 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Mode ........................................................................728
(REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)...................696 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................728
Component Description ...........................................696 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................729
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................697 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
Overall Function Check ...........................................698 FUNCTION (LEAN SIDE) ............................................733
DTC P0138 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................736
(REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING) .................705
EC-8
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM Wiring Diagram ........................................................779 GI
FUNCTION (RICH SIDE) .............................................740 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................780
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................740 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE MA
Wiring Diagram ........................................................742 (CIRCUIT).....................................................................783
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
EM
SENSOR ......................................................................747 Mode ........................................................................784
Component Description ...........................................747 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................784 LC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................747 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................784
DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION ...790 FE
MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE ...............752 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................790
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................752 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................790 CL
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................752 Overall Function Check ...........................................791
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) ...........................758 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME MT
Component Description ...........................................758 CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT).................795
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................758 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor AT
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................758 Mode ........................................................................795
AX
Component Inspection.............................................761 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................796
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Wiring Diagram ........................................................797 SU
(POS)............................................................................762 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................798
Component Description ...........................................762 Component Inspection.............................................799
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................762 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) .........800 BR
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................763 Component Description ...........................................800
ST
Component Inspection.............................................767 Wiring Diagram ........................................................802 RS
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................804
(CMPS) (PHASE).........................................................768 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) -
Component Description ...........................................768 AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE ...............805 BT
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................769 Mode ........................................................................806 HA
SC
Component Inspection.............................................774 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................806
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE)......................775 Wiring Diagram ........................................................807
Description ...............................................................775 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................808 EL
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Component Inspection.............................................812
Mode ........................................................................776 DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................776 SWITCH .......................................................................813 IDX
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................776 Component Description ...........................................813
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................777
EC-9
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................813 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) ........................851
Overall Function Check ...........................................814 Description ...............................................................851
DTC P0605 ECM .........................................................819 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................852
Component Description ...........................................819 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................853
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................819 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................856
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................820 Component Inspection.............................................857
DTC P1111 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION
SOLENOID VALVE......................................................821 LINE .............................................................................859
Component Description ...........................................821 System Description..................................................859
Operation .................................................................821 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................859
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................859
Mode ........................................................................821 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................859
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................821 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................861
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................822 DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP)
Wiring Diagram ........................................................823 SWITCH .......................................................................862
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................824 Component Description ...........................................862
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL Mode ........................................................................862
SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT)....................................826 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................862
Mode ........................................................................826 Overall Function Check ...........................................863
Component Description ...........................................827 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................865
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................827 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR ....................867
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM) .........833 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)...................872
System Description..................................................833 Component Description ...........................................872
Mode ........................................................................833 Mode ........................................................................872
Overall Function Check ...........................................835 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................874
Wiring Diagram ........................................................836 Component Inspection.............................................876
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................837 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)...878
Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................843 Description ...............................................................878
DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR.............845 Mode ........................................................................878
EC-10
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................880 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................921 GI
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR).....................882 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SYSTEM .......924
Component Description ...........................................882 Description ...............................................................924 MA
Mode ........................................................................882 Mode ........................................................................924
EM
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................884 Wiring Diagram ........................................................926 LC
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR).....888 Component Inspection.............................................931
Description ...............................................................888 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE......................................933
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor System Description..................................................933
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................888 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................935 FE
Wiring Diagram ........................................................889 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH ............937
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................890 Component Description ...........................................937 CL
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM ..........................893 Mode ........................................................................937
Description ...............................................................893 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................937 MT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................895 INJECTOR ...................................................................942 AT
AX
Component Inspection.............................................902 Mode ........................................................................942
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................942
SOLENOID VALVE......................................................904 Wiring Diagram ........................................................943 SU
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Component Inspection.............................................946
Mode ........................................................................904 IGNITION SIGNAL.......................................................947 BR
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................905 Component Description ...........................................947
ST
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) - AUXILIARY Wiring Diagram ........................................................948 RS
AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE ....................................911 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................950
Description ...............................................................911 Component Inspection.............................................954
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor START SIGNAL...........................................................956 BT
Mode ........................................................................912 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................912 Mode ........................................................................956
Wiring Diagram ........................................................913 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................956 HA
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................914 Wiring Diagram ........................................................957
SC
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID FUEL PUMP.................................................................960
VALVE..........................................................................919 System Description..................................................960
Component Description ...........................................919 Component Description ...........................................960 EL
Operation .................................................................919 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................960
Mode ........................................................................919 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................961 IDX
EC-11
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Component Inspection.............................................965 Engine Fuel & Emission Control System ................995
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.........966 Precautions ..............................................................996
Component Description ...........................................966 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis.................997
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor PREPARATION ...........................................................998
Mode ........................................................................966 Special Service Tools ..............................................998
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................966 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
Wiring Diagram ........................................................967 SYSTEM.......................................................................999
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................968 Engine Control Component Parts Location.............999
Component Inspection.............................................969 Circuit Diagram ......................................................1002
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ......................971 System Diagram ....................................................1004
Description ...............................................................971 System Chart .........................................................1005
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................971 ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL
Wiring Diagram ........................................................972 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...........................................1006
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................973 Fuel Injection Control System ...............................1006
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL.....................................976 Fuel Injection Timing Control System....................1007
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Air Conditioning Cut Control..................................1008
Mode ........................................................................976 Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................976 speed) ....................................................................1008
Wiring Diagram ........................................................977 Crankcase Ventilation System...............................1009
Diagnostic Procedure - Load Signal - .....................980 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ...............................1010
Diagnostic Procedure - Heater Control Panel Injection Tube and Injection Nozzle ......................1010
(Fan Switch) - ..........................................................986 Electronic Control Fuel Injection Pump .................1014
Component Inspection.............................................987 Fuel Filter...............................................................1021
MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ..............................988 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram ........................................................988 DESCRIPTION ...........................................................1023
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......989 DTC and MI Detection Logic .................................1023
Fuel Pressure Regulator..........................................989 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ............................1023
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing................................989 Malfunction Indicator (MI) ......................................1024
Mass Air Flow Sensor..............................................989 CONSULT-II ...........................................................1028
Intake Air Temperature Sensor................................989 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION..............1033
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ......................989 Introduction ............................................................1033
Throttle Position Sensor ..........................................989 Work Flow..............................................................1035
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater (Front) ................989 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION .......1037
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater (Rear).................989 Basic Inspection.....................................................1037
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor ...............................990 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
EGR Volume Control Valve .....................................990 DESCRIPTION ...........................................................1042
EGR Temperature Sensor .......................................990 Symptom Matrix Chart...........................................1042
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Valve ..........990 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
IACV-AAC Valve ......................................................990 Mode ......................................................................1052
Injector .....................................................................990 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Ignition Coil with Power Transistor ..........................990 Mode ......................................................................1054
Condenser ...............................................................990 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1055
Fuel Pump ...............................................................990 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)..........................991 INCIDENT...................................................................1061
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .......................991 Description .............................................................1061
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1061
EUROPE - YD TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY......1062
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit................1062
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ................................992 DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SEN .........................1068
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC .......................992 Component Description .........................................1068
PRECAUTIONS ...........................................................994 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR Mode ......................................................................1068
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...........994
EC-12
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1068 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 1110 GI
On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1068 On Board Diagnosis Logic..................................... 1110
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1068 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 1110
Wiring Diagram ......................................................1070 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 1112 MA
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1071 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 1113
DTC P0115 COOLANT TEMP SEN ..........................1074 DTC P1202 FUEL CUT SYSTEM2 ........................... 1115
Description .............................................................1074 Description ............................................................. 1115
EM
On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1074 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1074 Mode ...................................................................... 1115 LC
Wiring Diagram ......................................................1076 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 1116
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1077 On Board Diagnosis Logic..................................... 1116
DTC P0120 ACCEL POS SENSOR ..........................1079 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 1116
Description .............................................................1079 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 1118
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 1119
Mode ......................................................................1079 DTC P1217 OVER HEAT ..........................................1121 FE
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1079 Description .............................................................1121
On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1080 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor CL
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1080 Mode ......................................................................1121
Wiring Diagram ......................................................1081 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1121
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1082 On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1122 MT
DTC P0335 CRANK POS SEN (TDC) ......................1089 Overall Function Check .........................................1123
Description .............................................................1089 Wiring Diagram ......................................................1124
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1126 AT
Mode ......................................................................1089 Main 12 Causes of Overheating............................1147
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1089 DTC P1241 P7.F/INJ TIMG FB .................................1148
AX
On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1089 Description .............................................................1148
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1090 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Wiring Diagram ......................................................1091 Mode ......................................................................1148 SU
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1092 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1149
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SEN..........................1095 On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1149
Description .............................................................1095 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1149 BR
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1095 Wiring Diagram ......................................................1151
On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1095 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1152
Overall Function Check .........................................1095 DTC P1251 P4.SPILL/V CIRC ..................................1154
ST
Wiring Diagram ......................................................1097 Description .............................................................1154
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1099 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor RS
DTC P0571 BRAKE SW............................................1100 Mode ......................................................................1154
Description .............................................................1100 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1155
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1100 On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1155 BT
On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1100 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1155
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1100 Wiring Diagram ......................................................1157
Wiring Diagram ......................................................1102 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1158 HA
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1103 DTC P1337 P2.DTC PULSE SIG ..............................1160
DTC P1107 ECM 10 ..................................................1107 Description .............................................................1160
SC
Description .............................................................1107 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1107 Mode ......................................................................1160
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1107 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1161 EL
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1108 On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1161
DTC P1180 P9.FUEL TEMP SEN .............................1109 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1161
Description .............................................................1109 Wiring Diagram ......................................................1163 IDX
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1164
Mode ......................................................................1109 DTC P1341 P1.CAM POS SEN ................................1166
EC-13
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Description .............................................................1166 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1189
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1189
Mode ......................................................................1166 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1189
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1167 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1190
On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1167 GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM .....................................1191
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1167 Description .............................................................1191
Wiring Diagram ......................................................1169 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1192
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1170 Wiring Diagram ......................................................1193
DTC P1600 P3.PUMP COMM LINE..........................1172 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1194
Description .............................................................1172 EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM ........................1200
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Description .............................................................1200
Mode ......................................................................1172 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1173 Mode ......................................................................1201
On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1173 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1201
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1173 Wiring Diagram ......................................................1202
Wiring Diagram ......................................................1175 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1203
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1176 START SIGNAL.........................................................1208
DTC P1603 ECM 12, DTC P1607 ECM 2.................1178 Wiring Diagram ......................................................1208
Description .............................................................1178 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1209
On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1178 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH ..........1211
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1178 Description .............................................................1211
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1179 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC P1620 ECM RLY ...............................................1180 Mode ......................................................................1211
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1180 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ...................1211
On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1180 Wiring Diagram ......................................................1212
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1180 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1213
Wiring Diagram ......................................................1181 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL ................................1215
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1182 Wiring Diagram ......................................................1215
DTC P1621 ECM 15 ..................................................1184 MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ............................1216
Description .............................................................1184 Wiring Diagram ......................................................1216
On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1184 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .....1218
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1184 General Specifications...........................................1218
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1185 Injection Nozzle .....................................................1218
DTC P1660 BATTERY VOLTAGE ............................1186 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ....................1218
On Board Diagnosis Logic.....................................1186 Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC) ........................1218
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................1186 Glow Plug ..............................................................1218
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................1186 Accelerator Position Sensor ..................................1218
DTC P1690 P5.PUMP C/MODULE ...........................1188 EGR Volume Control Valve ...................................1218
Description .............................................................1188
Mode ......................................................................1188
EC-14
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX GENERAL - QG
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC NJEC0797

ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC
X: Applicable
NJEC0797S01
—: Not applicable
GI
Items DTC
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
MIL Illumination Reference page MA
CONSULT-II ECM*1
A/T COMM LINE P0600 0600 — EC-167

EM
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 X EC-154
ECT SEN/CIRC P0115 0115 X EC-123

LC
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 X EC-148
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 X EC-170
HO2S1 (B1) P0130 0130 X EC-135
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P1320 1320 X EC-188

FE
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325 0325 — EC-144
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0100 0100 X EC-116 CL

NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 X EL section
NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER

— 0000 — —
MT
TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED
NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER

— Flashing*2 — EC-49 AT
THRTL POS SEN/CIRC P0120 0120 X EC-128
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0500 X EC-161

AX
*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
*2: While engine is running, front heated oxygen sensor monitoring status is shown by blinks. SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-15
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX GENERAL - QG
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC =NJEC0797S02
X: Applicable —: Not applicable
DTC Items
MIL Illumination Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM*1 (CONSULT-II screen terms)
NOT DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER

— Flashing*2 — EC-49
NOT DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER

— 0000 — —
P0100 0100 X MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-116
P0115 0115 X ECT SEN/CIRC EC-123
P0120 0120 X THRTL POS SEN/CIRC EC-128
P0130 0130 X HO2S1 (B1) EC-135
P0325 0325 — KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-144
P0335 0335 X CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-148
P0340 0340 X CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-154
P0500 0500 X VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC EC-161
P0600 0600 — A/T COMM LINE EC-167
P1217 1217 X ENG OVER TEMP EC-170
P1320 1320 X IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY EC-188
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 X NATS MALFUNCTION EL section
*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).

*2: While engine is running, front heated oxygen sensor monitoring status is shown by blinks.
EC-16
PRECAUTIONS GENERAL - QG
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
NJEC0798
GI
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL N16 is as follows (The compo- MA
sition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer- EM
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), front seat
belt pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision LC
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), side air bag (satellite) sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal
collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING: FE
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN dealer. CL
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section. MT
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation tape either just
before the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS. AT
System of Engine AX
NJEC0799
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. SU
CAUTION:
I Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. BR
will cause the MIL to light up.
I Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, ST
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
I Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. RS
For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL-7, “Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
I Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with BT
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
I Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, HA
etc.
I Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM before
returning the vehicle to the customer. SC
EL
IDX
EC-17
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System =NJEC0800

I Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
I Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine
is running.
I Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect nega-
tive battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the
ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if
ignition switch is turned off.
SEF706Y
I Do not disassemble ECM.

I If a battery terminal is disconnected, the memory will
return to the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is
disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a mal-
function. Do not replace parts because of a slight varia-
tion.
SEF707Y
I When connecting or disconnecting ECM harness

connector, use lever as shown.
When connecting, fasten connector securely with lever
moved until it stops.
SEF908W
I When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminals when connecting pin connectors.
I Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A Poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
I Keep ECM harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away from adja-
cent harness, to prevent an ECM system malfunctions due
SEF291H
to receiving external noise, degraded operation of ICs, etc.
I Keep ECM parts and harness dry.
EC-18
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System (Cont’d)
I Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
I Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
I Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter- GI
gent.
I Do not disassemble IAC valve-AAC valve.
I Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri-
MA
ous incidents.
I Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor and EM
crankshaft position sensor.
I Before replacing ECM, refer to “ECM Terminals and Refer-
MEF040D ence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions LC
properly, EC-95.
FE
CL
MT
I After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function AT
Check”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall AX
Function Check” should be a good result if the repair is
completed.
SU
BR
SAT652J
I When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never

allow the two tester probes to contact. ST
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
I Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
RS
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the
ECM’s transistor. Use a grond other than ECM terminals, BT
such as the ground.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF348N
EC-19
I Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
I Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
SEF605X
I Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

I Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
I Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
I When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
1) Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
2) Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
3) Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave ratio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y 4) Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis NJEC0801
When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I GI-12, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
I EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution cir-
cuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
I GI-33, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS”
I GI-22, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN
ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
EC-20
PREPARATION GENERAL - QG
Special Service Tool
Special Service Tool NJEC0802
Tool number
Description GI
Tool name
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening front heated oxygen sen-

Heated oxygen sensor sor with 22 mm hexagon nut MA
wrench
EM
LC
NT379
FE
CL
MT
Commercial Service Tools NJEC0803
AT
Tool name Description
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
AX
SU
BR
NT653
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before ST

cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-seize
lubricant shown below.
a: 18 mm dia. with pitch 1.5 mm, for Zirconia RS
Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm dia. with pitch 1.25 mm, for Titania
Oxygen Sensor
BT
NT778
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

HA
(PermatexTM 133AR or when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
equivalent meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-907) SC
EL
NT779
IDX
EC-21
SYSTEM GENERAL - QG
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Engine Control Component Parts Location NJEC0804
SEC759D
EC-22
SYSTEM GENERAL - QG
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
JEC379D
EC-23
SYSTEM GENERAL - QG
JEF079Y
EC-24
SYSTEM GENERAL - QG
Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram NJEC0805
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GEC299A
EC-25
SYSTEM GENERAL - QG
System Diagram — QG13DE without Three Way Catalyst
System Diagram — QG13DE without Three

Way Catalyst NJEC0806
SEF080Y
EC-26
SYSTEM GENERAL - QG
System Diagram — Except QG13DE without Three Way Catalyst
System Diagram — Except QG13DE without

Three Way Catalyst NJEC0807
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEC380D
EC-27
SYSTEM GENERAL - QG
Vacuum Hose Drawing
Vacuum Hose Drawing NJEC0808

Refer to “System Diagram” on EC-26 for vacuum control system.
SEC174D
EC-28
SYSTEM GENERAL - QG
System Chart
System Chart NJEC0809
Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator) GI

I Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Injectors
I Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Mass air flow sensor Electronic ignition system Power transistor MA
I Engine coolant temperature sensor Idle air control system IACV-AAC valve
I Front heated oxygen sensor (Models with three
way catalyst) Intake valve timing control sole- EM
Intake valve timing control*
I Ignition switch noid valve
I Throttle position sensor
I PNP switch Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay LC
I Air conditioner switch
Front heated oxygen sensor monitor & on Malfunction indicator lamp
I Knock sensor
board diagnostic system (On the instrument panel)
I Battery voltage
I Power steering oil pressure switch EGRC solenoid valve (If so
I Vehicle speed sensor EGR control (Except QG13DE)
equipped)
I Closed throttle position switch
I Electrical load EVAP canister purge volume con- FE
EVAP canister purge flow control
I Refrigerant pressure sensor trol solenoid valve
I TCM (Transmission control module) (A/T mod-
els)
Cooling fan control Cooling fan relay CL
Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay
*: QG16DE and QG18DE engine models with three way catalyst MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-29
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION GENERAL - QG
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System

DESCRIPTION NJEC0810
Input/Output Signal Chart NJEC0810S01
ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Front heated oxygen sensor

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Models with three way catalyst)
Throttle position
Throttle position sensor
Throttle valve idle position Fuel injec-
PNP switch Gear position tion & mix-
Injector
ture ratio
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed control
Ignition switch Start signal
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Electrical load Electrical load signal
Battery Battery voltage
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering operation
Basic Multiport Fuel Injection System NJEC0810S02

The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the camshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
Various Fuel Injection Increase/Decrease Compensation NJEC0810S03
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various oper-
ating conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
I During warm-up
I When starting the engine
I During acceleration
I Hot-engine operation
I High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
I During deceleration
I During high engine speed operation
I Extremely high engine coolant temperature
EC-30
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
Mixture Ratio Feedback Control (Closed loop control) NJEC0810S04
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF336W
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission con-
trol. The three way catalyst can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses a front
heated oxygen sensor in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about the front FE
heated oxygen sensor, refer to EC-135. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal
air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition. CL
Open Loop Control NJEC0810S05
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback MT
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
I Deceleration and acceleration
I High-load, high-speed operation AT
I Malfunction of front heated oxygen sensor or its circuit
I Insufficient activation of front heated oxygen sensor at low engine coolant temperature AX
I High engine coolant temperature
I During warm-up
I When starting the engine SU
Mixture Ratio Self-learning Control NJEC0810S06
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from the front heated BR
oxygen sensor. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as
close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled
as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot film) and characteristic ST
changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This
is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between RS
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim. BT
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from the front heated oxygen sensor indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN
compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is HA
rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, SC
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
EL
IDX
EC-31
Fuel Injection Timing NJEC0810S07
SEF337W
Two types of systems are used.

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System NJEC0810S0701
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System NJEC0810S0702
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
Fuel Shut-off NJEC0810S08
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System
ECM func-
tion

Engine speed and piston position
Throttle position
Throttle valve idle position Ignition tim-
Power transistor
ing control
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Knock sensor Engine knocking
PNP switch Gear position
EC-32
Electronic Ignition (EI) System (Cont’d)
System Description NJEC0811S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF742M
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of
the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown above.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width, crankshaft position sensor signal and cam- FE
shaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transis-
tor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec CL
A°BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored
in the ECM. MT
I At starting
I During warm-up
I At idle AT
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed AX
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions.
If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The SU
ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Air Conditioning Cut Control BR
ST
ECM func-
tion
RS
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle

BT
Engine speed
Air condi- HA
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature tioner cut Air conditioner relay
Ignition switch Start signal control
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure

SC

EL
System Description NJEC0812S02 IDX

This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
I When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
I When cranking the engine.
EC-33
Air Conditioning Cut Control (Cont’d)
I At high engine speeds.
I When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
I When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
I When the refrigerant pressure becomes excessively high or excessively low.
speed)
ECM func-
tion
PNP switch Neutral position
Throttle position sensor Throttle position Fuel cut

Injectors
control

Engine speed
If the engine speed is above 2,500 rpm with no load, (for example, in Neutral and engine speed over 2,500
rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”,
EC-30.
Evaporative Emission System
SEF749T
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The fuel vapor from sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister when the engine is off. The fuel vapor is
then stored in the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister retains the fuel vapor until the EVAP canister is purged
EC-34
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
by air.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the flow
rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as GI
the air flow increases.
MA
EM
LC
INSPECTION NJEC0815
EVAP Canister NJEC0815S01
Blow air into each of three ports to check that air flows freely.
FE
CL
SEF083Y
MT
Fuel Tank Vacuum Relief Valve (Built into fuel fillerNJEC0815S02
cap)
1. Wipe clean valve housing. AT
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
AX
16.0 - 20.0 kPa (0.16 - 0.20 bar, 0.163 - 0.204 kg/cm2,
2.32 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: SU
−6.0 to −3.5 kPa (−0.060 to −0.035 bar, −0.061 to
−0.036 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.51 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. BR
SEF084Y
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF943S
Fuel Check Valve NJEC0815S03

SC
1. Blow air through connector on fuel tank side.
A considerable resistance should be felt and a portion of air
flow should be directed toward the EVAP canister side. EL
2. Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side.
Air flow should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side.
3. If fuel check valve is suspected of not properly functioning in
IDX
steps 1 and 2 above, replace it.
SEF552Y
EC-35
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Volume
Control Solenoid Valve NJEC0815S04
Refer to EC-211.
EVAP Vapor Line NJEC0815S05
Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for
cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
Refer to Evaporative Emission Line Drawing, EC-37.
EC-36
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING NJEC0816
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF085Y
IDX
EC-37
Positive Crankcase Ventilation

SEF921W
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake collector.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV
valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air duct into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through
the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover.
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some
of the flow will go through the hose connection to the intake collector under all conditions.
INSPECTION NJEC0818
PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve NJEC0818S01
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from breather sepa-
rator. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes
through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a fin-
ger is placed over the valve inlet.
SEF244Q
Ventilation Hose NJEC0818S02

1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any
hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
ET277
EC-38
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE GENERAL - QG
Fuel Pressure Release
Fuel Pressure Release NJEC0819

Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel
line to eliminate danger. GI
WITH CONSULT-II NJEC0819S01
1. Start engine. MA
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
EM
pressure.
SEF094Y 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. LC
FE
CL
SEF214Y
MT
WITHOUT CONSULT-II NJEC0819S02
1. Remove fuse for fuel pump. Refer to fuse block cover for fuse AT
location.
2. Start engine.
AX
pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and reconnect fuel pump fuse. SU
BR
JEF086Y
Fuel Pressure Check NJEC0820 ST

I When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
I Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent
parts. RS
I Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
I Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
I Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system
BT
operating (i.e. lights, rear window defogger, A/C etc.). Fuel
pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to vary- HA
ing engine loads and changes in manifold vacuum.
JEF087Y
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Disconnect fuel hose between fuel filter and fuel tube (engine SC
side).
3. Install pressure gauge between fuel filter and fuel tube.
4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. EL
5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
At idle speed: IDX
With vacuum hose connected
Approximately 235 kPa (2.35 bar, 2.4 kg/cm2, 34
psi)
With vacuum hose disconnected
EC-39
Fuel Pressure Check (Cont’d)
psi)
If results are unsatisfactory, perform Fuel Pressure Regulator
Check, EC-40.
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check NJEC0821

1. Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum
hose from intake manifold.
2. Plug intake manifold with a rubber cap.
3. Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator.
4. Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as
vacuum is changed.
Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases. If results
are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator.
SEF718B
Injector
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION NJEC0822
2. Remove fuel tube assemblies in numerical sequence as
shown in the Figure at left.
3. Expand and remove clips securing fuel injectors.
4. Extract fuel injectors straight from fuel tubes.
I Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during removal.
I Do not bump or drop fuel injectors.
JEF088Y 5. Install fuel injectors.
Carefully install O-rings, including the one used with the pres-
sure regulator.
I Lubricate O-rings with a smear of engine oil.
I Be careful not to damage O-rings with service tools finger
nails or clips. Do not expand or twist O-rings.
I Discard old clips; replace with new ones.
6. Position clips in grooves on fuel injectors.
I Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned
with cutouts of clips after installation.
SEF927W
EC-40
Injector (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
JEF089Y
AX
7. Align protrusions of fuel tubes with those of fuel injectors.
Insert fuel injectors straight into fuel tubes.
8. After properly inserting fuel injectors, check to make sure that SU
fuel tube protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors,
and that flanges of fuel tubes are engaged with clips.
BR
9. Tighten fuel tube assembly mounting nuts in numerical
sequence (indicated in the Figure at left) and in two stages. ST
: Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
1st stage: RS
12 - 13 (1.2 - 1.4, 9 - 10)
2nd stage:
17 - 23 (1.7 - 2.4, 13 - 17) BT
10. Insert fuel hoses into fuel tubes so that ends of fuel hoses butt
up against fuel tubes; fasten with clamps, avoiding bulges.
HA
CAUTION:
JEF815Y
After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and
fuel hose, check connections for fuel leakage. SC
EL
IDX
EC-41
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing NJEC0823

IDLE SPEED NJEC0823S01
I With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
I Without CONSULT-II
Check the idle speed by installing the pulse type tachometer
clamp on the loop wire or on suitable high-tension wire which
is installed between No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug.
NOTE:
SEF058Y For the method of installing the tachometer, refer to “IGNITION
TIMING”, EC-42.
IGNITION TIMING NJEC0823S02

Any of following two methods may be used.
I Method A
a) Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
b) Check ignition timing.
JEF150Y
I Method B
a) Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
b) Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to
this wire.
c) Check ignition timing.
SEF933W
SEF284G
EC-42
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
SEF166Y
LC
Idle Air Volume Learning NJEC0824
DESCRIPTION NJEC0824S01
“Idle Air Volume Learning” is an operation to learn the idle air vol-
ume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be
performed under any of the following conditions: FE
I Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced.
I Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
CL
PRE-CONDITIONING NJEC0824S02
Before performing “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that all of
SEF217Z the following conditions are satisfied. MT
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are
missed for even a moment.
I Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
AT
I Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99°C (158 - 210°F)
I PNP switch: ON AX
I Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
I Cooling fan motor: Not operating SU
I Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
I Vehicle speed: Stopped BR
SEF454Y I Transmission: Warmed-up
For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi- ST
cates less than 0.9V.
For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive
vehicle for 10 minutes. RS
OPERATION PROCEDURE NJEC0824S03
With CONSULT-II NJEC0824S0301
BT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
HA
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
MBIB0238E
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITION-
ING” (previously mentioned) are in good order. SC
6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 28 seconds.
7. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. EL
8. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
9. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. IDX
If “CMPLT” is not displayed, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not
be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the
incident by referring to the NOTE below.
10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within specifications.
EC-43
Idle Air Volume Learning (Cont’d)
Engine and transmission Idle speed Ignition timing

type (in “P” or “N” position) (in “P” or “N” position)
QG13DE M/T 630±50 rpm 2±5° BTDC
QG13DE A/T 750±50 rpm 6±5° BTDC
Without CONSULT-II NJEC0824S0302

ING” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown),
then reconnect it within 5 seconds.
NEF309A
8. Wait 20 seconds.
9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, “Idle
Air Volume Learning” will not be carried out successfully. In this
case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the NOTE
below.
Engine and transmission Idle speed Ignition timing
type (in “P” or “N” position) (in “P” or “N” position)
EC-44
NOTE:
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully,
proceed as follows: GI
1) Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2) Check PCV valve operation.
3) Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air MA
leakage.
4) Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory. EM
(Refer to Basic Inspection, EC-66.)
5) When the above four items check out OK, engine compo-
nent parts and their installation condition are question- LC
able. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFI-
CATION VALVE”, EC-103.
6) If any of the following conditions occur after the engine
has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and per-
form “Idle air volume learning” all over again: FE
I Engine stalls.
I Erroneous idle. CL
I Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system.
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-45
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION GENERAL - QG
Introduction
Introduction NJEC0825
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. Self-diagnosis items are listed in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”, EC-15.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when a specific malfunction is detected,
or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode (Refer to EC-85.). For diagnostic items causing the MIL to light up,
refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”, EC-15.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) NJEC0826
HOW TO READ DTC NJEC0826S01
Malfunction items can be confirmed by the following methods.
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode.
Examples: P0100, P0115, P0335, etc. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
The number of blinks of the malfunction indicator lamp in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)
indicates the DTC. Examples: 0100, 1320 etc.
I Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, Mode II does not indicate whether the malfunc-
tion is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if avail-
able) is recommended.
SEF560X
A sample of CONSULT-II display is shown at above. The malfunction is displayed in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last
detection of a malfunction.
If the malfunction is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
FREEZE FRAME DATA NJEC0826S02
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant
temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position
and base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the DTC, are called freeze frame data. The data, stored
together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II. The freeze frame
data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. For details, see EC-55.
Only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM.
When more than one DTC is detected, the freeze frame data detected first is stored in the memory.
The freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for
clearing the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR-
MATION”. Refer to EC-46.
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION NJEC0826S03
How to Erase DTC (With CONSULT-II) NJEC0826S0301
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
9 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “ENGINE”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
EC-46
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF993XA CL
The emission-related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. MT
How to Erase DTC (No Tools) NJEC0826S0302
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least AT
9 seconds and then turn it “ON” again.
2. Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by using the data link connector. (See EC-50.) AX
The emission-related diagnostic information can be erased by changing the diagnostic test mode from Diag-
nostic Test Mode II to Mode I by using the data link connector. (See EC-50.)
SU
NOTE:
I If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost after approx.
24 hours. BR
I Erasing the emission-related diagnostic information using CONSULT-II is easier and quicker than
switching the mode using the data link connector.
I The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. ST
1) Diagnostic trouble codes
2) Freeze frame data
RS
3) Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but
all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures. BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-47
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System)
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) NJEC0827
SEF543X
I If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNC-
TION” is displayed on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with
CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) in EL section.
I Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NATS is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
I When replacing ECM, initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs
must be carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedure of NATS ini-
tialization and NATS ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual, NATS.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
SAT652J
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.

1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
I If the MIL does not light up, refer to EL-226, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-272.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.
On Board Diagnostic System Function NJEC0828S01
The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.
Diagnostic Test Mode I
1. BULB CHECK:
This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit and ECM test mode selector. (See EC-50.)
2. MALFUNCTION WARNING:
This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected, the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
Diagnostic Test Mode II
3. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS:
This function allows DTCs to be read.
4. FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR:
EC-48
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or rich), monitored by front heated oxygen sensor, to
be read.
MIL Flashing without DTC NJEC0828S0101
GI
If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MIL may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM test
mode following “HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES”.
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later. (See MA
EC-50.)
Condition Diagnostic Test Mode I Diagnostic Test Mode II EM
Engine stopped
BULB CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS LC
Ignition switch in “ON” position
Engine running
FRONT HEATED OXYGEN
MALFUNCTION WARNING
SENSOR MONITOR
FE
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
CL
3) Others
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-49
How to Switch Diagnostic Test Modes NJEC0828S02
SEF636Y
*1: EC-272 *2: EC-48 *3: EC-272
EC-50
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Bulb Check =NJEC0828S03
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the MIL bulb. Refer
to EL-226, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-272. GI
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Malfunction Warning NJEC0828S04
MIL Condition
MA
ON When the malfunction is detected.
EM
OFF No malfunction.
I These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS). LC
Diagnostic Test Mode II — Self-diagnostic Results NJEC0828S05
In this mode, the DTC is indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEF952W BR
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds ST
consisting of an ON (0.6-second)-OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0 second OFF. In other words, the lat- RS
ter numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8 second off.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC “0000” refers to no BT
malfunction. (See TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX, EC-15.)
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)
The DTC can be erased from the backup memory in the ECM when the diagnostic test mode is changed from
NJEC0828S0501
HA
Diagnostic Test Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I. (Refer to EC-50, “HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST
MODES”.) SC
I If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory after approx. 24 hours.
I Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
EL
IDX
EC-51
Diagnostic Test Mode II — Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Monitor =NJEC0828S06
In this mode, the MIL displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the front
heated oxygen sensor.
MIL Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean
Closed loop system
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system
*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.

To check the front heated oxygen sensor function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up
until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the
MIL comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load.
EC-52
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II =NJEC0829
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
NJEC0829S01
GI
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to data link connector.
(Data link connector is located under lower dash panel near MA
the fuse box cover.)
EM
SEF094Y LC
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Touch “START”.
FE
CL
PBR455D
MT
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF995X
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure. ST
For further information, see the GI-37, regarding CONSULT-II.
RS
BT
HA
SEF838Z
SC
EL
IDX
EC-53
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL
SYSTEMS APPLICATION NJEC0829S02
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
Item WORK DATA ACTIVE
SUPPORT FREEZE MONITOR TEST
DTC FRAME
DATA
Camshaft position (PHASE) sensor X X
Mass air flow sensor X X
Engine coolant temperature sensor X X X X
Front heated oxygen sensor X X
Vehicle speed sensor X X X
Throttle position sensor X X X
(Engine
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) X speed) X
X
Knock sensor X
INPUT
Ignition switch (start signal) X
Closed throttle position switch (If so

X
equipped)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Closed throttle position switch (throttle

X
position sensor signal)
Air conditioner switch X
Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch X
Power steering oil pressure switch X
Electrical load X
Battery voltage X
Injectors X X
X
Power transistor (Ignition timing) (Ignition X X
signal)
IACV-AAC valve X X
Intake valve timing control solenoid

valve (QG16DE and QG18DE engines X X
with three way catalyst)
OUTPUT
EVAP canister purge volume control
X X
solenoid valve
Air conditioner relay X
Fuel pump relay X X X
EGRC-solenoid valve (If so equipped) X X
Cooling fan X X X
Calculated load value X X
X: Applicable
EC-54
FUNCTION NJEC0829S03
Diagnostic test mode Function GI

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
MA
Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results such as DTCs and freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly.*1
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.

EM
Data monitor (spec) Specification with basic fuel schedule, MAS A/F sensor and A/F alpha can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
LC
ECM part number ECM part numbers can be read.
*1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
2) Freeze frame data FE
3) Others
WORK SUPPORT MODE NJEC0829S04

CL
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
I FOLLOW THE BASIC INSPECTION INSTRUCTION IN When adjusting the idle throttle MT
TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ
THE SERVICE MANUAL. position
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE I FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” When releasing fuel pressure
DURING IDLING. from fuel line AT
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN I THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume AX
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT I THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clear the coefficient of self- SU
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL learnign control value
COEFFICIENT.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* I IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
BR
TARGET IGNITION TIMING ADJ* I IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing ST
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE RS

NJEC0829S05
DTC NJEC0829S0501
Regarding items of “DTC”, refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BT
INDEX”, EC-15.
Freeze Frame Data NJEC0829S0502 HA
Freeze frame data
Description
item
SC
DIAG TROUBLE
I Engine Control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer to
CODE
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”, EC-15.)
[PXXXX]
EL
I “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
I One mode in the following is displayed.
FUEL SYS-B1
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction IDX
“MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
“MODE 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
EC-55
Freeze frame data

Description
item
I The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

CAL/LD VALUE [%]
This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]

I The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
I “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] I The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
I “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] I The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
ENGINE SPEED
I The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VEHICL SPEED
I The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
ABSOL TH·P/S
I The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[degree] or [%]
B/FUEL SCHDL
I The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
DATA MONITOR MODE NJEC0829S06
ECM
Main
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
I Accuracy becomes poor if engine

I Indicates the engine speed computed from speed drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED [rpm] q q the POS signal of the crankshaft position I If the signal is interrupted while the
sensor. engine is running, an abnormal
value may be indicated.
I The signal voltage of the mass air flow sen- I When the engine is stopped, a cer-
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] q q
sor is displayed. tain value is indicated.
I When the engine coolant tempera-

ture sensor is open or short-
I The engine coolant temperature (deter-
COOLAN TEMP/S circuited, ECM enters fail-safe
q q mined by the signal voltage of the engine
[°C] or [°F] mode. The engine coolant tempera-
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed.
ture determined by the ECM is dis-
played.
I The signal voltage of the front heated oxy-

HO2S1 (B1) [V] q q
gen sensor is displayed.
I Display of front heated oxygen sensor sig-

I After turning ON the ignition switch,
nal during air-fuel ratio feedback control:
“RICH” is displayed until air-fuel
RICH ... means the mixture became “rich”,
mixture ratio feedback control
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) and control is being affected toward a
q begins.
[RICH/LEAN] leaner mixture.
I When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
LEAN ... means the mixture became “lean”,
clamped, the value just before the
and control is being affected toward a rich
clamping is displayed continuously.
mixture.
VHCL SPEED SE I The vehicle speed computed from the

q q
[km/h] or [mph] vehicle speed sensor signal is displayed.
I The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-

BATTERY VOLT [V] q
played.
EC-56
ECM
Main
signals
signals GI
I The throttle position sensor signal voltage is
THRTL POS SEN [V] q q
displayed. MA
I After starting the engine, [OFF] is
START SIGNAL I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
q q displayed regardless of the starter
[ON/OFF] starter signal. EM
signal.
I Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed

CLSD THL POS
q q by ECM according to the throttle position LC
[ON/OFF]
sensor signal.
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air con-

AIR COND SIG
q q ditioner switch as determined by the air
[ON/OFF]
conditioning signal.
P/N POSI SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the PNP

[ON/OFF]
q q
switch signal.
FE
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the power
PW/ST SIGNAL
q q
steering oil pressure switch determined by CL
[ON/OFF] the power steering oil pressure switch sig-
nal.
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the elec-

MT
trical load signal and/or lighting switch.
LOAD SIGNAL ON ... rear defogger is operating and/or
q q AT
[ON/OFF] lighting switch is on.
OFF ... rear defogger is not operating and
lighting switch is not on.
AX
IGNITION SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition
q
[ON/OFF] switch.
HEATER FAN SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the SU

q
[ON/OFF] heater fan switch.
I Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse BR

INJ PULSE-B1 I When the engine is stopped, a cer-
q width compensated by ECM according to
[msec] tain computed value is indicated.
the input signals.
I Indicates the ignition timing computed by ST

IGN TIMING [BTDC] q
ECM according to the input signals.
I When the engine is stopped, a cer- RS

I Indicates the mean value of the air-fuel ratio tain value is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] q
feedback correction factor per cycle. I This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
BT
I Indicates the IACV-AAC valve control value
IACV-AAC/V [step] q computed by ECM according to the input
signals. HA
I Indicates the air conditioner relay control
AIR COND RLY
q condition determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signals. SC
EGRC SOL/V I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the EGRC-
(If so equipped) q solenoid valve. EL
[ON/OFF] I ON: EGR valve operating
I Indicates the fuel pump relay control condi-

FUEL PUMP RLY
q tion determined by ECM according to the IDX
[ON/OFF]
input signals.
EC-57
ECM
Main
signals
signals
I Indicates the control condition of the cooling

fan determined by ECM according to the
COOLING FAN input signals.
q
[HI/LOW/OFF] HI ... High speed operation
LOW ... Low speed operation
OFF ... Stop
I “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injec-

B/FUEL SCHDL
tion pulse width programmed into ECM,
[msec]
prior to any learned on board correction.
I “Calculated load value” indicates the value

This function is not necessary in the
CAL/LD VALUE [%] of the current airflow divided by peak air-
usual service procedure.
flow.
I “Absolute throttle position sensor” indicates

ABSOL TH.P/S deg the throttle opening computed by ECM
or [%] according to the signal voltage of the
throttle position sensor.
I Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume

control solenoid valve computed by the
PURG VOL C/V [%] ECM according to the inpuct signals.
I The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
I The control condition of the valve timing

solenoid valve (determined by ECM accord-
INT/V SOL-B1 ing to the input signal) is indicated.
[ON/OFF] ON ... Intake valve timing control operating
OFF ... Intake valve timing control not oper-
ating
I Display the condition of idle air volume

learning
YET ... Idle air volume learning has not
IDL A/V LEAN
been performed yet.
CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.
VOLTAGE [V] I Voltage measured by the voltage probe.
I Only “#” is displayed if item is

unable to be measured.
Frequency I Pulse width, frequency or duty cycle mea- I Figures with “#”s are temporary
[msec] or [Hz] or [%] sured by the pulse probe. ones. They are the same figures as
an actual piece of data which was
just previously measured.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE NJEC0829S11
ECM
Main
signals
signals
I The signal voltage of the mass air flow sen- I When the engine is running, specifi-
sor specification is displayed. cation range is indicated.

B/FUEL SCHDL I When the engine is running, specifi-
[msec] cation range is indicated.
EC-58
ECM
Main
signals
signals GI
I When the engine is running, specifi-
I Indicates the mean value of the air-fuel ratio cation range is indicated. MA
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]* q
*: With three way catalyst only. EM

NOTE:
LC
ACTIVE TEST MODE NJEC0829S07
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
I Engine: Return to the original I Harness and connector

trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see I Fuel injectors
FUEL INJECTION
I Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM. I Front heated oxygen sensor FE
tion using CONSULT-II. I Fuel pressure
I Refer to “Idle Air Volume

Learning”, EC-43.
CL
I Engine: Return to the original
I Camshaft position sensor
trouble condition
If trouble symptom disappears, see (PHASE)
IGNITION TIMING I Timing light: Set MT
CHECK ITEM. I Crankshaft position sensor
I Retard the ignition timing using
(POS)
CONSULT-II.
I Engine component parts and
installing conditions AT
I Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
IACV-AAC/V
I Change the IACV-AAC valve
Engine speed changes according I Harness and connector AX
OPENING to the opening steps. I IACV-AAC valve
opening steps using CONSULT-
II.
SU
I Engine: After warming up, idle I Harness and connector
the engine. I Compression
POWER BAL- I Air conditioner switch “OFF” I Injectors BR
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE I Shift lever “N” or “P” I Power transistor
I Cut off each injector signal one I Spark plugs
at a time using CONSULT-II. I Ignition coils ST
I Ignition switch: ON
I Harness and connector
COOLING FAN* I Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “LOW” Cooling fan moves and stops.
I Cooling fan motor
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II. RS
trouble condition
ENG COOLANT
I Change the engine coolant tem-
If trouble symptom disappears, see I Engine coolant temperature sen- BT
TEMP CHECK ITEM. sor
perature indication using CON-
I Fuel injectors
SULT-II.
HA
(Engine stopped)
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- I Harness and connector
I Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” SC
RELAY ing sound. I Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound.
I Engine: After warming up, idle EL

EGRC SOLE- the engine.
Engine speed changes according I Vacuum hose
NOID VALVE (If I Change the EGRC-solenoid
to the opening. I EGR valve
so equipped) valve opening using CONSULT-
I EGRC-solenoid valve
IDX
II.
SELF-LEARNING I In this test, the coefficient of self-learning control mixture ratio returns to the original coefficient by touching
CONT “CLEAR” on the screen.
EC-59
I Turn intake valve timing control I Harness and connector
VALVE TIMING Intake valve timing control solenoid
solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” I Intake valve timing control sole-
SOL valve makes an operating sound.
using CONSULT-II and listen for noid valve
operating sound.

the engine.
PURG VOL I Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according
I EVAP canister purge volume
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve to the opening percent.
control solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
IDLE AIR VOL

I In this test, the idle air volume that keeps the engine within the specified range is memorized in ECM.
LEARN
*: Leaving cooling fan “OFF” with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE

(RECORDING VEHICLE DATA) NJEC0829S08
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by
touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
1) “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
I The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in
real time.
In other words, DTC and malfunction item will be displayed if
the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR”
SEF705Y in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ...
xx%” as shown at left, and the data after the malfunction detec-
tion is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%,
“REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched
on the screen during “ Recording Data ... xx%”, “REAL-TIME
DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION
MANUAL.
2) “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
I DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed automatically
SEF707X on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected
by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
Use these triggers as follows:
1) “AUTO TRIG”
I While trying to detect the DTC by performing the “DTC Confir-
mation Procedure”, be sure to select to “DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the
moment it is detected.
I While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II
should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, espe-
cially in case the incident is intermittent.
EC-60
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twist-
ing) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction GI
is found the DTC will be displayed. (Refer to GI-22, “Incident
Simulation Tests”.)
2) “MANU TRIG” MA
I If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR”
is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting
“MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data EM
can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with
the value for the normal operating condition.
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF720X
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-61
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION GENERAL - QG
Introduction
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel
control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM
accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators.
It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and
stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no malfunc-
tions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunc-
tions with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs inter-
mittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
MEF036D
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II or a circuit tester connected should be per-
formed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-64.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example on next page should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” malfunctions first.
SEF233G
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
cally controlled engine vehicle.
SEF234G
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET NJEC0830S01

There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction
of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make
trouble-shooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a
customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to
come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected.
SEF907L
Example:
Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
EC-62
Introduction (Cont’d)
Worksheet Sample NJEC0830S0101
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
MTBL0311
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-63
Work Flow
Work Flow NJEC0831
SEF510ZC
*1: If time data of “SELF-DIAG *3: If the on board diagnostic system be found, refer to “TROUBLE
RESULTS” is other than “0” or “1t” cannot be performed, check main DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS power supply and ground circuit. TENT INCIDENT”, EC-107.
FOR INTERMITTENT”, EC-107. Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS *5: EC-103
*2: If the incident cannot be FOR POWER SUPPLY”, EC-108.
duplicated, refer to “TROUBLE *4: If the malfunctioning part cannot
DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
TENT INCIDENT”, EC-107.
EC-64
Work Flow (Cont’d)
DESCRIPTION FOR WORK FLOW NJEC0831S01
STEP DESCRIPTION GI
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using
STEP I
the “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”. (Refer to EC-63.)
MA
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II) the Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) and the freeze frame data, then erase the code and the data. (Refer to EC-46.) The DTC and the freeze
frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV. EM
STEP II
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by DTC, and the symptom described by the customer. (The
“Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. See EC-86.)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
LC
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CON-
SULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP III
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”. (Refer to
EC-107.)
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V. FE
Try to detect the Diagnostic Trouble Code by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check
and read the DTC and freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II.
During the DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) CL
mode and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”. (Refer to
EC-107.) MT
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The
DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the DTC detection. AT
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-66.) If CONSULT-II is AX
STEP V
available, perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the “TROUBLE DIAGNO-
SIS-SPECIFICATION VALUE”, EC-103. (If a malfunction is detected, proceed to “REPAIR/REPLACE”.) Then per-
form inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-86.) SU
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes.
Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR
BR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CON-
STEP VI
SULT-II. Refer to EC-95. ST
The “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short
circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. For details, refer to
GI-22, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”, “Circuit Inspection”. RS
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions
and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint.
BT
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code [Diagnostic trouble code No. P0000 or
STEP VII 0000] is detected. If the incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method
from the previous one. HA
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) DTC in ECM.
(Refer to EC-46.)
SC
EL
IDX
EC-65
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION GENERAL - QG
Preparation
Preparation NJEC0832
I Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
a) Battery
b) Ignition system
c) Engine oil and coolant levels
d) Fuses
e) ECM harness connector
f) Vacuum hoses
g) Air intake system
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
h) Fuel pressure
i) Engine compression
j) EGR valve operation (If so equipped)
k) Throttle valve
l) EVAP system
I On models equipped with air conditioner, checks should
be carried out while the air conditioner is “OFF”.
I When checking idle speed, ignition timing and mixture
ratio of A/T models, shift lever to “P” or “N” position.
I When measuring “CO” percentage, insert probe more
than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
I Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear window defogger.
I Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
I If engine stops immediately after starting or idle condition
is unstable, perform the following to initialize IACV-AAC
valve:
a) Stop engine and wait 9 seconds.
b) Turn ignition “ON” and wait 1 second.
c) Turn ignition “OFF” and wait 9 seconds.
I Make sure after the cooling fan has stopped.
Basic Inspection NJEC0833

Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical
loads applied;
I Headlamp switch is OFF,
I Air conditioner switch is OFF,
I Rear window defogger switch is OFF,
I Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
EC-66
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
1 INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled GI
maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
I Harness connectors for improper connections MA
I Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
I Wiring for improper connections, pinches and cuts
I Air cleaner clogging
I Hoses and ducts for leaks
EM
LC
FE
SEF983U
CL
© GO TO 2.
MT
2 CHECK THROTTLE DRUM OPERATION
Confirm that throttle drum moves to contact the stopper.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF154Y
ST
OK or NG
OK (Models with TP © GO TO 5.
switch) RS
OK (Models without TP © GO TO 13.
switch) BT
NG © GO TO 3.
HA
3 CHECK ACCELERATOR WIRE INSTALLATION
Check accelerator wire for slack.
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EL
NG © 1. Adjust accelerator wire. Refer to FE-3, “Adjusting Accelerator Wire”.
2. GO TO 2.
IDX
EC-67
4 CHECK THROTTLE VALVE OPERATION

1. Remove intake air ducts.
2. Check throttle valve operation when moving throttle drum by hand.
OK or NG
OK © 1. Retighten the throttle drum fixing nuts.
2. GO TO 2.
NG © 1. Clean the throttle body and throttle valve.
2. GO TO 2.
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION (Models with TP switch)

With CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Always check ignition timing before performing the following.
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “A/T” and then select “CLSD THL/P SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Read “CLSD THL/P SW” signal under the following conditions.
I Insert a 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between stopper and throttle drum as
shown in the figure and check the signal.
SEF158Y
SEF173Y
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “ON” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge.
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “OFF” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 6.
EC-68
6 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I (Models with TP switch)

With CONSULT-II GI
1. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts.
2. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure.
MA
EM
LC
SEF158Y
3. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches to “OFF”. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF964W
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF173Y RS
© GO TO 7.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-69
7 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II (Models with TP switch)

With CONSULT-II
1. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
I Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it when “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches from “OFF” to
“ON”, then temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts.
SEF964W
2. Make sure two or three times that the signal is “ON” when the throttle valve is closed and “OFF” when it is opened.
3. Remove 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
4. Make sure two or three times that the signal remains “OFF” when the throttle valve is closed.
5. Tighten throttle position sensor.
6. Check the “CLSD THL/P SW” signal again.
The signal remains “OFF” while closing throttle valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 6.
EC-70
8 RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY (Models with TP switch)
With CONSULT-II GI
NOTE:
Always warm up engine to normal operating temperature. If engine is cool, the throttle position sensor idle posi-
tion memory will not be reset correctly. MA
1. Remove feeler gauge.
2. Start engine.
3. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
4. Select “ENGINE” and then select CLSD THL POS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
EM
5. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.)
6. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
LC
FE
CL
SEF864V
MT
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until “CLSD THL POS” signal changes to “ON”.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF061Y
ST
© GO TO 13.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-71
9 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION (Models with TP switch)

Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
2. Stop engine and wait at least 9 seconds.
3. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
4. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions.
SEF711X
I Insert the 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between the stopper and throttle drum
as shown in the figure.
SEF158Y
“Continuity should exist” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge.
“Continuity should not exist” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 10.
EC-72
10 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I (Models with TP switch)

Without CONSULT-II GI
2. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure.
MA
EM
LC
SEF158Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF711X
3. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until continuity does not exist.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF964W
RS
© GO TO 11.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-73
11 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II (Models with TP switch)

Without CONSULT-II
I Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it when the continuity comes to exist, then temporarily
tighten sensor body fixing bolts.
SEF964W
2. Make sure two or three times that the continuity exists when the throttle valve is closed and continuity does not exist
when it is opened.
4. Make sure two or three times that the continuity does not exist when the throttle valve is closed.
6. Check the continuity again.
Continuity does not exist while closing the throttle valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 10.
12 RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY (Models with TP switch)
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
tion memory will not be reset correctly.
1. Remove feeler gauge.
2. Reconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
3. Start engine.
SEF864V
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7, 20 times.
© GO TO 13.
EC-74
13 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION-I (Models without TP switch)

With CONSULT-II GI
1. Select “THRTL POS SEN” and “CLSD THL POS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
SEC353C
2. Check that output voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” is 0.15 to 0.85V, and “CLSD THL POS” stays “ON”. (Accelerator pedal
fully released.) FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 19.
CL
NG © GO TO 14.
MT
14 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION (Models without TP switch)
With CONSULT-II
1. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts. AT
2. Turn throttle position sensor body clockwise or counterclockwise until “THRTL POS SEN” voltage becomes 0.15 -
0.85V.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEC203D
3. Tighten throttle position sensor. RS
© GO TO 15.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-75
15 RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY (Models without TP switch)
With CONSULT-II
NOTE:
1. Start engine.
3. Select “CLSD THL POS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF864V
SEF061Y
OK or NG
© GO TO 19.
EC-76
16 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION-I (Models without TP switch)

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect throttle position sensor harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and accelerator pedal fully released. MA
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 57 and engine ground.
EM
LC
SEC204D
FE
Voltage: 0.15 - 0.85V
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © GO TO 17. MT
17 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION (Models without TP switch)

AT
Without CONSULT-II
2. Turn throttle position sensor body clockwise or counterclockwise until voltage between ECM terminal 57 and ground AX
becomes 0.15 - 0.85V.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEC203D
© GO TO 18. BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-77
18 RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY (Models without TP switch)
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
1. Start engine.
SEF864V
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5, 20 times.
© GO TO 19.
19 CHECK (1ST TRIP) DTC

2. Release vacuum from throttle opener.
3. Remove vacuum pump and vacuum hose from throttle opener.
4. Reinstall original vacuum hose to throttle opener securely.
6. Rev (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times.
7. Make sure no (1st trip) DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 21.
NG © GO TO 20.
20 REPAIR MALFUNCTION
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”.
© GO TO 19.
EC-78
21 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-II GI
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed. MA
M/T models: 630±50 rpm
A/T models with QG18DE: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
A/T models except above: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
EM
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. LC
2. Check idle speed.
OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 30.
NG © GO TO 22.
CL
22 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-43. MT
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No AT
Yes © GO TO 23.
No © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Leaning”. AX
2. GO TO 22.
23 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN SU

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. BR
M/T models: 630±50 rpm ST
RS
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check idle speed. BT
A/T models except above: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 29. SC
NG © GO TO 24.
EL
IDX
EC-79
24 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check IACV-AAC valve circuit for open and short. Refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-212.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 25.
NG © 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 26.
25 REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE

Replace IACV-AAC valve.
© GO TO 26.

Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-43.
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 27.
No © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 22.
27 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 29.
NG © GO TO 28.
28 CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is rarely
the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to “NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft
System)”, EC-48.
© GO TO 22.
EC-80
29 CHECK IGNITION TIMING

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. GI
2. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.
MA
EM
LC
SEF984U
Ignition timing:
M/T models with QG13DE and QG15DE: 2±5° BTDC
Except above: 6±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG FE
OK [Models with three © GO TO 40.
way catalyst (Except CL
QG13DE without three
way catalyst)]
OK (Models with © GO TO 37. MT
QG13DE and models
without three way cata-
lyst) AT
NG © GO TO 30.
AX
30 CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-34, “Installation”. SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 28.
BR
NG © 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 22.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-81

1. Start engine and let it idle.
SEF984U
Ignition timing:
M/T models with QG13DE and QG15DE: 2±5° BTDC
Except above: 6±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
way catalyst (Except
way catalyst)]
OK (Models with © GO TO 37.
QG13DE and models
lyst)
NG © GO TO 32.

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 33.
No © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 32.

With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 35.
NG © GO TO 34.
EC-82

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. GI
(ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is rarely the case.)
System)”, EC-48. MA
© GO TO 32.
EM
35 CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
Check ignition timing again. Refer to Test No. 25.
LC
OK or NG
way catalyst (Except
way catalyst)]
OK (Models with © GO TO 37.
FE
QG13DE and models
lyst)
CL
NG © GO TO 36.
MT
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-34, “Installation”. AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 34. AX
2. GO TO 32.
SU
37 CHECK IDLE CO%
Check the CO% by inserting a CO meter sampling probe into the tail pipe.
BR
CO%: 2±1%
OK or NG ST
OK © GO TO 40.
NG © GO TO 38. RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-83
38 ADJUST IDLE CO%

Removing the rubber cap of the CO adjustment resistor, rotate the adjuster with the triangle-shape head that appears in
the hole.
Create a tool for rotating the adjuster by processing rubber tube or other materials to match the shape of the adjuster
head.
SEF093Y
CO%: 2±1%
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 40.
NG © GO TO 39.
39 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
1. Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-40.
2. Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-116.
3. Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-236.
Clean or replace if necessary.
4. Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-123.
5. Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is rarely the case.)
© GO TO 37.
40 ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC

After this inspection, unnecessary DTC No. might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-46 and AT-44 or AT-52, “HOW TO
ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS”.
© INSPECTION END
EC-84
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
DTC Inspection Priority Chart NJEC0834

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following prior-
ity chart. GI
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 I P0100 Mass air flow sensor

MA
I P0115 Engine coolant temperature sensor
I P0120 Throttle position sensor
I P0325 Knock sensor EM
I P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
I P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
I P0500 Vehicle speed sensor LC
I P1320 Ignition signal
2 I P0130 Front heated oxygen sensor

I P1217 Overheat
3 I P0600 A/T Communication Line

FE
Fail-safe Chart NJEC0835
The ECM enters fail-safe mode if any of the following malfunctions is detected due to the open or short cir- CL
cuit. When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MIL illuminates.
DTC No.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
MT
CON-
ECM*1
SULT-II
P0100 0100 Mass air flow sensor Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. AT
circuit
P0115 0115 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time AX
ture sensor circuit after turning ignition switch “ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
The radiator fan operates. SU
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
BR
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or Start
More than approx. 4 minutes ST

80°C (176°F)
after ignition ON or Start
Except as shown above

40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) RS
(Depends on the time)
P0120 0120 Throttle position sensor Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and
circuit the engine speed. Therefore, acceleration will be poor. BT
Condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal HA

When accelerating Poor acceleration
P1217 1217 Overheat Engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm due to the fuel cut.
SC
*: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)
EL
IDX
EC-85
Symptom Matrix Chart
Symptom Matrix Chart NJEC0836

SYSTEM — ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM NJEC0836S01
SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-248
Fuel pressure regulator sys-

3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-40
tem
Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-237
Evaporative emission sys-

3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-34
tem
Air Positive crankcase ventila-

3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-38
tion system
Incorrect idle speed adjust-

3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-42
ment
IACV-AAC valve circuit 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-212
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing

3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-42
adjustment
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-188
EGR EGRC-solenoid valve circuit 2 2 3 3 3 EC-198

(If so
equipped) EGR system 2 1 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 EC-198
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 EC-108
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 HA section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

(continued on next page)
EC-86
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM
GI

MA



EM
Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
LC
ENGINE STALL
FE

2 2 EC-148
CL
circuit
Camshaft position sensor

(PHASE) circuit
3 2 EC-154 MT
Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-116
AT
Front heated oxygen sensor cir-
1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-135
cuit
Engine coolant temperature sen-

1 1 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 EC-123
AX
sor circuit
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-128

SU
Incorrect throttle position sensor
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-66
adjustment
BR
Vehicle speed sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-161
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-144

ST
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-85
Start signal circuit 2 EC-245

RS
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-231
Power steering oil pressure switch

circuit
2 3 3 EC-255 BT
Electrical load signal circuit 3 3 EC-263
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-87
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER NJEC0836S02
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Fuel Fuel tank FE section

5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5
Vapor lock
5
Valve deposit
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

Low octane)
—
Air Air duct
Air cleaner
Air leakage from air duct

(Mass air flow sensor — throttle
5 5 5 5 5 5
body)
5 5 5 5
Throttle body, Throttle wire FE section
Air leakage from intake manifold/

—
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Alternator circuit EL section
Starter circuit 3
Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM section
PNP switch 4 AT section

EC-88
SYMPTOM
GI

MA



EM
Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
LC
ENGINE STALL
FE
Engine Cylinder head CL

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block MT
Piston 4
EM section
Piston ring AT
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Connecting rod
Bearing
AX
Crankshaft
SU
Valve Timing chain
mechanism
Camshaft
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM section BR
Intake valve
3
Exhaust valve
ST
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 FE section
Three way catalyst
RS
Lubrication Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil MA, EM and
filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 LC sections BT
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap HA

Thermostat 5 LC section
Water pump SC
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Cooling fan 5 EC-170

EL
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
MA section
coolant IDX
EC-89
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Mode NJEC0837
Remarks:
I Specification data are reference values.
I Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
(i.e., Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING. Specification data might be displayed even when igni-
tion timing is not adjusted to specification. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the input signals
from the crankshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.)
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Almost the same speed

I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
ENG SPEED as the tachometer indi-
value.
cation value.
I Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 1.7V

I Air conditioner switch: OFF
MAS A/F SE-B1
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,500 rpm 1.5 - 2.1V
More than 70°C

COOLAN TEMP/S I Engine: After warming up
(158°F)
0 - 0.3V +, 0.6 -
HO2S1 (B1)
1.0V
Maintaining engine speed at LEAN +, RICH
I Engine: After warming up
2,000 rpm Changes more than 5
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
times during 10 sec-
onds.
Almost the same speed

I Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON-
VHCL SPEED SE as the speedometer
SULT-II value
indication value
BATTERY VOLT I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Throttle valve fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V
THRTL POS SEN I Engine: After warming up

I Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V
(Engine stopped)
START SIGNAL I Ignition switch: ON , START , ON OFF , ON , OFF
I Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: Idle position ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF
A/C switch “OFF” OFF

AIR COND SIG I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine A/C switch “ON”
ON
(Compressor operates)
Shift lever “N” or “P” ON

P/N POSI SW I Ignition switch: ON
Except above OFF
Steering wheel in neutral

position OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine (forward direction)
The steering wheel is turned ON
IGNITION SW I Ignition switch: ON , OFF , ON ON , OFF , ON
I Engine: After warming up Idle 2.4 - 3.7 msec

INJ PULSE-B1
I No-load 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 3.2 msec
EC-90
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
Rear window defogger or

ON
GI
LOAD SIGNAL I Engine: running headlamp “ON”
Except the above OFF

MA
Heater fan motor is operat-
ON
ing
HEATER FAN SW I Ignition switch ON EM
Heater fan motor is not
OFF
operating
I Engine: After warming up Idle 1.5 - 3.2 msec LC

B/FUEL SCHDL
Refer to “Idle Speed

I Engine: After warming up and Ignition Timing” in
I Air conditioner switch: OFF Idle “Service Data and FE
IGN TIMING Specifications (SDS)”,
I No-load EC-274.
CL
2,000 rpm —
I Engine: After warming up Idle 5 - 30 steps

I Air conditioner switch: OFF MT
IACV-AAC/V
I No-load 2,000 rpm —
AT
Idle 0%
I Engine: After warming up More than 30 seconds after
PURG VOL C/V I Lift up drive wheels and shift to a suitable starting engine AX
gear position. 30 - 100%
Rev engine up from 2,000 to
4,000 rpm.
Maintaining engine speed at

SU
A/F ALPHA-B1 I Engine: After warming up 75 - 125%
2,000 rpm
AIR COND RLY I Air conditioner switch: OFF , ON OFF , ON BR

I Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 1 second)
I Engine running or cranking ON
FUEL PUMP RLY I When engine is stopped (stops in 1.5 seconds)
ST
I Except as shown above OFF
RS
Engine coolant temperature
OFF
is 94°C (201°F) or less
Engine coolant temperature BT

I After warming up engine, idle the engine.
COOLING FAN is between 95°C (203°F) LOW
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
and 104°C (219°F)
HA
HIGH
is 105°C (221°F) or more
I Engine: After warming up Idle OFF SC

INT/V SOL-B1 I Lift up drive wheels and shift to a suitable Revving engine up from
gear position other than “P” or “N”. ON
2,000 to 3,000 rpm EL
Idle OFF
EGRC SOL/V
(If so equipped)
I Lift up drive wheels and shift to a suitable Revving engine up from IDX
gear position. 2,000 to 3,000 rpm [More ON
than 24 km/h (15 MPH)]
EC-91
I Engine: After warming up Idle 15.0 - 35.0%

CAL/LD VALUE*
I No-load 2,500 rpm 13.0 - 30.0%
I Engine: Idle
Throttle valve fully closed 0.0%
I After warming up
ABSOL TH·P/S
Throttle valve fully opened Approx. 80%
(Engine stopped)

Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode NJEC0838
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
(Select “HI SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” with CONSULT-II.)
THRTL POS SEN, ABSOL TH·P/S, CLSD THL POS NJEC0838S01
Below is the data for “THRTL POS SEN”, “ABSOL TH·P/S” and “CLSD THL POS” when depressing the accel-
erator pedal with the ignition switch “ON”.
The signal of “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH·P/S” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or
rise after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
SEF240YA
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL POS SEN, HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1 NJEC0838S02
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL POS SEN”, “HO2S1 (B1)1” and “INJ
PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine to normal
operating temperature.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
EC-92
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF241Y CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEF169Y
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-93
SEF170YA
EC-94
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value NJEC0839

PREPARATION
1.
NJEC0839S01
The ECM is located on the passenger side in the cowl panel
GI
(behind the strut tower), remove it from the engine room side.
I Remove the bracket fixing ECM harness. MA
I Remove the quick connector of the ventilation hose in the ECM
compartment room by pressing in the direction of the arrow.
I Pull the ECM box out of the dash panel by removing the two EM
ECM box attaching bolts.
I Remove the five bolts on ECM box installation cover.
SEF553Y LC
: 3.9 - 6.9 N·m (0.39 - 0.71 kg-m, 34 - 61 in-lb)
I Remove the three ECM installation bolts.
: 4.1 - 6.8 N·m (0.41 - 0.70 kg-m, 36 - 60 in-lb)
FE
CL
JEF096Y
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF097Y
2. Remove ECM harness protector.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF098Y
I When connecting or disconnecting ECM harness SC

moved until it stops. EL
IDX
SEF908W
EC-95
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
3. Perform all voltage measurements with the connector con-
nected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily.
I Open harness securing clip to make testing easier.
I Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
I Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a grond other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
SEF367I
ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUTNJEC0839S02
SEF152Y
EC-96
ECM INSPECTION TABLE =NJEC0839S03
Specification data are reference values and are measured between
each terminal and ground. GI
CAUTION:
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s MA
ground.
EM
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO. LC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition FE
I Idle speed
1 R/B Injector No. 1 CL

SEF011W
2 Y/B Injector No. 2
3 G/B Injector No. 3 BATTERY VOLTAGE
4 L/B Injector No. 4 (11 - 14V)
MT
[Engine is running] AT
I Warm-up condition
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
AX
SEF012W
SU
5 - 10V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition BR
EVAP canister purge
I More than 30 seconds after starting engine
5 P volume control solenoid
I Lift up drive wheels and shift to a suitable
valve
gear position other than “P” or “N” ST
I Accelerator pedal depressed
SEF975W
RS
Intake valve timing con- [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
trol solenoid valve I Idle speed (11 - 14V)
6 Y/R
(QG16DE and [Engine is running] BT
QG18DE engine mod- I Lift up drive wheels and shift to a suitable
els with three way cata- Approximately 0V
gear position other than “P” or “N”
lyst) I Rev engine up from 2,000 to 3,000 rpm HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-97
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
10 - 11V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
SEF973W
Tachometer
8 L/OR
(Four-thread type) 10 - 11V
[Engine is running]
SEF974W
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
9 BR Ignition signal (No. 1)

SEF971W
10 PU Ignition signal (No. 2)
11 L/Y Ignition signal (No. 3) 0.2 - 0.4V
12 GY/R Ignition signal (No. 4)
[Engine is running]
SEF972W
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Cooling fan is not operating
(11 - 14V)
13 LG/B Cooling fan relay (High) I Cooling fan is operating at low speed
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
I Cooling fan is operating at high speed
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE

I Cooling fan is not operating (11 - 14V)
14 LG/R Cooling fan relay (Low)
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
I Cooling fan is operating
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
0 - 1V
I For 9 seconds after turning ignition switch
ECM relay (Self shut- “OFF”
15 W/G
off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I 9 seconds passed after turning ignition switch
(11 - 14V)
“OFF”
EC-98
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR GI
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON” MA
16 L Air conditioner relay
I A/C switch is “OFF” (11 - 14V)
EM
[Ignition switch “ON”]
I For 1 second after turning ignition switch “ON” 0 - 1V
17 [Engine is running] LC
B/P Fuel pump relay
(20)* [Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I More than 1 second after turning ignition
(11 - 14V)
switch “ON”
[Engine is running]
18 Y/B A/T signal No. 3 0.05 - 0.7V
I Idle speed
FE
[Engine is running]
19 BR/W A/T signal No. 5 Approximately 8V
I Idle speed
CL
[Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1V
Malfunction indicator
21 OR/L [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
lamp
I Idle speed (11 - 14V) MT
[Engine is running]
I Both air conditioner switch and blower switch Approximately 0V AT
28 L/R Air conditioner switch are “ON” (Compressor operates)
[Engine is running]
Approximately 5V AX
I Air conditioner switch is “OFF”

I Gear position is “Neutral position” (M/T mod- SU
Approximately 0V
els)
29 G/OR PNP switch I Gear position is “N” or “P” (A/T models)

Approximately 5V
BR
I Except the above gear position
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V ST
Power steering oil pres- I Steering wheel is fully turned
30 PU/W
sure switch [Engine is running]
Approximately 5V
I Steering wheel is not turned RS
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0V
31 B/R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE BT
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE HA

32 G/W Reverse switch
I Gear position is “R” (A/T models only) (11 - 14V)
34 [Engine is running]
B ECM ground Engine ground SC
35 I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Warm-up condition EL
(11 - 14V)
I Idle speed
EGRC-solenoid valve
38 W/PU [Vehicle is running]
(If so equipped)
I Warm-up condition
0 - 1V
IDX
I Vehicle speed is more than 24 km/h (15 MPH)
I Revving engine up from 2,000 to 3,000 rpm
EC-99
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V

42 B/Y Start signal
[Ignition switch “START”] 9 - 12V
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Warm-up condition
(11 - 14V)
Throttle position switch I Accelerator pedal fully released
43 Y/PU (Closed position)
(If so equipped) [Ignition switch “ON”]
I Engine stopped Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
45 Y/R A/T signal No. 1 0.05 - 0.7V
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
46 Y/G A/T signal No. 2 0.05 - 0.7V
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
47 G/Y A/T signal No. 4 0.05 - 0.7V
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
48 B Sensors’ ground I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
I Idle speed
2.0 - 3.0V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
49
SEF977W
(51)* Camshaft position sen-
R
50 sor (PHASE) 2.0 - 3.0V
(52)*
[Engine is running]
SEF978W
3.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
SEF979W
51 Crankshaft position
R
(49)* sensor (POS) 3.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
SEF980W
EC-100
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR GI
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Engine coolant tem-
54 BR/Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with MA
perature sensor
engine coolant temperature
[Engine is running]
Mass air flow sensor EM
56 B I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
I Idle speed
[Engine is running] LC
I Warm up condition
0.15 - 0.85V
I Idle speed
57 Y Throttle position sensor I Accelerator pedal released
I Engine stopped 3.5 - 4.7V
I Accelerator pedal fully depressed FE
[Engine is running]
I Air conditioner switch is “ON” 1.0 - 4.0V
(Compressor operates) CL
Refrigerant pressure [Engine is running]
58 R/L
sensor I Warm-up condition MT
I Idle speed Voltage is decreasing gradually
I Air conditioner switch is turned from “ON” to
“OFF”. AT
0 - Approximately 1.0V
AX
[Engine is running]
Front heated oxygen
59 W I Warm-up condition
sensor
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SU
SEF008W
BR
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition 1.0 - 1.7V
I Idle speed ST
60 G Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition 1.5 - 2.1V RS
[Engine is running]
62 W Knock sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
I Idle speed BT
Data link connector for [Engine is running]
63 LG Approximately 9V
CONSULT-II I Idle speed (CONSULT-II is disconnected)
HA
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Headlamp switch or rear defogger switch is
(11 - 14V)
Electrical load signal-1 “ON” SC
67 R/W (Headlamp and
Rear defogger) [Engine is running]
I Headlamp switch and/or rear defogger switch Approximately 0V
are “OFF”
EL
Approximately 0V
Electrical load signal-2 I Blower fan switch is “ON” IDX
68 LG/B
(Blower fan SW) [Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
I Blower fan switch is “OFF”
EC-101
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE

69 W/L [Ignition switch “OFF”]
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
101 BR
[Engine is running]
102 LG
IACV-AAC valve I Warm-up condition 0.1 - 14V
103 P
I Idle speed
104 OR

B/Y ECM ground Engine ground
106 I Idle speed
107 BATTERY VOLTAGE

W Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
108 (11 - 14V)
109 R Sensors’ power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
2.5 - 3V
[Engine is running]
I Lift up the vehicle
110 PU/R Vehicle speed sensor
I In 2nd gear position
I Vehicle speed is 40 km/h (25 MPH)
SEF976W
*: Models for the Middle East and Australia
EC-102
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE GENERAL - QG
Description
Description NJEC1261
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI- GI
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions. MA
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items: EM
I B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection) LC
I A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
I MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition NJEC1262
I Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,100 miles)
I Barometric pressure: 101.3 kPa (1,013 mbar, 760.0 mmHg, 29.92 inHg)±3 kPa (30 mbar, 22.5 mmHg, 0.89 FE
inHg)
I Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
CL
I Transmission: Warmed-up*1
I Electrical load: Not applied*2 MT
I Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T or CVT models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until
“FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T or CVT fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates less than 0.9V.
AT
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Cooling fans are not oper-
ating. Steering wheel is straight ahead. AX
SU
BR
Inspection Procedure NJEC1263 ST

NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale dis-
play. RS
1. Perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-66.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F BT
SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. HA
5. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-104.
SEF601Z
SC
EL
IDX
EC-103
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure NJEC1264
SEF613ZA
EC-104
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF768Z
EC-105
SEF615Z
EC-106
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT GENERAL - QG
Description
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the custom- GI
er’s complaint often do not recur on DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occurrences
is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be
clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the spe- MA
cific malfunctioning area.
COMMON I/I REPORT SITUATIONS NJEC0840S01
EM
STEP in Work Flow Situation
The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or
LC
II
“1t”.
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV DTC data does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area. FE
CL
MT
AT
1 INSPECTION START
Erase DTCs. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION” (EC-46).
AX
© GO TO 2.
2 CHECK GROUND TERMINALS SU

Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection. Refer to GI-28, “GROUND INSPECTION”.
OK or NG BR
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace. ST
3 SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT RS

Perform GI-23, “Incident Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG BT
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Repair or replace.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-107
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY GENERAL - QG
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit

WIRING DIAGRAM NJEC0842
HEC727
EC-108
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC728
EC-109
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NJEC0843
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a grond other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0 - 1V
I For 9 seconds after turning ignition switch “OFF”
15 W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
“OFF”

31 B/R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
B ECM ground Engine ground
35 I Idle speed

B/Y ECM ground Engine ground
106 I Idle speed

(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
107 BATTERY VOLTAGE

W Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
108 (11 - 14V)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NJEC0844
1 INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 10.
No © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 31 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF099Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
EC-110

Check the following. GI
I Harness connectors E75, F36
I Harness connectors M21, E106
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M1, E103 MA
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between ECM and ignition switch
© Repair harness or connectors. EM
4 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I LC

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 34, 35, 105, 106 and engine ground.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power. FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. CL
NG © Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
MT
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II
1. Disconnect ECM relay.
AT
AX
SU
BR
JEF100Y
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 1, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF101Y SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. EL
NG © GO TO 6.
IDX
EC-111

I 10A fuse, 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and ECM relay terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.

Check the harness for open or short between ECM relay and ECM.
9 CHECK ECM RELAY

1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
SEF296X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO “DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL”, EC-188.
NG © Replace ECM relay.
EC-112
10 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Stop engine. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF102Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12. FE
NG © GO TO 11.
CL
Check the following. MT
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors. AT
12 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III AX

1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then “OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 107, 108 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF103Y
BT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
HA
NG (Battery voltage © GO TO 13.
does not exist.)
NG (Battery voltage © GO TO 15. SC
exists for more than a
few seconds.)
EL
IDX
EC-113
13 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

JEF100Y
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF295X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © GO TO 14.

I Harness connector E74, F35
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and 10A fuse
15 CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM RELAY AND ECM FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 107, 108 and ECM relay terminal 5.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © GO TO 16.

Check the harness for open or short between ECM and ECM relay.
EC-114
17 CHECK ECM RELAY

1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF296X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18. FE
CL
18 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. MT
Refer to Wiring Diagram. AT
OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SU
19 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT BR

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-107.
© INSPECTION END ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-115
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) GENERAL - QG
Component Description
Component Description NJEC0845

The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM
SEF987W
detects the air flow by means of this current change.

Mode NJEC0846
Specification data are reference values.

MAS A/F SE-B1
I No-load 2,500 rpm 1.5 - 2.1V

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Mass air flow sensor
ground
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
On Board Diagnosis Logic NJEC0848
DTC No. Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause)
P0100 A) An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent I Harness or connectors
0100 to ECM when engine is not running. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Mass air flow sensor
B) An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent I Harness or connectors

to ECM* when engine is running. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Intake air leaks
C) A voltage from the sensor is constantly approx. I Mass air flow sensor
1.0V when engine is running.
*: When the malfunction B is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
EC-116
Fail-Safe Mode
Fail-Safe Mode NJEC0849
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode GI

Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel
Mass air flow sensor circuit
cut.
MA
EM
LC
DTC Confirmation Procedure NJEC0850
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 9 seconds
before conducting the next test. FE
CL
MT
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NJEC0850S01
With CONSULT-II AT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
AX
3) Wait at least 2 seconds.
4) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-120.
Without CONSULT-II SU
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”, and wait at least 2 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 9 seconds and then
turn “ON”.
BR
SEF058Y
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with
ECM. ST
RS
BT
HA
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C NJEC0850S02

SC
With CONSULT-II
EL
3) Start engine and wait 2 seconds at most.
4) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-120. IDX
Without CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
EC-117
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-118
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram NJEC0851
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC731
EC-119
1 INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A, or B and C) is duplicated?
Malfunction A, or B and C
A © GO TO 3.
B and C © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check the following for connection.
I Air duct
I Vacuum hoses
I Intake air passage between air duct to collector
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Reconnect the parts.
3 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
JEF104Y
© GO TO 4.
EC-120
4 CHECK POWER SUPPLY

1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. GI
MA
EM
LC
JEF105Y
3. Check voltage between terminal 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF297X
OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
SU
BR
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor
I Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM ST
© Repair harness or connectors.
RS
6 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. BT
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor harness connector terminal 3 and ECM terminal 56.
Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist. HA
OK or NG SC
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EL
IDX
EC-121
7 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
8 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-122.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace mass air flow sensor.
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-107.
© INSPECTION END
Component Inspection NJEC0853

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR NJEC0853S01
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 60 (Mass air flow sen-
sor signal) and ground.
Conditions Voltage V
Ignition switch “ON” (Engine stopped.) Less than 1.2
SEF106Y Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating

1.0 - 1.7
temperature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal oper-

1.5 - 2.1
ating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.0 - 1.7 to Approx. 4.0
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in
engine speed.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow
sensor harness connector and connect it again. Then repeat
above check.
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot
SEF987W film for damage or dust.
EC-122
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
(CIRCUIT) GENERAL - QG

The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal GI
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical MA
resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
EM
SEF594K LC
<Reference data>
Engine coolant temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V kΩ
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4

FE
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00

CL
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 54 MT
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ AT
ground. AX
SU
BR
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ST

Mode NJEC0855
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION RS

COOLAN TEMP/S I Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
On Board Diagnosis Logic BT

NJEC0856
HA
P0115 I An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is I Harness or connectors
0115 sent to ECM.* (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Engine coolant temperature sensor SC
*: When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
EL
IDX
EC-123
Fail-Safe Mode
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch
“ON” or “START”.
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II

Condition
display)
Engine coolant tempera- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F)
ture sensor circuit More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80°C (176°F)
Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)

When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while the engine is running.

NOTE:
before conducting the next test.
With CONSULT-II
SEF013Y
Without CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-124
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC732
EC-125

2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
SEF999W
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF585X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

Check the harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor.

2. Check harness continuity between engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector terminal 2 and engine
ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
EC-126

I Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and engine coolant temperature sensor (A/T
models only) MA
EM
5 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT FE

© INSPECTION END CL
MT
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AT
NJEC0861S01
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
<Reference data> AX
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 SU

50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 BR

SEF152P
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF012P
SC
EL
IDX
EC-127
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GENERAL - QG

The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiom-
eter which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal
to the ECM.
Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sen-
sor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the “Wide open and closed
throttle position switch”, which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control.
NEF308A

Mode NJEC0863

Throttle valve: fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V
the engine
THRTL POS SEN I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V
(Engine stopped)

Throttle valve: fully closed 0.0° or 0.0%
the engine
ABSOL TH·P/S I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: fully opened Approx. 80° or 80%
(Engine stopped)
EC-128
ECM Terminals and Reference Value =NJEC0864

CAUTION:
GI
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a grond other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. MA
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR EM
NO.
[Engine is running]
48 B Sensors’ ground I Warm up condition Approximately 0V
I Idle speed
LC
[Engine is running]
I Warm up condition
0.15 - 0.85V
I Idle speed
57 Y Throttle position sensor I Accelerator pedal fully released

FE
I Accelerator pedal fully depressed
CL
On Board Diagnosis Logic MT

NJEC0865
AT
P0120 An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is I Harness or connectors
0120 sent to ECM* while driving. (The throttle position sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
AX
*: When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
SU

BR
Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
ST
circuit
When engine is idling Normal
RS
BT
HA

SC
NOTE:
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 9 seconds EL
CAUTION: IDX
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
I This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in
the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is
expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
EC-129
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
2 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE More than 4 km/h (2 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position except “N” or “P”

position

SEF175Y
Without CONSULT-II
Vehicle speed More than 4 km/h (2 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position except “N” or “P”

position

turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-130
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC736
EC-131

JEF104Y
© GO TO 2.

1. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector.
NEF309A
SEF306X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
EC-132

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. GI
2. Check harness continuity between throttle position sensor harness connector terminal 1 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist. MA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
EM
NG © GO TO 4.
LC
I Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle position sensor.
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and throttle position sensor (A/T models only).
FE
5 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT CL

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 57 and throttle position sensor harness connector terminal 2. MT
AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
AX
SU
6 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
OK or NG
BR
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-66. ST
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT RS

© INSPECTION END BT
HA

SC
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR NJEC0870S01
With CONSULT-II EL
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 9 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch ON. IDX
5) Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following con-
ditions.
SEF179Y
EC-133
Component Inspection (Cont’d)
NOTE:
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position
sensor installed in vehicle.
Throttle valve conditions Voltage (V)
Completely closed 0.15 - 0.85
Completely open 3.5 - 4.7
If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic

Inspection”, EC-66.
6) If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch in
“Basic Inspection”, replace throttle position sensor.
Without CONSULT-II
3) Turn ignition switch ON.
4) Check voltage between ECM terminal 57 (Throttle position
sensor signal) and ground under the following conditions.
NOTE:
SEF107Y Throttle valve conditions Voltage (V)

EC-134
DTC P0130 FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (FRONT HO2S)

The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the exhaust mani-
fold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared GI
to the outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed-
end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage
from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi- MA
tions. The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM.
The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal
air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change EM
from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R LC
FE
CL
SEF288D
MT
Mode AT
NJEC0872
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION AX
HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 LEAN +, RICH SU
HO2S1 MNTR rpm Changes more than 5 times during
(B1)
10 seconds.
BR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. ST
CAUTION:
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a grond other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. RS
TERMI- WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NAL NO. COLOR
BT
HA
[Engine is running]
Front heated oxygen
sensor
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SC
SEF008W
EL
IDX
EC-135
On Board Diagnosis Logic

Logic For Malfunction A
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the front
heated oxygen sensor output is not inordinately high.
Logic For Malfunction B
Under the condition in which the front heated oxygen sensor sig-
nal is not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approxi-
mately 0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output
voltage is within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diag-
nosis checks that this time is not inordinately long.
SEF108Y
P0130 A) An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to I Harness or connectors
0130 ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Front heated oxygen sensor
B) The voltage from the sensor is constantly approx. 0.3V.

NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y 3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5) Restart engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
Without CONSULT-II
3) Restart engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
turn “ON”.
SEF682Y ECM.
EC-136
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B NJEC0875S02 GI
CAUTION:
With CONSULT-II MA
3) Touch “START”.
EM
4) Maintain the following condition for at least 3 consecutive min-
utes. LC
ENG SPEED 1,400 - 2,600 rpm
Vehicle speed 70 - 100 km/h (43 - 62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 2.0 - 10.0 msec
Selector lever Suitable position FE

If DTS is not displayed after 3 minutes, retry from step 4.
5) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-139. CL
MT
Overall Function Check NJEC0876
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the front heated AT
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
AX
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B NJEC0876S01
Without CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. SU
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 59 (Front heated
oxygen sensor signal) and engine ground.
BR
SEF109Y 3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
I The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V. ST
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-139.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-137
Wiring Diagram
HEC739
EC-138
1 RETIGHTEN ENGINE GROUND GI

Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
MA
EM
LC
JEF104Y
Malfunction A © GO TO 2.
FE
Malfunction B © GO TO 5.
2 RETIGHTEN FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

CL
2. Loosen and retighten front heated oxygen sensor. MT
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
AT
© GO TO 3.
AX
1. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF012X
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 59 and front heated oxygen sensor harness connector terminal 2.
BT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 59 (or terminal 2) and ground.
HA
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EL
IDX
EC-139
4 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR

Check front heated oxygen sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair or replace harness connector.

1. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
SEF012X
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 59 and front heated oxygen sensor harness connector terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
EC-140
6 CHECK POWER SUPPLY HEATER CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF012X
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF153Y
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
SU
NG © GO TO 7.

BR
I Harness connectors E75, F36 ST
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between front heated oxygen sensor and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors. RS
8 CHECK GROUND FOR HEATER CIRCUIT BT

2. Check harness continuity between front heated oxygen sensor harness connector terminal 3 and ground.
HA
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
EL
IDX
EC-141
9 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace front heated oxygen sensor.
10 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.

© INSPECTION END

FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR NJEC0879S01
With CONSULT-II
2) Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and select
“HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the fol-
lowing steps.
4) Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y 5) Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from
“RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown in the figure:
R = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, “RICH”
L = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, “LEAN”
I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
SEF217YA
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
and approved anti-seize lubricant. (Refer to EC-21.)
EC-142
GI
MA
EM
SEF648Y
LC
Without CONSULT-II
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 59 (Front heated
oxygen sensor signal) and engine ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con- FE
I Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than five times within
10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II (FRONT HEATED OXY- CL
GEN SENSOR MONITOR).
I The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
SEF109Y I The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
MT
I The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
CAUTION: AT
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. AX
and approved anti-seize lubricant. (Refer to EC-21.) SU
BR
FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER

Check resistance between terminals 3 and 1.
NJEC0879S02 ST
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω at 25°C (77°F)
Check continuity between terminals 2 and 1, 3 and 2. RS
If NG, replace the front heated oxygen sensor. BT
CAUTION:
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a HA
SEF220W
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool SC
EL
IDX
EC-143
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) GENERAL - QG

The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses
engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock
sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction.
SEF598K

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
P0325 I An excessively low or high voltage from the knock sen- I Harness or connectors
0325 sor is sent to ECM. (The knock sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Knock sensor

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
No Tools
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-144
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC735
EC-145

JEF104Y
© GO TO 2.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and knock sensor harness connector.
JEF110Y
3. Check harness continuity between knock sensor signal terminal 1 and ECM terminal 62.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

Check the harness for open or short between knock sensor and ECM.
4 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace knock sensor.
EC-146

Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-107. GI
© INSPECTION END
MA
EM
LC
KNOCK SENSOR NJEC0886S01
I Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. FE
Resistance: 500 - 620 kΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
CAUTION: CL
Discard any knock sensors that have been dropped or physi-
cally damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF111Y
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-147
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(POS) GENERAL - QG

The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the right-rear
wall of the cylinder block in relation to the signal plate at the rear
end of the crankshaft.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, and hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
SEF058X
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
JEF112Y

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
3.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
SEF979W
51 Crankshaft position sen-
R 3.0 - 4.0V
(49)* sor
[Engine is running]
SEF980W
*: ( ) indicates models for the Middle East and Australia.
EC-148
(POS) GENERAL - QG
DTC No. Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause) GI
P0335 I The 10° signal is not entered to ECM for the first few I Harness or connectors
0335 seconds during engine cranking. (The crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit is open
I The 10° signal is not entered to ECM during engine or shorted.) MA
running. I Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I The 10° signal is not in the normal pattern at each I Starter motor (Refer to SC-13.)
engine revolution. I Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-15.) EM
I Dead (Weak) battery
LC
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tery voltage is more than 10.5V. CL
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y with CONSULT-II. MT
3) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-151. AT
Without CONSULT-II
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 9 seconds and then AX
turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with SU
ECM.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-149
(POS) GENERAL - QG
Wiring Diagram
HEC901
EC-150
(POS) GENERAL - QG
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS GI

MA
EM
LC
JEF104Y
FE
© GO TO 2.
CL
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor harness connector.
MT
AT
AX
SU
JEF112Y
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF113Y
OK or NG
SC
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
EL
IDX
I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor and ECM relay
I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor and ECM
EC-151
(POS) GENERAL - QG

1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor and ECM harness connectors.
JEF112Y
2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 49 (Models for the Middle East and Australia) 51 (Models except for the Middle
East and Australia) and crankshaft position sensor harness connector terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.

1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between terminal 1 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
6 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor.

© INSPECTION END
EC-152
(POS) GENERAL - QG
Component Inspection

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1.
NJEC0893S01
Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connec-
GI
tor.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. MA
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
EM
SEF121X LC
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 (+) - 1 (–)
2 (+) - 1 (–) Except 0 or ∞ FE

3 (+) - 2 (–)
CL
If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor.
SEF122X
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-153
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS)
(PHASE) GENERAL - QG

The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion pro-
vided with exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cyl-
inder. The crankshaft position sensor senses the piston position.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and hall IC.
change.
SEF058X
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the cylinder num-
ber signal.

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
2.0 - 3.0V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
49 SEF977W
(51)* Camshaft position sen-
R 2.0 - 3.0V
50 sor (PHASE)
(52)*
[Engine is running]
SEF978W
EC-154
DTC No. Check Items (Possible Cause) GI

P0340 I The cylinder No. signal is not entered to ECM for the I Harness or connectors
0340 first few seconds during engine cranking. (The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit is
I The cylinder No. signal is not enter to ECM during open or shorted.) MA
engine running. I Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
I The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern I Starter motor (Refer to SC-13.)
during engine running. I Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-15.) EM
LC
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
MT
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. AT
3) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
AX
Without CONSULT-II
1) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds. SU
turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with BR
SEF013Y
ECM.
4) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-157. ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-155
Wiring Diagram
GEC263A
EC-156
1 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM GI

Does the engine turn over?
(Does the starter motor operate?)
MA
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check starting system. (Refer to EL section.)
EM
2 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS LC

FE
CL
MT
JEF104Y
AT
© GO TO 3.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-157

1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor harness connector.
JEF114Y
SEF113Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

I Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor and ECM relay
I Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor and ECM

3. Check harness continuity between sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 49, 50 (Models except for the Middle East and
Australia); 51, 52 (Models for the Middle East and Australia).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
EC-158

2. Check harness continuity between sensor terminal 1 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
EM
LC
7 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. FE
NG © Replace camshaft position sensor.
CL
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-107. MT
© INSPECTION END
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-159
Component Inspection =NJEC0900

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR NJEC0900S01
1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness con-
nector.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
SEF122X
3 (+) - 1 (–)
2 (+) - 1 (–) Except 0 or ∞
3 (+) - 2 (–)
If NG, replace camshaft position sensor.
EC-160
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) GENERAL - QG

The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a
pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the GI
speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM.
MA
EM
SEF080X LC
CAUTION:
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a grond other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. FE
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) CL
COLOR
NO.
2.5 - 3V
MT
[Engine is running]
I Lift up the vehicle AT
SEF976W
AX
SU
BR
P0500 I The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed I Harness or connector
0500 sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being (The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or
driven. shorted.) ST
I Vehicle speed sensor
RS
BT
HA

SC
CAUTION:
NOTE:
EL
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 9 seconds IDX
TESTING CONDITION:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted
in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected
to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
EC-161
With CONSULT-II
1) Lift up vehicle.
2) Start engine.
3) Read the voltage signal between ECM terminal 110 (Vehicle
speed sensor signal) and ground with oscilloscope.
4) Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown in figure.
If OK, go to following step.
6) Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
SEF115Y CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should
exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable
gear position.
9) Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
10) Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive
seconds.
NOTE:
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain the
SEF196Y driving conditions required for this test.
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL QG13DE 3.3 - 5.5 msec
QG15DE 2.9 - 7.5 msec
QG16DE 4.7 - 6.5 msec
QG18DE 4.3 - 6.5 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle
speed sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
Without CONSULT-II
1) Lift up vehicle.
2) Start engine.
3) Read the voltage signal between ECM terminal 110 (Vehicle
SEF115Y shown in figure.
EC-162
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-163
Wiring Diagram

MODELS WITH TACHOMETER NJEC0906S01
HEC737
EC-164
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
MODELS WITHOUT TACHOMETER NJEC0906S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC738
EC-165

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 110 and meter terminal 57 (models with tachometer), 28 (models with-
out tachometer).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

I Harness connectors M63, F102
I Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
3 CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION

Make sure that speedometer functions properly.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

I Harness for open or short between combination meter and vehicle speed sensor
© Repair harness or connectors. Check vehicle speed sensor and its circuit. Refer to EL
section.

© INSPECTION END
EC-166
DTC P0600 A/T CONTROL GENERAL - QG
System Description
System Description NJEC0908

These circuit lines are used to control the smooth shifting up and down of A/T during the hard acceleration/
deceleration. Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). GI
NJEC0909
MA
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- EM
TERMI-
NAL
WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) LC
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
18 Y/B A/T signal No. 3 0.05 - 0.7V
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
19 BR/W A/T signal No. 5 Approximately 8V FE
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
45 Y/R A/T signal No. 1 0.05 - 0.7V
I Idle speed CL
[Engine is running]
46 Y/G A/T signal No. 2 0.05 - 0.7V
I Idle speed
MT
[Engine is running]
47 G/Y A/T signal No. 4 0.05 - 0.7V
I Idle speed
AT
DTC No. Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause) AX
P0600 I ECM receives incorrect voltage from TCM (Transmission I Harness or connectors
0600 control module) continuously. [The circuit between ECM and TCM (Transmis-
sion control module) is open or shorted.] SU
BR
DTC Confirmation Procedure NJEC0911 ST

NOTE:
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 9 seconds RS
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat- BT
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. HA
SEF058Y 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine, and let it idle for at least 15 seconds. SC
Without CONSULT-II
1) Start engine, and run it for at least 15 seconds at idle speed. EL
turn “ON”. IDX
ECM.
EC-167
Wiring Diagram
HEC740
EC-168
1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT GI

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM (Transmission control module) harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF116Y
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and TCM terminal 5, ECM terminal 46 and terminal TCM 6, ECM FE
terminal 18 and TCM terminal 7, ECM terminal 47 and TCM terminal 9, ECM terminal 19 and TCM terminal 8.
Continuity should exist. CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. MT
NG © Repair harness or connectors.
AT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 18, 19, 45, 46, 47 and ground.
AX
SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
BR
NG © Repair short to ground or short to power in harness.

ST
© INSPECTION END
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-169
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM) GENERAL - QG
System Description

COOLING FAN CONTROL NJEC0914S01
ECM func-
tion
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal ECM Cooling fan relay(s)
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refriger-
ant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3 step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
OPERATION (FOR MODELS PRODUCED BEFORE JULY 2001) NJEC0914S02
SEF118YA
EC-170
System Description (Cont’d)
OPERATION (FOR MODELS PRODUCED AFTER JULY 2001) NJEC0914S11
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEC937C
AX
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor SU

Mode NJEC0915
Specification data are reference values. BR
MONITOR
CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ITEM
ST
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
AIR COND
I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Air conditioner switch: ON
SIG
ON RS
Engine coolant tempera-
ture is 94°C (201°F) or OFF BT
less

COOLING I After warming up engine, idle the engine.
ture is between 95°C LOW
HA
FAN I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
(203°F) and 104°C (219°F)
Engine coolant tempera- SC

ture is 105°C (221°F) or HIGH
more
EL
IDX
EC-171

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V

I Cooling fan is not operating at high speed (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
P1217 I The engine coolant temperature is extraordinary high, I Harness or connectors

1217 even when the load is not heavy. (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted)
I Cooling fan
I Thermostat
I Improper ignition timing
I Engine coolant temperature sensor
I Blocked radiator
I Blocked front end (Improper fitting of nose mask)
I Crushed vehicle frontal area (Vehicle frontal is
collided but not repaired)
I Blocked air passage by improper installation of
front fog lamp or fog lamps.
I Improper mixture ratio of coolant
I Damaged bumper
For more information, refer to “MAIN 12 CAUSES
OF OVERHEATING”, EC-186.
EC-172
Overall Function Check

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan.
During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. GI
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious MA
burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by EM
turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape.
Then turn the cap all the way off.
SEF621WA With CONSULT-II LC
1) Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester)
in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level and
mixture ratio.
I If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos- FE
tic Procedure”, EC-175.
I If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55% CL
(varies depending on destinations), replace the coolant in the
following procedure LC-18, “Changing Engine Coolant”.
SEF646X
2) Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer MT
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos-
4) Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
5) If the results are NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-175.
AX
Without CONSULT-II
1) Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester) SU
mixture ratio. BR
SEC163BA If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos-
tic Procedure”, EC-175. ST
I If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55%
(varies depending on destinations), replace the coolant in the
following procedure LC-18, “Changing Engine Coolant”. RS
2) Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos- BT
3) Start engine.
Be careful not to overheat engine. HA
4) Set temperature control lever to full cold position.
5) Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.
6) Turn blower fan switch “ON”. SC
7) Run engine at idle for a few minutes with air conditioner oper-
ating. EL
Be careful not to overheat engine.
8) Make sure that cooling fan operates. Refer to “OPERATION”
table of Cooling fan, EC-170. IDX
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-175.
EC-173
Wiring Diagram
HEC747
EC-174
1 INSPECTION START GI
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 4.
EM
2 CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
LC
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
FE
CL
MT
SEF146Y
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. AT
3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF646X
4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-181.) BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-175
3 CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
SEF111X
5. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than low speed.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-184.)
EC-176

MA
EM
LC
SEF146Y
3. Set temperature lever at full cold position. FE
4. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.
5. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEC163BA SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. BR
NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-181.)
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-177

Without CONSULT-II
3. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
5. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
6. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than low speed.
MEF613EA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
6 CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK

Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
SLC754A
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

Check the following for leak.
I Hose
I Radiator
I Water pump (Refer to LC-12, “Water Pump”.)
© Repair or replace.
EC-178
8 CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief pressure. GI
MA
EM
LC
SLC755A
Radiator cap relief pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace radiator cap. CL
9 CHECK THERMOSTAT MT
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly. AT
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SLC343
Valve opening temperature:
82°C (180°F) [standard]
RS
Valve lift:
More than 8 mm/95°C (0.31 in/203°F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to LC-15, “Thermostat”.
BT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. HA
NG © Replace thermostat.
SC
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, EC-127. EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11. IDX
EC-179
11 CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-186.
© INSPECTION END
EC-180
PROCEDURE A =NJEC0920S01
1 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT GI

2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. MA
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 3, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
EM
LC
FE
SEF590X
OK or NG
CL
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
MT
Check the following. AT
I 10A fuse
I 40A fusible links
I Fuse block (J/B) connector E104 AX
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-181
3 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
JEF160Y
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cooling fan
motor-1 terminal 4 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM
6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace cooling fan relay.
EC-182
7 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2

Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-187. GI
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. MA
NG © Replace cooling fan motors.
EM
LC
© INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-183
PROCEDURE B =NJEC0920S02
1 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

4. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF593X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fuse
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fusible link

3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-2
terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 7 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 7 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
EC-184

I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. MA
6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3 EM

OK or NG LC
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace cooling fan relays.
7 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS

FE
OK or NG
CL
OK © GO TO 8.
MT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-107. AT
© INSPECTION END
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-185
Main 12 Causes of Overheating
Main 12 Causes of Overheating NJEC0921
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 I Blocked radiator I Visual No blocking —

I Blocked condenser
I Blocked radiator grille
I Blocked bumper
2 I Coolant mixture I Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-4, “RECOM-
MENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS”.
3 I Coolant level I Visual Coolant up to MAX level See LC-18, “Changing

in reservoir tank and Engine Coolant”.
radiator filler neck
4 I Radiator cap I Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa See LC-12, “System

(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 Check”.
2
kg/cm , 9 - 14 psi)
(Limit)
ON*2 5 I Coolant leaks I Visual No leaks See LC-12, “System

Check”.
ON*2 6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and Both hoses should be See LC-15, “Thermostat”
lower radiator hoses hot and LC-17, “Radiator”.
ON*1 7 I Cooling fan I CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217, EC-170.
OFF 8 I Combustion gas leak I Color checker chemi- Negative —

cal tester 4 Gas ana-
lyzer
ON*3 9 I Coolant temperature I Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving
I Coolant overflow to I Visual No overflow during driv- See LC-18, “Changing

reservoir tank ing and idling Engine Coolant”.
OFF*4 10 I Coolant return from I Visual Should be initial level in See LC-19, “Refilling
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank Egine Coolant”.
tor
OFF 11 I Cylinder head I Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-43, “Inspection”.
gauge mum distortion (warping)
12 I Cylinder block and pis- I Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-63, “Inspection”.
tons walls or piston
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.

*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to LC-24, “ OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS”.

COOLING FAN RELAYS-1, -2 AND -3 NJEC0922S01
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
Conditions Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and

Yes
2
No current supply No
If NG, replace relay.

SEF745U
EC-186
COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 NJEC0922S02
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and GI
check operation.
Terminals MA
Speed
(+) (−)
Low 1 4 EM
Cooling fan motor
High 1, 2 3, 4
SEF734W LC
Cooling fan motor should operate.
If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-187
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL GENERAL - QG

IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR NJEC0923S01
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the
power transistor. The power transistor turns on and off the ignition
coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high
voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
JEF119Y

Mode NJEC0924

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
9 B/R Ignition signal (No. 1) SEF971W

11 L/R Ignition signal (No. 3) 0.2 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
SEF972W
P1320 I The ignition signal in the primary circuit is not sent to I Harness or connectors (The ignition primary cir-
1320 ECM during engine cranking or running. cuit is open or shorted.)
I Power transistor unit built into ignition coil
I Condenser
I Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
I Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
I Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
EC-188
DTC Confirmation Procedure

NOTE:
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously GI
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
9 seconds before conducting the next test.
I If DTC P1320 is displayed with DTC P0335 or P0340, per-
MA
form trouble diagnosis for DTC P0335, P0340 first. Refer
to EC-148 or EC-154.
EM
SEF058Y
LC
3) Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to
“START” for at least 5 seconds.)
WITHOUT CONSULT-II NJEC0927S02 FE
2) Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to
“START” for at least 5 seconds.) CL
turn “ON”.
4) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with MT
ECM.
5) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-192. AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-189
Wiring Diagram
HEC733
EC-190
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC734
EC-191
1 CHECK ENGINE START

Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 12.
II)
No © GO TO 3.
2 SEARCH FOR MALFUNCTIONING CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Search for circuit which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop.
SEF190Y
© GO TO 12.
3 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

SEF120Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Go to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY, EC-108.
EC-192
4 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. GI
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
JEF121Y
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF367X
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 5.
SU
5 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III BR

2. Disconnect ECM relay. ST
RS
BT
HA
JEF100Y
3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 7 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. SC
EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
IDX
NG © GO TO 6.
EC-193

Check the harness for open or short between ECM relay and condenser.
7 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF368X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.

I 15A fuse
I Harness for open and short between ECM relay and fuse
© Repair or replace harness or connectors.
9 CHECK ECM RELAY

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
10 CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
11 CHECK CONDENSER
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace condenser.
EC-194
12 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
JEF119Y
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF122Y AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14. SU
NG © GO TO 13.
BR
Check the harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM relay terminal 7. ST
RS
14 CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. BT
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-195
15 CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 9, 10, 11, 12 and ignition coil terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
16 CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

© INSPECTION END
EC-196

IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
1.
NJEC0930S01
Disconnect ignition coil with power transistor harness connec-
GI
tor.
2. Check ignition coil with power transistor for resistance as show MA
in the figure.
EM
3 (+) - 2 (−) Except 0 or ∞
1 (+) - 3 (−)
SEF371Q
Except 0 LC
1 (+) - 2 (−)
If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor assembly.
FE
CL
MT
ECM RELAY NJEC0930S02
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and AT
2.
2. Check continuity between ECM relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and
7. AX
Condition Continuity
12V direct current supply between ter-

SU
Yes
minals 1 and 2
OFF No BR
SEF123Y
If NG, replace ECM relay.
ST
RS
BT
HA
CONDENSER NJEC0930S03
SC
2. Check condenser continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
EL
If NG, replace condenser.
IDX
SEF124Y
EC-197
EGR SYSTEM GENERAL - QG
Description (Model with EGR valve)
Description (Model with EGR valve) NJEC0931

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NJEC0931S01
ECM func-
tion

Engine speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature EGR control EGRC-solenoid valve
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
This system cuts and controls vacuum applied to the EGR valve to
suit engine operating conditions. This cut-and-control operation is
accomplished through the ECM and the EGRC-solenoid valve.
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, current
flows through the solenoid valve is cut. This causes the vacuum to
be discharged into the atmosphere. The EGR valve remains
closed.
I Low engine coolant temperature
I Engine starting
I Extremely light load engine operation
I Engine idling
I Excessively high engine coolant temperature
I Extremely low vehicle speed
I Mass air flow sensor malfunction
SEF127Y
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NJEC0931S02

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve NJEC0931S0201
The EGR valve controls the amount of exhaust gas routed to the
intake manifold. Vacuum is applied to the EGR valve in response
to EGRC-solenoid valve moving. The vacuum controls the move-
ment of a taper valve connected to the vacuum diaphragm in the
EGR valve.
SEF783K
EC-198
Description (Model with EGR valve) (Cont’d)
EGRC-Solenoid Valve NJEC0931S0202
The EGRC-solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM.
When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the coil in the sole- GI
noid valve is energized. The vacuum signal passes through the
solenoid valve. The signal then reaches the EGR valve.
When the ECM sends an OFF signal, a plunger will then move to MA
cut the vacuum signal from the intake manifold collector to the EGR
valve.
EM
SEF318UD LC
Mode NJEC0932
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION FE
Idle OFF
EGRC SOL/V I Lift up drive wheels and shift Revving engine up from 2,000 to CL
gear “ON” 3,000 rpm [More than 24 km/h (15 ON
MPH)]
MT
CAUTION: AT
AX
TERMI- WIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
SU
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Warm-up condition
(11 - 14V)
I Idle speed
BR
38 W/PU EGRC-solenoid valve [Vehicle is running]
I Warm-up condition
0 - 1V
I Vehicle speed is more than 24 km/h (15 MPH) ST
I Rev engine up from 2,000 to 3,000 rpm
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-199
Wiring Diagram
HEC751
EC-200
Yes or No MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 6.
EM
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
LC
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “EGRC-SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “ON/OFF”.
When the EGRC-solenoid valve is repeatedly switching between ON/OFF, make sure that the engine condition changes
accordingly.
FE
OK or NG
CL
NG © GO TO 3.
MT
3 CHECK EGRC-SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II AT
1. Stop engine, and turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Turn the EGRC-solenoid valve ON/OFF again, and check for operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard. AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. SU
NG © GO TO 10.
BR
4 CHECK VACUUM HOSE TO EGR VALVE
With CONSULT-II
ST
2. Disconnect vacuum hose to EGR valve.
3. Check for vacuum existence when EGRC-solenoid valve “ON” for “ACTIVE TEST” in “CONSULT-II”.
Check for vacuum under the following conditions. RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF128Y
EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. IDX
NG © GO TO 5.
EC-201
5 CHECK VACUUM HOSE

2. Check vacuum hose for clogging, cracks or improper connection.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Repair or replace vacuum hose.

Without CONSULT-II
2. Lift up driving wheel, and rev engine from 2,000 rpm up to 3,000 rpm for suitable gear position [More than 24 km/h (15
MPH)].
3. At that moment, place a finger on the EGR valve diaphragm to make sure the EGR valve is operating.
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 7.
7 CHECK VACUUM HOSE TO EGR VALVE

Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EGR valve.
2. Check for vacuum not existence at idle.
SEC137A
3. Check for vacuum existence when EGRC-solenoid valve “ON”.
Vacuum should exist when EGRC-solenoid valve “ON”, revving engine from 2,000 rpm up to 3,000 rpm for suitable
gear position.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 9.
EC-202
8 CHECK EGR VALVE

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13. MA
NG © Replace EGR valve.
EM
9 CHECK VACUUM HOSE
2. Check vacuum hose for clogging, cracks or improper connection. LC
FE
CL
SEF109L
MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. AT
NG © Repair or replace vacuum hose.
AX
10 CHECK EGRC SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. SU
2. Disconnect EGRC solenoid valve harness connector.
4. Check voltage between EGRC solenoid valve harness connector terminals 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF336X
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
SC
NG © GO TO 11.
EL
Check the harness for open or short between EGRC-solenoid valve and ECM relay.
IDX
EC-203
12 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

3. Check harness continuity between EGRC-solenoid vavle harness connector terminal 2 and ECM terminal 38.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
13 CHECK EGRC SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Replace EGRC-solenoid valve.

© INSPECTION END

EGR VALVE NJEC0936S01
I Apply vacuum to EGR vacuum port with a hand vacuum pump.
EGR valve spring should lift.
I Check for sticking.
If NG, repair or replace EGR valve.
Vacuum EGR valve operation
6.7 kPa (–67 mbar, –50 mmHg, –1.97 Starting

inHg)
MEF137D
–12.0 kPa (–120 mbar, –90 mmHg, Full lift
–3.54 inHg)
EC-204
EGRC-SOLENOID VALVE NJEC0936S02
1. Check air passage continuity.
With CONSULT-II GI
Perform “EGRC SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity MA
EGRC SOLENOID VALVE between A and B between A and C
ON Yes No
EM
OFF No Yes
SEF129Y If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace solenoid LC

valve.
Without CONSULT-II
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
Condition
between A and B between A and C
12V direct current supply FE

between terminals 1 and Yes No
2
No supply No Yes
CL
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace solenoid

AEC919 valve. MT
2. Check solenoid valve continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: 31 - 35Ω at 20°C (68°F) AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-205
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE GENERAL - QG
Description
ECM func-
tion

Engine speed

EVAP can-
EVAP canister purge volume
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering signal ister purge
control

Front heated oxygen sensor
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner signal
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canis-
ter purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow
rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by consider-
ing various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the
flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the
air flow changes.

The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON
pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the
valve.
SEF337U

Mode NJEC0938
Idle 0%
I Engine: After warming up More than 30 seconds after start-
PURG VOL C/V I Lift up drive wheels and suitable ing engine
gear position 30 - 100%
Rev engine up from 2,000 to 4,000
rpm.
EC-206
VALVE GENERAL - QG

CAUTION:
GI
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR EM
NO.
5 - 10V
LC
[Engine is running]
EVAP canister purge vol- I Warm-up condition
5 P ume control valve (ON/ I More than 30 seconds after starting engine
OFF duty) I Lift up drive wheels and shift to a suitable gear
position other than “P” or “N”
SEF975W FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-207
VALVE GENERAL - QG
Wiring Diagram
HEC750
EC-208
VALVE GENERAL - QG
1. Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
EM
LC
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Remove the purge vacuum hose between the EVAP canister and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at
the EVAP canister.
4. Touch “UP/DOWN” on CONSULT-II screen. Check to see if vacuum exists under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEC582C
AX
OK or NG
SU
NG © GO TO 4.
BR
Without CONSULT-II
1. LIft up vehicle, start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. ST
2. Remove the purge vacuum hose between the EVAP canister and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at
the EVAP canister.
3. Check to see if vacuum exists when revving engine from 2,000 to 4,000 rpm in a suitable gear position other than “P” RS
or “N”.
BT
MTBL0461 HA
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END SC
NG © GO TO 4.
EL
IDX
EC-209
VALVE GENERAL - QG

2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
JEF126Y
4. Check voltage between terminals 1 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

I Harness connectors E75, F36.
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse block.

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 5 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness
connector terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
EC-210
VALVE GENERAL - QG
7 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING

1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister and intake manifold. GI
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
MA
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
EM
8 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-211. LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
FE
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-107. CL
© INSPECTION END
MT
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL AT
SOLENOID VALVE NJEC0942S01
With CONSULT-II AX
1) Start engine.
2) Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the SU
valve opening.
If OK, inspection end. If NG, go to following step.
3) Check air passage continuity. BR
PBIB0569E
Condition Air passage continuity
PURG VOL CONT/V value between A and B ST
100.0% Yes
0.0% No RS
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace the
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. BT
4) Check solenoid valve continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: 31 - 35Ω at 20°C (68°F)
HA
Without CONSULT-II
SEF079X
1) Check air passage continuity.
Air passage continuity
SC
Condition
between A and B

Yes
EL
minals
No supply No
IDX
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
2) Check solenoid valve continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: 31 - 35Ω at 20°C (68°F)
EC-211
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC)
VALVE GENERAL - QG
Description
ECM func-
tion

Engine speed
PNP switch Park/Neutral position

Idle air
IACV-AAC valve
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation control
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal
Cooling fan Cooling fan operation
This system automatically controls engine idle speed to a specified

level. Idle speed is controlled through fine adjustment of the
amount of air which by-passes the throttle valve via IACV-AAC
valve. The IACV-AAC valve changes the opening of the air by-pass
passage to control the amount of auxiliary air. This valve is actu-
ated by a step motor built into the valve, which moves the valve in
the axial direction in steps corresponding to the ECM output sig-
nals. One step of IACV-AAC valve movement causes the respec-
tive opening of the air by-pass passage. (i.e. when the step
advances, the opening is enlarged.) The opening of the valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The
crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed
and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the step
position of the IACV-AAC valve so that engine speed coincides with
the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine speed is the
lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The opti-
mum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consid-
eration various engine conditions, such as during warm up,
deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering, cool-
ing fan operation and electrical load).

The IACV-AAC valve is operated by a step motor for centralized
control of auxiliary air supply. This motor has four winding phases
and is actuated by the output signals of ECM which turns ON and
OFF two windings each in sequence. Each time the IACV-AAC
valve opens or closes to change the auxiliary air quantity, the ECM
sends a pulse signal to the step motor. When no change in the
auxiliary air quantity is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse
signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains
at that particular opening.
SEF937W
EC-212
VALVE GENERAL - QG

Mode NJEC0944
GI
I Engine: After warming up Idle 5 - 30 steps MA

IACV-AAC/V
EM
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. LC
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) FE
NO.
101 BR
102 LG
[Engine is running] CL
103 P
I Idle speed
104 OR
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-213
VALVE GENERAL - QG
Wiring Diagram
HEC746
EC-214
VALVE GENERAL - QG
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION GI

2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 101, 102, 103, 104 (IACV-AAC valve signal) and ground with an oscil-
loscope. MA
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”, wait at least 5 seconds and then “OFF”.
4. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below at least once every 9 seconds after turning
ignition switch “OFF”. EM
LC
FE
SEF922Y CL
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END MT
NG © GO TO 2.
AT
2. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
AX
SU
BR
ST
NEF309A RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF343X
OK or NG
IDX
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
EC-215
VALVE GENERAL - QG

Check the harness for open or short between IACV-AAC and ECM relay.

3. Check harness continuity between
ECM terminal 101 and IACV-AAC valve harness connector terminal 1,
ECM terminal 104 and IACV-AAC valve harness connector terminal 6.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
5 CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-I

1. Reconnect the ECM harness connector and IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose connected to the air control valve (Power steering) at intake air duct.
4. Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence.
SEF923Y
Vacuum slightly exists or does not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace air control valve (Power steering).
EC-216
VALVE GENERAL - QG
6 CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-II

Check the vacuum hose for vacuum existence when steering wheel is turned. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF923Y
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. FE
NG © GO TO 7.
CL
7 CHECK VACUUM PORT
1. Stop engine. MT
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose connected to the air control valve (Power steering) at the vacuum port.
3. Blow air into vacuum port.
4. Check that air flows freely. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF924Y ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. RS
NG © Repair or clean vacuum port.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-217
VALVE GENERAL - QG
8 CHECK VACUUM HOSES AND TUBES

1. Disconnect vacuum hoses between the air control valve (Power steering) and vacuum port, air control valve (Power
steering) and air duct.
2. Check hoses and tubes for cracks, clogging, improper connection or disconnection.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Repair hoses or tubes.
9 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10.

1. Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly.
2. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-43.
Yes or No
Yes © INSPECTION END
No © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.

2. Reconnect all harness connectors and vacuum hose.
4. Also warm up transmission to normal operating temperature.
I Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
5. Stop vehicle with engine running.
6. Check target idle speed.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-43.
EC-218
VALVE GENERAL - QG

© INSPECTION END
MA
EM
LC
IACV-AAC VALVE NJEC0948S01
1) Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
2) Check IACV-AAC valve resistance.
FE
Condition Resistance
Terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3

20 - 24Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] CL
3) Reconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector. MT

4) Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”, and ensure the IACV-
AAC valve, makes operating sound and according to the igni-
tion switch position. AT
If NG, replace the IACV-AAC valve.
AX
SU
BR
SEF125Y
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-219
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH GENERAL - QG
Component Description (Model with TP switch)
Component Description (Model with TP switch) NJEC0949

A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position
switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open
throttle position switch is not used.
When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle
position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only
uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge control
valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning.
SEF505V

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Warm-up condition
(11 - 14V)
43 Y/PU
Throttle position switch I Accelerator pedal fully released
(Closed position)
Approximately 0V
EC-220
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC741
EC-221
1 INSPECTION START
Is the vehicle an A/T model?
Yes or No
II)
No © GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “A/T” and then select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW” under the following conditions. Measurement must be made with throttle position
switch installed in vehicle.
MTBL0355
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 4.

Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 43 (closed throttle position switch signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.
SEF916Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 4.
EC-222

2. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
JEF091Y
4. Check voltage between terminal 5 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF250W
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5. SU
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BR

I Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and fuse block. ST
I 10A fuse
RS
BT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 43 and throttle position switch harness connector terminal 4. HA
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
EL
NG © GO TO 7.
IDX
Check the harness for open or short between throttle position switch and ECM.
EC-223
8 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH IDLE POSITION

Perform Basic Inspection, EC-66.
© GO TO 9.
9 CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH

OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 10.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 11.
II)
NG © Replace throttle position switch.

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ENGINE” and then select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditins.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
MTBL1565
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace throttle position sensor.

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 57 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
SEC758D
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.

© INSPECTION END
EC-224

CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
With CONSULT-II
NJEC0953S01
GI
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode in A/T SECTION with CON- MA
SULT-II.
3) Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW” under the following
conditions. EM
NOTE:
Measurement must be made with closed throttle position
SEF173Y
switch installed in vehicle. LC
Throttle valve conditions CLOSED THL/SW
Completely closed ON
Partially open or completely open OFF

FE
CL
“Basic Inspection”, replace closed throttle position switch.
MT
Without CONSULT-II
1) Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector. AT
2) Check continuity between terminals 4 and 5 under the follow-
ing conditions. Refer to wiring diagram.
NOTE:
AX
Continuity measurement must be made with closed throttle
position switch installed in vehicle.
SU
Throttle valve conditions Continuity
Completely closed Yes BR

Partially open or completely open No
If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic ST

RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-225
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE GENERAL - QG

The valve timing control system is utilized to control intake valve
opening and closing timing. Engine coolant temperature signals,
engine speed and throttle position are used to determine intake
valve timing.
The intake camshaft sprocket position is regulated by oil pressure
controlled by the intake valve timing control.
When ECM sends ON signal to intake valve timing control solenoid
valve, oil pressure is transmitted to camshaft sprocket. Then, intake
side camshaft is advanced.
SEF095X
Operation NJEC0955
Engine operating condition Intake valve tim- Intake valve

Engine coolant ing control sole- opening and Valve overlap
Engine speed B/FUEL SCHDL Neutral switch noid valve closing time
temperature
20°C (68°F) -
Above 3 msec
70°C (158°F) 1,150 - 4,600
OFF ON Advance Increased
Above 70°C rpm
Above 7 msec
(158°F)
Conditions other than those above OFF Normal Normal

Mode NJEC0956
I Engine: After warming up Idle OFF

I Lift up drive wheels and shift to
INT/V SOL-B1
suitable gear position other than Revving engine up from 2,000 to
ON
“P” or “N” 3,000 rpm

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and engine ground.
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

I Idle speed (11 - 14V)
Intake valve timing control [Engine is running]
6 Y/R
solenoid valve I Lift up drive wheels and shift to a suitable gear
Approximately 0V
position other than “P” or “N”
I Rev engine up from 2,000 to 3,000 rpm
EC-226
VALVE GENERAL - QG
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC752
EC-227
VALVE GENERAL - QG
1 INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “VALVE TIMING SOL” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” CONSULT-II screen.
SEF919Y
4. Check for operating sound of the intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.

Without CONSULT-II
1. Lift up vehicle, start engine and warm it up to normal operation temperature.
2. Shift to a suitable gear position other than “P” or “N” and rev engine up from 2,000 to 3,000 rpm.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 6 (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve signal) and ground under the follow-
ing conditions.
SEF920Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.
EC-228
VALVE GENERAL - QG

2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF162Y
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF619X
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
SU
NG © GO TO 5.

BR
I Harness connector E75, F36 ST
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between valve timing control solenoid valve and fuse
6 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT BT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 6 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector HA
terminal 2. Refer to wiring diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. EL
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground to short to power or connectors.
IDX
EC-229
VALVE GENERAL - QG
7 CHECK VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace valve timing control solenoid valve.

© INSPECTION END

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
NJEC0960S01
1. Check oil passage visually for any metal debris.
2. Supply intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals with
battery voltage.
3. Make sure that inside plunger protrudes.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
SEF159Y
EC-230
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH GENERAL - QG

When the gear position is “P” (A/T models only) or “N”, park/neutral
position (PNP) switch is “ON”. GI
ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground
exists.
MA
EM
SEF740W LC
Mode NJEC0962
Shift lever: “N” (M/T models)
ON
P/N POSI SW I Ignition switch: ON “P” or “N” (A/T models)
CL
Except above OFF

MT
CAUTION:
AT
TERMI- AX
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
SU
I Gear position is “Neutral position” (M/T models) Approximately 0V
I Gear position is “P” or “N” (A/T models)
29 G/OR PNP switch BR
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-231
Wiring Diagram
HEC749
EC-232
Yes or No MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
EM
LC
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF915Y
OK or NG
AX
NG © GO TO 4.
SU
Without CONSULT-II BR
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 29 (PNP signal) and ground under the following conditions.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF921Y
OK or NG SC
NG © GO TO 4. EL
IDX
EC-233

2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
SEF740W
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch harness connector terminal 2 and body ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

Check the harness for open or short between PNP switch and body ground.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and PNP switch harness connector terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

Check the harness for open or short between ECM and PNP switch.
8 CHECK PNP SWITCH

Refer to MT-21, “Position Switch Check” or AT-184, “PNP Switch”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace PNP switch.
EC-234

© INSPECTION END
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-235
INJECTOR GENERAL - QG

The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The
amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration.
Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The
ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel
needs.
SEF138X

Mode NJEC0967

INJ PULSE-B1

B/FUEL SCHDL

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
1 R/B Injector No. 1 SEF011W

4 L/B Injector No. 4 (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
SEF012W
EC-236
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC744
EC-237

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
SEF190Y
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
MEC703B
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
EC-238

1. Stop engine. GI
2. Disconnect injector harness connector.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. MA
EM
LC
SEF130Y
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
CL
NG © GO TO 3.

MT
I 10A fuse AT
I Harness for open or short between injector and fuse AX
SU
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. BR
3. Check harness continuity between injector harness connector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 1, 2, 3, 4.
Continuity should exist. ST
OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5. BT

HA
Check the harness for open or short between ECM and injector.
SC
6 CHECK INJECTOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-240. EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. IDX
NG © Replace injector.
EC-239

© INSPECTION END

INJECTOR NJEC0971S01
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 13.5 - 17.5Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
If NG, replace injector.
SEF131Y
EC-240
FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER GENERAL - QG
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC845
EC-241
1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY HEATER CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor harness connector.
SEF012X
SEF153Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

I 10A fuse
I Fuse block (J/B) connector E104
I Harness for open or short between front heated oxygen sensor and fuse
3 CHECK GROUND FOR HEATER CIRCUIT

2. Check harness continuity between front heated oxygen sensor harness connector terminal 3 and ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC-242
4 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. MA
EM
LC
© INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER AT
NJEC0974S01
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω at 25°C (77°F) AX
If NG, replace the front heated oxygen sensor.
SU
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been BR
SEF220W dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys- ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-243
START SIGNAL GENERAL - QG

Mode NJEC0975

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

42 B/Y Start signal
EC-244
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC743
EC-245
Diagnostic Procedure =NJEC0978
1 INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
SEF227Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “START”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 42 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF362X
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.
EC-246

I 10A fuse
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M2 MA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
EM
LC
© INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-247
FUEL PUMP GENERAL - QG
System Description
ECM func-
tion

Engine speed Fuel pump
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump relay
control
Ignition switch Ignition signal & start signal
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine
startability. If the ECM receives a 180° signal from the camshaft position sensor, it knows that the engine is
rotating, and causes the pump to perform. If the 180° signal is not received when the ignition switch is on, the
engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The
ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the
fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second
Engine running or cranking Operates
When engine is stopped (Signal is not sent from camshaft position sensor.) Stops in 1.5 seconds
Except as shown above Stops

A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
SEF605X

Mode NJEC0981

I Engine running or cranking ON
FUEL PUMP RLY I When engine is stopped (Stops in 1.5 seconds)
EC-248

CAUTION:
GI
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR EM
NO.

[Engine is running]
LC
17
B/P Fuel pump relay
(20)* [Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I More than 1 second after turning ignition switch
(11 - 14V)
“ON”

FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-249
Wiring Diagram
HEC902
EC-250

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
MA
EM
LC
JEF133Y
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned “ON”. FE
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END CL
NG © GO TO 2.
MT
2. Disconnect fuel pump relay. AT
AX
SU
BR
JEF134Y ST
4. Check voltage between terminals 1, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF607X
OK or NG EL
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3. IDX
EC-251

I 10A and 15A fuses
I Fuse block (J/B) connector B4
I Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay
4 CHECK POWER GROUND CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
JEF135Y
3. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector terminal 3 and body ground,
fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector terminal terminal 5 and fuel pump relay connector terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

I Harness for open or short between fuel pump and body ground
I Harness for open or short between fuel pump and fuel pump relay

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 17 (Models except for the Middle East and Australia), 20 (Models for
the Middle East and Australia) and fuel pump relay connector terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
EC-252

I Harness connectors B1, M17
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay MA
EM
8 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY
LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace fuel pump relay.
9 CHECK FUEL PUMP FE

OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace fuel pump. MT
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT AT

© INSPECTION END AX
SU
BR
Component Inspection NJEC0985 ST

FUEL PUMP RELAY NJEC0985S01
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5.
RS
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes

BT
If NG, replace relay. HA

SEF145X
FUEL PUMP NJEC0985S02

SC
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness con-
nector.
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 5. EL
If NG, replace fuel pump. IDX
JEF136Y
EC-253
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH GENERAL - QG

The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load.
When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and
adjust for the increased load.
JEF137Y

Mode NJEC0987
Steering wheel in neutral position

I Engine: After warming up, idle OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL (forward direction)
the engine
The steering wheel is fully turned ON

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
Power steering oil pressure I Steering wheel is fully turned
30 PU/W
switch [Engine is running]
Approximately 5V
I Steering wheel is not turned
EC-254
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC748
EC-255
1 INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check “PW/ST SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
SEF228YA
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
SEF138Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.
EC-256

2. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between power steering oil pressure switch harness terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to wiring diagram. MA
OK or NG EM
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. LC

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 30 and power steering oil pressure switch harness terminal 1.
Refer to wiring diagram. FE
OK or NG
CL
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6. MT
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART AT

Check the harness for open or short between ECM and power steering oil pressure switch.
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. AX
7 CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SU

OK or NG
BR
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace power steering oil pressure switch.
ST
RS
© INSPECTION END
BT
HA

SC
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH NJEC0991S01
1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness con- EL
nector then start engine.
2. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
Refer to wiring diagram. IDX
Steering wheel is being fully turned. Yes
JEF137Y Steering wheel is not being turned. No
EC-257
If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch.
EC-258
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GENERAL - QG
Description
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the
air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume GI
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan sys-
tem. MA
EM
JEF147Y LC
FE
CL
SEF099X MT
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. AT
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- AX
TERMI-
WIRE SU
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] BR
I Idle speed
[Engine is running] ST
Refrigerant pressure sen- [Engine is running]
RS
58 R/L
sor I Warm-up condition
Voltage is decreasing
I Idle speed
gradually BT
“OFF”
109 R Sensors’ power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-259
Wiring Diagram
HEC742
EC-260
1 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION GI

2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 58 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. MA
EM
LC
SEF148Y FE
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
MT
2 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “OFF”.
2. Stop engine. AT
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
AX
SU
BR
ST
JEF147Y
5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF149Y EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. IDX
NG © GO TO 3.
EC-261

I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
4 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission control module) and refrigerant pressure sensor (A/T models
only)
6 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 58 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

8 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to HA-88, HA-225, “Refrigerant pressure sensor”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.

© INSPECTION END
EC-262
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL GENERAL - QG

Mode
NJEC0996
GI
MA
Rear window defogger or head-
ON
LOAD SIGNAL I Engine: running lamp “ON”.
Except the above. OFF EM

Heater fan motor is operating. ON
HEATER FAN SW I Ignition switch: ON LC
Heater fan motor is not operating. OFF

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- FE
TER-
WIRE CL
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] MT
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Rear window defogger is operating and/or lighting
Electrical load signal-1 (11 - 14V)
switch is on
67 R/W (Headlamp and rear defog- AT
ger) [Engine is running]
I Rear window defogger is not operating and lighting Approximately 0V
switch is not on
AX
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
Electrical load signal-2 I Blower fan motor is operating
68 LG/B
(Blower fan switch) SU
[Engine is running]
Approximately 5V
I Blower fan motor is not operating
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-263
Wiring Diagram

RHD MODELS AND LHD MODELS WITH REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY (1M TYPE)
NJEC0998S01
GEC326A
EC-264
LHD MODELS WITH REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY (2M TYPE) NJEC0998S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GEC327A
EC-265
Diagnostic Procedure — Load Signal —
Diagnostic Procedure — Load Signal — NJEC0999
1 CHECK CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

2. Turn “OFF” the lighting switch.
SEF139Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II

1. Turn “OFF” the rear window defogger switch.
SEF140Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 9.
3 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION

1. Start engine.
2. Turn “ON” the rear window defogger switch.
3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 4.
No © Refer to EL-314, “Rear Window Defogger”.
EC-266
Diagnostic Procedure — Load Signal — (Cont’d)

1. Stop engine. GI
3. Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
4. Check voltage between terminal 3 (LHD models), 5 (RHD models) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. MA
EM
LC
SEF143Y
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
CL
NG © Check the following and repair.
I 20A fuse
I Fuse block (J/B) connector B4 MT
I Harness for open and short between fuse block and rear window defogger relay
5 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY

AT
OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace rear window defogger relay. SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-267
6 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 67 and rear window defogger relay terminals 5 (LHD models*), 3
(RHD models).
*Refer to wiring diagram.
SEF141Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

I Diode M68
I Joint connector-1 (If so equipped)
I Harness for open and short between ECM and rear window defogger relay

© INSPECTION END
9 CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION

1. Start engine.
2. Turn the lighting switch “ON”.
3. Check that headlamps are illuminated.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Refer to EL-64, “HEADLAMP SYSTEM”.
EC-268
10 CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Stop engine. GI
3. Disconnect lighting switch connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 67 and lighting switch connector terminal 12 under the following con- MA
ditions.
EM
LC
SEF142Y
FE
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 11. MT

AT
I Diode M68 AX
I Joint connector-1 (If so equipped)
I Fuse block
I Harness for open and short between ECM and lighting switch connector SU
BR
ST
© INSPECTION END
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-269
Diagnostic Procedure — Heater Control Panel (Fan Switch) —
Diagnostic Procedure — Heater Control Panel

(Fan Switch) — NJEC1000
1 CHECK CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION

1. Start engine.
2. Turn fan switch “ON”.
SEF144Y
OK or NG
NG (Manual air condi- © GO TO 2.
tioner)
NG (Auto air conditioner) © GO TO 4.

1. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect fan switch harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 68 and fan switch harness connector terminal 14.
OK or NG
OK © Refer to HA-73, HA-198, “BLOWER MOTOR”.
NG © GO TO 3.

I Harness for open and short between ECM and fan switch
EC-270
Diagnostic Procedure — Heater Control Panel (Fan Switch) — (Cont’d)

1. Stop engine. GI
3. Disconnect auto air conditioner amplifier harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 68 and auto air conditioner amplifier harness connector terminal 19. MA
EM
OK or NG
OK © Refer to HA-56, “Auto Amp.”.
LC
NG © GO TO 5.

I Harness connectors M66, F105 FE
I Harness for open or short between ECM and auto air conditioner amplifier.
CL
MT
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY AT
NJEC1001S01
Conditions Continuity AX
No current supply No SU

BR
SEF145XA
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF145Y
SC
EL
IDX
EC-271
MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS GENERAL - QG
Wiring Diagram
GEC266A
EC-272
CO ADJUSTMENT RESISTOR GENERAL - QG
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC756
EC-273
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) GENERAL - QG
Fuel Pressure Regulator
Fuel Pressure Regulator NJEC1004
Fuel pressure at idling Vacuum hose is connected Approximately 235 (2.35, 2.4, 34)
kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)
Vacuum hose is disconnected Approximately 294 (2.94, 3.0, 43)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing NJEC1005
QG13DE QG15DE QG16DE QG18DE
Ignition timing °BTDC/Target idle speed* rpm M/T 2±5/630±50 2±5/630±50 6±5/630±50 6±5/630±50
A/T 6±5/750±50 6±5/750±50 6±5/750±50 6±5/700±50
M/T 800 or more

Air conditioner: ON rpm
A/T 850 or more
Throttle position sensor idle position V 0.15 - 0.85
*: Under the following conditions:

I Electrical load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
I Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Mass Air Flow Sensor NJEC1006
Supply voltage (Heater) V Battery voltage (11 - 14)
Supply voltage (Sensor) V Approximately 5
Output voltage V 1.0 - 1.7*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and idling under no-load.
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor NJEC1007
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater NJEC1008
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 2.3 - 4.3
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) NJEC1009

EC-274
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) GENERAL - QG
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) NJEC1010

GI
MA
EM
LC
EGRC-Solenoid Valve (If so equipped) NJEC1011
Resistance Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] 31 - 35
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Valve NJEC1012 FE

Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Ω 31 - 35
IACV-AAC Valve CL
NJEC1013
Terminal No. Resistance Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]

MT
1-2
2-3
20 - 24 AT
4-5
5-6
AX
Injector NJEC1014

SU
Ignition Coil with Power Transistor NJEC1015 BR

3 (+) - 2 (−) Except 0 or ∞ ST

1 (+) - 3 (−)
Except 0
1 (+) - 2 (−) RS
Condenser NJEC1016
BT
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] MΩ Above 1
Fuel Pump HA
NJEC1017

SC
EL
IDX
EC-275
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX GENERAL - YD
Alphabetical & Numerical Index for DTC
Alphabetical & Numerical Index for DTC NJEC1018

ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC NJEC1018S01
Items
DTC MIL illumination Reference page
ACCEL POS SENSOR 0403 X EC-392
COOLANT TEMP SEN 0103 X EC-359
CRANK POS SEN (TDC) 0407 X EC-399
ECM 2 0301 X EC-384
ECM 10 0802 X EC-438
ECM 12 0901 X EC-384
ECM 14 0807 X EC-440
ECM 15 0903 — EC-448
ECM RLY 0902 X EC-444
FUEL CUT SYSTEM1 1004 X EC-450
MASS AIR FLOW SEN 0102 X EC-353
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING 0505 — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
OVER HEAT 0208 X EC-368
P1·CAM POS SEN 0701 X EC-405
P2·TDC PULSE SIG 0702 X EC-411
P3·PUMP COMM LINE 0703 X EC-417
P4·SPILL/V CIRC 0704 X EC-423
P5·PUMP C/MODULE 0705 X EC-429
P6·SPILL VALVE 0706 X EC-423
P7·F/INJ TIMG FB 0707 X EC-432
P9·FUEL TEMP SEN 0402 X EC-386
VEHICLE SPEED SEN 0104 X EC-364
EC-276
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX GENERAL - YD
Alphabetical & Numerical Index for DTC (Cont’d)
NUMERICAL INDEX FOR DTC =NJEC1018S02
Items
GI
DTC MIL illumination Reference page
0102 MASS AIR FLOW SEN X EC-353 MA

0103 COOLANT TEMP SEN X EC-359
0104 VEHICLE SPEED SEN X EC-364 EM

0208 OVER HEAT X EC-368
0301 ECM 2 X EC-384 LC

0402 P9·FUEL TEMP SEN X EC-386
0403 ACCEL POS SENSOR X EC-392
0407 CRANK POS SEN (TDC) X EC-399

FE
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
0505 FURTHER TESTING — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
CL
0701 P1·CAM POS SEN X EC-405
0702 P2·TDC PULSE SIG X EC-411 MT

0703 P3·PUMP COMM LINE X EC-417
0704 P4·SPILL/V CIRC X EC-423 AT

0705 P5·PUMP C/MODULE X EC-429
0706 P6·SPILL VALVE X EC-423 AX

0707 P7·F/INJ TIMG FB X EC-432
0802 ECM 10 X EC-438 SU

0807 ECM 14 X EC-440
0901 ECM 12 X EC-384 BR

0902 ECM RLY X EC-444
0903 ECM 15 — EC-448

ST
1004 FUEL CUT SYSTEM1 X EC-450
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-277
PRECAUTIONS GENERAL - YD

BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” NJEC1019
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL N16 is as follows (The compo-
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer-
I For a side collision
WARNING:
formed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
Bag Module, see the RS section.
before the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.
EC-278
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System NJEC1020
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF313Y
EC-279
Precautions
Precautions NJEC1021
SEF289H
I When connecting ECM harness connector, tighten secur-

ing bolt with the specific tightening torque.
: 3.0 - 5.0 N·m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
SEF853Y

break).
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
SEF291H
I Before replacing ECM, perform Terminals and Reference

Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-340.
MEF040D
I If MIL illuminates or blinks irregularly when engine is

running, water may have accumulated in fuel filter. Drain
water from fuel filter. If this does not correct the
malfunction, perform specified trouble diagnostic proce-
dures.
“DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function
Check”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “ DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall
SAT652J
completed.
EC-280
Precautions (Cont’d)
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and GI
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the MA
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals,
such as the ground.
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF348N
MT
When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following: AT
I EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit AX
I GI-33, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
I GI-22, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT” SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-281
PREPARATION GENERAL - YD
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools NJEC1023
Tool number
Description
Tool name
KV111060S0
Removal/Installation tool
kit for fuel injection pump
NT814
Commercial Service Tool NJEC1024
Tool number Description
pressure
NT653
EC-282
SYSTEM GENERAL - YD
ECCS-D Component Parts Location
ECCS-D Component Parts Location NJEC1025
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF314Y
EC-283
SYSTEM GENERAL - YD
ECCS-D Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
SEF315Y
EC-284
SYSTEM GENERAL - YD
ECCS-D Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF316Y
EC-285
SYSTEM GENERAL - YD
Circuit Diagram
GEC268A
EC-286
SYSTEM GENERAL - YD
System Diagram
System Diagram NJEC1027
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF317Y
EC-287
SYSTEM GENERAL - YD
Vacuum Hose Drawing
SEF318Y
1. Vacuum pump to vacuum gallery 3. Throttle control actuator to 4. Throttle control solenoid valve to
2. Intake air duct to vacuum gallery vacuum gallery vacuum gallery
Refer to “System Diagram”, EC-287 for vacuum control system.
EC-288
SYSTEM GENERAL - YD
System Chart

I Electronic control fuel injection pump Electronic control fuel injection
Fuel injection control
I Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) pump
I Engine coolant temperature sensor MA
I Accelerator position sensor Electronic control fuel injection
Fuel injection timing control
I Accelerator position switch pump
I Accelerator switch (F/C) Electronic control fuel injection
EM
I Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch Fuel cut control
pump
I Ignition switch
I Battery voltage Glow control system Glow relay & glow lamp LC
I Air conditioner switch On board diagnostic system MIL (On the instrument panel)
EGR volume control valve &
I Stop lamp switch EGR volume control
throttle control solenoid valve
Cooling fan control Cooling fan relay FE

Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-289
DESCRIPTION GENERAL - YD
Fuel Injection Control System

Three types of fuel injection control are provided to accommodate engine operating conditions; normal control,
idle control and start control. The ECM determines the appropriate fuel injection control. Under each control,
the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance.
Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and electronic control fuel injection pump (control unit is built-in).
The fuel injection pump control unit performs duty control on the spill valve (built into the fuel injection pump)
according to the input signals to compensate the amount of fuel injected to the preset value.
Start Control NJEC1030S02
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator

Fuel injection
Electronic control fuel
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed control (start
injection pump
control)
SEF648S
When the ECM receives a start signal from the ignition switch, the ECM adapts the fuel injection system for
the start control. The amount of fuel injected at engine starting is a preset program value in the ECM. The
program is determined by the engine speed and engine coolant temperature.
For better startability under cool engine conditions, the lower the coolant temperature becomes, the greater
the amount of fuel injected. The ECM ends the start control when the engine speed reaches the specific value,
and shifts the control to the normal or idle control.
Idle Control NJEC1030S03
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed
Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position

Fuel injection
Battery Battery voltage control (Idle
injection pump
control)
Accelerator position switch Idle position
When the ECM determines that the engine speed is at idle, the fuel injection system is adapted for the idle
control. The ECM regulates the amount of fuel injected corresponding to changes in load applied to the engine
to keep engine speed constant. The ECM also provides the system with a fast idle control in response to the
engine coolant temperature signal.
EC-290
Fuel Injection Control System (Cont’d)
Normal Control NJEC1030S04
GI

Fuel injection MA
Accelerator position sensor Accelerator position control (Normal
injection pump
control)
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed EM
LC
FE
SEF649S CL
The amount of fuel injected under normal driving conditions is determined according to sensor signals. The
crankshaft position sensor (TDC) detects engine speed and the accelerator position sensor detects accelera- MT
tor position. These sensors send signals to the ECM.
The fuel injection data, predetermined by correlation between various engine speeds and accelerator positions,
are stored in the ECM memory, forming a map. The ECM determines the optimal amount of fuel to be injected AT
using the sensor signals in comparison with the map.
Maximum Amount Control NJEC1030S05
AX
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator SU

Fuel injection BR
Engine coolnat temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature control (Maxi- Electronic control fuel
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed mum amount injection pump
control)
Accelerator position sensor Accelerator position
ST
The maximum injection amount is controlled to an optimum by the engine speed, intake air amount, engine
coolant temperature, and accelerator opening in accordance with the driving conditions. RS
This prevents the oversupply of the injection amount caused by decreased air density at a high altitude or
during a system failure.
BT
Deceleration Control NJEC1030S06
HA
Accelerator switch (F/C) Accelerator position Fuel injection

Electronic control fuel SC
control (Decel-
injection pump
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed eration control)
EL
The ECM sends a fuel cut signal to the electronic control fuel injection pump during deceleration for better
fuel efficiency. The ECM determines the time of deceleration according to signals from the accelerator switch
(F/C) and crankshaft position sensor (TDC). IDX
EC-291
Fuel Injection Timing Control System
Fuel Injection Timing Control System

The target fuel injection timing in accordance with the engine speed and the fuel injection amount are recorded
as a map in the ECM beforehand. The ECM and the injection pump control unit exchange signals and per-
form feedback control for optimum injection timing in accordance with the map.
Air Conditioning Cut Control
Accelerator position sensor Accelerator valve opening angle Air conditioner

Air conditioner relay
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed cut control

This system improves acceleration when the air conditioner is used.
When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the air conditioner is turned off for a few seconds.
When engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the air conditioner is turned off. This continues
until the engine coolant temperature returns to normal.
speed)
Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
Accelerator position switch or Accelerator Electronic control fuel

Accelerator position Fuel cut control
switch (F/C) injection pump
If the engine speed is above 2,700 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 2,700
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Fuel Injection Control System”,
EC-290.
EC-292
Crankcase Ventilation System

In this system, blow-by gas is sucked into the air inlet pipe after oil
GI
separation by oil separator in the rocker cover.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF319Y
MT
INSPECTION NJEC1035
AT
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any AX
SU
BR
SEC692
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-293
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE GENERAL - YD
Injection Tube and Injection Nozzle

CAUTION:
I Do not disassemble injection nozzle assembly. If NG,
replace injection nozzle assembly.
I Plug flare nut with a cap or rag so that no dust enters the
nozzle. Cover nozzle tip for protection of needle.
JEF339Y
Injection Tube NJEC1036S01

Removal NJEC1036S0101
1. Mark the cylinder Nos. to the injection tubes, then disconnect
them.
I Marking should be made at proper locations and by the
proper method, so that they are not erased by fuel, etc.
2. Remove the clamps, then disconnect the tubes one by one.
I The intake manifold is removed for explanation in the figure.
JEF340Y
EC-294
Injection Tube and Injection Nozzle (Cont’d)
Installation NJEC1036S0102
1. Referring to the figure and the marking which were made for
installation, connect the injection tubes to all the cylinders. GI
2. Connect temporarily the tubes to the cylinder head side only
by screwing 2 to 3 turns. Make sure that all tubes can be con-
nected to the pump side also. MA
3. Then, tighten the flare nuts of the cylinder head side and pump
side, starting from the opposite side from you.
EM
JEF341Y LC
4. Attach the injection tube clamp in the direction shown in the
figure.
5. Insert tightening bolts of the clamp (4-tube type) from the rear
to the front of the engine.
FE
CL
JEF342Y
MT
Injection Nozzle Oil Seal NJEC1036S02
AT
Using a tool such as a flat-bladed screwdriver, pry the flange of the
seal, then remove it.
Installation
AX
NJEC1036S0202
1. After the high-pressure injection nozzle assembly is installed,
push the seal from the cylinder head side until it contacts the SU
flange.
2. Make sure that the garter spring of the seal on the high-pres-
sure injection nozzle assembly side is not falling. BR
JEF343Y
I Replace the oil seal with new one when the high-pressure
injection nozzle assembly is removed. (It is not necessary
to replace the oil seal when only injection tubes are ST
removed.)
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-295
Spill Tube NJEC1036S03
Loosen and remove the mounting bolts and flare nuts in the
reverse order of the numbers in the figure.
I When the flare nuts are loosened, hold the head of hexagonal
retaining bolts (head inside) using a wrench.
1. Tighten the flare nuts and mounting bolts in the numerical
order shown in the figure.
I When the flare nuts are tightened, hold the head of the hex-
agonal retaining bolts (head inside) using a wrench.
2. To prevent interference with the rocker cover, place the spill
gasket joint within the range shown by the arrow, then tighten
the mounting bolts. (Be especially careful about No. 2 and 4
cylinders.)
I After the spill tube is installed, check the airtightness of
the spill tube.
I After the bolts are tightened, the joint of the spill tube gasket
might be broken. However, this will not affect function.
JEF344Y
High Pressure Injection Nozzle Assembly NJEC1036S04

1. Remove the nozzle support, then pull out the high-pressure
injection nozzle assembly by turning it clockwise/
counterclockwise.
2. Using a tool such as a flat-head screwdriver, remove the cop-
per washer inside the cylinder head.
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the high-pressure injection nozzle.
JEF345Y
1. Insert the nozzle gasket to the cylinder head hole.
2. Attach the O-ring to the mounting groove of the nozzle side,
then insert it in the cylinder head.
TEST AND ADJUSTMENT NJEC1037

WARNING:
When using nozzle tester, be careful not to allow diesel fuel
sprayed from nozzle to contact your hands or body, and make
sure your eyes are properly protected with goggles.
EC-296
Inspection for Spill Tube Airtightness NJEC1037S01
Before the rocker cover is installed, perform the inspection as fol-
lows. GI
1. Connect the handy vacuum pump to the spill hose.
2. Check that the airtightness is maintained after the negative
pressure shown below is applied.
MA
Standard:
–53.3 to –66.7 kPa (–533 to –889 mbar, –400 to –500 EM
mmHg, –15.75 to –19.69 inHg)
JEF346Y LC
Air Bleeding of Fuel Piping NJEC1037S02
After the repair, bleed air in the piping by pumping the priming
pump up and down until it becomes heavy.
FE
CL
JEF347Y
MT
Injection Pressure Test NJEC1037S03
1. Install injection nozzle assembly to injection nozzle tester and AT
bleed air from flare nut.
AX
SU
BR
JEF348Y
2. Pump the tester handle slowly (one time per second) and
watch the pressure gauge. ST
3. Read the pressure gauge when the injection pressure just
starts dropping.
RS
Initial injection pressure:
Used
18,045 kPa (142.2 bar, 184 kg/cm2, 2,616 psi) BT
New
18,633 - 20,595 kPa (186.3 - 205.9 bar, 190 - 210
kg/cm2, 2,702 - 2,986 psi)
HA
Limit
16,182 kPa (161.8 bar, 165 kg/cm2, 2,218 psi) SC
I The injection nozzle assembly has a 2-stage pressure injection
function. However, the judgement should be made at the first
stage of the valve opening pressure. EL
Always check initial injection pressure using a new nozzle.
IDX
EC-297
Leakage Test NJEC1037S04
1. Maintain the pressure at about 981 to 1,961 kPa (9.8 to 19.6
bar, 10 to 20 kg/cm2, 142 to 284 psi) below initial injection
pressure.
2. Check that there is no dripping from the nozzle tip or around
the body.
SEF674A
3. If there is leakage, replace injection nozzle assembly.
Spray Pattern Test NJEC1037S05

1. Check spray pattern by pumping tester handle one full stroke
per second.
NG spray pattern:
Does not inject straight and strong (B in the figure).
Fuel drips (C in the figure).
Does not inject evenly (D in the figure).
2. If the spray pattern is not correct, replace injection nozzle
assembly.
JEF349Y
EC-298
Electronic Control Fuel Injection Pump

GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
JEF350Y
SU
REMOVAL NJEC1039
1. Remove the parts shown below.
I Engine hood
BR
I Engine coolant (drain)
I Engine cover ST
I Heater pipe under intake manifold
I Injection tubes
I Right splash cover (with undercover)
RS
I Right front wheel
BT
HA
2. Disconnect the fuel hoses from the fuel injection pump. SC

3. Disconnect the harness connector from the fuel injection
pump.
I Disconnect the connector by pulling the connector stopper EL
fully.
I When the stopper is fully pulled, the connector will be discon-
nected together. For installation, push the connector half way IDX
first, then press the stopper until it locks, so that the connec-
tor is connected together.
4. Remove the fuel injection pump rear bracket.
JEF351Y
EC-299
Electronic Control Fuel Injection Pump (Cont’d)
5. Remove the front chain case.
I Move the power steering fluid reservoir tank from the bracket.
I Loosen and remove the mounting bolts in the reverse order of
the numbers shown in the figure.
I As for bolts 6, 10, and 11, remove with rubber washer because
there is not enough space for removing only the bolts.
CAUTION:
To prevent foreign objects from getting in the engine, cover
the opening during the removal of the front chain case.
JEF352Y
6. Adjust the No. 1 cylinder to the top dead center position.

I Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise, then align the alignment
mark (punched mark) of the camshaft sprocket to the position
shown in the figure.
I There is no indicator on the crankshaft pulley.
I It is not necessary to mark the secondary timing chain for
removal because it can be matched by the link color for instal-
lation. However, the alignment mark on the fuel injection pump
sprocket is difficult to see; mark it if necessary.
JEF353Y
7. Remove the chain tensioner.

a. Push the plunger of the chain tensioner, then fix it with a tool
such as a push pin.
JEF354Y
b. Using the hexagon wrench (face to face: 5 mm) (SST), remove

the mounting bolts, then remove the chain tensioner.
I A multi-purpose tool may also be used.
JEF355Y
8. Remove the timing chain slack guide.

I Using the hexagon wrench (face to face: 6 mm, short-type)
(SST), remove the mounting bolts, then remove the timing
chain slack guide.
JEF356Y
EC-300
9. Remove the timing chain tension guide.
10. Remove the secondary timing chain.
I Only the timing chain can be removed without removing the GI
sprockets.
MA
EM
JEF357Y LC
11. Fix the fuel injection pump sprocket.
a. Insert the positioning stopper pin (SST) in the 6 mm (0.24 in)
dia. hole of the fuel injection pump sprocket.
b. Using the torx wrench (SST), turn the pump shaft gradually to
adjust the hole position of the fuel injection pump sprocket. FE
c. Insert the positioning stopper pin through the fuel injection
pump body to fix the sprocket.
CL
JEF358Y
MT
I Insert the positioning stopper pin until its flange contacts the
fuel injection pump sprocket. AT
d. Remove the torx wrench (SST).
AX
SU
BR
JEF359Y
12. Using the hexagon wrench (face to face: 6 mm, long-type)

(SST), remove the mounting bolts of the fuel injection pump ST
sprocket.
I It is not necessary to remove the washer of the fuel injection
pump sprocket.
RS
BT
HA
JEF360Y
SC
EL
IDX
JEF361Y
EC-301
13. Using the sprocket holder (SST), hold the fuel injection pump
sprocket to prevent falling.
I When the sprocket holder is installed, if the positioning stop-
per pin interferes, pull out the stopper pin approximately 10
mm (0.39 in), then install it.
I After the sprocket holder is installed temporarily, insert the
extension bar (SST) and Torx socket in the three holes A. After
positioning the holes, tighten the holder mounting bolts. (Refer
to the step 14 about the tool.)
I The length of the sprocket holder mounting bolts should be
JEF362Y
approximately 15 mm (0.59 in) (M6 thread length).
I Make sure that the a- and b-faces of the sprocket holder con-
tact the bottom side of the sprocket (0.59 in) (small diameter
side).
CAUTION:
Do not remove the sprocket holder until the fuel injection
pump is installed.
I After the sprocket holder is installed, pull out the positioning
stopper pin (SST) from the fuel injection pump sprocket.
JEF363Y
14. Using the extension bar [SST: whole length 43 mm (1.69 in)]
and the Torx socket (Q6-E12: commercially available), remove
the mounting bolts, them remove the fuel injection pump
toward the rear of the engine.
I Even after all the mounting bolts are removed, the fuel injec-
tion pump is still held by a dowel pin.
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble or adjust the fuel injection pump.
JEF364Y
15. Remove the fuel injection pump mounting bolts.

I The seal washer of the mounting bolts cannot be reused.
CAUTION:
For removal, be careful not to drop the seal washer into the
engine.
JEF365Y
INSTALLATION NJEC1040
I It is not necessary to adjust the injection timing by changing the
installation angle which used to be performed with conven-
tional fuel injection pumps. The installation position can be
simply decided by the dowel pin and the mounting bolts.
1. Before the fuel injection pump is installed, check that the notch
of its flange and the 6 mm (0.24 in) dia. hole on the body are
aligned.
JEF366Y
EC-302
2. Insert the fuel injection pump to the mounting position from the
rear of the engine.
I Adjust the fuel injection pump bracket position to the dowel pin, GI
then install it.
MA
EM
JEF367Y LC
3. Using the extension bar (SST) and the Torx socket, tighten the
mounting bolts of the fuel injection pump.
4. Remove the sprocket holder (SST).
FE
CL
JEF364Y
MT
5. Using the torx wrench (SST), turn the pump shaft gradually to
adjust the position of the flange. Then, insert the positioning AT
stopper pin (SST) to the 6 mm (0.24 in) dia. hole of the fuel
injection pump sprocket through the pump flange and the
pump body. AX
6. Remove the torx wrench (SST).
SU
BR
JEF358Y

(SST), tighten the sprocket mounting bolt. ST
I When the washer of the fuel injection pump sprocket is
removed, install it with the marking “F” (front) facing the front
of the engine.
RS
8. Pull out the positioning stopper pin (SST).
BT
HA
JEF360Y
SC
EL
IDX
EC-303
9. Install the secondary timing chain.
I Align the alignment marks of the sprockets and those of the
chain, then install it.
I The figure shows the installation state and names of the sec-
ondary timing chain and other related parts.
10. Install timing chain tension guide.
I The upper installation bolt is longer than the lower.
JEF368Y
11. Using a hexagon wrench (face to face: 6 mm, short-type)

(SST), install the timing chain slack guide.
JEF356Y
12. Install the chain tensioner.

a. Push the plunger of the chain tensioner, then hold it with a tool
such as a push pin, and install it.
b. Using a hexagon wrench (face to face: 5 mm) (SST), tighten
the mounting bolts.
I Installation is possible by a multi-purpose tool also.
c. Pull out the tool such as a push pin which holds the plunger.
I Make sure that the alignment marks of the sprockets and
timing chain are aligned.
JEF355Y
13. Install the front chain case.

a. Install the tension guide to the back side of the front chain
case.
I If the front chain case is tilted, the tension guide may fall off.
Therefore, when installing the front chain case, hold it verti-
cally.
JEF369Y
EC-304
b. Apply Three Bond 1207C (KP510 00150) to both ends of the
arch area of the oil pump (contact surface of rear chain case)
as shown in the figure. GI
c. Install the front chain case.
I Align the dowel pin of the oil pump case to the pin hole, then
install it. MA
I Install bolts 6, 10, and 11 (shown in the figure) with the rubber
washer to the front chain case.
EM
JEF370Y LC
d. Tighten the mounting bolts in the numerical order shown in the
figure.
e. After all bolts are tightened, tighten the mounting bolts in the
numerical order shown in the figure again.
14. Install the fuel injection pump rear bracket. FE
I Tighten all the bolts temporarily, then tighten them securely
with the mounting face securely contacting the fuel injection
pump and the pump bracket. CL
JEF352Y
MT
15. Connect the fuel injection pump harness connector.
I Insert the harness connector securely until the stopper locks. AT
I Push the connector half way first, then press the stopper until
it locks, so that the connector is connected together.
AX
SU
BR
JEF351Y
16. Connect the fuel hoses.

I When the hoses are disconnected at the fuel gallery side,
ST
insert until the hoses contact the valve, then install the clamp
securely.
RS
17. Install other parts in the reverse order of removal.
BT
HA
Fuel Filter SC
A water draining cock is on the lower side and a priming pump for EL
bleeding air is on the upper side.
IDX
EC-305
Fuel Filter (Cont’d)
AIR BLEEDING NJEC1042
Pump the priming pump to bleed air.
I When air is bled completely, the pumping of the priming
pump suddenly becomes heavy. Stop the operation at that
time.
I If it is difficult to bleed air by the pumping of the priming
pump (the pumping of the priming pump does not become
heavy), disconnect the fuel supply hose between the fuel
filter and the injection pump. Then, perform the operation
described above, and make sure that fuel comes out. (Use
SEF375Y a pan, etc. so as not to spill fuel. Do not let fuel get on
engine and other parts.) After that, connect the hose, then
bleed air again.
WATER DRAINING NJEC1043
I If the MIL lights up (not flashes) during the engine operation,
drain the water as follows.
1. Remove the fuel filter, filter bracket, protector assembly from
the dash panel as follows.
a. Remove the air cleaner case (upper), air duct assembly, and
vacuum hose for brake booster (between the vacuum pump
and vacuum pipe).
CAUTION:
After the duct is removed, cover the opening with gum tape,
etc. to prevent foreign object from getting into the engine
during the operation.
b. Disconnect the water level warning sensor harness connector.
c. Remove the mounting nuts on the dash panel, then remove the
fuel filter, filter bracket, and protector assembly from the dash
panel.
I It is not necessary to disconnect the fuel hose.
2. Using a tool such as a pliers, loosen the water draining cock
at the bottom of the water level warning sensor located under
the fuel filter.
3. Install the fuel filter, filter bracket, and protector assembly tem-
porarily. Then, drain the water by pumping the priming pump
with the filter standing straight.
I Extend the drain hose if necessary.
Water amount when the MIL lights up:
65 - 100 m (2.1 - 3.5 Imp fl oz)
CAUTION:
When the water is drained, the fuel is also drained. Use a pan,
etc. to avoid fuel adherence to the rubber parts such as the
engine mount insulator.
JEF377Y 4. Tighten the water draining cock, then install the fuel filter, filter
bracket, protector assembly in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not over-tighten the water draining cock. This will damage
the cock thread, resulting in water or fuel leak.
5. Bleed air of the fuel filter. Refer to EC-306.
6. Start the engine, then check that the MIL goes off.
EC-306
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION GENERAL - YD
DTC and MIL Detection Logic
DTC and MIL Detection Logic NJEC1044

When a malfunction is detected, the malfunction (DTC) is stored in the ECM memory.
The MIL will light up each time the ECM detects malfunction. For diagnostic items causing the MIL to light up, GI
MA
The DTC can be read by the following methods. EM
Without CONSULT-II
ECM displays the DTC by a set of four digit numbers with MIL illumination in the diagnostic test mode II (Self-
diagnostic results). Example: 0100, 0115, 0340, 1335, etc. LC
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. Examples: “CRANK POS SEN (TDC)”, etc.
I Output of the trouble code means that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in the Mode
II it does not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or occurred in the past and returned
to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. FE
HOW TO ERASE DTC NJEC1045S02
How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II) NJEC1045S0201
CL
2. Touch “ENGINE”. MT
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF371Y HA
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. SC
How to Erase DTC ( Without CONSULT-II) NJEC1045S0202
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least EL
2. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by using the data link connector. (See EC-309.)
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by changing the diagnostic test mode. IDX
24 hours.
switching the diagnostic test mode using the data link connector.
EC-307

SAT652J
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.

1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
I If the MIL does not light up, refer to EL-226, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-496.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.
If MIL illuminates or blinks irregularly after starting engine, water may have accumulated in fuel filter.
Drain water from fuel filter. Refer to “WATER DRAINING”, EC-306.
The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions.
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
ON position open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit. (See
EC-496.)
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When ECM detects a
WARNING malfunction, the MIL will light up to inform the driver that
a malfunction has been detected.
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS This function allows DTCs to be read.
ON position
Engine stopped
EC-308
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF372Y
*1: EC-496 *2: EC-308 *3: EC-496 IDX
EC-309
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Bulb Check NJEC1046S03
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to EL-226,
“WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-496.
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected or the ECM’s CPU is malfunctioning.
OFF No malfunction.

In this mode, DTC is indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
SEF298QA
SEF162PB
Long (0.6 second) blinking indicates the two LH digits of number and short (0.3 second) blinking indicates the
two RH digits of number. For example, the MIL blinks 10 times for 6 seconds (0.6 sec x 10 times) and then it
blinks three times for about 1 second (0.3 sec x 3 times). This indicates the DTC “1003”.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC “0505” refers to no
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) NJEC1046S06
Diagnostic Test Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I. (Refer to “How to Switch Diagnostic Test Modes”, EC-309.)
I If the battery terminal is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24
hours.
EC-310
Relationship Between MIL, DTC, CONSULT-II and Driving Patterns NJEC1046S07
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEC946C
HA
*1: When a malfunction is detected, *4: The DTC will not be displayed any NOSTIC RESULTS & DATA
MIL will light up. longer after vehicle is driven 40 MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) cannot
*2: MIL will not light up after ignition times without the same malfunc- display the malfunction. DATA SC
switch is turned OFF. tion. (The DTC still remain in MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) can dis-
*3: When a malfunction is detected ECM.) play the malfunction at the
for the first time, the DTC will be *5: Other screens except SELF-DIAG- moment it is detected. EL
stored in ECM.
IDX
EC-311
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II NJEC1047
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE NJEC1047S01
(Data link connector is located under the driver side dash
panel.)
SEF378Y

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual.
SEF995X
SEF320Y
EC-312
SYSTEMS APPLICATION =NJEC1047S02
GI
Item SELF-DIAG DATA MONI-
RESULTS TOR
ACTIVE TEST MA
Engine coolant temperature sensor X X
Vehicle speed sensor X X

EM
Accelerator position sensor X X X
LC
Accelerator position switch X
Accelerator switch (F/C) X
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) X X

INPUT
FE
Battery voltage X
CL
Mass air flow sensor X X MT

Stop lamp switch X X
Glow relay X X AT
EGR volume control valve & throttle control solenoid
X X
OUTPUT valve
AX
Cooling fan relay X X X

SU
X: Applicable
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE NJEC1047S03 BR

Regarding items detected in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode,
DATA MONITOR MODE ST
NJEC1047S04
Monitored item ECM

[Unit] input
Main
Description Remarks RS
signals
signals
CKPS·RPM (TDC) I The engine speed computed from the BT

[rpm] q q crankshaft position sensor (TDC) signal
is displayed.
CMPS·RPM·PUMP I The engine speed computed from the HA

[rpm] q q pulse signal sent from electronic control
fuel injection pump is displayed.
SC
COOLAN TEMP/S I The engine coolant temperature (deter- I When the engine coolant temperature
[°C] or [°F] mined by the signal voltage of the sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM
q q engine coolant temperature sensor) is enters fail-safe mode. The engine cool-
displayed. ant temperature determined by the ECM
EL
is displayed.
VHCL SPEED SE I The vehicle speed computed from the IDX

[km/h] or [mph] q q vehicle speed sensor signal is dis-
played.
EC-313
Monitored item ECM

Main
[Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
FUEL TEMP SEN I The fuel temperature (sent from elec-

[°C] or [°F] q q tronic control fuel injection pump) is dis-
played.
ACCEL POS SEN I The accelerator position sensor signal

q q
[V] voltage is displayed.
FULL ACCEL SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the

q q
[ON/OFF] accelerator position switch signal.
ACCEL SW (FC) I Indicates [OPEN/CLOSE] condition from

q q
[OPEN/CLOSE] the accelerator switch (FC) signal.
OFF ACCEL SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the

q q
SPILL/V [°CA] I The control position of spill valve (sent

q from electronic control fuel injection
pump) is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT [V] I The power supply voltage of ECM is

q q
displayed.
P/N POSI SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the

q q
[ON/OFF] park/neutral position switch signal.
START SIGNAL I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the I After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
q q
[ON/OFF] starter signal. played regardless of the starter signal.
AIR COND SIG I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air

[ON/OFF] q q conditioner switch as determined by the
air conditioner signal.
BRAKE SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the

q q
[ON/OFF] stop lamp switch signal.
IGN SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-

q q
[ON/OFF] tion switch signal.
MAS AIR/FL SE [V] I The signal voltage of the mass air flow I When the engine is stopped, a certain
q q
sensor is displayed. value is indicated.
INJ TIMG C/V [%] I The duty ratio of fuel injection timing
q control valve (sent from electronic con-
trol fuel injection pump) is displayed.
DECELER F/CUT I The [ON/OFF] condition from decelera-

[ON/OFF] q tion fuel cut signal (sent from electronic
control fuel injection pump) is displayed.
AIR COND RLY I Indicates the control condition of the air

[ON/OFF] q conditioner relay (determined by ECM
according to the input signals).
GLOW RLY I The glow relay control condition (deter-

[ON/OFF] q mined by ECM according to the input
signal) is displayed.
COOLING FAN I Indicates the control condition of the

[LOW/HI/OFF] cooling fans (determined by ECM
according to the input signal).
q
I LOW ... Operates at low speed.
HI ... Operates at high speed.
OFF ... Stopped.
EC-314
Monitored item ECM

Main
signals
signals GI
BARO SEN [kPa] I The barometric pressure (determined by
the signal voltage from the barometric MA
q
pressure sensor built into the ECM) is
displayed.
EGR VOL CON/V I Indicates the EGR volume control value EM

[step] computed by the ECM according to the
q input signals.
I The opening becomes larger as the LC
value increases.
THROT RLY A I The control condition of the throttle con-

[ON/OFF] trol solenoid valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signal) is indi-
cated.
q FE
I OFF ... Throttle control solenoid valve is
not operating.
ON ... Throttle control solenoid valve is
operating. CL
NOTE:
MT
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) AT

I Operate the cooling fan at Cooling fan moves at “LOW”, “HI”
COOLING FAN* I Cooling fan motor AX
“LOW”, “HI” speed and turn speed and stops.
I Cooling fan relay
“OFF” using CONSULT-II.
OFF ACCEL PO I Clears the self-learning fully closed accelerator position, detected by accelerator position sensor, from the SU
SIG ECM.
EGR VOL I Change EGR volume control EGR volume control valve makes I Harness and connector BR
CONT/V valve opening step using CON- an operating sound. I EGR volume control valve
SULT-II.
ST
THL CONT/SOL-V I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector
A “OFF” with the CONSULT-II and sound. I Solenoid valve
listen to operating sound. RS
I Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
Glow relay makes the operating I Harness and connector BT
GLOW RLY I Turn the glow relay “ON” and
sound. I Glow relay
“OFF” using CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound. HA
trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see I Electronic control fuel injection
INJ TIMING SC
I Retard the injection timing using CHECK ITEM. pump
CONSULT-II.
*: Leaving cooling fan “OFF” with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat. EL
IDX
EC-315
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODENJEC1047S06
real time.
In other words, DTC will be displayed if the malfunction is
detected by ECM.
in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ...
SEF373Y xx%” as shown at left, and the data after the malfunction detec-
MANUAL.
I DTC will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT-II screen
even though a malfunction is detected by ECM.
SEF707X DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
1) “AUTO TRIG”
I While trying to detect the DTC by performing the “DTC Confir-
moment it is detected.
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction
is found the DTC will be displayed. Refer to GI-23, “Incident
Simulation Tests”.
2) “MANU TRIG”
“MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data
EC-316
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF720X
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-317
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION GENERAL - YD
Introduction
injection control, fuel injection timing control, glow control system,
etc. The ECM accepts input signals from sensors and instantly
drives electronic control fuel injection pump. It is essential that both
input and output signals are proper and stable. At the same time,
it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks,
or other malfunctions with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs inter-
mittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
SEF858S
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
formed. Follow the “Work Flow”, EC-320.
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” malfunctions first.
SEF233G
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
cally controlled engine vehicle.
SEF234G

troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one shown below in order to
organize all the information for troubleshooting.
SEF907L
EC-318
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
MTBL0397
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-319
Work Flow
Work Flow NJEC1049
SEF374Y
*1 EC-306 *3 If the incident cannot be verified, Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

*2 If time data of “SELF-DIAG perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY”, EC-347.
RESULTS” is other than “0”, per- FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, *5 If malfunctioning part cannot be
form “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS EC-346. detected, perform “TROUBLE
FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, *4 If the on board diagnostic system DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
EC-346. cannot be performed, check main TENT INCIDENT”, EC-346.
power supply and ground circuit.
EC-320
STEP DESCRIPTION GI
STEP I
the “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET”, EC-318.
MA
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II) the DTC, then erase the
DTC. Refer to EC-307.
STEP II If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-346. EM
“Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. Refer to EC-327.) Also check related service bulletins for information.
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs. LC
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA
STEP III MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-346.
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read the DTC
by using CONSULT-II. FE
During the DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)
STEP IV CL
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the DTC detection. MT
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XXXX.
STEP V
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the Basic Inspection, EC-322. Then perform inspections according to AT
the Symptom Matrix Chart. Refer to EC-327.
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. AX
(AUTO TRIG)” mode. SU
SULT-II. Refer to EC-340 or EC-337.
STEP VI
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to GI-25, “Circuit
BR
Inspection”.
If the malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT ST
INCIDENT”, EC-346.
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions RS
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code (DTC No. 0505) is detected. If the inci-
STEP VII
dent is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method from the previous one.
BT
(Refer to EC-307.)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-321
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION GENERAL - YD
Basic Inspection

Precaution:
loads applied;
I Rear defogger switch is OFF,
1 INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction.
2. Check the current need for scheduled maintenance, especially for fuel filter and air cleaner filter. Refer to MA-4, “Peri-
odic Maintenance (Except for Europe)”.
I Harness connectors for improper connections
I Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, or improper connections
I Wiring for improper connections, pinches, or cuts
SEF142I
4. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
© GO TO 2.
2 PREPARATION FOR CHECKING IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-II
Connect CONSULT-II to the data link connector.
Without CONSULT-II
Install diesel tacho tester to the vehicle.
© GO TO 3.
EC-322
3 CHECK IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-II GI
1. Select “CKPS·RPM (TDC)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Read idle speed.
MA
EM
LC
SEF817Y
FE
Without CONSULT-II
Check idle speed.
725±25 rpm CL
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END MT
NG © GO TO 4.
AT
4 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
SU
BR
5 BLEED AIR FROM FUEL SYSTEM
1. Stop engine.
2. Using priming pump, bleed air from fuel system. Refer to “AIR BLEEDING”, EC-306. ST
© GO TO 6.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-323
6 CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN

With CONSULT-II
3. Read idle speed.
SEF817Y
Without CONSULT-II
725±25 rpm
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 7.
7 DRIN WATER FROM FUEL FILTER

© GO TO 8.

With CONSULT-II
3. Read idle speed.
SEF817Y
Without CONSULT-II
725±25 rpm
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 9.
EC-324
9 CHECK AIR CLEANER FILTER

Check air cleaner filter for clogging or breaks. GI
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. MA
NG © Replace air cleaner filter.
EM
10 CHECK FUEL INJECTION NOZZLE
Check fuel injection nozzle opening pressure. Refer to “Injection Pressure Test”, EC-297.
LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace fuel injection nozzle assembly.
11 CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN FE

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle. CL
3. Read idle speed.
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEF817Y
BR
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check idle speed. ST
725±25 rpm
OK or NG
RS
NG © GO TO 12.
BT
12 CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-92, “MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE”.
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13. SC
NG © Follow the instruction of “MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE”.
EL
IDX
EC-325

With CONSULT-II
3. Read idle speed.
SEF817Y
Without CONSULT-II
725±25 rpm
OK or NG
NG © Replace electronic control fuel injection pump.
EC-326
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION GENERAL - YD
SYMPTOM GI
HARD/NO START/RESTART
MA
EM
ENGINE STALL
(EXCP. HA)
LC
HARD TO START WHEN ENGINE IS COLD
HARD TO START WHEN ENGINE IS HOT

SYSTEM — Basic engine
control system
FE
NO START (without first firing)
Feature of symptom, Check point

CL
NO START (with first firing)
WHEN DECELERATING
POOR ACCELERATION
KNOCK/DETONATION
MT
DURING DRIVING
LACK OF POWER
Reference page
AT
LOW IDLE
AT IDLE
HI IDLE
AX
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF
Electronic control fuel injec-

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 3 4 — *1
SU
tion pump mainframe
Injection nozzle 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 EC-294 *2

BR
Glow system 1 1 1 1 EC-456
Engine body 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 EM section *3 ST

EGR system 3 3 EC-465
Air cleaner and ducts 3 3 MA section *4 RS

*1: Fuel injection system malfunction or fuel injection timing control system malfunction may be the cause.
BT
*2: Depends on open-valve pressure and spray pattern.
*3: Caused mainly by insufficient compression pressure.
*4: Symptom varies depending on off-position of air duct, etc.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-327
SYMPTOM
OVERHEAT/HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
ABNORMAL SMOKE COLOR
DEAD BATTERY (UNDER CHARGE)

Malfunction indicator lamp illuminates.

SYSTEM — Basic engine con-

trol system
Can be detected by CONSULT-II?

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
Reference page
Fuel cut
Warranty symptom code AG AH AJ AK AL AM AP HA
Electronic control fuel injection

4 4 3 4 5 4 3 3 3 — *1
pump mainframe
Injection nozzle 3 3 4 EC-294 *2
Glow system 1 EC-456
Engine body 3 3 3 3 3 3 EM section *3
EGR system 3 EC-465
Air cleaner and ducts 3 3 MA section *4

EC-328
SYMPTOM
GI
MA
ENGINE STALL
EM
(EXCP. HA)
LC

SYSTEM — ENGINE CONTROL system
FE

WHEN DECELERATING
POOR ACCELERATION
CL
KNOCK/DETONATION
DURING DRIVING
LACK OF POWER
MT
Malfunction
Reference page
LOW IDLE
AT IDLE
HI IDLE
AT
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AX

Electronic control fuel injection *a, *b 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 —
pump circuit SU
ENGINE CONTROL
*c, *d
*a, *c 1 1
Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 EC-353
*b BR
Engine coolant temperature sensor
*a, *b 1 1 1 1 EC-359 *1
circuit ST
Vehicle speed sensor circuit *a, *b 1 EC-364
1 - 5: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. RS

*a: Open
*b: Short BT
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise
*1: Compensation according to engine coolant temperature does not function. HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-329
SYMPTOM

Malfunction


ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
Reference page
Fuel cut
Electronic control fuel injection pump *a, *b 1 1

1 1 —
circuit
ENGINE CONTROL
*c, *d 1
*a, *c
*b 1

*a, *b 1 1 1 1 EC-359 *1
circuit

*a: Open
*b: Short
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise
*1: Compensation according to engine coolant temperature does not function.
EC-330
SYMPTOM
GI
MA
ENGINE STALL
EM
(EXCP. HA)
LC

FE

WHEN DECELERATING
POOR ACCELERATION
CL
KNOCK/DETONATION
DURING DRIVING
LACK OF POWER
MT
Malfunction
Reference page
LOW IDLE
AT IDLE
HI IDLE
AT

*a, *b 1
Accelerator switch (FC) circuit EC-486
*c SU
ENGINE CONTROL
*a, *c
Fuel cut system line EC-450
*b 1 1 1 1 *2 BR
Accelerator position sensor circuit *a, *b 1 1 1 EC-392
*a, *b ST
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
EC-399
circuit *d 1 1

RS
*a: Open
BT
*b: Short
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise HA
*2: Engine runs on after turning ignition switch OFF.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-331
SYMPTOM

Malfunction


ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
Reference page
Fuel cut
*a, *b
Accelerator switch (FC) circuit 1 1 EC-486
*c
ENGINE CONTROL
*a, *c 1 1
*b 1 *2
Accelerator position sensor circuit *a, *b 1 1 EC-392
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) *a, *b 1 1

1 1 EC-399
circuit *d

*a: Open
*b: Short
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise
EC-332
SYMPTOM
GI
MA
ENGINE STALL
EM
(EXCP. HA)
LC

FE

WHEN DECELERATING
POOR ACCELERATION
CL
KNOCK/DETONATION
DURING DRIVING
LACK OF POWER
MT
Malfunction
Reference page
LOW IDLE
AT IDLE
HI IDLE
AT

Start signal circuit *a, *b 1 1 EC-477 *3
*a, *b 1 SU
PNP switch circuit EC-491
*c
Accelerator position switch (Idle) *a, *c 1 1 1 BR

EC-480
circuit
ENGINE CONTROL
*b 1 1 1 *4
Accelerator position switch (Full) ST

*a, *b 1 1 1 EC-480
circuit
*a 1 1 1 1 RS
Ignition switch circuit EC-347
*b *5
*a BT
Power supply for ECM circuit EC-347
*b
Throttle control solenoid valve cir- *a, *b *6 HA

EC-465
cuit *c 1 1 *7
1 - 5: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. SC

*a: Open
*b: Short
EL
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise
*3: Start control does not function.
IDX
*4: Accelerator position sensor NG signal is output.
*5: Engine does not stop.
*6: Does not operate.
*7: Does not stop operating.
EC-333
SYMPTOM

Malfunction


ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
Reference page
Fuel cut
Start signal circuit *a, *b EC-477 *3
*a, *b
PNP switch circuit 1 1 EC-491
*c
Accelerator position switch (Idle) cir- *a, *c

EC-480
cuit
ENGINE CONTROL
*b 1 1 *4
Accelerator position switch (Full) cir-

*a, *b 1 1 EC-480
cuit
*a
*b *5
*a 1
Power supply for ECM circuit 1 1 EC-347
*b
*a, *b *6
Throttle control solenoid valve circuit EC-465
*c 1 *7

*a: Open
*b: Short
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise
*6: Does not operate.
EC-334
SYMPTOM
GI
START/RESTART
ENGINE STALL
(EXCP. HA)
HARD/NO
MA
EM

LC

WHEN DECELERATING
POOR ACCELERATION
KNOCK/DETONATION
FE
DURING DRIVING
LACK OF POWER
CL
Malfunction
Reference page
LOW IDLE
AT IDLE
HI IDLE
MT
AT
*a, *b
EGR volume control valve circuit EC-465
*c *8
AX
*a 1 1 1 1 *9
Glow relay circuit EC-456
*b *10
SU
ENGINE CONTROL
*a 1 1 1
ECM relay (Self-shutoff) circuit EC-347
*b *11
BR
EC-384,
ECM, Connector circuit *a, *b 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
438
ST
*a *12
Air conditioner relay circuit EC-495
*b *13
RS
*a, *c *13
Air conditioner switch circuit EC-495
*b *14
BT
*a: Open HA
*b: Short
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise SC
*9: Glow lamp does not turn on.
*10: Glow lamp does not turn off. EL
*11: Ground short makes engine unable to stop.
*12: Air conditioner does not operate.
*13: Air conditioner does not stop operating. IDX
*14: Air conditioner does not work.
EC-335
SYMPTOM

Malfunction


ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
Reference page
Fuel cut
*a, *b
*c 1 *8
*a 1 *9
*b *10
ENGINE CONTROL
*a 1
*b 1 1 *11
EC-384,
ECM, Connector circuit *a, *b 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
438
*a *12
*b *13
*a, *c *13
*b *14

*a: Open
*b: Short
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise
*10: Glow lamp does not turn off.
*13: Air conditioner does not stop operating.
EC-336

Mode
Remarks:
NJEC1052
GI
MA
EM
CKPS·RPM (TDC) I Tachometer: Connect
Almost the same speed as the
CMPS·RPM- I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II value.
PUMP value. LC
I Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
CONSULT-II value CONSULT-II value
FUEL TEMP SEN I Engine: After warming up More than 40°C (104°F) FE
I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: fully released 0.40 - 0.60V
ACCEL POS SEN
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: fully depressed Approx. 4.5V CL
I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: fully depressed ON
FULL ACCEL SW
(Engine stopped) Except above OFF MT
I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: fully released CLOSE
ACCEL SW (FC)
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: slightly open OPEN AT
I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: fully released ON
OFF ACCEL SW AX
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: slightly open OFF
SPILL/V I Engine: After warming up Approx. 13°CA

SU
Shift lever: Neutral position ON
P/N POSI SW I Ignition switch: ON BR
Except above OFF

ST
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine
(Compressor operates.)
ON RS
IGN SW I Ignition switch: ON , OFF ON , OFF
Brake pedal: depressed ON

BT
BRAKE SW I Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: released OFF
HA
MAS AIR/FL SE Idle 1.6 - 2.0V
I Shift lever: Neutral position
I No-load
SC
INJ TIMG C/V I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. Approx. 50 - 70%
EL
DECELER F/CUT I Engine: After warming up Idle OFF
GLOW RLY I Refer to EC-456.

IDX
I When cooling fan is stopped. OFF
COOLING FAN I When cooling fans operate at low speed. LOW
I When cooling fans operate at high speed. HIGH
EC-337

AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
Altitude
Approx. 0 m: Approx. 100.62 kPa
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi)
Approx. 1,000 m: Approx. 88.95
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
BARO SEN I Ignition switch: ON 12.90 psi)
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)
I Engine: After warming up Idle 1 - 54 step

EGR VOL CON/V
I Shift lever: Neutral position Revving engine from idle to 3,200
0 step
I No-load rpm
I Engine: After warming up Idle ON

THROT RLY A
OFF
I No-load rpm
EC-338
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode

Mode
=NJEC1053
GI
ACCEL POS SEN, “CKPS·RPM (TDC)”, “MAS AIR/FL SE”
Below is the data for “ACCEL POS SEN”, “CKPS·RPM (TDC)” and “MAS AIR/FL SE” when revving engine
NJEC1053S01
MA
quickly up to 3,000 rpm under no load after warming up engine to the normal operating temperature.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF321Y
IDX
EC-339

PREPARATION NJEC1054S01
1. ECM is located on the left side under the cowl panel (behind
the strut tower). For the inspection, perform the following pro-
cedure.
SEF396Y
a. Remove the engine control harness fixing clips.
SEF322Y
b. Remove the ventilation hose.

I To release the lock, push the quick connector.
SEF323Y
c. Remove the ECM cover mounting bolts, then remove the ECM
cover from the vehicle.
: 4.0 - 7.8 N·m (0.4 - 0.8 kg-m, 35 - 69 in-lb)
d. Remove the ECM cover bolts, then open the ECM cover.
: 4.0 - 6.8 N·m (0.4 - 0.7 kg-m, 35 - 60 in-lb)
e. Remove the ECM bolts.
: 4.2 - 6.7 N·m (0.42 - 0.69 kg-m, 37 - 59 in-lb)
f. Install in the reverse order of removal.
SEF324Y
AEC913
EC-340
I Open harness securing clip to make testing easier. GI
MA
EM
MEC486B LC
I Be sure ECM unit is properly grounded before checking.
FE
CL
SEF665S
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF064P
ST
ECM INSPECTION TABLE NJEC1054S03
Remarks: Specification data are reference values and are mea-
sured between each terminal and ground. RS
CAUTION:
BT
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground. HA
TERMI-
WIRE DATA (DC Voltage and Pulse
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR Signal)
NO. SC
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition Approximately 0.1V
I Idle speed
EL
Throttle control solenoid
1 L
valve [Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Warm-up condition
(11 - 14V)
IDX
I Revving engine from idle to 1,500 rpm
EC-341
TERMI-
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR Signal)
NO.

Approximately 0.25V
I For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
4 G ECM relay (Self-shutoff) “OFF”

BATTERY VOLTAGE
I A few seconds passed after turning ignition
(11 - 14V)
switch “OFF”
Approximately 4.8V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
SEF325Y
5 L/OR Tachometer
Approximately 4.6V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
SEF326Y
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0.1V

[Engine is running]
Approximately 0.1V

I Air conditioner switch is “OFF” (11 - 14V)
15 L Air conditioner relay [Engine is running]

I Both air conditioner switch and blower fan
Approximately 0.1V
switch are “ON”
(Compressor is operating)

Approximately 1V
I Glow lamp is “ON”
16 OR Glow lamp
I Glow lamp is “OFF” (11 - 14V)

Approximately 0V
I Brake pedal fully released
17 R/G Stop lamp switch
I Brake pedal depressed (11 - 14V)

18 OR/L [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
lamp
EC-342
TERMI-
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
COLOR Signal) GI
19 L/OR [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with MA
ture sensor

20 B/Y Start signal
EM
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “START”]
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE LC

21 R/L Air conditioner switch [Engine is running]

Approximately 0.1V
switch are “ON”
FE
Approximately 0V
Park/Neutral position I Gear position is “Neutral”
22 G/OR
switch CL
[Ignition switch “ON”] MT

Accelerator position sen- I Accelerator pedal fully released
23 W
sor AT
I Engine stopped Approximately 4.5V
AX
[Engine is running]
SU
I In 1st gear position
I Vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) BR
SEF327Y
26 PU/R Vehicle speed sensor ST
Approximately 2.2V
[Engine is running]
RS
I Vehicle speed is 30 km/h (19 MPH) BT
SEF328Y
HA
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Engine stopped
(11 - 14V)
I Accelerator pedal fully released SC
29 BR/R Accelerator switch (F/C)
EL
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Engine stopped
(11 - 14V)
IDX
Accelerator position I Accelerator pedal fully released
31 Y
switch (Idle) [Ignition switch “ON”]
EC-343
TERMI-
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR Signal)
NO.

Accelerator position I Accelerator pedal released
32 LG
switch (Full) [Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Engine stopped
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
33 G/Y I Warm-up condition Approximately 2.5V
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
35 R Mass air flow sensor I Warm-up condition 1.6 - 2.0V
I Idle speed

38 W/R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
39 B [Engine is running]
ECM ground Approximately 0V
43 B I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
40 PU I Warm-up condition Approximately 2.5V
injection pump
I Idle speed
42 G/R Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
64 G/B Data link connector I Idle speed (CONSULT-II is connected and Approximately 0V
turned on)
65 GY/L Less than 9V
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
SEF333Y
Crankshaft position sen-
44 Y
sor (TDC) Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
SEF334Y
[Engine is running]
47 BR I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor (TDC) ground
I Idle speed
Accelerator position sen-

48 G/Y [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
sor power supply

49 W [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
power supply
EC-344
TERMI-
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
COLOR Signal) GI
[Engine is running]
50 B Sensors’ ground I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V MA
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Accelerator position sen- EM
51 PU/R I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor ground
I Idle speed
Electronic control fuel [Engine is running] LC

52 L/W Approximately 0.1V
injection pump I Idle speed
Electronic control fuel [Engine is running]

53 L/R Approximately 0.35V
56 R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
61 R (11 - 14V)
FE
103 GY
[Engine is running]
105 OR/B EGR volume control
I Warm-up condition 0.1 - 14V
109 W/L valve
I Idle speed
CL
115 GY/B
106 B
112 B ECM ground
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
MT
I Idle speed
118 B
111 W/R Glow relay Refer to “Glow Control System”, EC-456. AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-345
INCIDENT GENERAL - YD
Description
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the custom-
clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the spe-
cific malfunctioning area.
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0”.
IV DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for XXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
1 INSPECTION START
Erase DTCs. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE DTC”, EC-307.
© GO TO 2.
2 CHECK GROUND TERMINALS

Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to GI-28, “GROUND INSPECTION”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
3 SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT

OK or NG
EC-346
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY GENERAL - YD

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
NJEC1057
GI
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- MA
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
NAL
WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA(DC Voltage)
EM
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”] LC

Approximately 0.25V

BATTERY VOLTAGE
I A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch
“OFF”
(11 - 14V) FE
38 W/R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE CL
(11 - 14V)
39 B
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
Approximatley 0V MT
43 B I Idle speed
61 R
(11 - 14V) AT
106 B
[Engine is running]
112 B ECM ground
I Idle speed
Approximately 0V AX
118 B
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-347
HEC759
EC-348
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
MA
Yes © GO TO 11.
No © GO TO 2. EM
2 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I LC

FE
CL
MT
SEF397Y
AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
AX
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART SU

I Harness connectors M21, E106 BR
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M1
I 10A fuse ST
RS
4 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. BT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 39, 43, 106, 112, 118 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. HA
OK or NG
SC
OK © GO TO 5.
EL
IDX
EC-349

SEF398Y
OK or NG
OK © Check electronic control fuel injection pump power supply circuit. Refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-421.
does not exist.)
few seconds.)
6 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

SEF379Y
2. Check voltage between relay terminals 1, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF399Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
EC-350

I 20A fuse
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery MA
EM
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 4 and ECM relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
FE
9 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV CL

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 56, 61 and ECM relay terminal 7. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
AT
AX
10 CHECK ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2. SU
2. Check continuity between ECM relay terminals 3 and 5, 7 and 6.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF296X
OK or NG
HA
OK © GO TO 13.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-351
11 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

SEF379Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 39, 43, 106, 112, 118 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.

© INSPECTION END
EC-352
DTC 0102 MASS AIR FLOW SEN GENERAL - YD

The mass air flow sensor (MAFS) is placed in the stream of intake
air. It measures the intake air flow rate by measuring a part of the GI
entire intake air flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with
electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is
controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the MA
hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air,
the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain EM
SEF987W LC
Mode NJEC1061
MAS AIR/FL SE Idle 1.6 - 2.0V CL
I No-load
ECM Terminals and Reference Value MT

NJEC1062
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: AT
TER-
AX
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
SU
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed BR
power supply
ST
[Engine is running]
50 B Sensor’s ground I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
I Idle speed RS
BT
Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause)
I An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is sent to I Harness or connectors
ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) HA

SC
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”, and wait at least 6 seconds. EL
3) Start engine and wait at least 3 seconds.
SEF817Y
EC-353
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-354
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC765
EC-355
1 CHECK MAFS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
SEF381Y
4. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminals 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF297X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

I Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
I Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM relay
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
EC-356
3 CHECK MAFS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

MA
EM
LC
SEF380Y
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
CL
NG © GO TO 4.
MT
Check harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM. AT
AX
5 CHECK MAFS INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. SU
2. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 35. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-357

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 35 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEF400Y
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAFS harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.

© INSPECTION END
EC-358
DTC 0103 COOLANT TEMP SEN GENERAL - YD
Description
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal GI
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical MA
EM
SEF594K LC
<Reference data>
Voltage* (V) Resistance (kΩ)
ture °C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4

FE
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.3 0.68 - 1.00

CL
90 (194) 1.0 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
*: These data are reference values and measured between ECM terminal 19 MT
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
the ground. AX
SU
BR
On Board Diagnosis Logic NJEC1068 ST

I An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is entered I Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or RS
to ECM. shorted.)
BT
HA

SC
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. EL
SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
EC-359
ECM.
EC-360
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC760
EC-361
1 CHECK ECTS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

SEF382Y
4. Check voltage between ECTS terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF401Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK ECTS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between ECTS terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

Check the following harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor.
EC-362

1. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor from the engine. GI
2. Check resistance between ECTS terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF304X
OK or NG
AT
OK © GO TO 5.
AX
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-346. SU
© INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-363
DTC 0104 VEHICLE SPEED SEN GENERAL - YD
Description
pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the
AEC110

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA (DC Voltage and
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR Pulse Signal)
NO.
Approximately 4.8V
[Engine is running]
I Lift up the vehicle.
SEF327Y
26 PU/R Vehicle speed sensor Approximately 2.2V
[Engine is running]
SEF328Y
Malfunction is detected when .... Check Items (Possible Cause)
I The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed sensor I Harness or connector
is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being driven. (The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
EC-364

speed sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be con- GI
firmed.
MA
1) Lift up the vehicle.
2) Start engine.
3) Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode
EM
with CONSULT-II.
The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should be able to
SEF864Y
exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suit-
LC
able gear position.
1) Lift up the vehicle. FE
2) Start engine.
3) Rotate drive wheel by hand.
4) Check voltage between ECM terminal 26 and ground with CL
tester.
Voltage should vary between 0 - 4.8V.
SEF811R 5) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-367. MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-365
Wiring Diagram
HEC761
EC-366
1 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT GI
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 26 and combination meter terminal 57. Refer to Wiring Diagram. MA
OK or NG
EM
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
LC

FE
CL
Make sure that speedometer functions properly. MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. AT
NG © GO TO 4.
AX
4 CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Check the following. SU
I Harness for open or short between vehicle speed sensor and engine ground
BR
OK or NG
OK © Check vehicle speed sensor and combination meter. Refer to EL section.
ST
RS
© INSPECTION END
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-367
DTC 0208 OVER HEAT GENERAL - YD
Description
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Cooling fan
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Cooling fan relay
control
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, air condi-
tioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
OPERATION NJEC1078S02
SEF404Y

Mode NJEC1079

the engine ON

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA(DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Cooling fans are not operating
(11 - 14V)
13 LG/B Cooling fan relay (High) I Cooling fans are operating at low speed
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0.1V
I Cooling fans are operating at high speed
EC-368
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR GI
I Cooling fans are not operating (11 - 14V) MA
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0.1V
I Cooling fans are operating
EM
This diagnosis continuously monitors the engine coolant temperature. LC
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
FE
I Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat). I Harness or connectors
I Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Overheat). (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
I Engine coolant was not added to the system using the proper I Cooling fan CL
filling method. I Radiator hose
I Radiator
I Radiator cap MT
I Water pump
I Thermostat
I Fan belt
I Engine coolant temperature sensor AT
For more information, refer to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF
OVERHEATING”, EC-383.
AX
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant following the procedure in the LC-47,
“Changing Engine Coolant”. Also, replace the engine oil. SU
1) Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure
to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-21, “RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS”.
BR
2) After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-369
During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Carefully remove the cap
by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to
escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
AEC640
1) Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
SEF111X SULT-II and make sure that cooling fans operate when touch-
ing “HIGH” or “LOW”.
SEC163BA tic Procedure”, EC-372.
3) Start engine.
6) Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
ating.
8) Make sure that cooling fans operate at low speed.
9) Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
MEC475B 10) Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
11) Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness con-
nector.
12) Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
13) Start engine and make sure that cooling fans operate at higher
speed than low speed.
EC-370
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC764
EC-371
1 INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
SEF384Y
SEF646X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
EC-372

With CONSULT-II GI
EM
LC
FE
SEF111X
5. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at high speed.
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-380.) MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-373

Without CONSULT-II
SEF384Y
3. Set temperature lever at full cold position.
SEC163BA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
EC-374

3. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”. MA
6. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at high speed.
EM
LC
FE
MEC475B CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. MT
AT
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi) AX
CAUTION:
SU
BR
ST
RS
SLC754A
Pressure should not drop. BT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. HA
NG © GO TO 7.
SC
I Hose EL
I Radiator
IDX
EC-375

Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief pressure.
SLC755A
59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace radiator cap.
9 CHECK THERMOSTAT
It should seat tightly.
SLC343
Valve lift:
More than 8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
EC-376

1. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor. GI
2. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF304X
OK or NG
AT
OK © GO TO 11.
AX
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-383. SU
© INSPECTION END
BR
PROCEDURE A NJEC1084S01

ST
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF590X
EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
IDX
NG © GO TO 2.
EC-377

I 10A fuse
I 40A fusible links

SEF385Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

EC-378

Check continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF591X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
FE

CL
Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check operation.
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEF405Y
OK or NG BR
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace cooling fan motors. ST

HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-379
PROCEDURE B =NJEC1084S02

SEF384Y
SEF593X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

EC-380

MA
EM
LC
SEF385Y
terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 7 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. FE
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 CL
terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 7 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
AT
AX
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 2. SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. ST
NG © GO TO 5.
RS
BT
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-381
6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3

Check continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions.
SEF591X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.

SEF405Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.

1. Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-346.
© INSPECTION END
EC-382
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Condition Reference page GI

I Blocked radiator grille
I Blocked bumper MA
MENDED FLUIDS AND EM
LUBRICANTS”.
3 I Coolant level I Visual Coolant up to MAX level See LC-47, “Changing

in reservoir tank and Engine Coolant”. LC

(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 Check”.
kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi)
ON*2 5 I Coolant leaks I Visual No leaks See LC-40, “System FE

Check”.
ON*2 6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and Both hoses should be See LC-43, “Thermostat” CL
lower radiator hoses hot and “Radiator”.
ON*1 7 I Cooling fan I CONSULT-II Operating See Trouble Diagnosis

for DTC 0208, EC-368. MT
cal tester 4 Gas ana- AT
lyzer

gauge when driving AX
SU
OFF* 4
10 I Coolant return from I Visual Should be initial level in See LC-48, “REFILLING
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank ENGINE COOLANT”.
tor BR
OFF 11 I Cylinder head I Straight gauge feeler 0.1mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-135, “Inspec-
gauge mum distortion (warping) tion”.
ST
12 I Cylinder block and pis- I Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-158, “Inspec-
tons walls or piston tion”.
RS
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes. BT
For more information, refer to LC-50, “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS”.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-383
DTC 0301 ECM 2, DTC 0901 ECM 12 GENERAL - YD
Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine.
SEC220B
I ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. I ECM

(ECCS-D control module)

SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-384
DTC 0301 ECM 2, DTC 0901 ECM 12 GENERAL - YD
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. MA
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-384, again.
5. Is the malfunction displayed again? EM
Without CONSULT-II
2. Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory.
LC
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”.
5. Is the DTC 0301 or 0901 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes © Replace ECM. FE
No © INSPECTION END
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-385
DTC 0402 P9·FUEL TEMP SEN GENERAL - YD
Description
The ECM and the electronic control fuel injection pump control unit
(abbreviated as the injection pump control unit) perform the real
time communication (signal exchange).
The ECM transmits the signals of the target fuel injection amount,
target fuel injection timing, and engine speed, etc., and receives
the signals of the pump speed and fuel temperature, etc. from the
injection pump control unit.
By those signals, the injection pump controls the optimum fuel
SEF437Y injection amount and injection timing of the spill valve and timing
control valve.
Injection pump control unit has an on board diagnostic system,
which detects malfunctions related to sensors or actuators built-into
electronic control fuel injection pump. These malfunction informa-
tion are transferred through the line (circuit) from injection pump
control unit to ECM.
FUEL INJECTION AMOUNT CONTROL NJEC1090S02
In accordance with the target fuel injection amount signal from the
ECM, the injection amount is controlled by controlling the spill valve
in the injection pump and by changing the needle opening time.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING CONTROL NJEC1090S03
Based on the target fuel injection timing signal from the ECM, the
injection timing is controlled in accordance with the timer spring by
performing the duty control of the timing control valve in the injec-
tion pump and by adjusting the pressure of the timer piston high
pressure chamber.
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR NJEC1090S04
The sensor detects the fuel temperature in the injection pump and
calibrates the injection amount change by the fuel temperature.
The sensor detects the passing of the protrusion on the sensor
wheel in the injection pump by the semiconductor magnetic resis-
tance element sensor. The camshaft position sensor synchronizes
with the cam ring, and detects the actual advance amount. The
injection pump control unit measures the injection pump revolution
by the signal of the camshaft position sensor.

Mode NJEC1091
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
FUEL TEMP SEN I Engine: After warming up More than 40°C (104°F)
EC-386
Altitude GI
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi) MA
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
EM
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
Approx. 2,000 m: Approx. 78.36 LC
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. FE
CAUTION:
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. CL
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR MT
[Engine is running]
33 G/Y
injection pump
I Warm-up condition Approximately 2.5V AT
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
40 PU
I Warm-up condition Approximately 2.5V AX
injection pump
I Idle speed
52 L/W
Approximately 0.1V SU

53 L/R
Approximately 0.35V BR

Malfunction is detected when .... Check Items (Possible cause)
I An improper voltage signal from fuel temperature sensor I Harness or connectors RS

(Built-into electronic control fuel injection pump) is sent to (Electronic control fuel injection pump circuit is open or
injection pump control unit. shorted.)
I Electronic control fuel injection pump BT
HA

SC
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds. EL
(If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at IDX
least 2 seconds.)
SEF817Y 1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
EC-387
(If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at
least 2 seconds.)
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-388
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC762
EC-389
1 CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROL FUEL INJECTION PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect electronic control fuel injection pump harness connector.
SEF390Y
4. Check voltage between electronic control fuel injection pump terminal 7 and ground.
SEF438Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

I Harness for open or short between electronic control fuel injection pump and ECM
I Harness for open or short between electronic control fuel injection pump and ECM relay
3 CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROL FUEL INJECTION PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between electronic control fuel injection pump terminal 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC-390
4 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. GI
MA
EM
MTBL0444
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
FE
CL
OK or NG
OK © Replace electronic control fuel injection pump.
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-391
DTC 0403 ACCEL POS SENSOR GENERAL - YD
Description
The accelerator position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor
detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM uses the signal to determine the
amount of fuel to be injected.
SEF861SA

Mode NJEC1098
I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: released 0.40 - 0.60V

ACCEL POS SEN
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: depressed Approx. 4.5V

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

I Accelerator pedal fully released
23 W Accelerator position sensor
I Engine stopped Approximately 4.5V
Accelerator position sensor

power supply
[Engine is running]
51 PU/R I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
I Idle speed
EC-392
Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause) GI

I An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is I Harness or connectors
detected by the ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Accelerator position sensor MA
I Accelerator position switch
I Accelerator switch (F/C)
EM
LC
3) Wait at least 2 seconds. FE
WITHOUT CONSULT-II CL
NJEC1101S02
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 5 seconds and then MT
SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
ECM. AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-393
Wiring Diagram
HEC766
EC-394
1 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT GI

2. Disconnect accelerator position sensor harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF386Y
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. FE
4. Check voltage between accelerator position sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF816Y
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
ST
I Harness connectors F104, M65
I Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator position sensor
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-395
3 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screw.
SEF380Y
3. Check harness continuity between accelerator position sensor terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

5 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 23 and accelerator position sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.

EC-396
7 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SENSOR

With CONSULT-II GI
1. Reconnect all disconnected harness connectors.
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. MA
4. Check the indication of “ACCEL POS SEN” under the following conditions.
EM
LC
FE
SEC756D
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
CL
NG © Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
MT
Without CONSULT-II AT
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 23 and ground under the following conditions. AX
SU
BR
ST
SEC757D RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. BT
HA
9 RESET ACCELERATOR POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY
With CONSULT-II
SC
2. Select “OFF ACCEL PO SIG” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “CLEAR”.
EL
© GO TO 11.
IDX
EC-397

Without CONSULT-II
2. Let engine idle for 10 minutes.
© GO TO 11.

© INSPECTION END
EC-398
DTC 0407 CRANK POS SEN (TDC) GENERAL - YD
Description
The crankshaft position sensor (TDC) monitors engine speed by
means of signals from the sensing plate (with three protrusions) GI
installed to the crankshaft pulley. The datum signal output is
detected at ATDC 70° and sent to the ECM. The sensor signal is
used for fuel injection control and fuel injection timing control. MA
EM
SEF615S LC
Mode NJEC1105
I Tachometer: Connect
CKPS·RPM (TDC) I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CON-
CONSULT-II value. CL
SULT-II value.

NJEC1106 MT
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- AT
TERMI-
NAL
WIRE
ITEM CONDITION
DATA(DC Voltage and AX
COLOR Pulse Signal)
NO.
Approximately 0V SU
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
ST
SEF333Y
Crankshaft position sensor
44 Y
(TDC) Approximately 0V RS
[Engine is running] BT
I Warm-up condition
HA
SEF334Y
[Engine is running] SC
47 BR I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(TDC) ground
I Idle speed
EL
Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause) IDX

I An improper signal from the sensor is sent to ECM during I Harness or connectors
engine running and cranking. (The sensor circuit is open.)
I Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
EC-399

tery voltage is more than 10V.
with CONSULT-II.
2) Crank engine for at least 1 second.
SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-400
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC767
EC-401
1 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
SEF380Y
3. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (TDC) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
SEF387Y
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 47 and terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

I Harness connectors F22, F201
I Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
3 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between terminal 2 and ECM terminal 44. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
EC-402

I Harness connectors F22, F201
I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (TDC) and ECM
5 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT EM

1. Disconnect harness connectors F22, F201.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F201 terminals 3 and 4, harness connector F22 terminal 3 and
engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.
FE
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART CL

I Harness connectors F22, F201 MT
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F201 and engine ground
AT
7 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC)-I
1. Loosen the fixing bolt and remove the crankshaft position sensor (TDC). AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF620S
OK or NG BT
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (TDC). HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-403
8 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC)-II

1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (TDC) harness connector.
2. Check resistance between crankshaft position sensor (TDC) terminals 1 and 2.
SEF408Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (TDC).
9 INSTALL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC)

1. Install crankshaft position sensor (TDC) and temporarily tighten the fixing bolt.
2. Turn crankshaft position sensor (TDC) clockwise until it stops.
3. Tighten the fixing bolt.
SEF409Y
© GO TO 10.

© INSPECTION END
EC-404
DTC 0701 P1·CAM POS SEN GENERAL - YD
Description
GI
time communication (signal exchange). MA
the signals of the pump speed and fuel temperature, etc. from the EM
SEF437Y injection amount and injection timing of the spill valve and timing LC
control valve.
control unit to ECM. FE
In accordance with the target fuel injection amount signal from the CL
FUEL INJECTION TIMING CONTROL MT
NJEC1111S03
AT
pressure chamber. AX
calibrates the injection amount change by the fuel temperature. SU
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
NJEC1111S05
BR
with the cam ring, and detects the actual advance amount. The ST
RS
BT
HA
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor SC

Mode NJEC1112
Remarks: Specification data are reference values. EL
FUEL TEMP SEN I Engine: After warming up More than 40°C (104°F) IDX
EC-405
Altitude
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi)
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed


I An improper voltage signal from cam position sensor (Built- I Harness or connectors
into electronic control fuel injection pump) is sent to injection (Electronic control fuel injection pump circuit is open or
pump control unit. shorted.)
I Electronic control fuel injection pump

least 2 seconds.)
EC-406
least 2 seconds.) GI
turn “ON”.
4) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with MA
ECM.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-407
Wiring Diagram
HEC762
EC-408
1 CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROL FUEL INJECTION PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT GI

MA
EM
LC
SEF390Y
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF438Y
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
ST
RS
BT
2. Check harness continuity between electronic control fuel injection pump terminal 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Dia- HA
gram.
3. Also check harness for short to power. SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. EL
IDX
EC-409

1. Check continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0444
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.

OK or NG
EC-410
DTC 0702 P2·TDC PULSE SIG GENERAL - YD
Description
GI
control valve.
NJEC1118S03
AT
NJEC1118S05
BR
RS
BT
HA

Mode NJEC1119
EC-411
Altitude
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi)
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed


I Injection pump control unit input signal [Crankshaft position I Harness or connectors
sensor (TDC) signal] processing function is malfunctioning. (Electronic control fuel injection pump circuit is open or
shorted.)

least 2 seconds.)
4) If DTC 0407 is detected, go to “Diagnostic procedure”, EC-402.
If DTC 0702 is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-415.
SEF817Y
EC-412
2) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. GI
least 2 seconds.)
MA
turn “ON”.
4) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with EM
ECM.
5) If DTC 0407 is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-402. LC
If DTC 0702 is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-415.
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-413
Wiring Diagram
HEC762
EC-414

MA
EM
LC
SEF390Y
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF438Y
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
ST
RS
BT
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. EL
IDX
EC-415

MTBL0444
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.

OK or NG
EC-416
DTC 0703 P3·PUMP COMM LINE GENERAL - YD
Description
GI
control valve.
NJEC1125S03
AT
NJEC1125S05
BR
RS
BT
HA

Mode NJEC1126
EC-417
Altitude
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi)
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed


I Injection pump control unit receives incorrect voltage signal I Harness or connectors
from ECM continuously. (Electronic control fuel injection pump circuit is open or
shorted.)

least 2 seconds.)
EC-418
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-419
Wiring Diagram
HEC762
EC-420

MA
EM
LC
SEF390Y
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF438Y
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
ST
RS
BT
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. EL
IDX
EC-421

MTBL0444
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.

OK or NG
EC-422
DTC 0704 P4·SPILL/V CIRC, DTC 0706 P6·SPILL
VALVE GENERAL - YD
Description
GI
control valve.
NJEC1132S03
AT
NJEC1132S05
BR
RS
BT
HA

Mode NJEC1133
EC-423
VALVE GENERAL - YD
Altitude
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi)
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed


I Spill valve (Built-into electronic control fuel injection pump) I Harness or connectors
does not function properly. (Electronic control fuel injection pump circuit is open or
shorted.)

least 2 seconds.)
EC-424
VALVE GENERAL - YD
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-425
VALVE GENERAL - YD
Wiring Diagram
HEC762
EC-426
VALVE GENERAL - YD

MA
EM
LC
SEF390Y
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF438Y
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
ST
RS
BT
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. EL
IDX
EC-427
VALVE GENERAL - YD

MTBL0444
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.

OK or NG
EC-428
DTC 0705 P5·PUMP C/MODULE GENERAL - YD
Description
GI
control valve.
NJEC1139S03
AT
NJEC1139S05
BR
RS
BT
HA

Mode NJEC1140
EC-429
Altitude
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi)
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed


I Injection pump control unit does not function properly. I Electronic control fuel injection pump

least 2 seconds.)
EC-430
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EM
LC
1 INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Is the malfunction displayed again?
CL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. MT
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”. AT
5. Is the DTC 0705 displayed again?
Yes or No
AX
Yes © Replace electronic control fuel injection pump.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-431
DTC 0707 P7·F/INJ TIMG FB GENERAL - YD
Description
control valve.
pressure chamber.

Mode NJEC1146
EC-432
Altitude GI
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi) MA
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
EM
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR MT
[Engine is running]
33 G/Y
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
40 PU
injection pump
I Idle speed
52 L/W

53 L/R

I Fuel injection timing control system does not function prop- I Harness or connectors RS
erly. (Electronic control fuel injection pump circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Electronic control fuel injection pump BT
I Improper fuel quality
HA

SC
least 2 seconds.)
4) Keep engine speed at more than 2,000 rpm for at least 10
seconds.
SEF817Y
EC-433
least 2 seconds.)
seconds.
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-434
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC762
EC-435
1 INSPECTION START
2. Perform “AIR BREEDING”, EC-306, and “WATER DRAINING”, EC-306.
© GO TO 2.
2 PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN

Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-433 again.
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 3.

SEF390Y
SEF438Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

EC-436
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MTBL0444
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. AT
AX
OK or NG
OK © Replace electronic control fuel injection pump. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-437
DTC 0802 ECM 10 GENERAL - YD
Description
SEC220B
I An excessively high or low voltage from the absolute pres- I ECM

sure sensor (built-into ECM) is sent to ECM. (ECCS-D control module)

SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-438
With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
LC
Yes or No
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-439
Description
The stop lamp switch is installed to brake pedal bracket. The switch
senses brake pedal position and sends an ON-OFF signal to the
ECM. The ECM uses the signal to control the fuel injection control
system.
SEF394Y

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 0V
I An irregular voltage signal from the switch is sent to ECM. I Harness or connectors
(The stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
I Stop lamp switch

3) Depress and release brake pedal more than 10 times.
SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-440
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC777
EC-441
1 CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the stop lamp switch.
MTBL0443
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
SEF394Y
4. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF435Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

I 10A fuse
I Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and fuse
EC-442
4 CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
MA
EM
LC
SEF394Y
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 17 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. FE
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5. MT

I Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch AX
SU
6 CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF436Y
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
SC
NG © Replace stop lamp switch.
EL
IDX
© INSPECTION END
EC-443
DTC 0902 ECM RLY GENERAL - YD

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 0.25V

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
“OFF”

(11 - 14V)
61 R (11 - 14V)
Malfunction is detected when .... Check Items (Possible Cause)
I An irregular voltage signal from the ECM relay is sent to I Harness or connectors
ECM. (ECM relay circuit is open or shorted.)
I ECM relay

turn “ON”.
SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-444
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC776
EC-445
1 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

SEF379Y
SEF399Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

1. Harness connectors E74, F35
2. 20A fuse
3. Harness for open and short between ECM relay and battery
3 CHECK ECM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC-446
4 CHECK ECM OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 4 and ECM relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. GI
OK or NG MA
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EM
5 CHECK ECM RELAY LC

FE
CL
MT
SEF296X
OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace ECM relay. AX
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT SU

© INSPECTION END BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-447
Description
SEC220B
I ECM input signal processing function is malfunctioning. I ECM

(ECCS-D control module)

turn “ON”.
SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-448
With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
LC
Yes or No
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-449
DTC 1004 FUEL CUT SYSTEM1 GENERAL - YD
Description
control valve.
pressure chamber.

Mode NJEC1172
EC-450
Altitude GI
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi) MA
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
EM
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR MT
[Engine is running]
33 G/Y
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
40 PU
injection pump
I Idle speed
52 L/W

53 L/R

I Fuel cut control system does not function properly. I Harness or connectors RS
(Electronic control fuel circuit is open or shorted.)
I Electronic control fuel
BT
HA

SC
least 2 seconds.)
turn “ON”.
SEF817Y
EC-451
least 2 seconds.)
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-452
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC762
EC-453

SEF390Y
SEF438Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC-454

MA
EM
MTBL0444
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
FE
CL
OK or NG
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-455
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL - YD
Description
ECM
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Func- Actuator
tion
Crankshaft position sensor Glow lamp,

Engine speed
(TDC) Glow Glow relay
Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant tem- control "
ture sensor perature Glow plugs
When engine coolant temperature is higher than approximately

75°C (167°F), the glow relay turns off, inactivating the quick-glow
control until coolant temperature drops below approximately 55°C
(131°F).
When coolant temperature is lower than approximately 75°C
(167°F):
I Ignition switch ON
After ignition switch has turned to ON, the glow relay turns ON
for a certain period of time in relation to engine coolant
temperature, allowing current to flow through glow plug.
I Cranking
The glow relay turns ON, allowing current to flow through glow
plug.
I Starting
After engine has started, current continues to flow through
glow plug (after-glow mode) for a certain period in relation to
engine coolant temperature.
When engine speed exceeds approximately 4,800 rpm, current
flow through glow plug is interrupted.
The glow indicator lamp turns ON for a certain period of time in
relation to engine cooalnt temperature at the time glow relay is
turned ON.

Glow Plug NJEC1178S0201
The glow plug is provided with a ceramic heating element to obtain
a high-temperature resistance. It glows in response to a signal sent
from the ECM, allowing current to flow through the glow plug via
the glow relay.
SEF376Y
EC-456

CAUTION:
GI
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. MA
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR EM
NO.

Approximately 1V
I Glow indicator lamp is “ON”
16 OR Glow indicator lamp
LC
I Glow indicator lamp is “OFF” (11 - 14V)
111 W/R Glow relay Refer to “SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”, EC-456.
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-457
Wiring Diagram
GEC269A
EC-458
Check fuel level, fuel supplying system, starter motor, etc.
OK or NG MA
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Correct.
EM
2 CHECK INSTALLATION
LC
Check that glow plug nut and all glow plug connecting plate nuts are installed properly.
FE
CL
MT
SEF392Y
OK or NG
AT
II) AX
NG © Install properly.
SU
3 CHECK GLOW INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
BR
2. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Confirm that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates below 75°C (167°F). If it indicates above 75°C (167°F), cool down engine.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF013Y
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 5 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SC
5. Make sure that glow indicator lamp is turned “ON” for 1.5 seconds or more after turning ignition switch “ON”, and then
turned “OFF”.
EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
IDX
NG © GO TO 6.
EC-459

Without CONSULT-II
2. Confirm that the voltage between ECM terminal 19 and ground is above 1.36V. If it is below 1.36V, cool down engine.
SEF430Y
turned “OFF”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 6.
5 CHECK GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM OVERALL FUNCTION

2. Set voltmeter probe between glow plug and engine body.
4. Check the voltage between glow plug and engine body under the following conditions.
SEF431Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 11.
EC-460
6 CHECK GLOW INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector M32.
4. Check voltage between combination meter terminal 17 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. MA
EM
LC
SEF432Y
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
CL
NG © GO TO 7.

MT
1. Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 AT
2. 10A fuse
3. Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuse
8 CHECK GLOW INDICATOR LAMP OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT SU
3. Disconnect combination meter harness connector M36. BR
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and combination meter terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. RS
NG © GO TO 9.
BT
Check the following. HA
1. Harness connectors M63, F102
2. Harness for open or short between combination meter and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SC
10 CHECK COMBINATION METER EL

Check combination meter and glow indicator lamp. Refer to EL-185, “Meter and Gauges”.
OK or NG IDX
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © Repair or replace combination meter or glow indicator lamp.
EC-461
11 CHECK GLOW RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect glow relay.
SEF391Y
3. Check voltage between glow relay terminals 1, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF420Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © GO TO 12.

I 60A fusible link
I Harness for open or short between glow relay and battery
13 CHECK GLOW RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and glow relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © GO TO 14.

I Harness for open or short between glow relay and ECM
EC-462
15 CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN GLOW RELAY AND GLOW PLUG FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect glow plug harness connector. GI
2. Check harness continuity between glow relay terminal 3 and glow plug harness connector. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. MA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
EM
LC
16 CHECK GLOW RELAY
Check continuity between glow relay terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
SEF433Y
AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace glow relay.
AX
17 CHECK GLOW PLUG SU

1. Remove glow plug connecting plate.
2. Check glow plug resistance. BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF434Y
HA
NOTE:
I Do not bump glow plug heating element. If it is bumped, replace glow plug with a new one.
I If glow plug is dropped from a height of 10 cm (3.94 in) or higher, replace with a new one.
I If glow plug installation hole is contaminated with carbon, remove it with a reamer or suitable tool.
SC
I Hand-tighten glow plug by turning it two or three times, then tighten using a tool to specified torque.
: 17.7 - 22.5 N·m (1.8 - 2.3 kg-m, 13 - 16 ft-lb)
EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
IDX
NG © Replace glow plug.
EC-463

© INSPECTION END
EC-464
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL - YD
Description
GI
Electronic controlled fuel injection pump Fuel injection signal MA

Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed EM

Ignition switch Start signal EGR volume control LC

EGR volume con- valve
trol Throttle control solenoid
Battery Battery voltage valve
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation FE

PNP switch Park/Neutral position signal

CL
This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold
to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the
MT
EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A
built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the AT
ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum
engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined
by considering various engine conditions. The throttle control sole- AX
noid valve controls vacuum pressure acting on the throttle body.
Thus, intake air passages are opened or closed in relation to
exhaust gas and intake air. Utilizing the relationship between SU
exhaust gas pressure and intake air pressure control, the amount
of EGR (exhaust gas recirculated) is regulated to the optimal value.
The EGR volume control valve remains close under the following BR
conditions.
I Engine stopped
I Engine starting ST
I Excessively high engine coolant temperature RS
I High engine speed
I Wide open throttle
I Low battery voltage BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF410Y IDX
EC-465
Description (Cont’d)
EGR Volume Control Valve NJEC1182S0201
The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow
rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding
phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the
ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each
time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing
the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM
does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued
so that the valve remains at that particular opening.
SEF411Y
Throttle Control Solenoid Valve NJEC1182S0202

The throttle control solenoid valve responds to signals from the
ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the solenoid
valve is bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the throttle
control actuator. This operation closes the throttle valve. When the
ECM sends an OFF signal, the vacuum signal is cut and the throttle
valve opens.
SEF422Y

Mode NJEC1183
I Engine: After warming up Idle 1 - 54 step

EGR VOL CON/V
I Shift lever: Neutral position Revving engine up to 3,200 rpm
0 step
I No-load quickly
I Engine: After warming up Idle ON

THROT RLY A
OFF
I No-load rpm

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Throttle control solenoid I Idle speed
1 L
valve [Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Warm-up condition
(11 - 14V)
I Revving engine from idle to 1,500 rpm
103 GY
[Engine is running]
105 OR/B
EGR volume control valve I Warm-up condition 0.1 - 14V
109 W/L
I Idle speed
115 GY/B
EC-466
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram =NJEC1185
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC768
EC-467
1 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM OVERALL FUNCTION-I

2. Confirm that throttle control actuator rod moves when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm and returns to idle.
SEF423Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM OVERALL FUNCTION-II

2. Set the oscilloscope probe between ECM terminals 103, 105, 109, 115 and ground.
4. Check the oscilloscope screen when revving engine up to 3,200 rpm and return to idle.
SEF424Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 10.
EC-468
3 CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE

2. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to throttle control actuator.
4. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions. MA
EM
LC
SEF425Y
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
CL
NG © GO TO 5.
MT
4 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
2. Install a handy vacuum pump to the throttle control actuator. AT
3. Apply vacuum [more than –13.3 kPa (–133 mbar, –100 mmHg, –3.94 inHg)] and check throttle control actuator rod
operation.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF426Y
RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace throttle body assembly.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-469
5 CHECK VACUUM HOSE AND TUBES

2. Check vacuum hoses and tubes between vacuum pump and throttle control solenoid valve, throttle control solenoid
valve and throttle control actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose
Drawing”, EC-288.
SEF816F
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
6 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect throttle control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF389Y
4. Check voltage between throttle control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF427Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
EC-470

I 10A fuse MA
I Harness for open or short between throttle control solenoid valve and fuse
EM
8 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. LC
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 1 and throttle control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-471
9 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
3. Perform “THL CONT/SOL-V A” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Check air passage continuity of throttle control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF428Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Apply 12V direct current between throttle control solenoid valve terminals.
2. Check air passage continuity of throttle control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF429Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © Replace throttle control solenoid valve.
EC-472
10 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

2. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF388Y
4. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF412Y
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
SU
NG © GO TO 11.
11 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

BR
RS
BT
HA
SEF379Y SC
3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 5 and EGR volume control valve terminals 2 and 5. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12. IDX
EC-473
12 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

SEF413Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.

I 10A fuse
14 CHECK ECM RELAY

SEF296X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
EC-474
15 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. MA
EM
LC
MTBL0442
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16. FE
CL
16 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-I
Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEF414Y
BR
OK or NG
ST
II)
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-475
17 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II

With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EGR volume control valve.
2. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector.
4. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothy forward and backward according to the valve opening
steps.
SEF819Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve.

Without CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”.
4. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch
position.
SEF560W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 19.

© INSPECTION END
EC-476
START SIGNAL GENERAL - YD
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC771
EC-477
1 CHECK START SIGNAL OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
SEF604X
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 20 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF415Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK START SIGNAL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and ignition switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 20 and ignition switch terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

I 10A fuse
I Fuse block (J/B) connectors M2, E104
EC-478

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-346. GI
© INSPECTION END
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-479
ACCELERATOR POSITION SWITCH GENERAL - YD
Description
The accelerator position switch detects Off-accelerator switch sig-
nal and Full-accelerator switch signal and send these signals to the
ECM. The ECM will then determine engine idle conditions. These
signals are also used for diagnosing the accelerator position sen-
sor.
SEF386Y

Mode NJEC1190
I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: fully depressed ON

FULL ACCEL SW
(Engine stopped) Except above OFF

OFF ACCEL SW

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Engine stopped
(11 - 14V)
Accelerator position switch I Accelerator pedal fully released
31 Y
(Idle) [Ignition switch “ON”]

Accelerator position switch I Accelerator pedal released
32 LG
(Full) [Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Engine stopped
(11 - 14V)
EC-480
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC772
EC-481

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “FULL ACCEL SW” and “OFF ACCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “FULL ACCEL SW” and “OFF ACCEL SW” signal under the following conditions.
SEF416Y
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 31, 32 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF417Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
EC-482
2 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect accelerator position switch harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF386Y
4. Check voltage between accelerator position switch terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF346X
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
SU
NG © GO TO 3.

BR
I Harness connectors M65, F104 ST
I Harness for open or short between accelerator position switch and ECM relay
I Harness for open or short between accelerator position switch and ECM
4 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I FOR OPEN AND SHORT BT
3. Check harness continuity between accelerator position switch terminal 6 and ECM terminal 31. Refer to Wiring Dia-
HA
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. EL
NG © GO TO 5.
IDX
EC-483

I Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator position switch
6 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between accelerator position switch terminal 4 and ECM terminal 32. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

I Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator position switch
8 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SWITCH

Check continuity between accelerator position switch terminals 4 and 5, 5 and 6 under the following conditions.
SEF418Y
OK or NG
II)

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “OFF ACCEL PO SIG” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “CLEAR”.
© GO TO 11.
EC-484

2. Let engine idle for 10 minutes.
© GO TO 11. MA
11 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EM

© INSPECTION END LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-485
ACCELERATOR SWITCH (F/C) GENERAL - YD
Description
The accelerator switch is installed to the accelerator pedal assem-
bly. The switch senses accelerator position and sends an ON-OFF
signal to the ECM. The ECM uses the signal to control the fuel cut
operation at deceleration for better fuel efficiency.
SEF687V

Mode NJEC1195
I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: fully released CLOSE

ACCEL SW (FC)
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: slightly open OPEN

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Engine stopped
(11 - 14V)
29 BR/R Accelerator switch (F/C)
EC-486
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC763
EC-487
1 CHECK ACCELERATOR SWITCH (F/C) OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
2. Check “ACCEL SW (FC)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
SEF402Y
Without CONSULT-II
SEF421Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
EC-488
2 CHECK ACCELERATOR SWITCH (F/C) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Disconnect accelerator switch (F/C) harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF383Y
4. Check harness continuity between accelerator switch (F/C) terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. FE
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3. MT

I Harness for open or short between accelerator switch (F/C) and engine ground AX
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
SU
4 CHECK ACCELERATOR SWITCH (F/C) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and accelerator switch (F/C) terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
RS
NG © GO TO 5.
BT
I Harness connectors M63, F102 HA
I Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator switch (F/C)
SC
EL
IDX
EC-489
6 CHECK ACCELERATOR SWITCH (F/C)

Check continuity between accelerator switch (F/C) connector terminals 1 and 3 under the following conditions.
SEF403Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.

© INSPECTION END
EC-490
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH GENERAL - YD
Description
When the gear position is in “Neutral”, neutral position is “ON”. ECM detects the position because the conti-
nuity of the line (the “ON” signal) exists. GI
Mode MA
NJEC1200
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION EM
Shift lever: Neutral ON
Except above OFF
LC

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE CL
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 0V
22 G/OR
switch [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-491
Wiring Diagram
HEC773
EC-492

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. MA
3. Check “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
EM
LC
FE
SEF049Y
Without CONSULT-II
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEF419Y
BR
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-493
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.
SEF393Y
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 4 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 22 and PNP switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Refer to MT-21, “Position Switch Check”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace park/neutral position switch.

© INSPECTION END
EC-494
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL GENERAL - YD
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC774
EC-495
MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS GENERAL - YD
Wiring Diagram
GEC270A
EC-496
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) GENERAL - YD
General Specifications
General Specifications NJEC1206

Unit: rpm
GI
Engine YD22DD
Idle speed 725±25

MA
Maximum engine speed 5,400
Injection Pump Numbers NJEC1207

EM
Engine Part number Pump assembly number
YD22DD 16700 WD001 109341-2020 LC
Injection Nozzle NJEC1208

Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)
Used 18,045 (180.4, 184, 2,616)

FE
Initial injection pressure New 18,633 - 20,595 (186.3 - 205.9, 190 - 210, 2,702 - 2,986)
Limit 16,182 (161.8, 165, 2,346)

CL
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ MT

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 AT

90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
AX
Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC) NJEC1210
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Ω 495 - 605 SU

Glow Plug NJEC1211
BR
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 0.8
Accelerator Position Sensor NJEC1212

ST
Throttle valve conditions Resistance between terminals 2 and 3 kΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
Completely closed Approximately 0.5 RS

Partially open 0.5 - 4
Completely open Approximately 4 BT
EGR Volume Control Valve NJEC1213 HA

SC
EL
IDX
EC-497
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX EUROPE - QG

Check if the vehicle is a model with the Euro-OBD (E-OBD) system or not by referring to the “Type approval
number” on the identification plate.
Refer to GI-40, “IDENTIFICATION PLATE”.
Type approval number Model
Available With Euro-OBD system
Not available Without Euro-OBD system
MODELS WITH EURO-OBD SYSTEM NJEC0001S03

Alphabetical Index for DTC NJEC0001S0301
DTC*6
Items
CONSULT-II Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM*1
GST*2
Unable to access ECM — — EC-602
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 0110 EC-639
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 AT-205
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 AT-212
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 AT-218
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 AT-224
A/T DIAG COMM LINE P1605 1605 EC-859
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 AT-190
CMP SEN/CIRCUIT P0340 0340 EC-768
CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 0510 EC-813
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3 P0115 0115 EC-644
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 EC-762
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 EC-752
ECM P0605 0605 EC-819
EGR SYSTEM P0400 0400 EC-775
EGR SYSTEM P1402 1402 EC-851
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P1401 1401 EC-845
EGR VOL CON/V CIR P0403 0403 EC-783
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 AT-201
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-833
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 P0171 0171 EC-733
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 P0172 0172 EC-740
FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC*7 P0180 0180 EC-747
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 0135 EC-691
HO2S1 (B1) P0130 0130 EC-657
EC-498
DTC*6
Items
Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II
ECM*1
GI
GST*2
HO2S1 (B1) P0131 0131 EC-664

MA
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 EC-670
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 EC-676

EM
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 EC-685
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 EC-696 LC

HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 EC-705
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 EC-713
HO2S2 (B1) P0140 0140 EC-722
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 0141 EC-728 FE

IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 0505 EC-805
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 EC-821 CL

KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325 0325 EC-758
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 AT-240 MT

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 P0100 0100 EC-633
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 EC-752

AT
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 EL-624
AX
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
— 0000 —
FURTHER TESTING MAYBE REQUIRED
NO DTC IS DETECTED. SU
— Flashing*5 EC-561
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1760 AT-268 BR

PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 AT-184
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 EC-862 ST

PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 0443 EC-795
SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 0750 AT-247 RS

SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 0755 AT-253
SWRL CONT SOL/V P1131 1131 EC-826 BT

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 AT-234
THRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 P0120 0120 EC-649 HA

TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 AT-259
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 EC-790

SC
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 0720 AT-196
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4 P0500 0500 EC-800

EL
*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). These numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-6. IDX
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MI illuminates.
*4: The MI illuminates when the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the
same time.
*5: While engine is running.
*6: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
EC-499
*7: If so equipped
P No. Index for DTC NJEC0001S0302
DTC*6
Items
ECM*1 (CONSULT-II screen terms)
GST*2
— — Unable to access ECM EC-602
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING MAYBE REQUIRED.
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
— 0000 —
P0100 0100 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 EC-633
P0110 0110 AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-639
P0115 0115 COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3 EC-644
P0120 0120 THRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 EC-649
P0130 0130 HO2S1 (B1) EC-657
P0131 0131 HO2S1 (B1) EC-664
P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1) EC-670
P0133 0133 HO2S1 (B1) EC-676
P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1) EC-685
P0135 0135 HO2S1 HTR (B1) EC-691
P0137 0137 HO2S2 (B1) EC-696
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-705
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-713
P0140 0140 HO2S2 (B1) EC-722
P0141 0141 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-728
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 EC-733
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 EC-740
P0180 0180 FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC*7 EC-747
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-752
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-752
P0325 0325 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-758
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-762
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-768
P0400 0400 EGR SYSTEM EC-775
P0403 0403 EGR VOL CON/V CIR EC-783
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-790
P0443 0443 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-795
EC-500
DTC*6
Items
Reference page
CONSULT-II
ECM*1 (CONSULT-II screen terms) GI
GST*2
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4 EC-800

MA
P0505 0505 IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC EC-805
P0510 0510 CLOSED TP SW/CIRC EC-813

EM
P0605 0605 ECM EC-819
P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-184 LC

P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-190
P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT AT-196
P0725 0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-201
P0731 0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-205 FE

P0732 0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-212
P0733 0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-218 CL

P0734 0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-224
P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-234 MT

P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-240
P0750 0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC AT-247

AT
P0755 0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC AT-253
AX
P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 EC-821
P1131 1131 SWRL CONT SOL/V EC-826

SU
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-833
P1401 1401 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-845

BR
P1402 1402 EGR SYSTEM EC-851
P1605 1605 A/T DIAG COMM LINE EC-859

ST
P1610 - 1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION EL-624
P1705 1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T AT-259 RS

P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-862
P1760 1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-268 BT

*2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-6
HA
same time.
*5: While engine is running. SC
*7: If so equipped
EL
IDX
EC-501
MODELS WITHOUT EURO-OBD SYSTEM NJEC0001S04
Alphabetical Index for DTC NJEC0001S0401
DTC*6
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM*1
GST*2
Unable to access ECM — — EC-602
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 EC-762
CMP SEN/CIRCUIT P0340 0340 EC-768
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3 P0115 0115 EC-644
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-833
HO2S1 (B1) P0130 0130 EC-657
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325 0325 EC-758
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 P0100 0100 EC-633
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 EL-624
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
— 0000 —
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
THRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 P0120 0120 EC-649
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4 P0500 0500 EC-800
*2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
same time.
P No. Index for DTC NJEC0001S0402
DTC*6
Items
ECM*1 (CONSULT-II screen terms)
GST*2
— — Unable to access ECM EC-602
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
— 0000 —
P0100 0100 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 EC-633
P0115 0115 COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3 EC-644
P0120 0120 THRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 EC-649
P0130 0130 HO2S1 (B1) EC-657
P0325 0325 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-758
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-762
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-768
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4 EC-800
EC-502
DTC*6
Items
Reference page
CONSULT-II
ECM*1 (CONSULT-II screen terms) GI
GST*2
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-833

MA
P1610 - 1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION EL-624
EM
*2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-6
*4: The MI illuminates when the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the LC
same time.
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-503
PRECAUTIONS EUROPE - QG

belt pre-tensioners, a diagnoses sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
seat), side air bag (satellite) sensor, diagnoses sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal
WARNING:
System of Engine and A/T NJEC0003
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator (MI) to warn the driver
of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
I Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.
will cause the MI to light up.
I Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MI to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
I Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL section, “Description”, “HARNESS CONNEC-
TOR”.
I Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MI to light up due to the short circuit.
I Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MI to light up due to the malfunction of fuel injection system, etc.
I Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission Control Module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
EC-504
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System =NJEC0004

I Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
I Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine GI
is running.
I Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness MA
ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if EM
SEF706Y LC
I Do not disassemble ECM.
I If a battery terminal is disconnected, the memory will
return to the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is
disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a prob-
FE
lem. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
CL
SEF707Y
MT
connector, use lever as shown. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF908W

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or ST
break).
pin terminals when connecting pin connectors. RS
I Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A Poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) BT
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
I Keep ECM harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away from adja- HA
cent harness, to prevent an ECM system malfunctions due
SEF291H
to receiving external noise, degraded operation of ICs, etc.
I Keep ECM parts and harness dry. SC
EL
IDX
EC-505
I Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
I Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
I Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent.
I Do not disassemble IAC valve-AAC valve.
I Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous problems.
I Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor and
crankshaft position sensor.
I Before replacing ECM, perform refer to “ECM Terminals
MEF040D and Reference Value” inspection and make sure ECM
functions properly, EC-612.

Check”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirma-
completed.
SAT652J

Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the
such as the ground.
SEF348N
EC-506
I Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
I Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
GI
MA
EM
SEF605X LC
I Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
I Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
I Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
FE
CL
SEF709Y
MT
I When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure
to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec- AT
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
1) Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units. AX
2) Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance. SU
3) Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave ratio can be kept smaller.
BR
SEF708Y 4) Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis NJEC0006 ST
When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution cir- RS
cuit
BT
I GI-33, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS”
I GI-22, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN HA
ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
SC
EL
IDX
EC-507
PREPARATION EUROPE - QG
Tool number
Description
Tool name
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor 1

Heated oxygen sensor (front) with 22 mm hexagon nut
wrench
NT379
KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor 2

Heated oxygen sensor (rear)
wrench a: 22 mm
NT636
Commercial Service Tools NJEC0008
Tool name Description
pressure
NT653
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before

cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
seize lubricant shown below.
a: 18 mm dia. with pitch 1.5 mm, for Zirconia
Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm dia. with pitch 1.25 mm, for Titania
Oxygen Sensor
NT778
Anti-seize lubricant (Per- Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

matexTM 133AR or when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
equivalent meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-907)
NT779
EC-508
SYSTEM EUROPE - QG
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF596Y
EC-509
SYSTEM EUROPE - QG
SEF597YA
EC-510
SYSTEM EUROPE - QG
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF598YA
EC-511
SYSTEM EUROPE - QG
SEF599Y
EC-512
SYSTEM EUROPE - QG
Circuit Diagram

SEDAN NJEC0010S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC895
EC-513
SYSTEM EUROPE - QG
Circuit Diagram (Cont’d)
HATCHBACK NJEC0010S02
HEC896
EC-514
SYSTEM EUROPE - QG
System Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF621YA
EC-515
SYSTEM EUROPE - QG
Vacuum Hose Drawing

Refer to “System Diagram” on EC-515 for vacuum control system.
SEF624Y
EC-516
SYSTEM EUROPE - QG
System Chart

I Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Injectors
I Mass air flow sensor Electronic ignition system Power transistor MA
I Engine coolant temperature sensor Idle air control system IACV-AAC valve
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
I Ignition switch Intake valve timing control sole- EM
Intake valve timing control
I Throttle position sensor noid valve
I PNP switch
I Air conditioner switch Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay LC
I Knock sensor
I EGR temperature sensor*1 On board diagnostic system
(On the instrument panel)
I Fuel tank temperature sensor*1, *4
I Battery voltage EGR control EGR volume control valve
I Power steering oil pressure switch
I Vehicle speed sensor Heated oxygen sensor 1/2 heater (front/ Heated oxygen sensor 1/2 heater
I Intake air temperature sensor rear) control (front/rear) FE
I Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)*2
EVAP canister purge volume con-
I TCM (Transmission Control Module)*3 EVAP canister purge flow control
I Closed throttle position switch
trol solenoid valve CL
I Electrical load Cooling fan control Cooling fan relay
I Refrigerant pressure sensor
Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay MT
Swirl control valve control sole-
Swirl control valve control
noid
AT
*1: These sensors are not used to control the engine system. They are used only for the on board diagnosis.
*2: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation.
*3: The DTC related to A/T will be sent to ECM. AX
*4: If so equipped
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-517
DESCRIPTION EUROPE - QG

ECM func-
tion
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed and cylinder number
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position
Throttle valve idle position
PNP switch Gear position Fuel injec-

tion & mix-
Injector
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed ture ratio
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)* Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
* Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation.
Basic Multiport Fuel Injection System NJEC0014S02

The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the camshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
Various Fuel Injection Increase/Decrease Compensation NJEC0014S03
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various oper-
ating conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
I During warm-up
I When starting the engine
I Hot-engine operation
I When selector lever is changed from “N” to “D” (A/T models)
I High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
I During deceleration
I During high engine speed operation
I During high vehicle speed operation (M/T models)
I Extremely high engine coolant temperature
EC-518
Mixture Ratio Feedback Control (Closed loop control) NJEC0014S04
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF336WA
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission con-
trol. The three way catalyst can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses a heated
oxygen sensor 1 (front) in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about the heated FE
oxygen sensor 1 (front), refer to EC-657. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric
(ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition. CL
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is located downstream of the three way catalyst. Even if the switching char-
acteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the
signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). MT
Open Loop Control NJEC0014S05
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback AT
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
I Deceleration and acceleration
I High-load, high-speed operation AX
I Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) or its circuit
I Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) at low engine coolant temperature SU
I High engine coolant temperature
I During warm-up
I When starting the engine BR
Mixture Ratio Self-learning Control NJEC0014S06
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from the heated oxy- ST
gen sensor 1 (front). This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio
as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily con-
trolled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot film) and charac- RS
teristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This
is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between BT
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim. HA
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN
compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is SC
rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, EL
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
IDX
EC-519
Fuel Injection Timing NJEC0014S07
SEF337W
Two types of systems are used.

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System NJEC0014S0701
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System NJEC0014S0702
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
Fuel Shut-off NJEC0014S08
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System
ECM func-
tion
Throttle position
Throttle position sensor Ignition tim-
Throttle valve idle position Power transistor
ing control
Knock sensor Engine knocking
PNP switch Gear position
EC-520
Electronic Ignition (EI) System (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF742M
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of
the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown above.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width, crankshaft position sensor signal and cam- FE
shaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transis-
tor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec CL
A°BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored
in the ECM. MT
I At starting
I During warm-up
I At idle AT
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed AX
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions.
If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The SU
ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Air Conditioning Cut Control BR
ST
ECM func-
tion
RS

BT
Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle

Air condi- HA
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature tioner cut Air conditioner relay
control
SC

EL
System Description IDX

NJEC0016S02
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
I When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
I When cranking the engine.
EC-521
Air Conditioning Cut Control (Cont’d)
I At high engine speeds.
I When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
I When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
I When engine speed is excessively low.
I When the refrigerant pressure is excessively high or low.
speed)
ECM func-
tion
Throttle position sensor Throttle position Fuel cut

Injectors
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature control
If the engine speed is above 3,950 rpm with no load, (for example, in Neutral and engine speed over 4,000
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”,
EC-518.
Evaporative Emission System
SEF916WA
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating.
EC-522
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the flow
rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as
the air flow increases. GI
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
MA
EM
LC
INSPECTION NJEC0019
EVAP Canister NJEC0019S01
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B. Orally blow air through port A. Check that air
flows freely through port C with check valve resistance. FE
2. Block port A. Orally blow air through port B. Check that air
flows freely through port C.
CL
SEF917W
MT
Fuel Tank Vacuum Relief Valve (Built into fuel fillerNJEC0019S03
cap)
1. Wipe clean valve housing. AT
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
AX
16.0 - 20.0 kPa (0.16 - 0.20 bar, 0.163 - 0.204 kg/cm2,
2.32 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: SU
−6.0 to −3.5 kPa (−0.060 to −0.035 bar, −0.061 to
−0.036 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.51 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. BR
SEF918W
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF943S
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Volume SC

Control Solenoid Valve NJEC0019S07
Refer to EC-799.
EL
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor NJEC0019S08
Refer to EC-751 (If so equipped).
IDX
Checking EVAP Vapour Lines NJEC0019S13
1. Visually inspect vapor lines for leaks, cracks, damage, loose
connections, chafing and deterioration.
2. Inspect vacuum relief valve of fuel tank filler cap for clogging,
sticking, etc. Refer to next page.
EC-523
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING =NJEC0020
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hoses or purge hoses.
SEF600Y
EC-524

GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF921W
MT
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake collector.
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake AT
manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV
valve. AX
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air duct into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through
the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. SU
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some BR
of the flow will go through the hose connection to the intake collector under all conditions.
INSPECTION NJEC0023 ST
PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve NJEC0023S01
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from breather sepa-
rator. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes RS
through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a fin-
ger is placed over the valve inlet.
BT
HA
SEF244Q

SC
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any
hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. EL
IDX
ET277
EC-525
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE EUROPE - QG
Fuel Pressure Release
Fuel Pressure Release NJEC0024

Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel
line to eliminate danger.
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUP-
pressure.
SEF094Y 4. Turn ignition switch OFF.
SEF214Y

1. Remove fuse for fuel pump. Refer to fuse block cover for fuse
location.
2. Start engine.
pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and reconnect fuel pump fuse.
JEF086Y
Fuel Pressure Check NJEC0025

I When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
I Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent
parts.
I Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
I Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
I Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operat-
ing. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.
JEF087Y
2. Disconnect fuel hose between fuel filter and fuel tube (engine
side).
3. Install pressure gauge between fuel filter and fuel tube.
4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
At idle speed:
With vacuum hose connected
psi)
With vacuum hose disconnected
psi)
EC-526
Fuel Pressure Check (Cont’d)
If results are unsatisfactory, perform Fuel Pressure Regulator
Check, EC-527.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check NJEC0026
1. Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum
hose from intake manifold.
2. Plug intake manifold with a rubber cap.
3. Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator. FE
4. Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as
vacuum is changed.
CL
Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases. If results
are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator.
SEF718B
MT
Injector
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION AT
NJEC0027
2. Remove fuel tube assemblies in numerical sequence as AX
shown in the Figure at left.
3. Expand and remove clips securing fuel injectors.
4. Extract fuel injectors straight from fuel tubes. SU
I Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during removal.
I Do not bump or drop fuel injectors.
BR
JEF088Y 5. Install fuel injectors.
Carefully install O-rings, including the one used with the pres-
sure regulator. ST
I Lubricate O-rings with a smear of engine oil.
I Be careful not to damage O-rings with service tools or
finger nails or clips. Do not expand or twist O-rings. RS
I Discard old clips; replace with new ones.
6. Position clips in grooves on fuel injectors. BT
I Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned
with cutouts of clips after installation.
HA
SEF927W
SC
EL
IDX
EC-527
Injector (Cont’d)
JEF089Y
7. Align protrusions of fuel tubes with those of fuel injectors.

Insert fuel injectors straight into fuel tubes.
8. After properly inserting fuel injectors, check to make sure that
fuel tube protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors,
and that flanges of fuel tubes are engaged with clips.
9. Tighten fuel tube assembly mounting nuts in numerical

sequence (indicated in the Figure at left) and in two stages.
: Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
1st stage:
12 - 13 (1.2 - 1.4, 9 - 10)
2nd stage:
17 - 23 (1.7 - 2.4, 13 - 17)
10. Insert fuel hoses into fuel tubes so that ends of fuel hoses butt
up against fuel tubes; fasten with clamps, avoiding bulges.
CAUTION:
JEF815Y
After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and
fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage.
EC-528
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing NJEC0028

IDLE SPEED
I Using CONSULT-II
NJEC0028S05
GI
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II. MA
I With GST
Check idle speed in “MODE 1” with GST.
EM
SEF058Y LC
IGNITION TIMING NJEC0028S06
Any of following two methods may be used.
I Method A
a) Attach timing light to loop wire or, combine the three No. 1
ignition coil harnesses and attach the timing light sensor FE
(attach from above the harness protector) as shown.
b) Check ignition timing.
CL
JEF150Y
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
JEF438Z
I Method B
a) Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
ST
b) Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to RS
this wire.
c) Check ignition timing.
BT
HA
SEF933W
SC
EL
IDX
SEF284G
EC-529
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing (Cont’d)
SEF166Y
Preparation NJEC0592
I Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
a) Battery
b) Ignition system
c) Engine oil and coolant levels
d) Fuses
e) ECM harness connector
f) Vacuum hoses
g) Air intake system
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
h) Fuel pressure
i) Engine compression
j) EGR valve operation
k) Throttle valve
l) EVAP system
I On models equipped with air conditioner, checks should
be carried out while the air conditioner is “OFF”.
I When checking idle speed on models equipped with A/T,
ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried
out while shift lever is in “P” or “N” position.
I When measuring “CO” percentage, insert probe more
than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
I Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear window defogger.
I On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set
lighting switch to the 1st position to light only small
lamps.
I Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
I If engine stops immediately after starting or idle condition
is unstable, perform the following to initialize IACV-AAC
valve:
a) Stop engine and wait 9 seconds.
b) Turn ignition “ON” and wait 1 second.
EC-530
Preparation (Cont’d)
c) Turn ignition “OFF” and wait 9 seconds.
I Make sure the cooling fan has stopped.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-531
Preparation (Cont’d)
OVERALL INSPECTION SEQUENE NJEC0592S01
SEC141CA
EC-532
Inspection Procedure
Inspection Procedure NJEC0593
1. Visually check the following:
I Hoses and ducts for leaks MA
I EGR valve operation
I Electrical connectors
I Gasket EM
I Throttle valve and throttle position sensor operation
2. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. LC
FE
CL
SEF090Y MT
3. Open engine hood and run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
AT
AX
SU
SEF977U
4. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. ST
NG © GO TO 2.
RS
2 REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”. BT
© GO TO 3.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-533
Inspection Procedure (Cont’d)

With CONSULT-II
M/T: 700±50 rpm
A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
M/T: 700±50 rpm
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 4.

Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © GO TO 5.
INCMP © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Leaning”.
2. GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
M/T: 700±50 rpm
Without CONSULT-II
M/T: 700±50 rpm
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 6.

© GO TO 7.
EC-534

Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-543. GI
CMPLT or INCMP
MA
CMPLT © GO TO 8.
INCMP © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 4. EM
8 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN LC

With CONSULT-II
M/T: 700±50 rpm
A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) FE
Without CONSULT-II
CL
M/T: 700±50 rpm
A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. AT
NG © GO TO 9.
AX
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely SU
the case.)
System)”, EC-560. BR
© GO TO 4.
ST
2. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light. RS
BT
HA
SC
SEM872F EL
M/T: 8°±5° BTDC
A/T: 10°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
IDX
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 11.
EC-535

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-34, “Installation”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
2. GO TO 4.

SEM872F
M/T: 8°±5° BTDC
A/T: 10°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 13.

CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © GO TO 14.
INCMP © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 13.

With CONSULT-II
M/T: 700±50 rpm
Without CONSULT-II
M/T: 700±50 rpm
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © GO TO 15.
EC-536

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. GI
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
System)”, EC-560. MA
© GO TO 13.
EM
LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 17.
17 CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION FE

OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © 1. Repair the timing chain installation. MT
2. GO TO 13.
AT
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). AX
Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-556 or EC-559 and AT-55, “HOW
TO ERASE DTC”.
With CONSULT-II © GO TO 19.
SU
Without CONSULT-II © GO TO 20.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-537
19 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
SEF820Y
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
OK or NG
NG (Monitor does not © GO TO 23.
fluctuate.)
NG (Monitor fluctuates © GO TO 21.
less than 5 times.)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Set “Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor (front)” in the Diagnostic Test Mode II. Refer to EC-560.
3. Maintain engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load and check that MI goes on more than five times within 10 seconds.
OK or NG
NG (MI does not go on.) © GO TO 23.
NG (MI goes on less © GO TO 21.
than 5 times.)
EC-538

With CONSULT-II GI
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. MA
4. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
6. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
EM
LC
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
3. Set “Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor (front)” in the Diagnostic Test Mode II. Refer to EC-560.
5. Maintain engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load and check that MI goes on more than five times within 10 seconds. FE
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 22.
MT
1. Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-527. AT
2. Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-633.
3. Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-942.
Clean or replace if necessary. AX
4. Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-644.
5. Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.) SU
© GO TO 3.
BR
23 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) HARNESS
1. Turn off engine and disconnect battery ground cable. ST
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector terminal 1. RS
Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-657.
OK or NG BT
OK © GO TO 25.
NG © GO TO 24. HA
24 REPAIR OR REPLACE SC
Repair or replace harness between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
© GO TO 3.
EL
IDX
EC-539
25 PREPARATION FOR “CO” % CHECK

With CONSULT-II
3. Select “COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Set “COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN” and “Qd”.
SEF172Y
Without CONSULT-II
3. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
SEF982UA
© GO TO 26.
EC-540
26 CHECK “CO” %
1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF090Y
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed.
FE
CL
MT
SEF978U
3. Check “CO” %. AT
Idle CO: 3 - 11%
4. Without CONSULT-II
After checking CO%, AX
a. Disconnect the resistor from terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor.
b. Connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor.
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 27.
NG © GO TO 28. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-541

With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
6. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
5. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 62 and ground.
6. Make sure that voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000 rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 28.

I Connect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connectors to heated oxygen sensors 1 (front).
I Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-527.
I Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-633.
I Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-942.
Clean or replace if necessary.
I Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-644.
I Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
© GO TO 3.
EC-542
Idle Air Volume Learning
Idle Air Volume Learning NJEC0562

“Idle Air Volume Learning” is an operation to learn the idle air vol-
GI
ume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be
performed under any of the following conditions: MA
I Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced.
I Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
EM
PRE-CONDITIONING NJEC0562S02
Before performing “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that all of
SEF217Z the following conditions are satisfied. LC
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are
missed for even a moment.
I Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
I PNP switch: ON
FE
I Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting CL
switch to the 1st position to light only small lamps.
I Cooling fan motor: Not operating
SEF454Y I Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) MT
I Vehicle speed: Stopped
I Transmission: Warmed-up AT
For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi-
cates less than 0.9V. AX
For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive
vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
SU
NJEC0562S03
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second. BR
SEF455Y
ST
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 9 seconds. RS
7. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
8. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds. BT
9. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
If “INCMP” is displayed, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not be HA
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the
problem by referring to the NOTE below.
10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle SC
ITEM SPECIFICATION
EL
Idle speed M/T: 700±50 rpm
IDX
Ignition timing M/T: 8±5° BTDC
A/T: 10±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)

EC-543
7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown),
then reconnect it within 5 seconds.
8. Wait 20 seconds.
9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the
JEF091Y
result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the
problem by referring to the NOTE below.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed M/T: 700±50 rpm

Ignition timing M/T: 8±5° BTDC

A/T: 10±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
NOTE:
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully,
proceed as follows:
1) Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2) Check PCV valve operation.
3) Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air
leakage.
4) Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory.
(Refer to Basic Inspection, EC-586.)
5) When the above four items check out OK, engine compo-
nent parts and their installation condition are question-
able. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem.
It is useful to perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFI-
CATION VALVE”, EC-620.
6) If any of the following conditions occur after the engine
has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and per-
form “Idle air volume learning” all over again:
I Engine stalls.
I Erroneous idle.
I Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system.
EC-544
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EUROPE - QG
Introduction
MODELS WITH EURO-OBD SYSTEM
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
NJEC0029S01
GI
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Mode 3 of ISO 15031-5 MA
Freeze Frame data Mode 2 of ISO 15031-5
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Mode 1 of ISO 15031-5 EM

1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Mode 7 of ISO 15031-5
1st Trip Freeze Frame data

LC
Test values and Test limits Mode 6 of ISO 15031-5
Calibration ID Mode 9 of ISO 15031-5
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below. FE
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze

DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code Test value CL
data Frame data
ECM*3 X X*1 — — — —
CONSULT-II X X X X X — MT
GST X X*2 X — X X
*1: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
AT
*2: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display.
*3: In diagnostic test mode II (Self-diagnostic results), DTC is displayed on MI. DTC uses a set of four digit numbers.
AX
The malfunction indicator (MI) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two
consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-602.)
MODELS WITHOUT EURO-OBD SYSTEM SU
NJEC0029S02
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: BR
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Freeze Frame data ST

1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
1st Trip Freeze Frame data RS

The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
X: Applicable —: Not applicable BT
1st trip Freeze Frame
DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data
data
HA
CONSULT-II X X X X
ECM*1 X X*2 — —
SC
*1: In diagnostic test mode II (Self-diagnostic results), (1st trip) DTC is displayed on the MI by a set of four digit numbers.
*2: When the DTC and the 1st trip DTC appear on the display simultaneously, it is difficult to clearly distinguish one from the other.
EL
Two Trip Detection Logic NJEC0030
MODELS WITH EURO-OBD SYSTEM
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in
NJEC0030S01
IDX
the ECM memory. The MI will not light up at this stage <1st trip>.
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored
in the ECM memory, and the MI lights up. The MI lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored <2nd
trip>.
EC-545
Two Trip Detection Logic (Cont’d)
The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during
vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MI, and store
DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
MI DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip

Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip
Lighting Lighting displaying displaying displaying displaying
Blinking Blinking
up up
Misfire (Possible three way

catalyst damage)
X — — — — — X —
— DTC: P0300 - P0304 is
being detected
Misfire (Possible three way

catalyst damage)
— — X — — X — —
— DTC: P0300 - P0304 is
being detected
Fail-safe items (Refer to

— X — — X*1 — X*1 —
EC-602.)
Except above — — — X — X X —
*1: Except “ECM”.

When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored
in the ECM memory. <2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which
self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode (Refer to
EC-602), the DTC is stored in the ECM memory even in the 1st trip.
Emission-related Diagnostic Information NJEC0031
MODELS WITH EURO-OBD SYSTEM NJEC0031S01
DTC and 1st Trip DTC NJEC0031S0101
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed. If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM
memory. The MI will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd
trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same mal-
function is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MI
lights up. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MI lights up when the same malfunc-
tion occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed
between the 1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or
light up the MI during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase
Emission-related Diagnostic Information”. Refer to EC-556.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-554. These items are required by legal
regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously
are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MI
and therefore does not warn the driver of a problem. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to page EC-584. Then perform “DTC Confirmation
Procedure” or “Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the problem. If the malfunction is duplicated, the
item requires repair.
How to read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II/ With GST
EC-546
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1320, P0705, P0750, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) GI
I 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
I Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, Mode II and GST do not indicate whether the
malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. MA
CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if avail-
able) is recommended.
EM
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed
in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was
driven after the last detection of a DTC. LC
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.
FE
CL
MT
SEF698X
AT
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data NJEC0031S0102
temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, AX
base fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or SU
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-572.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the BR
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no prior-
ity for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MI on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no ST
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
RS
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304 (0300 - 0304)

1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171 (0171), P0172 (0172) BT
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data

HA
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
SC
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is EL
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or
1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and
freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged IDX
in the ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase Emission-related
Diagnostic Information”. Refer to EC-556.
EC-547
System Readiness Test (SRT) Code NJEC0031S0103
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of ISO 15031-5.
As part of an emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of SRT be
used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components.
Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”,
use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer’s
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM
memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MI is “ON” during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item NJEC0031S0107
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item Perfor-
Corresponding
(CONSULT-II indica- mance Pri- Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
DTC No.
tion) ority*1
CATALYST 3 Three way catalyst function P0420
O2 SENSOR 3 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (circuit) P0130
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (lean shift monitoring) P0131
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (rich shift monitoring) P0132
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (response monitoring) P0133
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (high voltage) P0134
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (min. voltage monitoring) P0137
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (max. voltage monitoring) P0138
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (response monitoring) P0139
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (high voltage) P0140
O2 SEN HEATER 3 Front heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) P0135
Rear heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (rear) P0141
EGR SYSTEM 3 EGR function (close) P0400
1 EGR function (open) P1402
*1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority
for models with CONSULT-II.
SRT Set Timing NJEC0031S0108

SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done
regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is
shown in the table below.
EC-548
Example
Self-diagnosis result
Diagnosis
Ignition cycle GI
+ ON , OFF + ON , OFF + ON , OFF + ON ,
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)

MA
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)

EM
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1) LC

P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — — FE

P0402 — — — —
NG CL
P1402 NG — NG
(Consecutive NG)
(1st trip) DTC MT

1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL “ON”)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”

AT
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out. AX
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT
will indicate “CMPLT”. , Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indi- SU
cate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. , Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. , Case 3 above BR
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary of each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following ST
reasons:
I The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
RS
I The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
I When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diag-
nosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair. BT
I If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior HA
to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure NJEC0031S0109
SC
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
EL
IDX
EC-549
SEF573XB
*1 EC-546 *2 EC-550 *3 EC-551
How to Display SRT Code NJEC0031S0110

1. With CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose
SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed as shown below.
EC-550
GI
MA
EM
SEF821Y LC
2. With GST
Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
How to Set SRT Code NJEC0031S0111
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each FE
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
With CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on “Performance Priority” in the table CL
on EC-601.
Without CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The MT
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-551
Driving Pattern =NJEC0031S0112
SEF822Y
EC-552
I The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time required, for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the GI
shortest. Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not
completed within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following: MA
− Sea level
− Flat road EM
− Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
− Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag- LC
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
I The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F) (where the volt-
age between the ECM terminals 70 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
I The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C FE
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminals 70 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
I The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 82 and ground is less than 4.1V). CL
Pattern 2:
I When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. MT
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h AT
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with CONSULT-II or GST is advised.
Suggested transmission gear position for A/T models AX
Set the selector lever in the “D” position with “OD” ON.
Suggested upshift speeds for M/T models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel SU
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather
and individual driving habits.
ACCEL shift point
BR
Gear change
km/h (MPH)
1st to 2nd 15 (9) ST

2nd to 3rd 35 (22)
3rd to 4th 50 (31) RS

4th to 5th 70 (43)
BT
Test Value and Test Limit (GST only — not applicable to CONSULT-II) NJEC0031S0104
The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of ISO 15031-5.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is “OK” or “NG” while HA
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items (14 test SC
items).
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen. EL
SRT item Self-diagnostic test item

Test value (GST display)
Test limit Application
IDX
TID CID
01H 01H Max. X

CATALYST Three way catalyst function
02H 81H Min. X
EC-553
Test value (GST display)

SRT item Self-diagnostic test item Test limit Application
TID CID
09H 04H Max. X
0AH 84H Min. X

Heated oxygen sensor 1
0BH 04H Max. X
(front)
0CH 04H Max. X
HO2S 0DH 04H Max. X
19H 86H Min. X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 1AH 86H Min. X

(rear) 1BH 06H Max. X
1CH 06H Max. X
Heated oxygen sensor 1 29H 08H Max. X

heater (front) 2AH 88H Min. X
HO2S HTR
Heated oxygen sensor 2 2DH 0AH Max. X
heater (rear) 2EH 8AH Min. X
31H 8CH Min. X
32H 8CH Min. X
EGR SYSTEM EGR function 33H 8CH Min. X
34H 8CH Min. X
35H 0CH Max. X
Emission-related Diagnostic Information Items NJEC0031S0105

Test value/Test
Items
DTC*1 SRT code limit 1st trip DTC*1 Reference page
(GST only)
NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAIL-

P0000 — — — —
URE INDICATED
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0100 — — X EC-633
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 — — X EC-639
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC P0115 — — X EC-644
THRTL POS SEN/CIRC P0120 — — X EC-649
HO2S1 (B1) P0130 X X X*2 EC-657
HO2S1 (B1) P0131 X X X*2 EC-664
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 X X X*2 EC-670
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 X X X*2 EC-676
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 X X X*2 EC-685
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 X X X*2 EC-691
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 X X X*2 EC-696
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 X X X*2 EC-705
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 X X X*2 EC-713
EC-554
Test value/Test
Items
(GST only) GI
HO2S2 (B1) P0140 X X X*2 EC-722
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 X X X*2 EC-728 MA

FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 P0171 — — X EC-733
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 P0172 — — X EC-740

EM
FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC*3 P0180 — — X EC-747
LC
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 — — X EC-752
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 — — X EC-752

FE
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325 — — — EC-758

CL
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT (POS) P0335 — — X EC-762
CMP SEN/CIRCUIT (PHS) P0340 — — X EC-768 MT

EGR SYSTEM P0400 X X X*2 EC-775
EGR VOL CONT/V CIRC P0403 — — X EC-783 AT

TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 X X X*2 EC-790
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 — — X EC-795 AX

VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 — — X EC-800
IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 — — X EC-805 SU

CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 — — X EC-813
ECM P0605 — — X EC-819 BR

Refer to AT sec-
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 — — X
tion. ST
Refer to AT sec-
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 — — X
tion.
RS
Refer to AT sec-
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 — — X
tion.
Refer to AT sec- BT
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 — — X
tion.
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 — — X

Refer to AT sec- HA
tion.
Refer to AT sec-
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 — — X
tion. SC
Refer to AT sec-
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 — — X
tion. EL
Refer to AT sec-
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 — — X
tion.
IDX
Refer to AT sec-
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 — — X
tion.
Refer to AT sec-
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 — — X
tion.
EC-555
Test value/Test
Items
(GST only)
Refer to AT sec-
SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 — — X
tion.
Refer to AT sec-
SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 — — X
tion.
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 — — X EC-821
SWIRL CONT SOL/V P1131 — — X EC-826
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 — — X EC-833
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P1401 — — X EC-845
EGR SYSTEM P1402 X X X*2 EC-851
A/T DIAG COMM LINE P1605 — — X EC-859
Refer to AT sec-
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 — — X
tion.
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 — — X EC-862
Refer to AT sec-
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 — — X
tion.

*2: These are not displayed with GST.
*3: If so equipped
How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information NJEC0031S0106

How to Erase DTC (With CONSULT-II)
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-498), skip steps 2 through 4.
1) If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
2) Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3) Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4) Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
twice.
5) Touch “ENGINE”.
7) Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
I If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased
individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
EC-556
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF823Y
SU
The emission-related diagnostic information can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
BR
How to Erase DTC ( With GST)
NOTE: ST
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-498), skip step 2.
9 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. RS
2) Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)” in AT section titled “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS”, “Self-diagnosis”. (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis
only to erase the DTC.) BT
3) Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
The emission-related diagnostic information can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). HA
NOTE:
24 hours. SC
I Erasing the emission-related diagnostic information using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and
quicker than switching the mode using the data link connector.
I The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
EL
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes IDX
4) 1st trip freeze frame data
5) System readiness test (SRT) codes
6) Test values
EC-557
7) Distance traveled while MI is activated
8) Others
all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. If the same mal-
function is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from
the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored
in the ECM memory. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory when the same malfunction occurs
in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the
1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For fail-safe items, the DTC is stored in the
ECM memory even in the 1st trip.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase
Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, EC-559.
When a (1st trip) DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to EC-584. Then perform “DTC Confirmation Proce-
dure” or “Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the problem. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item
requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
Without CONSULT-II
ECM displays the DTC by a set of four digit numbers with MI illumination in the diagnostic test mode II (Self-
diagnostic results). Example: 0100, 0115, 0340, 1335, etc.
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. Examples: P0100, P0115, P0340, P1335,
etc.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
I 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
I Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, ECM in the diagnostic test mode II (Self-diag-
nostic results) does not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the
past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below.
Therefore, the use of CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.
A sample CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in the SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many
times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.
SEF992X
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data NJEC0031S0702
temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, throttle valve opening, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
EC-558
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II. For
details, see EC-572.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the GI
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no prior-
ity for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, MA
only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM.
If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and another freeze frame data occurs later, the first (origi-
nal) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the ECM memory. EM
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase Emission-related
Diagnostic Information”, EC-559. LC
How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information NJEC0031S0706
How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II)
2) Touch “ENGINE”. FE
4) Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF993XA RS
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. BT
How to Erase DTC ( Without CONSULT-II)
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. HA
2) Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by using the data link connector. (See EC-562.)
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by changing the diagnostic test mode. SC
24 hours.
I Erasing the emission-related diagnostic information using CONSULT-II is easier and quicker than EL
I The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
IDX
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
5) Others
EC-559
all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) NJEC0591

I If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch
in the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is dis-
played on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-
diagnostic results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS pro-
gram card. Refer to NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) in EL
section.
I Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NATS is displayed
before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF543X I When replacing ECM, initialization of NATS system and
registration of all NATS ignition key IDs must be carried
out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner.
Regarding the procedure of NATS initialization and NATS
ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation
manual, NATS.
Malfunction Indicator (MI)

SAT652J
The MI is located on the instrument panel.

1. The MI will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
I If the MI does not light up, refer to EL-226, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-988.
2. When the engine is started, the MI should go off.
If the MI remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.
EC-560
Malfunction Indicator (MI) (Cont’d)
The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.
Diagnostic Test Mode I GI
1. BULB CHECK:
This function checks the MI bulb for damage (blown, open circuit, etc.).
If the MI does not come on, check MI circuit and ECM test mode selector. (See the following page.) MA
2. MALFUNCTION WARNING:
MI Condition EM
OFF No malfunction. LC
Diagnostic Test Mode II

3. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS:
This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
4. HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR (FRONT): FE
This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or rich), monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1 (front),
to be read.
MI Flashing without DTC NJEC0032S0101
CL
If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MI may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM test
mode following “How to Switch Diagnostic Test Modes”.
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later. MT
(Refer to EC-562.)
Condition Diagnostic Test Mode I Diagnostic Test Mode II AT
Engine stopped
BULB CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS AX
Ignition switch in “ON” position
Engine running
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
SU
MALFUNCTION WARNING
MONITOR (FRONT)
BR
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
ST
4) 1st trip freeze frame data RS
6) Test values
7) Distance traveled while MI is activated
BT
8) Others
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-561
SEF951WA
*1: EC-988 *3: EC-988 *4: EC-602

*2: EC-560
EC-562
In this mode, the MI on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the MI bulb. Refer to
EL-226, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-988. GI
MI Condition
MA
EM
OFF No malfunction.
I These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS). LC
In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MI as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MI does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode
I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MI illu-
minates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are FE
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uni-
dentified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how
to read a code. CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF952W RS
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds BT
consisting of an ON (0.6-second)-OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0 second OFF. In other words, the lat- HA
ter numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8 second off.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC “0000” refers to no SC
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) NJEC0032S0501 EL
Diagnostic Test Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I. (Refer to “How To Switch Diagnostic Test Modes”, EC-562.)
I If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory after approx. 24 hours. IDX
Diagnostic Test Mode II — Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor (Front) NJEC0032S06
In this mode, the MI displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated
oxygen sensor 1 (front).
EC-563
MI Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean
Closed loop system
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system
*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.

To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm
it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the
MI comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load.
OBD System Operation Chart (With Euro-OBD
Models Only) NJEC0033
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS NJEC0033S01
I When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
I When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MI will come on. For details, refer to “Two Trip Detection Logic” on
EC-545.
I The MI will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset.
I The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel
Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driv-
ing pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS”
mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
I The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in “OK” for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART NJEC0033S02
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MI (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display) 80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear) *1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
For details about patterns “B” and “C” under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-566.
For details about patterns “A” and “B” under “Other”, see EC-568.
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
EC-564
OBD System Operation Chart (With Euro-OBD Models Only) (Cont’d)
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” NJEC0033S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF392SA
HA
*1: When the same malfunction is data will not be displayed any freeze frame data will be cleared
detected in two consecutive trips, longer after vehicle is driven 80 at the moment OK is detected.
SC
MI will light up. times (pattern C) without the same *7: When the same malfunction is
*2: MI will go off after vehicle is driven malfunction. detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
3 times (pattern B) without any (The DTC and the freeze frame trip freeze frame data will be EL
malfunctions. data still remain in ECM.) cleared.
*3: When the same malfunction is *5: When a malfunction is detected *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
detected in two consecutive trips, for the first time, the 1st trip DTC vehicle is driven once (pattern C) IDX
the DTC and the freeze frame and the 1st trip freeze frame data without the same malfunction after
data will be stored in ECM. will be stored in ECM. DTC is stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
EC-565
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” NJEC0033S04
Driving Pattern B NJEC0033S0401
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
I The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
I The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
I The MI will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in EC-565)
Driving Pattern C NJEC0033S0402
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
1) The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) × (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
I When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
I When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
I The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of driving pattern C.
I The C counter will be counted up when driving pattern C is satisfied without the same malfunction.
I The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
I The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
EC-566
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” NJEC0033S05
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF393SA
HA
*1: When the same malfunction is *4: The DTC and the freeze frame and the 1st trip freeze frame data
detected in two consecutive trips, data will not be displayed any will be stored in ECM.
SC
MI will light up. longer after vehicle is driven 40 *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
*2: MI will go off after vehicle is driven times (pattern A) without the same vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
3 times (pattern B) without any malfunction. without the same malfunction. EL
malfunctions. (The DTC and the freeze frame *7: When the same malfunction is
*3: When the same malfunction is data still remain in ECM.) detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
detected in two consecutive trips, *5: When a malfunction is detected trip freeze frame data will be IDX
the DTC and the freeze frame for the first time, the 1st trip DTC cleared.
data will be stored in ECM.
EC-567
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” NJEC0033S06
Driving Pattern A NJEC0033S0601
AEC574
I The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
I The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
I The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
Driving Pattern B NJEC0033S0602
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
I The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
I The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
I The MI will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in EC-567).
EC-568
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II =NJEC0034
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NJEC0034S01
GI
(Data link connector is located under lower dash panel near MA
the fuse box cover.)
EM
SEF094Y LC
FE
CL
PBR455D
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF995X

procedure. ST
For further information, see the GI-37 regarding CONSULT-II.
RS
BT
HA
SEF824Y
SC
EL
IDX
EC-569
SYSTEMS APPLICATION NJEC0034S02
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT

WORK RESULTS CONFIRMATION
Item DATA ACTIVE
SUP- FREEZE DTC
MONITOR TEST SRT
PORT DTC*1 FRAME WORK
STATUS
DATA*2 SUPPORT
Engine Engine
X speed speed
(PHASE)
X X

X*3
(POS)

X X X X
sensor
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) X X X*3 X*3
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) X*3 X X*3 X*3

Vehicle speed sensor X X X
Throttle position sensor X X
Fuel tank temperature sensor X
EGR temperature sensor*4 X*3 X

INPUT
Intake air temperature sensor X*3 X X
Knock sensor X
Closed throttle position switch X*3 X
Closed throttle position switch

X
(throttle position sensor signal)
Park/Neutral position (PNP)

X*3 X
switch
Power steering oil pressure

X
switch
Electrical load X
Heater fan switch X
Battery voltage X
EC-570
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT GI

WORK RESULTS CONFIRMATION
Item DATA ACTIVE
SUP- FREEZE DTC
MONITOR TEST
PORT DTC*1 FRAME
SRT
WORK MA
STATUS
DATA*2 SUPPORT
Injectors X X EM
Power transistor (Ignition tim- X*3
X X
ing) (misfire)
LC
IACV-AAC valve X*3 X X
Intake valve timing control sole-

X X
noid valve
EVAP canister purge volume

X*3 X X
control solenoid valve FE
OUTPUT Fuel pump relay X X X CL

EGR volume control valve X*3 X X X*3
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater MT

X*3 X X*3
(front)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

X*3 X X*3 AT
(rear)
Cooling fan X X
AX
Swirl control valve control sole-
X*3 X X
noid valve
Calculated load value X X SU

X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs. BR
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-547, EC-558.
*3: Not applicable for models without Euro-OBD system ST
*4: If so equipped
FUNCTION NJEC0034S03 RS
Diagnostic test mode Function
Work support
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the BT
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame
Self-diagnostic results
data can be read and erased quickly.*1 HA
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Data monitor (spec) Specification with basic fuel schedule, MAS A/F sensor and A/F alpha can be read.
SC
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range. EL
DTC and SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECM part number ECM part numbers can be read. IDX

*1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
EC-571
6) Test values
7) Distance traveled while MI is activated.
8) Others
WORK SUPPORT MODE NJEC0034S04
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
I FOLLOW THE BASIC INSPECTION INSTRUCTION IN When adjusting the idle throttle
TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ
THE SERVICE MANUAL. position
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE I FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” When releasing fuel pressure
DURING IDLING. from fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN I THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT I THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clear the coefficient of self-
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL learnign control value
COEFFICIENT.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* I IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGNITION TIMING ADJ* I IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
After adjustment, confirm target
ignition timing with a timing light.
I If once the “TARGET IDLE
RPM ADJ” has been done, the
Idle Air Volume Learning proce-
dure will not be completed.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE NJEC0034S05

Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”, EC-498.
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
NJEC0034S0502
Freeze frame data

Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
I Engine Control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer to
CODE
“Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC”, EC-498.)
[PXXXX]
I “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

I One mode in the following is displayed.
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B1
“MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
“MODE 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] I The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]

I The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
I “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] I The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
EC-572
Freeze frame data

Description
item*
GI
I “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] I The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule. MA
ENGINE SPEED
I The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
EM
VEHICL SPEED
I The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
ABSOL TH·P/S [%] I The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. LC
B/FUEL SCHDL
I The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]

I The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
FE
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE NJEC0034S06 CL

ECM
Main
signals
signals MT
I Accuracy becomes poor if engine
I Indicates the engine speed computed from speed drops below the idle rpm. AT
ENG SPEED [rpm] q q the POS signal of the crankshaft position I If the signal is interrupted while the
sensor. engine is running, an abnormal
value may be indicated.
AX
I The signal voltage of the mass air flow sen- I When the engine is stopped, a cer-
sor is displayed. tain value is indicated.
SU
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
BR
I When the engine is stopped, a cer-
I Indicates the mean value of the air-fuel ratio tain value is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] q
feedback correction factor per cycle. I This data also includes the data for ST
I When the engine coolant tempera-

ture sensor is open or short- RS
I The engine coolant temperature (deter-
COOLAN TEMP/S circuited, ECM enters fail-safe
q q mined by the signal voltage of the engine
[°C] or [°F] mode. The engine coolant tempera-
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. BT
ture determined by the ECM is dis-
played.
I The signal voltage of the heated oxygen HA

HO2S1 (B1) [V] q q
sensor 1 (front) is displayed.
I The signal voltage of the heated oxygen

HO2S2 (B1) [V] q
sensor 2 (rear) is displayed. SC
I Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
I After turning ON the ignition switch,
signal during air-fuel ratio feedback control:
RICH ... means the mixture became “rich”,
“RICH” is displayed until air-fuel EL
mixture ratio feedback control
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) and control is being affected toward a
q begins.
[RICH/LEAN] leaner mixture.
I When the air-fuel ratio feedback is IDX
LEAN ... means the mixture became “lean”,
clamped, the value just before the
and control is being affected toward a rich
clamping is displayed continuously.
mixture.
EC-573
ECM
Main
signals
signals
I Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)

signal:
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) RICH ... means the amount of oxygen after I When the engine is stopped, a cer-
q
[RICH/LEAN] three way catalyst is relatively small. tain value is indicated.
LEAN ... means the amount of oxygen after
three way catalyst is relatively large.
VHCL SPEED SE I The vehicle speed computed from the

q q
[km/h] or [mph] vehicle speed sensor signal is displayed.
I The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-

BATTERY VOLT [V] q
played.
I The throttle position sensor signal voltage is

THRTL POS SEN [V] q q
displayed.
I The fuel temperature judged from the fuel

FUEL T/TMP SE
tank temperature sensor signal voltage is
[°C] or [°F]
displayed.
I The intake air temperature determined by

INT/A TEMP SE
q the signal voltage of the intake air tempera-
[°C] or [°F]
ture sensor is indicated.
I The signal voltage of the EGR temperature

EGR TEMP SEN [V] q q
sensor is displayed.
I After starting the engine, [OFF] is

START SIGNAL I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
q q displayed regardless of the starter
[ON/OFF] starter signal.
signal.
I Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed

CLSD THL POS
q q by ECM according to the throttle position
[ON/OFF]
sensor signal.
CLSD THL/P SW I Indicates mechanical contact [ON/OFF] con-

q
[ON/OFF] dition of the closed throttle position switch.
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air con-

AIR COND SIG
q q ditioner switch as determined by the air
[ON/OFF]
conditioning signal.
P/N POSI SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the PNP

q q
[ON/OFF] switch signal.
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the power

PW/ST SIGNAL steering oil pressure switch determined by
q q
[ON/OFF] the power steering oil pressure switch sig-
nal.
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the elec-

trical load signal and/or lighting switch.
LOAD SIGNAL ON ... rear defogger is operating and/or
q q
[ON/OFF] lighting switch is on.
OFF ... rear defogger is not operating and
lighting switch is not on.
IGNITION SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition

q
[ON/OFF] switch.
HEATER FAN SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the

q
[ON/OFF] heater fan switch.
I Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse

INJ PULSE-B1 I When the engine is stopped, a cer-
q width compensated by ECM according to
[msec] tain computed value is indicated.
the input signals.
EC-574
ECM
Main
signals
signals GI
I Indicates the ignition timing computed by
IGN TIMING [BTDC] q
ECM according to the input signals. MA
I “Calculated load value” indicates the value
CAL/LD VALUE [%] of the current airflow divided by peak air-
flow. EM
I “Absolute throttle position sensor” indicates
the throttle opening computed by ECM LC
ABSOL TH.P/S [%]
according to the signal voltage of the
throttle position sensor.
I Indicates the mass airflow computed by

MASS AIRFLOW
ECM according to the signal voltage of the
[gm/s]
mass air flow sensor.
I Indicates the IACV-AAC valve control value

FE
IACV-AAC/V [step] q computed by ECM according to the input
signals.
CL
I Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve computed by the
PURG VOL C/V [%] ECM according to the inpuct signals. MT
I The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
I Indicates the EGR volume control valve AT

computed by the ECM according to the
EGR VOL CON/V
q input signals.
[step]
I The opening becomes larger as the value AX
increases.
I The control condition of the swirl control

valve control solenoid valve (determined by
SU
SWRL CONT S/V ECM according to the input signals) is indi-
[ON/OFF] cated.
I ON ... Swirl control valve is closed. BR
OFF ... Swirl control valve is opened.
I The control condition of the valve timing ST

solenoid valve (determined by ECM accord-
INT/V SOL-B1 ing to the input signal) is indicated.
[ON/OFF] ON ... Intake valve timing control operating
OFF ... Intake valve timing control not oper-
RS
ating
AIR COND RLY

I Indicates the air conditioner relay control BT
q condition determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signals.
I Indicates the fuel pump relay control condi-

HA
FUEL PUMP RLY
q tion determined by ECM according to the
[ON/OFF]
input signals.
SC
I Indicates [ON/OFF] control condition of the
COOLING FAN
q cooling fan determined by ECM according
[ON/OFF]
to the input signals. EL
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxy-
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
gen sensor 1 heater (front) determined by
[ON/OFF]
ECM according to the input signals. IDX
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxy-
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
gen sensor 2 heater (rear) determined by
[ON/OFF]
ECM according to the input signals.
EC-575
ECM
Main
signals
signals
I Display the condition of idle air volume

learning
YET ... Idle air volume learning has not
been performed yet.
IDL A/V LEARN
CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.
INCMP ... Idle air volume learning has not
been performed successfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL

I Distance traveled while MI is activated
[km] or [Mile]
VOLTAGE [V] I Voltage measured by the voltage probe.
I Only “#” is displayed if item is

unable to be measured.
PULSE I Pulse width, frequency or duty cycle mea- I Figures with “#”s are temporary
[msec] or [Hz] or [%] sured by the pulse probe. ones. They are the same figures as
an actual piece of data which was
just previously measured.
NOTE:
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE NJEC0034S11
ECM
Main
signals
signals
I The signal voltage of the mass air flow sen- I When the engine is running, specifi-
sor specification is displayed. cation range is indicated.

B/FUEL SCHDL I When the engine is running, specifi-
[msec] cation range is indicated.
I When the engine is running, specifi-

I Indicates the mean value of the air-fuel ratio cation range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] q
NOTE:

trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
FUEL INJECTION I Fuel injectors
I Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
tion using CONSULT-II.
I “Idle Air Volume Leaning” (Refer

to EC-543.)
I Camshaft position sensor
trouble condition
If trouble symptom disappears, see (PHASE)
IGNITION TIMING I Timing light: Set
CHECK ITEM. I Crankshaft position sensor
I Retard the ignition timing using
(POS)
CONSULT-II.
I Engine component parts and
installing conditions
EC-576
I Engine: After warming up, idle GI

the engine.
IACV-AAC/V Engine speed changes according I Harness and connector
I Change the IACV-AAC valve
OPENING to the opening steps. I IACV-AAC valve
opening steps using CONSULT- MA
II.
I Engine: After warming up, idle I Harness and connector

the engine. I Compression EM
POWER BAL- I Air conditioner switch “OFF” I Injectors
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE I Shift lever “N” I Power transistor
I Cut off each injector signal one I Spark plugs LC
at a time using CONSULT-II. I Ignition coils
COOLING FAN I Turn the cooling fan “ON” and Cooling fan moves and stops.
I Cooling fan motor
I Engine: Return to the original FE

trouble condition
ENG COOLANT If trouble symptom disappears, see I Engine coolant temperature sen-
I Change the engine coolant tem-
TEMP CHECK ITEM. sor
perature indication using CON- CL
I Fuel injectors
SULT-II.
(Engine stopped) MT
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- I Harness and connector
I Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
RELAY ing sound. I Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound. AT
the engine.
EGR VOL Engine speed changes according I Harness and connector AX
I Change the EGR volume control
CONT/V to the opening step. I EGR volume control valve
valve opening step using CON-
SULT-II.
SU
I Turn intake valve timing control I Harness and connector
VALVE TIMING Intake valve timing control solenoid
solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” I Intake valve timing control sole- BR
SOL valve makes an operating sound.
using CONSULT-II and listen for noid valve
operating sound.
I Ignition switch: ON ST
SWIRL CONT I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector
SOL VALVE “OFF” with CONSULT-II and lis- sound. I Solenoid valve
ten for operating sound. RS
the engine.
I Harness and connector BT
PURG VOL I Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according
I EVAP canister purge volume
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve to the opening percent.
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II. HA
DTC AND SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
This mode is not available for models without Euro-OBD system.
NJEC0034S08
SC
SRT STATUS Mode NJEC0034S0801
For details, refer to “SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE”, EL
EC-548.
SRT Work Support Mode NJEC0034S0803
IDX
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT
while monitoring the SRT status.
EC-577
DTC Work Support Mode NJEC0034S0802
TEST MODE TEST ITEM CONDITION REFERENCE PAGE
HO2S1 (B1) P0130 EC-657
HEATED OXYGEN SEN- HO2S1 (B1) P0131 EC-664

SOR 1 (FRONT) HO2S1 (B1) P0132 EC-670
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-676

Refer to corresponding
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 trouble diagnosis for EC-696
HEATED OXYGEN SEN- DTC.
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 EC-705
SOR 2 (REAR)
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-713
EGR SYSTEM P0400 EC-775

EGR SYSTEM
EGR SYSTEM P1402 EC-851
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE

(RECORDING VEHICLE DATA) NJEC0034S10
real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
SEF705Y in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ...
xx%” as shown at left, and the data after the malfunction detec-
MANUAL.
I DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
SEF707X automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
1) “AUTO TRIG”
I While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure to select to “DATA
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunc-
tion at the moment it is detected.
EC-578
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction GI
is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to
GI-23, “Incident Simulation Tests”.)
2) “MANU TRIG” MA
“MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF714Y
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-579
Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Generic Scan Tool (GST) =NJEC0035

Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with ISO15031-4
has 9 different functions explained on the next page.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service
manual.
SEF139P
GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE NJEC0035S02

2. Connect “GST” to data link connector. (Data link connector is
located under lower dash panel near the fuse box cover.)
SEF094Y

4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF398S
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service pro-

cedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the
tool maker.
SEF416S
EC-580
Generic Scan Tool (GST) (Cont’d)
FUNCTION NJEC0035S03
Diagnostic test mode Function GI

This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog
MODE 1 READINESS TESTS inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, distance traveled while MI is activated
and system status information. MA
This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM
MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA)
during the freeze frame. (For details, refer to “Freeze Frame Data”, EC-572.) EM
This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were
MODE 3 DTCs
stored by ECM.
LC
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
I Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1)
I Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3)
MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO I Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1)
I Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2)
I Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1)
I Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7) FE
This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific
MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS)
components/systems that are not continuously monitored. CL
This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related
MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS) powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving
conditions. MT
MODE 8 — This mode is not applicable on this vehicle.
This mode enables the off-board (External test equipment) to request specific vehicle
AT
MODE 9 (CALIBRATION ID)
information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-581
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION EUROPE - QG
Introduction
control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM
accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators.
It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and
stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no problems
such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other problems with
the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermit-
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
MEF036D
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-584.
tomer can supply good information about such problems, espe-
cially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and
under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first.
SEF233G
This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically
controlled engine vehicle.
SEF234G

trouble-shooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is
customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to
come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected.
SEF907L
Example:
Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
EC-582
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
MTBL0311
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-583
Work Flow
Work Flow NJEC0563
SEF510ZB
*1 EC-602 *4 If the on board diagnostic system detected, perform “TROUBLE

*2 If time data of “SELF-DIAG cannot be performed, check main DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
RESULTS” is other than “0” or power supply and ground circuit. TENT INCIDENT”, EC-624.
“[1t]”, perform “TROUBLE DIAG- Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS *6 EC-552
NOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT FOR POWER SUPPLY”, EC-625. *7 EC-620
INCIDENT”, EC-624. *5 If malfunctioning part cannot be
*3 If the incident cannot be verified,
perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”,
EC-624.
EC-584
STEP DESCRIPTION GI
STEP I
the “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”, EC-583.
MA
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC
and the (1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-556, EC-559.) The (1st trip)
DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV. EM
STEP II If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-624.
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the cus-
tomer. (The “Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. See EC-603.)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
LC
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CON-
STEP III SULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V. FE
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read
the (1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO CL
TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The MT
(1st trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV. AT
If the normal code is indicated, proceed refer to “BASIC INSPECTION”, EC-586. If CONSULT-II is available, per-
STEP V AX
form “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS-SPECIFI-
CATION VALUE”, EC-620. (If a malfunction is detected, proceed to “REPAIR/REPLACE”.) Then perform inspec-
tions according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-603.)
SU
BR
SULT-II. Refer to EC-612.
STEP VI
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit ST
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to GI section
(“HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”, “Circuit Inspection”).
Repair or replace the malfunction parts. RS
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”,
EC-624.
BT
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the
STEP VII
incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method from the previous one. HA
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in
ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-556, EC-559.)
SC
EL
IDX
EC-585
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION EUROPE - QG
Basic Inspection

Precaution:
loads applied;
On vehicle equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting
switch to the 1st position to light only small lamps.
I Rear window defogger switch is OFF,
1 INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related problem, or a current need for scheduled
maintenance.
I Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
I Wiring for improper connections, pinches and cuts
I Hoses and ducts for leaks
SEF983U
© GO TO 2.
2 CHECK THROTTLE OPENER OPERATION-I

Confirm that there is a clearance between throttle drum and stopper.
SEF850Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
EC-586
3 CHECK THROTTLE OPENER FIXING BOLTS

Check throttle opener fixing bolts for loosening. GI
OK or NG
OK © 1. Repair or replace throttle body assembly. MA
2. GO TO 2.
NG © 1. Retighten the fixing bolts.
2. GO TO 2. EM
4 CHECK THROTTLE OPENER OPERATION-II LC

2. Confirm that throttle opener rod moves backward and there is a clearance between throttle drum and throttle opener
rod.
FE
CL
MT
SEF850Y AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. AX
NG © GO TO 5.
SU
5 CHECK VACUUM SOURCE FOR THROTTLE OPENER
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to throttle opener. BR
2. Check vacuum existance with engine running.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF155Y
OK or NG
OK © 1. Repair or replace throttle body assembly.
SC
2. GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 6. EL
IDX
EC-587
6 CHECK VACUUM HOSE

1. Stop engine.
2. Remove the vacuum hose.
3. Check the vacuum hose for splits, kinks and clogging.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK © 1. Clean vacuum port by blowing air.
2. GO TO 4.
NG © 1. Replace vacuum hose.
2. GO TO 4.
7 CHECK THROTTLE DRUM OPERATION

Confirm that throttle drum moves to contact the stopper.
SEF850Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 8.
8 CHECK ACCELERATOR WIRE INSTALLATION

1. Stop engine.
2. Check accelerator wire for slack.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © 1. Adjust accelerator wire. Refer to FE-3, “Adjusting Accelerator Wire”.
2. GO TO 7.
EC-588
9 CHECK THROTTLE VALVE OPERATION

1. Remove intake air ducts. GI
2. Check throttle valve operation when moving throttle drum by hand.
OK or NG
MA
OK © 1. Retighten the throttle drum fixing nuts.
2. GO TO 7.
NG © 1. Clean the throttle body and throttle valve. EM
2. GO TO 7.
LC
10 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I
NOTE:
2. Stop engine.
3. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener. FE
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump as shown below.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF793WA
5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (–400 mbar, −300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum is free from the
throttle opener rod. SU
Models with CONSULT-II © GO TO 11.
Models without CON- © GO TO 15. BR
SULT-II
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-589
11 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II

With CONSULT-II
1. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector and select “ENGINE” from the menu. Refer to EC-569.
3. Select “TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Read “CLSD THL/P SW” signal under the following conditions.
I Insert a 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between stopper and throttle drum as
shown in the figure and check the signal.
SEF073X
SEF715Y
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “ON” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge.
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “OFF” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 12.
EC-590
12 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I

With CONSULT-II GI
2. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to test No. 10. During adjustment, vacuum should be applied.
3. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure. MA
EM
LC
SEF073X
FE
4. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches to “OFF”.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF863Y
© GO TO 13. SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-591
13 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II

With CONSULT-II
I Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it when “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches from “OFF” to
“ON”, then temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts.
SEF964W
2. Make sure two or three times that the signal is “ON” when the throttle valve is closed and “OFF” when it is opened.
4. Make sure two or three times that the signal remains “OFF” when the throttle valve is closed.
6. Check the “CLSD THL/P SW” signal again.
SEF716Y
The signal remains “OFF” while closing throttle valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 12.
EC-592
14 RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY

With CONSULT-II GI
NOTE:
tion memory will not be reset correctly. MA
1. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to Test No. 10.
2. Attach blind cap to vacuum port from which vacuum hose to throttle opener was disconnected.
3. Start engine.
EM
5. Select “TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF864V
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF715Y
ST
© GO TO 19.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-593
15 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II

Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions.
SEF711X
I Insert the 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between the stopper and throttle drum
SEF073X
“Continuity should exist” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge.
“Continuity should not exist” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 16.
EC-594
16 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I

2. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to Test No. 10. During adjustment, vacuum should be applied.
3. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure. MA
EM
LC
SEF073X
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF711X
4. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until continuity does not exist.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF964W
RS
© GO TO 17. BT
17 CHECK (1ST TRIP) DTC

HA
2. Release vacuum from throttle opener.
3. Remove vacuum pump and vacuum hose from throttle opener. SC
4. Reinstall original vacuum hose to throttle opener securely.
6. Rev (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times. EL
7. Make sure no (1st trip) DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
IDX
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © GO TO 18.
EC-595
18 REPAIR MALFUNCTION
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”.
© GO TO 17.

With CONSULT-II
M/T: 700±50 rpm
Without CONSULT-II
M/T: 700±50 rpm
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 29.
NG © GO TO 20.

CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © GO TO 21.
INCMP © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Leaning”.
2. GO TO 20.

With CONSULT-II
M/T: 700±50 rpm
Without CONSULT-II
M/T: 700±50 rpm
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 27.
NG (Models with Euro- © GO TO 23.
OBD system)
NG (Models without © GO TO 22.
Euro-OBD system)
EC-596
22 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check IACV-AAC valve circuit for open and short. Refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-808.
OK or NG
MA
OK © GO TO 23.
NG © 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 24. EM
23 REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE LC

© GO TO 24.

FE
CMPLT or INCMP CL
CMPLT © GO TO 25.
INCMP © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”. MT
2. GO TO 20.
AT
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. AX
M/T: 700±50 rpm SU
Without CONSULT-II
BR
M/T: 700±50 rpm
ST
OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 27.
NG © GO TO 26. BT

HA
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely
the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to “NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft SC
System)”, EC-560.
© GO TO 20.
EL
IDX
EC-597

SEF984U
Ignition timing:
M/T 8°±5° BTDC
A/T 10°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 35.
NG © GO TO 28.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 26.
2. GO TO 20.

SEF984U
Ignition timing:
M/T 8°±5° BTDC
A/T 10°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 35.
NG © GO TO 20.
EC-598

Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-543. GI
CMPLT or INCMP
MA
CMPLT © GO TO 31.
INCMP © 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 30. EM
31 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN LC

With CONSULT-II
M/T: 700±50 rpm
A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) FE
Without CONSULT-II
CL
M/T: 700±50 rpm
A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 33. AT
NG © GO TO 32.
AX
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. SU
System)”, EC-560. BR
© GO TO 30.
ST
RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 35.
BT
NG © GO TO 34.

HA
OK or NG SC
OK © GO TO 32.
NG © 1. Repair the timing chain installation. EL
2. GO TO 30.
IDX
EC-599

Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
Refer to “How to Erase Emission-Related Diagnostic Information”, EC-556 or EC-559 and AT-55, “HOW TO ERASE DTC”.
© INSPECTION END
EC-600
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION EUROPE - QG
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
DTC Inspection Priority Chart NJEC0039

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following prior-
ity chart. GI
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 I P0100 Mass air flow sensor

MA
I P0110 Intake air temperature sensor
I P0115 Engine coolant temperature sensor
I P0120 Throttle position sensor EM
I P0180 Fuel tank temperature sensor*1
I P0325 Knock sensor
I P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit LC
I P0403 EGR volume control valve
I P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
I P0605 ECM
I P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I P1605 A/T diagnostic communication line
I P1706 Park/Neutral position switch FE
2 I P0130 - P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
I P0135 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
I P0137 - P0140 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) CL
I P0141 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
I P0443 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
I P0510 Closed throttle position switch MT
I P0705 - P0725, P0740 - P1760 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
I P1217 Overheat (Cooling system)
I P1401 EGR temperature sensor AT
3 I P0171, P0172 Fuel injection system function
I P0300 - P0304 Misfire
I P0400, P1402 EGR function AX
I P0420 Three way catalyst function
I P0505 IACV-AAC valve
I P0731 - P0734, P0744 A/T function SU
I P1111 Intake valve timing control
I P1131 Swirl control valve control solenoid
*1: If so equipped
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-601
Fail-safe Chart
Fail-safe Chart =NJEC0040

The ECM enters fail-safe mode if any of the following malfunctions is detected due to the open or short cir-
cuit. When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MI illuminates.
DTC No.
CON- Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

SULT-II ECM*1
GST
P0100 0100 Mass air flow sensor Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
circuit
P0115 0115 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time
ture sensor circuit after turning ignition switch “ON” or “START”.
The radiator fan operates.
Engine coolant temperature decided

Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned

40°C (104°F)
ON or Start
More than approx. 4 minutes

80°C (176°F)
after ignition ON or Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)

P0120 0120 Throttle position sensor Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and
circuit the engine speed. Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Unable to Unable to ECM ECM fail-safe activating condition

access access The computing function of the ECM was judged to be malfunctioning.
ECM Diagnostic When the fail-safe system activates (i.e., if the ECM detects a malfunction
Test Mode condition in the CPU of ECM), the MI on the instrument panel lights to warn
II the driver.
However it is not possible to access ECM and DTC cannot be confirmed.
Engine control with fail-safe
When ECM fail-safe is operating, fuel injection, ignition timing, fuel pump
operation and IACV-AAC valve operation are controlled under certain limita-
tions.
ECM fail-safe operation
Engine speed will not rise more than

Engine speed
3,000 rpm
Simultaneous multiport fuel injection sys-

Fuel injection
tem
Ignition timing Ignition timing is fixed at the preset value
Fuel pump relay is “ON” when engine is

Fuel pump
running and “OFF” when engine stalls
IACV-AAC valve Full open
Cooling fan relay “ON” (High speed condi-

Cooling fans tion) when engine is running, and “OFF”
when engine stalls.
Replace ECM, if ECM fail-safe condition is confirmed.
*: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)
EC-602

SYSTEM — ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM NJEC0041S01
GI
SYMPTOM
MA


EM


LC
Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL FE
CL
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-960 MT

Fuel pressure regulator sys-
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-527
tem
AT
Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-943
Evaporative emission sys-

tem
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-522 AX
Air Positive crankcase ventila-
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-525
tion system SU
Incorrect idle speed adjust-
3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-529
ment
BR
IACV-AAC valve circuit 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-805
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing

adjustment
3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-529 ST
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-947
RS
EGR EGR volume control valve
2 2 3 3 3 EC-783
circuit
EC-775, BT
EGR system 2 1 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
783, 851
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 EC-625 HA

Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 HA section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. SC

EL
IDX
EC-603
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

2 2 EC-762
circuit

3 2 3 EC-768
(PHASE) circuit
Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-633
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) EC-657,

1 2 3 2 2 2 2
circuit 664
Engine coolant temperature sen- EC-644,

1 1 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2
sor circuit 646
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-649
Incorrect throttle position sensor

3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-586
adjustment
Vehicle speed sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-800
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-758
EC-819,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
602
Start signal circuit 2 EC-957
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-862
Power steering oil pressure switch

2 3 3 EC-967
circuit
Electrical load signal circuit 3 3 EC-976

EC-604
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER NJEC0041S03
SYMPTOM GI

MA


EM

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
LC
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL FE
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA CL

Fuel Fuel tank FE section
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 MT
Vapor lock
5
Valve deposit AT
Poor fuel (Heavy weight 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
gasoline, Low octane)
— AX
Air Air duct
Air cleaner SU
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor —
throttle body)
5 5 5 5 5 5 BR
5 5 5 5
Throttle body, Throttle wire FE section
Air leakage from intake ST

—
manifold/Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery RS
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Alternator circuit EL section
Starter circuit 3 BT
Flywheel/drive plate 6 EM section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. HA

SC
EL
IDX
EC-605
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Engine Cylinder head

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
EM section
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve Timing chain

mecha-
nism Camshaft
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM section
Intake valve
3
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/

Muffler/Gasket 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 FE section
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil MA, EM and

tion pump/Oil filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 LC sections
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler

cap
LC section
Thermostat 5
Water pump
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery
Cooling fan 5 EC-833
Coolant level (low)/

MA section
Contaminated coolant
EC-606

Mode
Remarks:
NJEC0042
GI
MA
(i.e., Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING. Specification data might be displayed even when igni-
tion timing is not adjusted to specification. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the input signals
from the crankshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.) EM
I If the real-time diagnosis results are NG, and the on board diagnostic system results are OK, when diagnosing the mass air flow sensor,
first check to see if the fuel pump control circuit is normal.
LC
ENG SPEED I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II value.
value.
I Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 1.7V FE

MAS A/F SE-B1
I No-load 2,500 rpm 1.5 - 2.1V
CL
B/FUEL SCHDL
2,000 rpm 1.2 - 3.0 msec
MT
I No-load
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000

A/F ALPHA-B1 I Engine: After warming up 75 - 125% AT
rpm
HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, 0.6 - 1.0V

AX
I Engine: After warming up LEAN +, RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) rpm Changes more than 5 times SU
during 10 seconds.
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, 0.6 - 1.0V

Revving engine from idle to 3,000 BR
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) rpm quickly LEAN +, RICH
I Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON- Almost the same speed as the ST
VHCL SPEED SE
SULT-II value CONSULT-II value

RS
I Engine: Idle Throttle valve fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V
THRTL POS SEN I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Throttle valve fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V BT
EGR TEMP SEN I Engine: After warming up Less than 4.5V

HA
I Engine: Idle Throttle valve: Idle position ON
CLSD THL POS
SC
CLSD THL/P SW Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF
(Engine stopped)
A/C switch “OFF” OFF EL

AIR COND SIG A/C switch “ON”
the engine ON
IDX
Shift lever “P” or “N” ON
Except above OFF
EC-607

the engine
The steering wheel is turned ON
Rear window defogger or headlamp

ON
LOAD SIGNAL I Engine: running “ON”
Except the above OFF
IGNITION SW I Ignition switch: ON , OFF ON , OFF
I Heater fan switch is “ON” ON

HEATER FAN SW
I Heater fan switch is “OFF” OFF

INJ PULSE-B1
I Engine: After warming up M/T: 8°±5° BTDC

Idle
I Air conditioner switch: OFF A/T: 10°±5° BTDC
IGN TIMING
I No-load 2,000 rpm Approx. 30° BTDC
I Engine: After warming up Idle Not used

CAL/LD VALUE
I No-load 2,500 rpm Not used
I Engine: Idle Throttle valve fully closed 0.0°

ABSOL TH·P/S I Ignition switch: ON
Throttle valve fully opened Approx. 80°
(Engine stopped)
I Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s

MASS AIRFLOW
I Shift lever: N
I No-load 2,500 rpm 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/s

IACV-AAC/V
I Engine: After warming up Idle 0%

PURG VOL C/V
I No-load Revving engine —
I Engine: After warming up Idle 0 step

EGR VOL CON/V I Shift lever: “N” Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
I No-load quickly
1 - 10 steps
Engine coolant temperature is

between 15°C (59°F) to 40°C ON
SWRL CONT S/V I Engine speed: Idle (104°F)
Engine coolant temperature is above

OFF
40°C (104°F)
Idle OFF
INT/V SOL-B1
I Lift up drive wheels Suitable gear position except “P” or
ON (Momentarily)
“N” and revving engine
AIR COND RLY I Air conditioner switch: OFF , ON OFF , ON
EC-608
I Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 1 second) GI

I Engine running and cranking ON
I Except as shown above OFF MA

Engine coolant temperature is 99°C
I After warming up engine, idle OFF
(210°F) or less EM
COOLING FAN the engine.
I Air conditioner switch: OFF Engine coolant temperature is 100°C
ON
(212°F) or more
LC
I Engine speed: Below 3,200 rpm ON
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
I Engine speed: Above 3,200 rpm OFF
Below 3,600 rpm [After driving for 2

minutes at a speed of 70 km/h (43 ON
I Engine speed MPH) or more] FE
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
Above 3,600 rpm OFF
I Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped) OFF CL

Vehicle has traveled after MI has 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MI I Ignition switch: ON
turned ON. (0 - 40,723 mile)
MT
Mode AT
NJEC0043
THRTL POS SEN, ABSOL TH·P/S, CLSD THL/P SW AX
NJEC0043S01
Below is the data for “THRTL POS SEN”, “ABSOL TH·P/S” and “CLSD THL/P SW” when depressing the
accelerator pedal with the ignition switch “ON”.
The signal of “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH·P/S” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or SU
rise after “CLSD THL/P SW” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF240Y
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL POS SEN, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1 HA
NJEC0043S02
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL POS SEN”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and
“INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine to nor- SC
mal operating temperature.
EL
IDX
EC-609
SEF241Y
SEF601Y
EC-610
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF170YA
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-611

PREPARATION NJEC0044S01
1. The ECM is located under the cowl panel on the passenger
side (behind the strut tower). Remove it from the engine room
side.
I Remove the bracket fixing ECM harness.
I Remove the quick connector of the ventilation hose in the ECM
compartment room by pressing in the direction of the arrow.
I Pull the ECM box out from under the cowl panel by removing
the two ECM box attaching bolts.
SEF553Y
I Remove the five bolts on ECM box installation cover.
: 3.9 - 6.9 N·m (0.39 - 0.71 kg-m, 34 - 61 in-lb)
I Remove the three ECM installation bolts.
: 4.1 - 6.8 N·m (0.41 - 0.70 kg-m, 36 - 60 in-lb)
JEF096Y
SEF097Y
SEF098Y

SEF908W
EC-612
I Open harness securing clip to make testing easier. GI
MA
CAUTION:
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s EM
the ground.
LC
FE
CL
SEF367I
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF970W
ST
Specification data are reference values and are measured between
each terminal and ground. RS
CAUTION:
BT
the ground. HA
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO. SC
Intake valve timing con- EL
1 Y/R [Engine is running]
trol solenoid valve
I Lift up vehicle and suitable gear position Approximately 0V
I Rev engine from 2,000 to 3,000 rpm IDX
EC-613
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm
Approximately 0.7V
I After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70
Heated oxygen sensor 2 km/h (43 MPH) or more
3 W/R
heater (rear)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Engine stopped
(11 - 14V)
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
Heated oxygen sensor 1 I Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm
4 R/B
heater (front) [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm (11 - 14V)
6 BR
[Engine is running]
7 L/G
15 P
I Idle speed
16 OR
8 SB
[Engine is running]
9 W/B EGR volume control
I Warm-up condition 0 - 14V
17 R/Y valve
I Rev engine from 2,000 to 4,000 rpm
18 BR/R
[Engine is running]
10 Y/B A/T signal No. 3 Approximately 0V
I Idle speed

13 LG/R Cooling fan relay
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
5 - 12V
EVAP canister purge [Engine is running]

14 GY/L volume control valve I Warm-up condition
(ON/OFF duty) I Accelerator pedal depressed
SEF975W
[Engine is running]
19 BR/W A/T signal No. 5 Approximately 8V
I Idle speed

I For 1 second after turning ignition switch
0 - 1V
“ON”
21 B/P Fuel pump relay [Engine is running]

BATTERY VOLTAGE
I More than 1 second after turning ignition
(11 - 14V)
switch “ON”
[Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1V

22 OR/L Malfunction indicator [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”
23 L Air conditioner relay
I A/C switch is “OFF” (11 - 14V)
EC-614
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR GI
I For 9 seconds after turning ignition switch 0 - 1V MA
“OFF”
BATTERY VOLTAGE EM
(11 - 14V)
“OFF”
7 - 8V LC
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
FE
SEF928X
32 L/OR Tachometer
7 - 8V CL
[Engine is running] MT
AT
SEF929X
0 - 0.2V AX
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
SU
I Idle speed
BR
35 L/W Ignition signal (No. 1)
SEF971W
37 L/R Ignition signal (No. 3)
0.2 - 0.4V ST
[Engine is running] RS
BT
SEF972W
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE HA

Throttle position switch I Accelerator pedal released (11 - 14V)
40 Y/PU
(Closed position) [Engine is running]
Approximately 0V SC
41 B/Y Start signal EL
IDX
EC-615
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

I Gear position is “Neutral position” (M/T mod-
Approximately 0V
els)
I Gear position is “P” or “N” (A/T models)
42 G/OR PNP switch A/T models
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
M/T models
Approximately 5V

(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Both air conditioner switch and blower switch Approximately 0V
44 L/R Air conditioner switch are “ON” (Compressor operates)
[Engine is running]
Approximately 5V
I Air conditioner switch is “OFF”
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
Power steering oil pres- I Steering wheel is fully turned
46 PU/W
sure switch [Engine is running]
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
48 B ECM ground Engine ground
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Headlamp switch or rear defogger switch is
Electrical load signal (11 - 14V)
“ON”
50 L/B (Headlamp and
Rear defogger) [Engine is running]
I Headlamp switch and rear defogger switch Approximately 0V
are “OFF”

Approximately 0V
I Blower fan switch is “ON”
51 LG/B Blower fan SW
Approximately 5V
I Blower fan switch is “OFF”
[Engine is running]
54 Y/R A/T signal No. 1 Approximately 0V
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
55 Y/G A/T signal No. 2 Approximately 0V
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
56 G/Y A/T signal No. 4 Approximately 0V
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
EC-616
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR GI
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition 1.0 - 1.7V MA
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition 1.5 - 2.1V EM
0 - Approximately 0.7V LC
[Engine is running]
(front)
FE
SEF008W
63 L I After warming up to normal operating tem- 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(rear)
perature and engine speed is 3,000 rpm
Approximately 0 - 4.8V MT
Intake air temperature
64 Y/B [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
sensor
intake air temperature
AT
2.0 - 3.0V
[Engine is running]
AX
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
SU
SEF977W
66 R Camshaft position sen-
75 R sor (PHASE) BR
2.0 - 3.0V
ST
[Engine is running]
RS
SEF978W
BT
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
Approximately 0 - 4.8V HA
70 BR/W [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
ture sensor
SC
[Engine is running]
Throttle position sensor I Accelerator pedal fully released
71 GY
signal output EL
Approximately 4V
IDX
EC-617
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition Less than 4.5V
I Idle speed
72 P/B EGR temperature sensor
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition 0 - 1.0V
I EGR system is operating
[Engine is running]
ground
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Refrigerant pressure [Engine is running]
74 R/L
sensor I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed Voltage is gradually decreasing.
“OFF”
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
Fuel tank temperature
82* L/W [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with fuel
sensor
temperature
3.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
SEF979W
85 R
sor (POS) 3.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
SEF980W
2.5 - 3V
[Engine is running]
86 PU/R Vehicle speed sensor I Lift up the vehicle
SEF976W
[Engine is running]
91 PU A/T check signal 0 - Approximately 5V
I Idle speed
EC-618
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR GI
[Engine is running]
0.15 - 0.85V
I Accelerator pedal released MA
92 Y Throttle position sensor
3.5 - 4.7V
EM
[Engine is running]
93 G/R Data link connector I Idle speed (CONSULT-II or GST is discon- Approximately 0V
nected) LC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed FE
101 R/B Injector No. 1 CL

SEF011W
103 YB Injector No. 2
105 GB Injector No. 3 BATTERY VOLTAGE
107 L/B Injector No. 4 (11 - 14V) MT
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
AT
AX
SEF012W
[Engine is running] SU
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15°C
0 - 1V
(59°F) to 40°C (104°F)
Swirl control valve con- I Idle speed BR
104 SB
trol solenoid valve [Engine is running]
I Engine coolant temperature is above 40°C BATTERY VOLTAGE
(104°F) (11 - 14V)
ST
I Idle speed
106
B/Y ECM ground
[Engine is running]
Engine ground
RS
108 I Idle speed
110 W BATTERY VOLTAGE

112 W
(11 - 14V)
BT
[Engine is running]
HA
114 GY/R Adjust switch 0V
I Idle speed
[Engine is running] SC
115 LG Data link connector I Idle speed (CONSULT-II or GST is discon- 0 - 10V
nected)
* If so equipped
EL
IDX
EC-619
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE EUROPE - QG
Description
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI-
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
I B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection)
I A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
I MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition NJEC1266
I Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,100 miles)
I Barometric pressure: 101.3 kPa (760.0 mmHg, 29.92 inHg)±3 kPa (22.5 mmHg, 0.89 inHg)
I Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
I Transmission: Warmed-up*1
I Electrical load: Not applied*2
I Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T or CVT models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until
“FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T or CVT fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates less than 0.9V. For M/T models, drive
vehicle for 5 minutes after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Cooling fans are not oper-
ating. Steering wheel is straight ahead.
Inspection Procedure NJEC1267

NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale dis-
play.
1. Perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-586.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
SEF601Z
5. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-621.
EC-620
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF613Z
EC-621
SEF768Z
EC-622
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF615Z
EC-623
INCIDENT EUROPE - QG
Description
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the problem resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the custom-
er’s complaint often do not recur on DTC (1st trip) visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I
occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred
may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indi-
cate the specific problem area.
The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or
II
“1t”.
IV (1st trip) DTC data does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the problem area.
1 INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, EC-556, EC-559.
© GO TO 2.
2 CHECK GROUND TERMINALS

Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection. Refer to GI-28, “GROUND INSPECTION”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.

OK or NG
EC-624
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY EUROPE - QG

GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC779
EC-625
HEC780
EC-626
CAUTION: GI
MA
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO. EM
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0 - 1V
I For 9 seconds after turning ignition switch “OFF” LC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
“OFF”

FE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
CL
I Idle speed
57 B ECM ground
[Engine is running]
Engine ground
MT
I Idle speed

67 W/L
(Back-up)
(11 - 14V)
AT
106 B/Y [Engine is running]
ECM ground Engine ground
108 B/Y I Idle speed AX
110 W BATTERY VOLTAGE
112 W (11 - 14V)
SU
1 INSPECTION START BR
Start engine.
Is engine running?
ST
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 9.
RS
No © GO TO 2.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-627

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
SEF291X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

I Harness connectors M21, E106 (Sedan), M160, E175 (Hatchback)
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M1, E103
I 10A fuse
4 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
EC-628
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II

1. Disconnect ECM relay. GI
MA
EM
LC
JEF100Y
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 1, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
SEF101Y AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. AX
NG © GO TO 6.
SU
Check the following. BR
I 15A fuse and 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery ST
RS
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 31 and ECM relay terminal 2.
Continuity should exist. BT
OK or NG HA
OK © Go to “IGNITION SIGNAL”, EC-947.
NG © GO TO 8.
SC
EL
Check the harness for open or short between ECM relay and ECM.
IDX
EC-629

1. Stop engine.
SEF293X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10.


SEF294X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
does not exist.)
few seconds.)
EC-630

1. Disconnect ECM relay. GI
MA
EM
LC
JEF100Y
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
SEF295X AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14. AX
NG © GO TO 13.
SU
Check the following. BR
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and 10A fuse
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. ST
14 CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM RELAY AND ECM FOR OPEN AND SHORT RS
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ECM relay terminal 5.
OK or NG HA
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © GO TO 15.
SC
EL
I Joint connector-4
I Harness for open or short between ECM and ECM relay IDX
EC-631
16 CHECK ECM RELAY

SEF296X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
17 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.

© INSPECTION END
EC-632
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) EUROPE - QG

The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire GI
intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire MA
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain EM
SEF987W LC
Mode NJEC0051
MAS A/F SE-B1 CL
I No-load 2,500 rpm 1.5 - 2.1V

Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s MT
MASS AIRFLOW
I No-load 2,500 rpm 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/s
AT
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. AX
CAUTION:
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SU
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BR
NO.
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition 1.0 - 1.7V ST
I Idle speed
[Engine is running] RS
[Engine is running] BT
ground
I Idle speed
HA
DTC No. Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause) SC
P0100 A) An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent I Harness or connectors
0100 to ECM when engine is not running. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) EL
B) An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent I Harness or connectors

to ECM* when engine is running. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) IDX
I Intake air leaks
*: When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
EC-633
Fail-safe Mode
Fail-safe Mode NJEC0589
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel
Mass air flow sensor circuit
cut.

CAUTION:
NOTE:

With CONSULT-II
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-636.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y

With CONSULT-II
EC-636.
With GST
SEF058Y
EC-634
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC781
EC-635
1 INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A, or B) is duplicated?
Malfunction A or B
A © GO TO 3.
B © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check the following for connection.
I Air duct
I Vacuum hoses
I Intake air passage between air duct to collector
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Reconnect the parts.

JEF104Y
© GO TO 4.
EC-636

1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. GI
MA
EM
LC
JEF105Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF297X
OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
SU
BR
I Joint connector-4
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor ST
RS
Refer to wiring diagram. HA
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
EL
IDX
EC-637

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.

© INSPECTION END

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR NJEC0058S01
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sen-
sor signal) and ground.
Conditions Voltage V
Ignition switch “ON” (Engine stopped.) Less than 1.2
SEF993W Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating

1.0 - 1.7
temperature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal oper-

1.7 - 2.1
ating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.0 - 1.7 to Approx. 4.0
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in
engine speed.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow
sensor harness connector and connect it again. Repeat above
check.
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot
SEF987W film for damage or dust.
EC-638
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR EUROPE - QG

The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct hous-
ing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a sig- GI
nal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor MA
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
EM
SEF206T LC
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9

FE
80 (176) 1.23 0.27 - 0.38
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 64
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
CL
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ MT
SEF012P
the ground. AT
AX
SU
BR

P0110 An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is sent I Harness or connectors RS
0110 to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Intake air temperature sensor
BT
HA

SC
NOTE:
IDX
EC-639
With CONSULT-II
EC-642.
With GST
SEF058Y
EC-640
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC782
EC-641

2. Disconnect intake air temperature sensor harness connector.
SEF602Y
SEF301X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

I Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor

2. Check harness continuity between intake air temperature sensor harness connector terminal 2 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
EC-642

I Joint connector-3
I Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor MA
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and intake air temperature sensor
EM
5 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-644. LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace intake air temperature sensor.
FE
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-624. CL
© INSPECTION END
MT
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AT
NJEC0071S01
AX
SU
BR
SEF913W
<Reference data>
ST
Resistance kΩ
°C (°F)
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9

RS
80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38
BT
If NG, replace intake air temperature sensor.
HA
SEF012P
SC
EL
IDX
EC-643
(CIRCUIT) EUROPE - QG

engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V kΩ
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
the ground.

Mode NJEC0073
P0115 I An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is I Harness or connectors
0115 sent to ECM.* (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
EC-644
Fail-safe Mode
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode GI

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch
“ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. MA
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II
Condition
display) EM
Engine coolant tempera- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F)
ture sensor circuit More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or LC
80°C (176°F)
Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)

When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while the engine is running. FE
CL
MT
NOTE: AT
before conducting the next test. AX
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. SU
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, BR
SEF013Y
EC-647 .
With GST ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-645
Wiring Diagram
HEC783
EC-646
1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY GI

MA
EM
LC
SEF999W
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF301X
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
Check the harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor.
ST
RS
2. Check harness continuity between engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector terminal 2 and engine
ground.
Refer to wiring diagram. HA
OK or NG SC
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4. EL
IDX
EC-647

I Joint connector-3
I Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
I Harness for open or short between engine coolant temperature sensor and TCM (Transmission Control Module)

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.

© INSPECTION END

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR NJEC0078S01
<Reference data>
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260

SEF152P
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
EC-648
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR EUROPE - QG

NOTE:
If DTC P0120 (0120) is displayed with DTC P0510 (0510), first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0510, GI
EC-813.
The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiom- MA
eter which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal
to the ECM. EM
Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sen-
sor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the “Wide open and closed
throttle position switch”, which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF208W SU
Mode BR
NJEC0080
ST
I Engine: Idle Throttle valve: fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V
THRTL POS SEN RS
Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V
(Engine stopped)
I Engine: Idle Throttle valve: fully closed 0.0° BT

ABSOL TH·P/S I Ignition switch: ON
Throttle valve: fully opened Approx. 80°
(Engine stopped)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-649

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
58 B Sensors’ ground I Warm up condition Approximately 0V
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
0.15 - 0.85V
92 Y Throttle position sensor
3.5 - 4.7V
P0120 An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is I Harness or connectors
0120 sent to ECM* while driving. (The throttle position sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Throttle position sensor Condition Driving condition
circuit

NOTE:
CAUTION:
TESTING CONDITION:
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
I This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in
EC-650
the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is
expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
GI
MA
EM
LC
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
5 consecutive seconds. FE
Selector lever Suitable position except “P” or “N” CL

position
SEF175Y
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, MT
EC-653.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-651
Wiring Diagram
HEC784
EC-652

MA
EM
LC
JEF104Y
FE
© GO TO 2.
CL
1. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector.
MT
AT
AX
SU
JEF091Y
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF306X
OK or NG
SC
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
EL
IDX
I Joint connector-4
I Harness for open or short between throttle position sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 111
EC-653

2. Check harness continuity between throttle position sensor harness connector terminal 1 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

I Joint connector-3
I Harness for open or short between ECM terminal 58 and throttle position sensor
I Harness for open or short between ECM terminal 58 and TCM (Transmission Control Module)

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 92 and throttle position sensor harness connector terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-586.

© INSPECTION END
EC-654

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
NJEC0086S01
GI
2) Stop engine (ignition switch OFF). MA
3) Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
4) Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the
opener. EM
5) Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−400 mbar, −300 mmHg,
−11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod
SEF793W
of the throttle opener.
LC
8) Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following con-
ditions.
NOTE: FE
CL
SEF179Y
Completely closed 0.15 - 0.85 (a) MT
Partially open Between (a) and (b)
Completely open 3.5 - 4.7 (b) AT

Inspection”, EC-586. AX
SU
BR
Without CONSULT-II
ST
2) Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3) Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener. RS
4) Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the
opener.
5) Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−400 mbar, −300 mmHg, BT
−11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod
of the throttle opener.
HA
SEF793W
7) Check voltage between ECM terminal 92 (Throttle position
sensor signal) and ground under the following conditions. SC
NOTE:
sensor installed in vehicle. EL
Completely closed 0.15 - 0.85 (a) IDX

Partially open Between (a) and (b)
Completely open 3.5 - 4.7 (b)

SEF007X
EC-655
EC-656
DTC P0130 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)

The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the exhaust
manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas com- GI
pared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a
closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner MA
conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the
ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the
ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical EM
change from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R LC
FE
CL
SEF288D
MT
Mode AT
NJEC0095
HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V

(B1)
10 seconds.
BR
CAUTION:
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. RS
TERMI- WIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
BT
HA
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor
62 W I After warming up to normal operating tempera-
1 (front)
ture and engine speed is 2,000 rpm SC
SEF008W
EL
IDX
EC-657

Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
signal is not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approxi-
mately 0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output
voltage is within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diag-
nosis checks that this time is not inordinately long.
SEF237U
P0130 I The voltage from the sensor is constantly approx. 0.3V. I Harness or connectors
0130 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
SEF825Y
With CONSULT-II
2) Select “HO2S1 (B1) P0130” of “HO2S1 (B1)” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,200 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 4.
5) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
SEF826Y
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 10 to 60 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from

step 2.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
SEF645Y
EC-658
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
GI
MA
EM
LC
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
Without CONSULT-II FE
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 62 (HO2S1 sig-
nal) and engine ground. CL
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
MT
SEF011X I The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V.
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-659
Wiring Diagram
HEC785
EC-660
MA
EM
LC
JEF104Y
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF012XA AX
© GO TO 2.
SU
BR
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector terminal 2.
ST
4. Also check harness for short to power. RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. BT
HA
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-662. SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. EL
NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
IDX
© INSPECTION END
EC-661

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) NJEC0102S01
With CONSULT-II
lowing steps.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below:
CAUTION:
SEF647Y
and approved anti-seize lubricant.
SEF648Y
Without CONSULT-II
nal) and engine ground.
I Malfunction indicator goes on more than five times within 10
seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II [HEATED OXYGEN SEN-
SOR 1 MONITOR (FRONT).]
SEF011X I The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
EC-662
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been GI
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys- MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-663
DTC P0131 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING) EUROPE - QG

manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas com-
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical
SEF463R
SEF288D

Mode NJEC0104
HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V

HO2S1 MNTR I Engine: After warming up LEAN +, RICH
rpm Changes more than 5 times during
(B1)
10 seconds.

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
62 W I After warming up to normal operating temperature
1 (front)
and engine speed is 2,000 rpm
SEF008W
EC-664

To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sen-
sor 1 (front) is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is GI
sufficiently high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low.
When both the outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunc-
tion will be detected. MA
EM
SEF300U LC
P0131 I The maximum and minimum voltages from the sensor I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
0131 are not reached to the specified voltages. I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors FE
I Intake air leaks
CL
MT
CAUTION: AT
NOTE: AX
before conducting the next test. SU
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that BR
SEF827Y
With CONSULT-II ST
2) Stop engine and wait at least 9 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0131” of RS
“HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
BT
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,200 rpm after this step. If HA
SEF828Y
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions SC
will take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
EL

IDX
SEF651Y
EC-665
step 2.

not be confirmed.
Without CONSULT-II
SEF011X I The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
I The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time.
1 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)

2. Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
© GO TO 2.
EC-666
2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA

With CONSULT-II GI
2. Select “SELF-LEARN CONTROL” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “START”. MA
EM
LC
SEF652Y
FE
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II CL
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. MT
AT
AX
SU
JEF105Y BR
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure diagnostic trouble code No. 0100 is displayed in Diagnostic Test Mode II.
6. Erase the diagnostic test mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory. Refer to “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic ST
InformatioN”, EC-556.
Is the 1st trip DTC 0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
RS
Yes or No
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-733.
BT
No © GO TO 3.
HA
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. EL
IDX
EC-667

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.

Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-660, for circuit.
© INSPECTION END

With CONSULT-II
lowing steps.
CAUTION:
SEF647Y
EC-668
GI
MA
EM
SEF648Y
LC
Without CONSULT-II
10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II [HEATED OXYGEN CL
SENSOR 1 MONITOR (FRONT).]
MT
CAUTION: AT
and approved anti-seize lubricant. SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-669
DTC P0132 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT

SEF463R
SEF288D

Mode NJEC0112
HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V

(B1)
10 seconds.

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
1 (front)
SEF008W
EC-670

To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sen-
sor 1 (front) is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is GI
sufficiently high. The “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the
outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be
detected. MA
EM
SEF299UA LC
P0132 I The maximum and minimum voltages from the sensor I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
0132 are beyond the specified voltages. I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors FE
CL
MT
CAUTION: AT
NOTE: AX
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF829Y
With CONSULT-II ST
BT
NOTE:
SEF830Y
will take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
EL

IDX
SEF655Y
EC-671
step 2.

not be confirmed.
Without CONSULT-II
SEF011X I The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time.
I The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

2. Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
© GO TO 2.
EC-672

With CONSULT-II GI
EM
LC
SEF652Y
FE
AT
AX
SU
JEF105Y BR
Information”, EC-556.
RS
Yes or No
BT
No © GO TO 3.
HA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. SC
3. Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exit. EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. IDX
EC-673

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.

Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-660, for circuit.
© INSPECTION END

With CONSULT-II
lowing steps.
CAUTION:
SEF647Y
EC-674
GI
MA
EM
SEF648Y
LC
Without CONSULT-II
I Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times within
10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II [HEATED OXYGEN CL
MT
CAUTION: AT
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-675
DTC P0133 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE

SEF463R
SEF288D

Mode NJEC0120
HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V

(B1)
10 seconds.

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
1 (front)
SEF008W
EC-676

To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front), this
diagnosis measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1 GI
(front) signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed
and load), fuel feedback control constant, and heated oxygen sen-
sor 1 (front) temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the MA
compensated time [heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) cycling time
index] is inordinately long or not.
EM
SEF010V LC
P0133 I The response of the voltage signal from the sensor takes I Harness or connectors
0133 more than the specified time. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) FE
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
I Intake air leaks CL
I Exhaust gas leaks
I PCV
I Mass air flow sensor MT
CAUTION: AT
NOTE: AX
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF831Y
With CONSULT-II ST
BT
NOTE:
SEF832Y
will take approximately 50 seconds.)
EL

IDX
SEF658Y
EC-677
step 2.

not be confirmed.
Without CONSULT-II
SEF011X I Malfunction indicator goes on more than five times within 10
seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II [HEATED OXYGEN SEN-
EC-678
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC785
EC-679

JEF104Y
© GO TO 2.

Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
© GO TO 3.
3 CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst.
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
EC-680

With CONSULT-II GI
EM
LC
SEF652Y
FE
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
AT
AX
SU
JEF105Y BR
Is the 1st trip DTC 0171 or 0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
RS
Yes or No
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0172. Refer to EC-733, 740.
BT
No © GO TO 6.
HA
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector and ECM harness connector. SC
Continuity should exist. EL
4. Also check harness for short to power. IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
EC-681

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
10 CHECK PCV VALVE

Refer to “Positive Crankcase Ventilation”, EC-525.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Repair or replace PCV valve.

© INSPECTION END
EC-682

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
NJEC0127S02
GI
2) Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and select MA
lowing steps. EM
5) Check the following.
SEF646Y LC
“RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” five times in 10 seconds.
I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. FE
CL
CAUTION:
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a MT
SEF647Y
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF648Y
RS
BT
HA
Without CONSULT-II SC
nal) and engine ground. EL
IDX
10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II [HEATED OXYGEN
EC-683
CAUTION:
EC-684
(HIGH VOLTAGE) EUROPE - QG

manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas com- GI
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner MA
ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical EM
SEF463R LC
FE
CL
SEF288D
MT
Mode AT
NJEC0129
HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V

(B1)
10 seconds.
BR
CAUTION:
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. RS
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR BT
HA
[Engine is running]
62 W
I After warming up to normal operating temperature SC
1 (front)
SEF008W
EL
IDX
EC-685

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated
oxygen sensor 1 (front) output is not inordinately high.
SEF301U
P0134 I An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to I Harness or connectors

NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
5) Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
EC-688.
With GST
6) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con-
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
EC-686
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC785
EC-687

Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
© GO TO 2.

1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
SEF012XA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.

Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector for water.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.

© INSPECTION END
EC-688

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
NJEC0135S01
GI
2) Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and select MA
lowing steps. EM
SEF646Y LC
“RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” five times in 10 seconds.
I “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. FE
CL
CAUTION:
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a MT
SEF647Y
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF648Y
RS
BT
HA
Without CONSULT-II SC
nal) and engine ground. EL
IDX
10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II [HEATED OXYGEN
EC-689
CAUTION:
EC-690
HEATER EUROPE - QG
Description
GI
ECM func-
tion
MA
Heated
oxygen
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sensor 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Engine speed
heater (front)
EM
(front) con-
trol
LC
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) corresponding to the engine
operating condition.
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) FE

Above 3,200 rpm OFF
Below 3,200 rpm ON CL

Mode MT
NJEC0137
AT
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
AX
ECM Terminals and Reference Value NJEC0138 SU

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- BR
TERMI- WIRE
ST
NAL NO. COLOR
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V RS
Heated oxygen sensor 1 I Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.
4 R/B
I Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm. (11 - 14V) BT
HA
P0135 I The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 1 I Harness or connectors
0135 heater (front) circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) cir-
SC
[An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM through cuit is open or shorted.)
the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front).] I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
EL
IDX
EC-691
HEATER EUROPE - QG

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle.
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
EC-694.
With GST
SEF058Y
recommended.
EC-692
HEATER EUROPE - QG
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC786
EC-693
HEATER EUROPE - QG

SEF012XA
SEF934X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

I Harness connectors F36, E75
I Harness connectors E106, M21 (Sedan), E175, M160 (Hatchback)
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) and fuse

3. Check harness continuity between heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector terminal 3 and ECM terminal 4.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC-694
HEATER EUROPE - QG

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. MA
EM
LC
© INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) AT
NJEC0143S01
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 Ω at 25°C (77°F) AX
If NG, replace the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
SU
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been BR
SEF935X dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys- ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-695
DTC P0137 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE

The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst, moni-
tors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
SEF327R
used for engine control operation.

Mode NJEC0145
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V

Revving engine from idle to 3,000
HO2S2 MNTR I Engine: After warming up
rpm LEAN +, RICH
(B1)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
63 L I After warming up to normal operating temperature 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(rear)

The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of
heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the mini-
mum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently low during various driving
conditions such as fuel-cut.
SEF258VA
P0137 I The minimum voltage from the sensor does not reach I Harness or connectors
0137 the specified voltage. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
EC-696

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. GI
NOTE:
I “COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-II screen when all MA
tests “COND1”, “COND2” and “COND3” are completed.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least EM
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF833Y
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is LC
stopped, retry this procedure from step 2 in “Procedure for
COND1”.
With CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1
FE
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S2 (B1) P0137” of
“HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. CL
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
SEF834Y 6) Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under no load. MT
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
2 in “Procedure for COND3”.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go
AT
to the following step.
7) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 AX
consecutive minutes.
played at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the SU
conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COM-
PLETED”. (It will take approximately 60 seconds.)
BR
SEF835Y ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,600 rpm
Vehicle speed Above 70 km/h (43 MPH)

ST
NOTE: RS
I If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2 in “Procedure for COND1”.
I If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CON- BT
SULT-II screen before “Procedure for COND2” is
conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Proce-
dure for COND2”. HA
Procedure for COND2 SC

1) While driving, release accelerator pedal completely with “OD”
OFF (A/T models), or 4th gear position (M/T models) from the
above condition [step 8] until “INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on EL
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 4 seconds.)
NOTE: IDX
If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-II
screen before “Procedure for COND3” is conducted, it is
unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND3”.
SEF836Y
EC-697
Procedure for COND3
1) Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of “COND3” on
a maximum of approximately 6 minutes.)
SEF661Y

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the rear heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
Without CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals 63 (HO2S2 sig-
SEF032X 4) Check the voltage when revving engine up to 4,000 rpm under
no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 0.56V at least once during
this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should be below 0.56V at least once during
this procedure.
EC-698
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC787
EC-699

JEF104Y
© GO TO 2.
EC-700

With CONSULT-II GI
EM
LC
SEF652Y
FE
AT
AX
SU
JEF105Y BR
RS
Yes or No
BT
No © GO TO 3.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-701

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
SEF160Z
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 and heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector terminal 1.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 [or heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector terminal 1]
and ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

Check the harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) and ECM.

1. Check harness continuity between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector terminal 4 and body ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).

© INSPECTION END
EC-702

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
With CONSULT-II
NJEC0152S01
GI
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. MA
3) Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and
select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. EM
4) Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL
INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF662Y
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68V at least once when LC
the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be
below 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is
−25%.
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been FE
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys- CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEF244YA
BR
Without CONSULT-II
ST
2) Stop vehicle with engine running. RS
4) Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load BT
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once. HA
SEF032X If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 4, step 5 is not nec-
essary.
5) Check the voltage when revving up to 6,000 rpm under no SC
load. Or keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the
voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50
MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with “OD” OFF
EL
(A/T).
The voltage should be below 0.56V at least once.
IDX
CAUTION:
EC-703
EC-704
DTC P0138 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE

tors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. GI
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). MA
conditions. EM
SEF327R LC
Mode NJEC0154
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR rpm LEAN +, RICH CL
(B1)

MT
CAUTION:
AT
TERMI- AX
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
SU
[Engine is running]
(rear)
BR

(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst RS
heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the maxi-
mum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during various driv- BT
ing conditions such as fuel-cut.
HA
SEF259VA
SC
P0138 I The maximum voltage from the sensor does not reach I Harness or connectors
0138 the specified voltage. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) EL
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors IDX
I Intake air leaks
EC-705

CAUTION:
NOTE:
I “COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-II screen when all
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF837Y
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is
COND1”.
With CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1
SEF838Y 6) Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under no load.
7) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
played at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the
NOTE:
I If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CON-
dure for COND2”.
Procedure for COND2

above condition [step 8] until “INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on
CONSULT-II screen is turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
NOTE:
SEF840Y
EC-706
Procedure for COND3
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take GI
RESULTS”. MA
If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-709.
EM
SEF665Y LC
be confirmed.
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH)
for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running. CL
SEF032X
MT
4) Check the voltage when revving engine up to 4,000 rpm under
no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) AT
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during
this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not AX
necessary.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) SU
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during
this procedure. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-707
Wiring Diagram
HEC787
EC-708

MA
EM
LC
JEF104Y
FE
© GO TO 2.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-709

With CONSULT-II
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “START”.
SEF652Y
Without CONSULT-II
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed.
JEF105Y
6. Erase the diagnostic test mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory. Refer to “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic
Yes or No
No © GO TO 3.
EC-710

1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector and ECM harness connector. GI
and ground.
EM
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
LC
NG © GO TO 4.

Check the harness for open or short between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). FE
CL
1. Check harness continuity between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector terminal 4 and engine ground. MT
AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
AX
SU
OK or NG
BR
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). ST

HA

SC
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) NJEC0161S01
With CONSULT-II EL
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes..
2) Stop vehicle with engine running. IDX
select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
SEF662Y
EC-711
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68V at least once when
the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.56V at least once when
the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
SEF244YA
Without CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH)
for 2 consecutive minutes.
4) Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once.
essary.
5) Check the voltage when revving up to 6,000 rpm under no
(A/T).
CAUTION:
EC-712
DTC P0139 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) (RESPONSE

tors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. GI
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). MA
conditions. EM
SEF327R LC
Mode NJEC0163
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR rpm LEAN +, RICH CL
(B1)

MT
CAUTION:
AT
TERMI- AX
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
SU
[Engine is running]
(rear)
and revving engine from idle to 2,000 rpm
BR

(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst RS
heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the switch-
ing response of the sensor’s voltage is faster than specified during BT
various driving conditions such as fuel-cut.
HA
SEF302U
SC
P0139 I It takes more than the specified time for the sensor to I Harness or connectors
0139 respond between rich and lean. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) EL
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors IDX
I Intake air leaks
EC-713

CAUTION:
NOTE:
I “COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-II screen when all
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure ” has been previously
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF841Y
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is
COND1”.
With CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1
SEF842Y 6) Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under no load.
7) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
played at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the
NOTE:
I If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CON-
dure for COND2”.
Procedure for COND2

above condition [step 8] until “INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on
NOTE:
SEF844Y
EC-714
Procedure for COND3
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take GI
RESULTS”. MA
If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-717.
EM
SEF668Y LC
be confirmed.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running. CL
SEF032X
MT
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) AT
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not AX
necessary.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) SU
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-715
Wiring Diagram
HEC787
EC-716

MA
EM
LC
JEF104Y
FE
© GO TO 2.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-717

With CONSULT-II
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “START”.
SEF652Y
Without CONSULT-II
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed.
JEF105Y
6. Erase the diagnostic test mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory. Refer to “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic
Yes or No
No © GO TO 3.
EC-718

1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector and ECM harness connector. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF160Z
and ground.
CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
MT
NG © GO TO 4.
AT
Check the harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) and ECM. AX
SU
1. Check harness continuity between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector terminal 4 and engine ground. BR
ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
RS
BT
OK or NG
HA
OK © GO TO 7.
SC
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EL

© INSPECTION END IDX
EC-719

With CONSULT-II
SEF662Y
CAUTION:
SEF244YA
Without CONSULT-II
at least 10 times.
essary.
(A/T).
CAUTION:
EC-720
and approved anti-seize lubricant. GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-721
DTC P0140 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)

conditions.
SEF327R

Mode NJEC0172
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V

rpm LEAN +, RICH
(B1)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
(rear)
and revving engine from idle to 2,000 rpm

(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether or not the
voltage is too high during various driving conditions such as fuel-
cut.
SEF305U
P0140 I An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to I Harness or connectors
EC-722

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure ” has been previously conducted, GI
With CONSULT-II
MA
with CONSULT-II. EM
SEF189Y
3) Stop vehicle with engine running. LC
4) Let engine idle for 1 minute.
minutes.
ENG SPEED Above 1,500 rpm
FE
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, CL

EC-725.
MT
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy- AT
gen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
Without CONSULT-II AX
SU
nal) and engine ground. BR
SEF032X 4) Check the voltage after revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) ST
The voltage should be below 2V during this procedure.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-723
Wiring Diagram
HEC787
EC-724

MA
EM
LC
JEF104Y
FE
© GO TO 2.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEF160Z
BR
ST
and ground.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. BT
NG © GO TO 3.
HA
Check the harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) and ECM. SC
EL
IDX
EC-725

1. Check harness continuity between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector terminal 4 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.

Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector for water.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.

© INSPECTION END

With CONSULT-II
SEF662Y
CAUTION:
EC-726
GI
MA
EM
SEF244YA
LC
Without CONSULT-II
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals 63 (HO2S2 sig- FE
at least 10 times. CL
SEF032X If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 4, step 5 is not nec- MT
essary.
load. Or keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the AT
(A/T).
AX
CAUTION: SU
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. BR
and approved anti-seize lubricant. ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-727
DTC P0141 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
(REAR) EUROPE - QG
Description
ECM func-
tion
Heated
oxygen
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) heater (rear)
(rear) con-
trol
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) corresponding to the engine
speed.
Engine condition Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
Engine stopped OFF
Engine is running. Engine speed below 3,600 rpm after

driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 ON
km/h (43 MPH) or more
Engine speed above 3,600 rpm OFF

Mode NJEC0181
Below 3,600 rpm [After driving for 2 minutes at a

ON
I Engine speed speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more]
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
Above 3,600 rpm OFF
I Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped) OFF

CAUTION:
TERMI- WIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm [After driving
Approximately 0.7V
for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or
more]
3 W/R
heater (rear) [Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “ON”] (11 - 14V)
I Engine stopped
EC-728
(REAR) EUROPE - QG
P0141 I The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 I Harness or connectors
0141 heater (rear) circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) cir-
[An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM through cuit is open or shorted.) MA
the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear).] I Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
EM
LC
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure ” has been previously conducted,
TESTING CONDITION:
tery voltage is in between 10.5V and 16V at idle. CL
MT
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode AT
with CONSULT-II.
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. Engine speed must be AX
maintained at speeds of 3,600 rpm or less during vehicle
operations.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, SU
EC-731.
With GST BR
SEF175Y 1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. Engine speed must be
maintained at speeds of 3,600 rpm or less during vehicle ST
operations.
3) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h RS
4) Select “MODE 3” with GST. BT
When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure ” should be
performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because HA
GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this
diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-729
(REAR) EUROPE - QG
Wiring Diagram
HEC788
EC-730
(REAR) EUROPE - QG

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF160Z
4. Check voltage between terminal 2 and ground.
CL
MT
AT
SEF218W
Voltage: Battery voltage AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. SU
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
Check the following. ST
I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) and fuse RS
I 10A fuse
BT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. HA
3. Check harness continuity between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector terminal 3 and ECM terminal 3.
Refer to wiring diagram. SC
EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
IDX
EC-731
(REAR) EUROPE - QG

Check the harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) and ECM.
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR)

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.

© INSPECTION END

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) NJEC0187S01
1. Check resistance between terminals 2 and 3.
2. Check continuity.
Terminal No. Continuity
1 and 2, 3, 4
No
4 and 1, 2, 3
If NG, replace the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).

CAUTION:
SEF221W
EC-732
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN SIDE) EUROPE - QG

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). GI
The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the MA
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input Signal to ECM

ECM func-
Actuator
EM
tion
Fuel injec-
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas tion & mix-
LC
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Injectors
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) ture ratio
control
FE
P0171 I Fuel injection system does not operate properly. I Intake air leaks
0171 I The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
(The mixture ratio is too lean.) I Injectors
I Exhaust gas leaks
CL
I Incorrect fuel pressure
I Lack of fuel
I Mass air flow sensor MT
NOTE: AT
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. SU
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARN CON-
TROL” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. BR
SEF652Y
4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “START”.
5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. ST
6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, RS
EC-736.
7) If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection sys-
tem has a malfunction. BT
8) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-736. If engine does
not start, visually check for exhaust and intake air leak. HA
SEF058Y
With GST SC
3) Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then EL
restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- IDX
nector.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is
detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC P0100.
JEF105Y
EC-733
7) Start engine again and run it for at least 10 minutes at idle
speed.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to
“Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-736.
tem has a malfunction.
not start, visually check for exhaust and intake air leak.
EC-734
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC789
EC-735

2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst.
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
SEF012XA
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 [or heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector terminal 2]
and ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC-736
4 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

1. Release fuel pressure to zero. GI
Refer to EC-526.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure.
At idling: MA
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected.
235 kPa (2.35 bar, 2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected.
294 kPa (2.94 bar, 3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
EM
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
LC
NG © GO TO 5.

Check the following. FE
I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-960.)
I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-527.)
I Fuel lines (Refer to “ENGINE MAINTENANCE” in MA section.) CL
I Fuel filter for clogging
MT
With CONSULT-II
AT
Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
at idling: 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec
at 2,500 rpm: 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
AX
With GST SU
Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
at 2,500 rpm: 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. ST
NG © Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-633.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-737
7 CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS

With CONSULT-II
1. Install all parts removed.
2. Start engine.
SEF190Y
Without CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
MEC703B
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-942.
8 REMOVE INJECTOR
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Remove injector with fuel tube assembly. Refer to EC-527.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. The injector harness connectors should remain con-
nected.
© GO TO 9.
EC-738
9 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. GI
2. Place pans or saucers under each injector.
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors.
MA
EM
LC
SEF595Q
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each cylinder. FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. CL
NG © Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new
one.
MT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-624. AT
© INSPECTION END
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-739
(RICH SIDE) EUROPE - QG

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MI (2 trip detection logic).
ECM func-
tion
Fuel injec-
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas tion & mix-
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Injectors
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) ture ratio
control
P0172 I Fuel injection system does not operate properly. I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
0172 I The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. I Injectors
(The mixture ratio is too rich.) I Exhaust gas leaks

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure ” has been previously conducted,
With CONSULT-II
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARN CON-
TROL” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF652Y
4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “START”.
6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-743.
not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc.
SEF058Y
With GST
3) Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is
detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC P0100.
JEF105Y
EC-740
7) Start engine again and run it for at least 10 minutes at idle
speed.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be GI
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to
“Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-743.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection sys- MA
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-743. If
EM
engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for
fouling, etc.
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-741
Wiring Diagram
HEC789
EC-742
1 CHECK FOR EXHAUST AIR LEAK GI

2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before the three way catalyst.
MA
EM
LC
SEF099P
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
CL
2 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) CIRCUIT

MT
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector and ECM harness connector. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF012XA ST
Continuity should exist. RS
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 [or heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector terminal 2]
and ground.
Continuity should not exist. BT
OK or NG
HA
OK © GO TO 3.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-743

Refer to EC-526.
At idling:
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected.
Approximately 235 kPa (2.35 bar, 2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected.
Approximately 294 kPa (2.94 bar, 3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.


With CONSULT-II
at 2,500 rpm: 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
at 2,500 rpm: 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-636.
EC-744
6 CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS

With CONSULT-II GI
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. MA
EM
LC
SEF190Y
FE
Without CONSULT-II
1. Install all parts removed. CL
2. Start engine.
MT
AT
AX
SU
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard. BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. ST
NG © Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-943.
RS
7 REMOVE INJECTOR
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. BT
3. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EC-527.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. HA
© GO TO 8.
SC
8 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
2. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. EL
3. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
4. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. IDX
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip) © GO TO 9.
NG (Drips) © Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
EC-745

© INSPECTION END
EC-746
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR EUROPE - QG

The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tem-
perature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal GI
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther- MA
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
EM
SEF463TA LC
<Reference data>
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7

FE
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CL
CAUTION:
SEF012P
the ground. AT
AX
SU
BR

P0180 I An excessively high or low voltage is sent to ECM. I Harness or connectors RS

0180 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Fuel tank temperature sensor
BT
HA

SC
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II IDX
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
SEF194Y
EC-750.
EC-747
With GST
EC-748
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC897
EC-749

2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit harness connector.
JEF135Y
SEF603Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

I Harness connectors M81, B38
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor unit
© Repair harness or connector.

2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit harness connector terminal 1 and body ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG (Sedan) © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
NG (Hatchback) © GO TO 4.
EC-750

I COMBINATION METER connectors
I Harness for open or short between fuel level sensor unit to ground MA
© Repair harness or connector.
EM
5 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace fuel tank temperature sensor.

MT
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR AT
NJEC0201S01
Check resistance by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown
in the figure. AX
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 SU

50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
If NG, replace fuel tank temperature sensor. BR

SEF934WA
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-751
DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE EUROPE - QG

When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the CKP
sensor signal to vary, the ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.

1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to
overheating, the MI will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MI will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MI will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MI will only light
when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor
signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
P0300 I Multiple cylinders misfire. I Improper spark plug

0300 I Insufficient compression
P0301 I No. 1 cylinder misfires. I EGR volume control valve
0301 I The injector circuit is open or shorted
P0302 I No. 2 cylinder misfires. I Injectors
0302 I Intake air leak
I Insufficient ignition spark
P0303 I No. 3 cylinder misfires. I Lack of fuel
0303 I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
P0304 I No. 4 cylinder misfires.

0304

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
EC-752
MISFIRE EUROPE - QG
4) Start engine again and drive at 1,500 - 3,000 rpm for at least
3 minutes. GI
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
NOTE:
Refer to the freeze frame data for the test driving conditions. MA
EC-753. EM
With GST
LC

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
CL
NG © Discover air leak location and repair.
MT
2 CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace it.
AX
3 CHECK EGR FUNCTION SU

Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN).
Refer to EC-851.
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
ST
NG © Repair EGR system.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-753
MISFIRE EUROPE - QG
4 PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST

With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
SEF190Y
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a
momentary engine speed drop?
SEF604Y
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 5.
No © GO TO 7.
5 CHECK INJECTOR
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle?
MEC703B
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 6.
No © Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-943.
EC-754
MISFIRE EUROPE - QG
6 CHECK IGNITION SPARK

1. Turn Ignition switch “OFF”. GI
2. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
3. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly.
4. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine. MA
5. Check for spark.
EM
LC
FE
SEF575Q
OK or NG
CL
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-947.
MT
7 CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF156I ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. RS
NG © Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to
EM-25, “Checking and changing”.
BT

HA
Refer to EM section.
I Check compression pressure.
Standard: SC
1,324 kPa (13.24 bar, 13.5 kg/cm2, 192 psi)/350 rpm
Minimum:
1,128 kPa (11.28 bar, 11.5 kg/cm2, 164 psi)/350 rpm EL
Difference between each cylinder:
98 kPa (0.98 bar, 1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/350 rpm
OK or NG IDX
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
EC-755
MISFIRE EUROPE - QG

1. Install any parts removed.
2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-526.
JEF087Y
At idle: Approx. 235 kPa (2.35 bar, 2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10.

I Fuel lines
I Fuel filter for clogging

Perform “Basic Inspection”.
Refer to EC-586.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © 1. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”. Refer to EC-543.
2. Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (EC-768) and crankshaft position sensor
(POS) (EC-762).

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
EC-756
MISFIRE EUROPE - QG

With CONSULT-II GI
at 2,500 rpm: 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec MA
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. EM
at 2,500 rpm: 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
OK or NG
LC
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © GO TO 14.
14 CHECK CONNECTORS FE
Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds.
Refer to EC-633.
CL
OK or NG
NG © Repair or replace it.
MT
15 CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Check items on the rough idle symptom in “Symptom Matrix Chart”, EC-603.
AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
AX
SU
16 ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set. BR
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-556.
© GO TO 17.
ST
RS
© INSPECTION END
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-757
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) EUROPE - QG

The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses
engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock
sensor. The MI will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The
knock sensor has one trip detection logic.
SEF598K

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
P0325 I An excessively low or high voltage from the knock sen- I Harness or connectors
0325 sor is sent to ECM. (The knock sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Knock sensor

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y with CONSULT-II.
With GST
EC-758
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC791
EC-759

JEF104Y
© GO TO 2.
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-1

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and knock sensor harness connector.
JEF110Y
3. Check harness continuity between knock sensor signal terminal 1 and ECM terminal 81.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

Check the harness for open or short between knock sensor and ECM.
4 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace knock sensor.
EC-760

© INSPECTION END
MA
EM
LC
KNOCK SENSOR NJEC0212S01
I Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. FE
Resistance: 500 - 620 kΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
CAUTION: CL
Discard any knock sensors that have been dropped or physi-
cally damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF111Y
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-761
(POS) EUROPE - QG

The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the right-rear
wall of the cylinder block in relation to the signal plate at the rear
end of the crankshaft.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, and hall IC.
change.
SEF058X
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
JEF835Z

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (AC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
3 - 4V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
SEF979W
Crankshaft position
85 R 3 - 4V
sensor (POS)
[Engine is running]
SEF980W
EC-762
(POS) EUROPE - QG
P0335 I The 10° signal is not entered to ECM for the first few I Harness or connectors
0802 seconds during engine cranking. (The crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit is
I The 10° signal is not entered to ECM during engine run- open or shorted.) MA
ning. I Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I The 10° signal is not in the normal pattern at each I Starter motor (Refer to EL section.)
engine revolution. I Starting system circuit (Refer to EL section.) EM
LC
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II. CL
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, MT
SEF058Y
EC-765.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-763
(POS) EUROPE - QG
Wiring Diagram
HEC792
EC-764
(POS) EUROPE - QG

MA
EM
LC
JEF104Y
FE
© GO TO 2.
CL
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor harness connector.
MT
AT
AX
SU
JEF835Z
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF113Y
OK or NG
SC
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
EL
IDX
EC-765
(POS) EUROPE - QG

I Joint connector-4
I Harness for open or short between joint connector and ECM relay
I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor and joint connector
I Harness for open or short between joint connector and ECM
I ECM relay

1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor and ECM harness connectors.
JEF835Z
2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 85 and crankshaft position sensor harness connector terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.

2. Check harness continuity between terminal 1 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.

I Joint connector-5 (Hatchback models)
I Harness for open between crankshaft position sensor harness connector terminal 1 and engine ground.
7 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor.
EC-766
(POS) EUROPE - QG

© INSPECTION END
MA
EM
LC
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) NJEC0557S01
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connec-
tor.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. FE
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. CL
SEF121X
MT
AT
3 (+) - 1 (–)
AX
2 (+) - 1 (–) Except 0 or ∞
3 (+) - 2 (–)
SU
If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor.
BR
SEF122X
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-767
(PHASE) EUROPE - QG

The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion pro-
vided with exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cyl-
inder. The crankshaft position sensor senses the piston position.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and hall IC.
change.
SEF058X
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the cylinder num-
ber signal.

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
3 - 4V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
SEF977W
66 R Camshaft position sen-
75 R sor (PHASE) 3 - 4V
[Engine is running]
SEF978W
EC-768
(PHASE) EUROPE - QG
P0340 I The cylinder No. signal is not entered to ECM for the first I Harness or connectors
0340 few seconds during engine cranking. (The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit is
I The cylinder No. signal is not entered to ECM during open or shorted.) MA
engine running. I Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
I The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern during I Starter motor (Refer to EL section.)
engine running. I Starting system circuit (Refer to EL section.) EM
LC
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
MT
With CONSULT-II
3) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
AX
EC-771.
With GST SU
BR
SEF013Y
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-769
(PHASE) EUROPE - QG
Wiring Diagram
HEC793
EC-770
(PHASE) EUROPE - QG
1 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM GI

Does the engine turn over?
(Does the starter motor operate?)
MA
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check starting system. (Refer to EL section.)
EM
2 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS LC

FE
CL
MT
JEF104Y
AT
© GO TO 3.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-771
(PHASE) EUROPE - QG

JEF114Y
SEF113Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

I Joint connector-4
I Harness for open or short between joint connector and ECM relay
I Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor and joint connector
I Harness for open or short between joint connector and ECM

3. Check harness continuity between sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 75.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.
EC-772
(PHASE) EUROPE - QG

I Joint connector-5
I Harness for open or short between ECM and joint connector
I Harness for open or short between joint connector and camshaft position sensor MA
EM
2. Check harness continuity between sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. FE
NG © GO TO 8.
CL
Check the following. MT
I Joint connector-2
I Harness for open between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ground
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. AT
9 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR AX

OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace camshaft position sensor.
BR
ST
© INSPECTION END
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-773
(PHASE) EUROPE - QG

1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness con-
nector.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
SEF122X
3 (+) - 1 (–)
2 (+) - 1 (–) Except 0 or ∞
3 (+) - 2 (–)
If NG, replace camshaft position sensor.
EC-774
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE) EUROPE - QG
Description
GI
ECM func-
tion
MA

EM

LC
Throttle position sensor Throttle position EGR vol-

EGR volume control valve
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed ume control
Battery Battery voltage FE

Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal CL

PNP switch Park/Neutral position signal MT

to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the AT
built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the
ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum AX
by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control
valve remains close under the following conditions. SU
I Engine starting BR
I High-speed engine operation
I Engine idling ST
RS
I Low battery voltage
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF551W
IDX
EC-775
SEF552W

Mode NJEC0502

EGR VOL CON/V
I Shift lever: “N” Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
10 - 55 step
I No-load quickly

CAUTION:
TERMI- WIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
8 SB
9 W/B [Engine is running]
EGR volume control valve 0 - 14V
17 R/Y I Idle speed
18 BR/R
[Engine is running]
58 B Sensor’s ground I Warm-up condition 0V
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
I EGR system is operating.

If the absence of EGR flow is detected by EGR temperature sen-
sor under the condition that calls for EGR, a low-flow malfunction
is diagnosed.
SEF073P
EC-776
On Board Diagnosis Logic (Cont’d)
P0400 I No EGR flow is detected under conditions that call for I Harness or connectors GI
0400 EGR. (EGR volume control valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
I EGR volume control valve stuck closed MA
I EGR passage clogged
I EGR temperature sensor and circuit
I Exhaust gas leaks
EM
LC
CAUTION:
NOTE:
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously FE
I P0400 will not be displayed at “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode CL
with CONSULT-II even though DTC work support test result is
“NG”.
SEF013Y
MT
TESTING CONDITION:
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm bat-
tery voltage is more than 10V at idle, then stop engine AT
immediately.
I For best result, perform the test at a temperature of 0°C
(32°F) or higher. AX
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 9 seconds. SU
3) Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II and confirm it is within the range listed below. BR
SEF845Y
COOLAN TEMP/S: Less than 40°C (104°F)
If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and
allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to
ST
lower the engine coolant temperature with a fan or means
other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate
diagnostic result.
RS
4) Start engine and let it idle monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S”
value. When the “COOLAN TEMP/S” value reaches 70°C BT
(158°F), immediately go to the next step.
5) Select “EGR SYSTEM P0400” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. HA
SEF846Y 6) Touch “START”.
7) Accelerate vehicle to a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) once and
then stop vehicle with engine running. SC
9.
EL
8) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis- IDX
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 45 seconds or more.)
SEF235Y
EC-777
Selector lever 4th or 5th

step 2.
With GST
2) Check engine coolant temperature in MODE 1 with GST.
Engine coolant temperature: Less than 40°C (104°F)
If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and
allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to
lower the engine coolant temperature with a fan or means
other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate
diagnostic result.
3) Start engine and let it idle monitoring the value of “COOLAN
TEMP/S”. When the engine coolant temperature reaches 70°C
(158°F), immediately go to the next step.
4) Maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute.
Engine speed Above 2,400 rpm
5) Stop vehicle.
6) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 9 seconds, then
turn “ON”.
7) Repeat step 2 to 4.
9) If DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
EC-780.
I When using GST, “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
should be performed twice as much as when using CON-
SULT-II because GST cannot diaplay MODE 7 (1st trip
DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CON-
SULT-II is recommended.
EC-778
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC794
EC-779
1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

1. Start engine.
2. Check exhaust pipes and muffler for leaks.
SEF099P
OK or NG
II)
NG © Repair or replace exhaust system.

SEF327X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between fuse and ECM relay
I ECM relay
I Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and ECM relay.
© Repair harness or connectors, or replace fuse or ECM relay.
EC-780

ECM terminal 8 and EGR volume control valve terminal 1, MA
ECM terminal 9 and EGR volume control valve terminal 4,
ECM terminal 18 and EGR volume control valve terminal 6.
EM
LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
FE
5 CHECK EGR PASSAGE
Check EGR passage for clogging and cracks.
OK or NG
CL
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or replace EGR passage. MT
6 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AT

Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, EC-850.
OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace EGR temperature sensor. SU
7 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

BR
OK or NG
ST
OK © GO TO 8.
RS
BT
© INSPECTION END
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-781
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE NJEC0233S01

With CONSULT-II
1) Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
2) Check resistance between the following terminals.
terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance Ω
20 (68) 20 - 24
SEF069X
3) Reconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.

4) Remove EGR volume control valve from cylinder head.
(The EGR volume control valve harness connector should
remain connected.)
6) Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft
moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve
opening.
If NG, replace the EGR volume control valve.
Without CONSULT-II
20 (68) 20 - 24
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”. Check that EGR volume
control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward
according to the ignition switch position.
SEF605Y If NG, replace the EGR volume control valve.
SEF015Y
SEF560W
EC-782
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
Description
GI
ECM func-
tion
MA

EM

LC




I Engine idling ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF551W
IDX
EC-783
SEF552W

Mode NJEC0506

EGR VOL CON/V I Shift lever: “N” Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
I No-load quickly
1 - 10 step

CAUTION:
TERMI- WIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
8 SB
[Engine is running]
9 W/B
EGR volume control valve I Warm-up condition 0 - 14V
17 R/Y
I Idle speed
18 BR/R
P0403 I An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through the I Harness or connectors
0403 valve. (The EGR volume control valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
I EGR volume control valve

NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
4) Rev engine from idle to 2,000 rpm 20 times.
EC-784
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE”, EC-787.
With GST GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-785
Wiring Diagram
HEC795
EC-786

3. Check voltage between terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. MA
EM
LC
SEF327X FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. CL
NG © GO TO 2.
MT
I 15A fuse AT
I ECM relay AX
© Repair harness or connectors, or replace fuse or ECM relay. SU

BR
3. Check harness continuity between ST
ECM terminal 17 and EGR volume control valve terminal 3, RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
HA
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. IDX
EC-787

© INSPECTION END
EC-788
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE NJEC0512S01 GI

With CONSULT-II
2) Check resistance between the following terminals. MA
EM
20 (68) 20 - 24
SEF069X LC
remain connected.)
5) Turn ignition switch “ON”. FE
moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve CL
opening.
Without CONSULT-II MT
2) Check resistance between the following terminals. AT
AX
20 (68) 20 - 24
SU
according to the ignition switch position. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF015Y
SC
EL
IDX
SEF560W
EC-789
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION EUROPE - QG

The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen
sensors 1 (front) and 2 (rear).
A three way catalyst with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate
a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). As
oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
(rear) switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 (front) and
2 (rear) approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst
malfunction is diagnosed.
SEF184UD
P0420 I Three way catalyst does not operate properly. I Three way catalyst
0420 I Three way catalyst does not have enough oxygen stor- I Exhaust tube
age capacity. I Intake air leaks
I Injectors
I Injector leaks
I Spark plug

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
I Open engine hood before conducting following proce-
SEF847Y dure.
I Do not hold engine speed more than specified minutes
below.
2) Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-
3) Start engine.
4) Rev engine up to 3,000±500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive
minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “COMPLETED” appears on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
step 7.
SEF848Y 5) Wait 5 seconds at idle.
6) Rev engine up to 2,500±500 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP”
of CATALYST changes to “CMPLT” (it will take approximately
5 minutes.)
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
7) Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
8) Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-791.
SEF560X
EC-790

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way
catalyst. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. GI
Without CONSULT-II
MA
3) Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminals 62 (HO2S1 EM
signal), 63 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground.
4) Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF074X
5) Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low) LC
between ECM terminal 63 and engine ground is much less
than that of ECM terminal 62 and engine ground.
Switching frequency ratio = A/B
A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) voltage switching fre-
quency
B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) voltage switching fre- FE
quency
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way catalyst
CL
does not operate properly.
NOTE: MT
If the voltage at terminal 62 does not switch periodically more
than 5 times within 10 seconds at step 4, perform trouble
diagnosis for DTC P0133 first. (See EC-676.) AT
AX
SU
BR
Diagnostic Procedure NJEC0243 ST

1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent. RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-791

2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before the three way catalyst.
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.

Check for ignition timing.
Refer to “BASIC INSPECTION”, EC-586.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (EC-768) and crankshaft position sensor
(POS) (EC-762).
EC-792
5 CHECK INJECTORS
1. Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-943. GI
2. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 101, 103, 105 and 107 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MA
EM
LC
SEF075X
Battery voltage should exist.
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
CL
NG © Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” INJECTOR, EC-944.
6 CHECK IGNITION SPARK

MT
1. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
2. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly. AT
3. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
4. Check for spark.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF575Q
OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-947.
BT
7 CHECK INJECTOR HA
2. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EC-527.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
SC
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
EL
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip) © GO TO 8. IDX
NG (Drips) © Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
EC-793

Trouble is fixed © INSPECTION END
Trouble is not fixed © Replace three way catalyst.
EC-794
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
GI
ECM func-
tion
MA

EM

LC
EVAP can-
Ignition switch Start signal EVAP canister purge volume
ister purge
Closed throttle position switch Closed throttle position control
Throttle position sensor Throttle position FE

Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
CL
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank

MT
ter purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow AT
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. AX
SU
air flow changes.
BR
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NJEC0248S02 ST
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve RS
valve. BT
HA
SEF337U

Mode NJEC0249
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION EL

PURG VOL C/V
I No-load Revving engine — IDX
EC-795

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Warm-up condition
(11 - 14V)
I Idle speed
5 - 12V
EVAP canister purge vol-

14 GY/L
ume control solenoid valve [Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I 2,000 rpm
SEF975W
0443 valve. (The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V.
With CONSULT-II
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC
With GST
SEF058Y
EC-796
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC796
EC-797

SEF076X
4. Check voltage between terminals 1 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF606Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC-798

Refer to “Component Inspection” EC-799. GI
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. MA
EM
LC
© INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL AT
With CONSULT-II AX
1) Start engine.
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the SU
valve opening.
3) Check air passage continuity. BR
SEF677Y
PURG VOL CONT/V value between A and B ST
100.0% Yes
0.0% No RS
If NG, replace the EVAP canister purge volume control sole-
noid valve. BT
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity.
HA
SEF661U
Condition
between A and B

SC
Yes
minals
No supply No EL
If NG, replace the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve. IDX
EC-799
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) EUROPE - QG

pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the
SEF080X

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
2.5 - 3V
[Engine is running]
SEF976W
P0500 I The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed I Harness or connector
0500 sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being (The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or
driven. shorted.)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted
in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected
to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
EC-800
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine
2) Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with GI
CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should
exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable
gear position. MA
EM
5) Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
SEF196Y 6) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive LC
seconds.
ENG SPEED 2,600 - 4,000 rpm (M/T)
2,600 - 3,000 rpm (A/T)

FE
B/FUEL SCHDL 5.3 - 10.7 msec (M/T)
4.8 - 10.7 msec (A/T)
Selector lever Suitable position CL

PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
MT
EC-804.
With GST AT
AX
SU
BR
Without CONSULT-II
1) Lift up drive wheels.
ST
2) Start engine.
3) Read the voltage signal between ECM terminal 86 (Vehicle RS
shown in the figure. BT
HA
SEF607Y
SC
EL
IDX
EC-801
Wiring Diagram

SEDAN NJEC0277S01
HEC891
EC-802
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC820
EC-803

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 86 and meter terminal 57 (Sedan), 39 (Hatchback).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.


OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT

I Harness connectors M73, F111 (Hatchback only)
I Harness for open or short between vehicle speed sensor and ground (Sedan only)
OK © Check combination meter and vehicle speed sensor. Refer to EL-185, “METERS AND
GAUGES”.

© INSPECTION END
EC-804
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE EUROPE - QG
Description
GI
ECM func-
tion
MA

EM

LC
PNP switch Park/Neutral position Idle air

IACV-AAC valve
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal FE

Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed CL

Electrical load Electrical load signal MT

level. Idle speed is controlled through fine adjustment of the AT
passage to control the amount of auxiliary air. This valve is actu- AX
nals. One step of IACV-AAC valve movement causes the respec- SU
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The BR
position of the IACV-AAC valve so that engine speed coincides with ST
mum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consid- RS
ing fan operation and electrical load). BT
HA

SC
IACV-AAC Valve NJEC0279S0202
control of auxiliary air supply. This motor has four winding phases EL
valve opens or closes to change the auxiliary air quantity, the ECM IDX
SEF937W
EC-805

Mode NJEC0280

IACV-AAC/V

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
6 BR
[Engine is running]
7 LG
15 P
I Idle speed
16 OR
0505 valve. (The IACV-AAC valve circuit is open.)
I IACV-AAC valve

NOTE:
I If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, per-
form “Idle Air Volume Leaning”, EC-543, before conduct-
ing “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. For the target idle
speed, refer to “SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS)”, EC-989.
SEF058Y With CONSULT-II
4) Rev engine from idle to 2,000 rpm 20 times.
With GST
EC-806
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC798
EC-807

SEF938W
SEF343X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

I 15A fuse
I ECM relay
I Harness for open or short between IACV-AAC and ECM relay.
EC-808

ECM terminal 6 and IACV-AAC valve terminal 1, MA
ECM terminal 7 and IACV-AAC valve terminal 4,
ECM terminal 16 and IACV-AAC valve terminal 6.
EM
LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
FE
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose connected to the air control valve (Power steering) at the intake air duct. CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEF162Z
Vacuum does not exist or slightly exist. BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. ST
NG © Replace air control valve (Power steering).
RS
Check the vacuum hose for vacuum existence when steering wheel is turned.
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF162Z
IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 6.
EC-809
6 CHECK VACUUM PORT

1. Stop engine.
4. Check that air flows freely.
SEF924Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.

1. Disconnect vacuum hoses between the air control valve (Power steering) and vacuum port, air control valve (Power
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
8 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 9.
EC-810

1. Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly. GI
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP MA
CMPLT © INSPECTION END
INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”. EM
10 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED LC

2. Reconnect all harness connectors and vacuum hose.
I For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi-
cates less than 0.9V. FE
I For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
5. Stop vehicle with engine running.
6. Check target idle speed. CL
M/T: 700±50 rpm
OK or NG
MT
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-543. AT
11 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT AX

© INSPECTION END SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-811


20 - 24Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
3) Reconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.

4) Remove idle air adjusting unit assembly (IACV-AAC valve is
built-in) from engine.
(The IACV-AAC valve harness connector should remain con-
nected.)
AAC valve shaft smoothly moves forward and backward,
SEF605Y
SEF089X
EC-812
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH EUROPE - QG

A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position
switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open GI
throttle position switch is used only for A/T control.
When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle
position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only MA
uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge control
valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning.
EM
SEF505V LC
Mode NJEC0571
Throttle valve: Idle position ON
CLSD THL/P SW I Engine: Idle
Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF CL
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. MT
CAUTION:
TER-
MINAL
WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) AX
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE SU

Throttle position switch I Accelerator pedal released (11 - 14V)
40 Y/PU
(Closed position) [Engine is running]
Approximately 0V BR

P0510 I Battery voltage from the closed throttle position switch is I Harness or connectors RS
0510 sent to ECM with the throttle valve opened. (The closed throttle position switch circuit is
shorted.)
I Closed throttle position switch BT
HA

SC
CAUTION:
NOTE:
EL
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 9 seconds IDX
With CONSULT-II
SEF197Y
start engine.
EC-813
3) Select “CLSD THL/P SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. If
“CLSD THL/P SW” is not available, go to step 5.
4) Check the signal under the following conditions.
Condition Signal indication
Throttle valve: Idle position ON
Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-816.

6) Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.
THRTL POS SEN More than 2.3V
Driving pattern Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load)

will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.

EC-816.

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed
throttle position switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
Without CONSULT-II
2) Check the voltage between ECM terminal 40 (Closed throttle
position switch signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.
Condition Voltage
SEF090X
At idle Battery voltage
At 2,000 rpm Approximately 0V
EC-814
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC799
EC-815

2. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
JEF091Y
SEF837X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and fuse

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 40 and terminal 4.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
EC-816

I Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and ECM
I Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and TCM (Transmission Control Module)
5 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH IDLE POSITION EM

Perform Basic Inspection, EC-586.
© GO TO 6. LC
6 CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH

OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace throttle position switch.
CL
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-655. MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. AT
AX
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-624. SU
© INSPECTION END
BR

CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH NJEC0294S01
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. RS
2) Stop engine and turn ignition switch “ON”.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. BT
4) Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW” under the following
conditions.
NOTE: HA
SEF197Y Measurement must be made with closed throttle position
switch installed in vehicle.
SC
Throttle valve conditions CLSD THL/P SW
Completely closed ON
EL
Partially open or completely open OFF
If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic IDX

Without CONSULT-II
EC-817
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3) Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
4) Check continuity between terminals 4 and 5 under the follow-
ing conditions. Refer to wiring diagram.
NOTE:
Continuity measurement must be made with closed throttle
position switch installed in vehicle.
Throttle valve conditions Continuity
Completely closed Yes
Partially open or completely open No

EC-818
DTC P0605 ECM EUROPE - QG

The ECM consists of a microcomputer, and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the GI
engine.
MA
EM
SEF093X LC
P0605 I ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. I ECM

0605 FE
CL
MT
NOTE: AT
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. SU
3) Start engine.
4) Run engine for at least 1 second at idle speed. BR
SEF058Y
EC-820. ST
With GST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-819
DTC P0605 ECM EUROPE - QG
1 INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-819.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
With GST
2. Select MODE 4 with GST.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-819.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
2 REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM) system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs.
Refer to “NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)”, EC-560.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-543,
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © INSPECTION END
INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
EC-820
DTC P1111 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE EUROPE - QG

opening and closing timing. Engine coolant temperature signals, GI
valve timing.
The intake camshaft sprocket position is regulated by oil pressure MA
valve, oil pressure is transmitted to camshaft sprocket. Then, intake EM
SEF095X LC
Operation NJEC0514

temperature FE
20°C (68°F) -
Above 3 msec
70°C (158°F) 1,150 - 4,600
OFF ON Advance Increased CL
Above 70°C rpm
Above 7 msec
(158°F)

MT
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor AT

Mode NJEC0515

INT/V SOL-B1 I Lift up vehicle and suitable gear Revving engine from 2,000 to SU
position ON
3,000 rpm
ECM Terminals and Reference Value BR

NJEC0516
CAUTION: ST
TERMI- RS
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BT
1 Y/R
Intake valve timing control [Engine is running] HA
solenoid valve I Warm-up condition
Approximately 0V
I Lift up vehicle and suitable gear position
I Rev engine from 2,000 to 3,000 rpm SC
EL
P1111 I An improper voltage signal is entered to ECM through I Harness or connectors IDX
1111 intake valve timing control solenoid valve. (The intake valve timing control solenoid valve
circuit is open or shorted.)
I Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
EC-821
VALVE EUROPE - QG

NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
SEF608Y
Without CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”, wait at least 5 seconds.
2) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II” (Self-diagnostic results),
EC-560.
EC-822
VALVE EUROPE - QG
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC801
EC-823
VALVE EUROPE - QG

SEF149X
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

I 10A fuse

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 1 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC-824
VALVE EUROPE - QG

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. MA
EM
LC
© INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE AT
NJEC0521S01
2. Supply intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals with AX
battery voltage.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. SU
BR
SEF159Y
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-825
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
ECM func-
tion

Swirl con-
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Swirl control valve control sole-
trol valve
noid valve via swirl control
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed and cylinder number system
valve
control
This system has a swirl control valve in the intake passage of each cylinder.
While idling and during low engine speed operation, the swirl control valve closes. Thus the velocity of the air
in the intake passage increases, promoting the vaporization of the fuel and producing a swirl in the combus-
tion chamber.
Because of this operation, this system tends to increase the burning speed of the gas mixture, improve fuel
consumption, and increase the stability in running conditions.
Also, except when idling and during low engine speed operation, this system opens the swirl control valve.
The solenoid valve controls swirl control valve’s shut/open condition. This solenoid valve is operated by the
ECM.
Engine coolant tempera- Throttle position sensor Swirl control valve con-
Engine speed Swirl control valve
ture (Idle position) trol solenoid valve
ON —
15 - 40°C ON Closed
OFF Below 2,400 rpm*
Except above OFF Open
*: The value may vary according to accelerator pedal operation.
SEF081X

Mode NJEC0523

SWRL CONT S/V I Engine speed: Idle (104°F).

OFF
above 40°C (104°F).
EC-826

CAUTION:
GI
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR EM
NO.
[Engine is running]
(59°F) to 40°C (104°F).
0 - 1V LC
Swirl control valve control I Idle speed
104 SB
solenoid valve [Engine is running]
(104°F). (11 - 14V)
I Idle speed FE
CL
MT
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE AT
NJEC0525S01
The swirl control valve control solenoid valve responds to signals
from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the AX
solenoid valve is bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the
swirl control valve actuator. This operation closes the swirl control
valve. When the ECM sends an OFF signal, the vacuum signal is SU
cut and the swirl control valve opens.
BR
SEF098X

P1131 An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through swirl I Harness or connectors RS
1131 control valve control solenoid valve. (The swirl control valve control solenoid valve cir-
cuit is open or shorted.)
I Swirl control valve control solenoid valve BT
HA

SC
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II IDX
turn ignition switch ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-827
With GST
EC-828
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC802
EC-829
1 INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK CIRCUIT
1. Perform “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 3.

1. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and fuse
EC-830

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 104 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector
terminal 2 with CONSULT-II or tester. MA
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
EM
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
LC
6 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace swirl control valve control solenoid valve. CL
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT MT

© INSPECTION END AT
AX
SU
BR

SWIRL CONTROL VALVE AND ACTUATOR NJEC0530S01
Supply vacuum to actuator and check swirl control valve operation.
RS
Condition Swirl control valve
Supply vacuum to actuator Close

BT
No supply Open
If NG, replace swirl control valve and actuator. HA

SEF103X
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

NJEC0530S02
SC
Check solenoid valve air passage continuity.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON” and perform “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in EL
“ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity IDX
SWIRL CONT SOL/V between A and B between A and C
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
SEF105X
EC-831
valve.
Without CONSULT-II
Condition
12V direct current supply

2
No supply No Yes

valve.
ONE-WAY VALVE NJEC0530S03

Check one-way valve air passage continuity.
Blow air from side B to A Yes
Blow air from side A to B No
If NG, replace one-way valve.
SEF106X
VACUUM TANK NJEC0530S04

Check vacuum tank leakage.
Apply vacuum −80.0 kPa (−800 mbar, −600 mmHg, −23.62 inHg,
−11.60 psi). Then keep it for 10 seconds and check there is no
leakage.
If NG, replace vacuum tank.
SEF405S
EC-832
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM) EUROPE - QG
System Description

COOLING FAN CONTROL NJEC0433S01
GI
ECM func-
tion
MA

Cooling fan EM
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal Cooling fan relay(s)
control
LC
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refriger-
ant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has ON-OFF control.
OPERATION NJEC0433S02 FE
Engine coolant temperatures at which the cooling fan turns “ON” are indicated in the Table below.
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
CL
High pressure of
Air conditioner switch refrigerant Less than 20 (12) 20 - 80 (12 - 50) More than 80 (50)
kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi) MT
More than 1,760
Always Always More than 95°C (203°F)
(17.6, 17.95, 255)
ON AT
Less than 1,760
Always More than 95°C (203°F) More than 95°C (203°F)
(17.6, 17.95, 255)
More than 100°C

AX
OFF More than 95°C (203°F) More than 95°C (203°F)
(212°F)
SU
Mode NJEC0486
Specification data are reference values. BR

ST
the engine ON
(Compressor operates) RS
Engine coolant temperature is less
I After warming up engine, idle OFF
than 100°C (212°F)
COOLING FAN the engine. BT
I Air conditioner switch: OFF Engine coolant temperature is
ON
100°C (212°F) or more
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-833

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

13 LG/R Cooling fan relay
[Engine is running]
0 - 0.6V
[Engine is running]
I Both air conditioner switch and blower switch are Approximately 0V
23 L/W Air conditioner switch “ON” (Compressor operates)


rise.
indicated.
P1217 I The engine coolant temperature is extraordinary high, I Harness or connectors

1217 even when the load is not heavy. (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted)
I Cooling fan
I Thermostat
I Blocked radiator
I Blocked front end (Improper fitting of nose mask)
I Crushed vehicle frontal area (Vehicle frontal is
collided but not repaired)
I Blocked air passage by improper installation of
front fog lamp or fog lamps.
I Improper mixture ratio of coolant
I Damaged bumper
For more information, refer to “MAIN 12 CAUSES
OF OVERHEATING”, EC-843.
CAUTION:
“Changing Engine Coolant”. Also, replace the engine oil.
1) Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use
coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-21, “Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”, “RECOM-
MENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS”.
EC-834

WARNING:
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by EM
turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape.
Then turn the cap all the way off.
SEF621WA With CONSULT-II LC
1) Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester)
mixture ratio.
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos- FE
I If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55%, CL
replace the coolant in the following procedure LC-18, “Chang-
ing Engine Coolant”.
SEF646X
2) Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer MT
SULT-II.
5) If the results are NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-837.
AX
Without CONSULT-II
1) Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester) SU
mixture ratio. BR
SEC163BA
tic Procedure”, EC-837. ST
I If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55%,
replace the coolant in the following procedure LC-18, “Chang- RS
ing Engine Coolant”.
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos- BT
3) Start engine.
Be careful not to overheat engine. HA
SC
6) Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
ating. EL
8) Make sure that cooling fan operates. Refer to “OPERATION”
table for cooling fan, EC-833. IDX
EC-835
Wiring Diagram
HEC805
EC-836
1 CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION GI

3. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”. MA
5. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate.
EM
LC
FE
SEC163BA
CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
MT
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION AT

Is air conditioner operating?
(Check operation of compressor and blower motor.) AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. SU
NG © Check for failure of air conditioner to operate. Refer to HA section.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-837

2. Disconnect cooling fan relay.
SEF628Y
4. Check voltage between terminals 1, 3, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF590X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

I 10A fuse
I 30A fusible link
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay and fuse
EC-838

MA
EM
LC
SEF609Y
3. Check harness continuity between relay terminal 5 and motor-1 terminal 2, motor-1 terminal 1 and body ground.
5. Check harness continuity between relay terminal 7 and motor-2 terminal 2, motor-2 terminal 1 and body ground.
CL
MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
AT
AX
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and relay terminal 2. Refer to wiring diagram. SU
OK or NG
BR
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7. ST
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART RS

I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay and ECM
BT
HA
8 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. EL
IDX
EC-839

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.

© INSPECTION END

Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
CAUTION:
SLC754A
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Check the following for leak
I Hose
I Radiator
I Water pump
Refer to LC-14, “Water Pump”.
EC-840

Apply pressure to cap with a tester. GI
MA
EM
LC
SLC755A
59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Replace radiator cap. CL
13 CHECK THERMOSTAT MT
2. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift. AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SLC343
Valve lift:
RS
More than 8 mm/95°C (0.31 in/203°F)
3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature.
For details, refer to LC section (“Thermostat”).
BT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14. HA
NG © Replace thermostat
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15. IDX
EC-841

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-843.
© INSPECTION END
EC-842
Main 12 Causes of Overheating =NJEC0492
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page GI

I Blocked condenser
I Blocked radiator grille MA
I Blocked bumper
2 I Coolant mixture I Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-21, “RECOM- EM
MENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS”.
3 I Coolant level I Visual Coolant up to MAX level See LC-18, “Changing LC


(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 Check”.
kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi) (Limit)
FE
Check”.
CL
ON*2 6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and Both hoses should be See LC-15, “Thermostat”
lower radiator hoses hot and LC-17, “Radiator”.
ON*1 7 I Cooling fan I CONSULT-II Operating See “TROUBLE DIAG- MT

NOSIS FOR OVER-
HEAT” (EC-833).
AT
lyzer
AX
gauge when driving

SU
OFF*4 10 I Coolant return from I Visual Should be initial level in See LC-19, “Refilling BR
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank Engine Coolant”.
tor
OFF 11 I Cylinder head I Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-43, “Inspection”,
ST
gauge mum distortion (warping) “CYLINDER HEAD”.
12 I Cylinder block and pis- I Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-63, “Inspection”, RS
tons walls or piston “CYLINDER BLOCK”.

BT
HA
For more information, refer to LC-24, “ OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS”.

SC
COOLING FAN RELAY NJEC0493S01
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. EL
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and

Yes IDX
2

SEF745U
EC-843
COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 NJEC0493S02
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Terminals
(+) (−)
Cooling fan motor 2 1
Cooling fan motor should operate.

SEF610Y If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
EC-844
DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR EUROPE - QG

The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the
EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot GI
exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway
changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modi-
fies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then MA
returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature
increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases. This
sensor is not used to control the engine system. EM
It is used only for the on board diagnosis.
SEF599K LC
<Reference data>
EGR temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V MΩ
0 (32) 4.56 0.62 - 1.05

FE
50 (122) 2.25 0.065 - 0.094
100 (212) 0.59 0.011 - 0.015

CL
(EGR temperature sensor) and ground.
When EGR system is operating. MT
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V
CAUTION:
the ground. AX
SU
BR
SEF068X

P1401 A) An excessively low voltage from the EGR tempera- I Harness or connectors RS
1401 ture sensor is sent to ECM even when engine cool- (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is shorted.)
ant temperature is low. I EGR temperature sensor
I Malfunction of EGR function BT
B) An excessively high voltage from the EGR tempera- I Harness or connectors
ture sensor is sent to ECM even when engine cool- (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is open.)
ant temperature is high. I EGR temperature sensor HA
I Malfunction of EGR function

SC
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st trip
DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MAL-
FUNCTION B”. EL
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, IDX
EC-845
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A =NJEC0344S01
With CONSULT-II
3) Verify that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 50°C (122°F).
If the engine coolant temperature is above the range, cool
the engine down.
EC-849.
SEF174Y
With GST

CAUTION:
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and warm it up to above 80°C (176°F).
2) Select “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT.
3) Hold engine speed at 1,500 rpm.
SEF200Y
4) Touch “Qu” and set the EGR volume control valve opening to
50 step and check EGR TEMP SEN.
EGR TEMP SEN should decrease to less than 1.0V.
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
EC-849.
If the check result is OK, go to the following step.

VHCL SPEED SE Above 90 km/h (56 MPH) or more

SEF201Y
EC-849.
EC-846
With GST
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 9 seconds, then GI
turn “ON”.
3) Select “MODE 1” with GST and maintain the following condi-
tions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. MA
Engine speed Above 2,400 rpm
EM

LC
4) Select “MODE 7” with GST
EC-849.
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-847
Wiring Diagram
HEC807
EC-848

2. Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF127X
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF896X
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 2.
BR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. ST
2. Check harness continuity between EGR temperature sensor harness terminal 2 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist. RS
OK or NG BT
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3. HA

SC
I Harness for open or short between EGR temperature sensor and ECM
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and ECM EL
I Joint connector-3
© Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
IDX
EC-849
4 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace EGR temperature sensor.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.

© INSPECTION END

EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR NJEC0348S01
Check resistance change and resistance value.
<Reference data>
EGR temperature Voltage Resistance
°C (°F) V MΩ
0 (32) 4.56 0.62 - 1.05
50 (122) 2.25 0.065 - 0.094
SEF611Y 100 (212) 0.59 0.011 - 0.015
If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor.
SEF068X
EC-850
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) EUROPE - QG
Description
GI
ECM func-
tion
MA

EM
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature EGR vol-

EGR volume control valve LC
Ignition switch Start signal ume control

to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the CL
ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum MT
valve remains close under the following conditions. AT
I Engine idling AX
I Excessively high engine coolant temperature SU
I Low battery voltage BR
I Engine starting
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF551W
SC
EL
IDX
EC-851
SEF552W

Mode NJEC0539

EGR VOL CON/V
10 - 55 step
I No-load quickly

CAUTION:
TERMI- WIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
8 SB
[Engine is running.]
9 W/B
EGR volume control valve I Warm-up condition 0 - 14V
17 R/Y
I Idle speed
18 BR/R
I Idle speed
I Idle speed
I Warm-up condition 0 - 1.0V

If EGR temperature sensor detects EGR flow under the condition
that does not call for EGR, a high-flow malfunction is diagnosed.
NOTE:
Diagnosis for this DTC will occur when engine coolant temperature
is below 50 to 60°C (122 to 140°F). Therefore, it will be better to
turn ignition switch “ON” (start engine) at the engine coolant tem-
perature below 30°C (86°F) when starting DTC confirmation pro-
cedure.
SEF073P
EC-852
On Board Diagnosis Logic (Cont’d)
P1402 I EGR flow is detected under conditions that do not call for I Harness or connectors GI
1402 EGR. (The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
I EGR volume control valve leaking or stuck open
I EGR temperature sensor MA
EM
LC
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
I Engine coolant temperature and EGR temperature must
CL
be verified in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II
before starting DTC WORK SUPPORT test. If it is out of
SEF202Y range below, the test cannot be conducted.
MT
COOLAN TEMP/S: −10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)*
EGR TEMP SEN: Less than 4.8V AT
If the values are out of the ranges indicated above, park
the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine tempera-
ture to stabilize. Do not attempt to reduce the engine cool- AX
ant or EGR temperature with a fan or means other than
ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnos-
tic result. SU
*: Although CONSULT-II screen displays “−10 to 40°C (14 to
104°F)” as a range of engine coolant temperature, ignore it.
With CONSULT-II BR
SEF851Y
turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “EGR SYSTEM P1402” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC ST
WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Touch “START”. Follow instruction of CONSULT-II. RS
4) Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II
screen is turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take 45 seconds or
more.) BT
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, turn ignition
“OFF” and cool the engine coolant temperature to the
range of −10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F). Retry from step 1. HA
SEF852Y 5) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
Procedure”, EC-856. SC
EL
IDX
SEF236Y
EC-853
With GST
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “MODE 1” with GST.
2) Check that engine coolant temperature is within the range of
−10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F).
3) Check that voltage between ECM terminal 72 (EGR tempera-
ture sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.8V.
5) Stop engine.
6) Perform from step 1 to 4.
SEF947X
recommended.
EC-854
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC794
EC-855

SEF327X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

Check the harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and ECM relay.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
EC-856

Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, EC-857. GI
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. MA
EM
LC
© INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AT
NJEC0354S01
<Reference data> AX
°C (°F) V MΩ
SU
0 (32) 4.56 0.62 - 1.05
50 (122) 2.25 0.065 - 0.094

BR
SEF611Y 100 (212) 0.59 0.011 - 0.015
If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor. ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF068X
EC-857
With CONSULT-II
20 (68) 20 - 24
SEF069X 3) Reconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.

remain connected.)
opening
Without CONSULT-II
20 (68) 20 - 24
SEF605Y
SEF015Y
SEF560W
EC-858
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE EUROPE - QG
System Description

The malfunction information related to A/T (Automatic Transaxle) is transferred through the line (circuit) from
TCM (Transmission Control Module) to ECM. Therefore, be sure to erase the malfunction information such as GI
DTC not only in TCM (Transmission Control Module) but also ECM after the A/T related repair.
MA
CAUTION: EM
TERMI- LC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
91 PU A/T check signal [Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - Approximately 5V

FE
P1605 I An incorrect signal from TCM (Transmission Control Mod- I Harness or connectors
CL
1605 ule) is sent to ECM. [The communication line circuit between ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control Module) is open
or shorted.] MT
I TCM (Transmission Control Module)
AT
AX
SU
BR
DTC Confirmation Procedure NJEC0576 ST

NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 9 RS
seconds before conducting the next test.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. BT
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 40 seconds. HA
SEF058Y
EC-861.
With GST SC
EL
IDX
EC-859
Wiring Diagram
HEC804
EC-860
1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT GI

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF116Y
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 91 and TCM terminal 15. FE
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. MT
AT
AX
© INSPECTION END
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-861
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP)
SWITCH EUROPE - QG

position (PNP) switch is “ON”.
exists.
SEF740W

Mode NJEC0425
Shift lever: “P” or “N” ON

Except above OFF

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

I Gear position is “N” or “P” (A/T models)
42 G/OR PNP switch A/T models

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
M/T models
Approximately 5V
P1706 I The signal of the PNP switch is not changed in the pro- I Harness or connectors
1706 cess of engine starting and driving. (The PNP switch circuit is open or shorted.)
I PNP switch

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
EC-862
SWITCH EUROPE - QG
2) Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the fol-
lowing conditions. GI
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal
“N” and “P” (A/T only) position ON MA

Except the above position OFF
EM
SEF213Y 3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. LC
seconds.

FE
B/FUEL SCHDL 3.0 msec or more
CL
VHCL SPEED SE 70 - 130 km/h (43 - 81 MPH)

MT
EC-865.
AT
AX
SU
BR
Overall Function Check NJEC0429 ST

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral
position switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed. RS
Without CONSULT-II
2) Check voltage between ECM terminal 42 (PNP switch signal) BT
and body ground under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position) Voltage (V) (Known good data) HA
SEF137X “P” (A/T only) and “N” position Approx. 0
A/T models SC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except the above position (11 - 14V)
M/T models EL
Approximately 5
3) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-865. IDX
EC-863
SWITCH EUROPE - QG
Wiring Diagram
HEC808
EC-864
SWITCH EUROPE - QG
1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT GI

MA
EM
LC
SEF740W
FE
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. MT
NG © GO TO 2.
AT
Check the harness for open or short between PNP switch and body ground. AX
SU
BR
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. RS
NG © GO TO 4.
BT
Check the harness for open or short between ECM and PNP switch. HA
SC
5 CHECK PNP SWITCH
Refer to MT-21, “POSITION SWITCH CHECK” or AT-184, “PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH”.
EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
IDX
EC-865
SWITCH EUROPE - QG

© INSPECTION END
EC-866
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR EUROPE - QG

The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct hous-
ing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a sig- GI
nal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor MA
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
EM
SEF206T LC
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9

FE
80 (176) 1.23 0.27 - 0.38
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
CL
CAUTION:
SEF012P
the ground. AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-867
Wiring Diagram
HEC907
EC-868

MA
EM
LC
SEF004Y
OK or NG
FE
NG © GO TO 2. CL
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY MT

2. Disconnect intake air temperature sensor harness connector.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF602Y
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF301X
OK or NG EL
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
IDX
EC-869


2. Check harness continuity between intake air temperature sensor harness connector terminal 2 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

I Joint connector-3
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and intake air temperature sensor
6 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace intake air temperature sensor.

© INSPECTION END

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR NJEC1274S01
SEF913W
EC-870
<Reference data>
°C (°F)
Resistance kΩ GI
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38

MA
If NG, replace intake air temperature sensor.

EM
SEF012P LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-871
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) EUROPE - QG

SEF463R
SEF288D

Mode NJEC1215
HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V

(B1)
10 seconds.

CAUTION:
TERMI- WIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
[Engine is running]
62 W I After warming up to normal operating tempera-
1 (front)
ture and engine speed is 2,000 rpm
SEF008W
EC-872
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC851
EC-873
1 INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load, and make sure that the monitors fluctuate between LEAN and
RICH more than five times in 10 seconds.
SEF218Z
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.

Without CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Set ECM in “Diagnostic test mode - II [Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor (front)]”. Refer to “How to Switch Diagnostic
Test Modes”, EC-560.
4. Keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load, and make sure that the MI comes ON more than five times in 10
seconds.
SAT652J
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.
EC-874

MA
EM
LC
JEF104Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF012XA
AX
© GO TO 5.
SU
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque: BR
40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb)
© GO TO 6. ST
6 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT RS

BT
HA
OK or NG SC
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EL
IDX
EC-875

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.

© INSPECTION END

With CONSULT-II
lowing steps.
CAUTION:
SEF647Y
EC-876
GI
MA
EM
SEF648Y
LC
Without CONSULT-II
I Malfunction indicator goes on more than five times within 10
seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II [HEATED OXYGEN SEN- CL
MT
CAUTION: AT
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-877
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) EUROPE - QG
Description
ECM func-
tion
Heated
oxygen
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) heater (front)
(front) con-
trol
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) corresponding to the engine
operating condition.
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
Above 3,200 rpm OFF
Below 3,200 rpm ON

Mode NJEC1224

HO2S1 HTR (B1)

CAUTION:
TERMI- WIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
Heated oxygen sensor 1 I Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.
4 R/B
I Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm. (11 - 14V)
EC-878
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC852
EC-879

2. Set the tester probe between ECM terminals 4 [HO2S1 Heater (front) signal] and ground.
4. Check the voltage under the following conditions.
SEF239Z
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.

SEF012XA
SEF934X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
EC-880

I Harness connectors E106, M21 (Sedan), E175, M160 (Hatchback)
I 10A fuse MA
I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) and fuse
EM
3. Check harness continuity between heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector terminal 3 and ECM terminal 4.
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
CL
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) MT

OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). AX

© INSPECTION END
BR

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT) NJEC1230S01
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 Ω at 25°C (77°F) RS
Continuity should not exist. BT
If NG, replace the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been HA
SEF935X dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
SC
and approved anti-seize lubricant. EL
IDX
EC-881
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) EUROPE - QG

conditions.
SEF327R

Mode NJEC1232
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V

rpm LEAN +, RICH
(B1)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
(rear)
EC-882
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC853
EC-883
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

1. Start engine and drive the vehicle at over 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle and keep the engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals 63 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] and ground.
4. Check the voltage while revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release the accelerator pedal as quickly as possible.)
SEF240Z
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

Keep engine at idle for 10 minutes, then check the voltage between ECM terminal 63 and ground, or check the voltage
when coasting at 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
SEF240Z
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 3.
EC-884

MA
EM
LC
JEF104Y
© GO TO 4. FE
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT CL

MT
AT
AX
SU
SEF160Z
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 and heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector terminal 1. BR
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 [or heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector terminal 1] ST
and ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. BT
NG © GO TO 5.
HA
Check the harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) and ECM.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-885

1. Check harness continuity between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector terminal 4 and body ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.

© INSPECTION END

With CONSULT-II
SEF662Y
the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be
below 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is
−25%.
CAUTION:
SEF244YA
EC-886
Without CONSULT-II
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. GI
nal) and engine ground. MA
at least 10 times. EM
SEF032X If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 4, step 5 is not nec- LC
essary.
(A/T). FE
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been CL
MT
and approved anti-seize lubricant. AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-887
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) EUROPE - QG
Description
ECM func-
tion
Heated
oxygen
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) heater (rear)
(rear) con-
trol
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) corresponding to the engine
speed.
Engine condition Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
Engine stopped OFF
Engine is running. Engine speed below 3,600 rpm after

driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 ON
km/h (43 MPH) or more
Engine speed above 3,600 rpm OFF

Mode NJEC1241
Below 3,600 rpm [After driving for 2 minutes at a

ON
I Engine speed speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more]
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
Above 3,600 rpm OFF
I Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped) OFF

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm [After driving
0 - 1V
for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or
more]
3 W/R
heater (rear) [Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “ON”] (11 - 14V)
I Engine stopped
EC-888
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC854
EC-889

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive the vehicle at over 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle and keep the engine running.
3. Set the voltmeter probe between ECM terminals 3 [HO2S2 HTR (B1) signal] and ground.
4. Check the voltage under the following conditions.
SEF241Z
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF160Z
4. Check voltage between terminal 2 and ground.
SEF218W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
EC-890

I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) and fuse MA
I 10A fuse
EM
3. Check harness continuity between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector terminal 3 and ECM terminal 3.
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
CL
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART MT

Check the harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) and ECM.
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. AT
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) AX

OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 7.
BR
ST
© INSPECTION END
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-891

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR) NJEC1247S01
1. Check resistance between terminals 2 and 3.
2. Check continuity.
Terminal No. Continuity
1 and 2, 3, 4
No
4 and 1, 2, 3
If NG, replace the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).

CAUTION:
SEF221W
EC-892
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM EUROPE - QG
Description
GI
ECM func-
tion
MA

EM

LC




I Engine idling ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF551W
IDX
EC-893
SEF552W
EGR Temperature Sensor NJEC1282S0203

The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the
EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot
exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway
changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modi-
fies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then
returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature
increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases. This
sensor is not used to control the engine system.
SEF599K
<Reference data>
EGR temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V MΩ
0 (32) 4.56 0.62 - 1.05
50 (122) 2.25 0.065 - 0.094
100 (212) 0.59 0.011 - 0.015
(EGR temperature sensor) and ground.
When EGR system is operating.
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V
CAUTION:
the ground.
SEF068X

Mode NJEC1283

EGR VOL CON/V
10 - 55 step
I No-load quickly
EC-894

CAUTION:
GI
TERMI- WIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
EM
8 SB
9 W/B [Engine is running]
EGR volume control valve 0 - 14V
17 R/Y I Idle speed
18 BR/R
LC
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
FE
I Idle speed
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-895
Wiring Diagram
HEC794
EC-896
Yes or No MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 4.
EM
LC
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Confirm that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates less than 40°C (104°F).
If the indication is out of range, cool the engine down.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF013Y
5. Make sure that “EGR TEMP SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode indicates more than 3V. Print out the screen or note the
AX
indication.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF014Y
OK or NG BT
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 6. HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-897

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm and set the “EGR VOL CONT/V” opening to “20 step”.
4. Make sure the “EGR TEMP SEN” indicated is lower than the value indicated in test No. 2 by 1.0V or more.
SEF015Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 6.

Without CONSULT-II
2. Confirm that the voltage between ECM terminal 70 (Engine coolant temperature sensor signal) and ground is more
than 2.72V.
If the voltage is out of range, cool the engine down.
SEF016Y
4. Make sure that the voltage between ECM terminal 72 (EGR temperature sensor signal) and ground is more than 3V.
SEF755Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 6.
EC-898

2. Rev engine from idle up to about 3,000 rpm two to three times.
3. Make sure the voltage between ECM terminal 72 and ground is lower than the voltage measured in test No. 4 by 1.0V MA
or more.
EM
LC
SEF755Z
FE
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 6.
MT
6 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. AT
2. Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF127X
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF896X
EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
IDX
EC-899
7 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

2. Check harness continuity between EGR temperature sensor harness terminal 2 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.

I Harness for open or short between EGR temperature sensor and ECM
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and ECM
I Joint connector-3

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
10 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY

SEF782Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 11.

I 15A fuse
I ECM relay
EC-900

ECM terminal 8 and EGR volume control valve terminal 1, MA
EM
LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
FE
13 CHECK EGR PASSAGE
Check EGR passage for clogging and cracks.
OK or NG
CL
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Repair or replace EGR passage. MT
14 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE AT

OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. SU

BR
© INSPECTION END
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-901

With CONSULT-II
20 (68) 20 - 24
SEF069X

remain connected.)
opening.
Without CONSULT-II
20 (68) 20 - 24
SEF015Y
SEF560W
EC-902
EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR NJEC1289S07
<Reference data> GI
°C (°F) V MΩ MA
0 (32) 4.56 0.62 - 1.05
50 (122) 2.25 0.065 - 0.094 EM

100 (212) 0.59 0.011 - 0.015
SEF611Y
If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor. LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF068X
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-903
VALVE EUROPE - QG
Description
ECM func-
tion

EVAP can-
Ignition switch Start signal EVAP canister purge volume
ister purge
Closed throttle position switch Closed throttle position control

Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
ter purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control.
air flow changes.

canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
valve.
SEF337U

Mode NJEC1292

PURG VOL C/V
I No-load Revving engine —
EC-904
VALVE EUROPE - QG

CAUTION:
GI
TER-
WIRE
COLOR EM
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
(11 - 14V) LC
5 - 12V
EVAP canister purge vol-

14 GY/L
ume control solenoid valve [Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition FE
I 2,000 rpm
SEF975W
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-905
VALVE EUROPE - QG
Wiring Diagram
HEC909
EC-906
VALVE EUROPE - QG
Yes or No MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
EM
2 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL FUNCTION
LC
With CONSULT-II
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose connected to the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at the EVAP
canister.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Change the valve opening percentage touching “Qu” and “Qd” and check for vacuum existence under the following
FE
conditions.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF156Z
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 5. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-907
VALVE EUROPE - QG
3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
3. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose connected to the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at the EVAP
canister.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 90 seconds.
5. Check for vacuum existence at the EVAP purge hose under the following conditions.
SEF760Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 5.
4 CHECK EVAP CANISTER

2. Remove EVAP canister.
3. Block port B of EVAP canister.
4. Blow air through port A orally, and confirm that air flows freely through port C with check valve resistance.
5. Block port A of EVAP canister.
6. Blow air through port B orally, and confirm that air flows freely through port C.
SEF917W
OK or NG
NG © Replace EVAP canister.
EC-908
VALVE EUROPE - QG

MA
EM
LC
SEF076X
4. Check voltage between terminals 1 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF606Y
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
SU
NG © GO TO 6.

BR
I Harness connectors E74, F35 ST
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse
7 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT BT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and terminal 2. HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. EL
IDX
EC-909
VALVE EUROPE - QG

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.

© INSPECTION END

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine.
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
3) Check air passage continuity.
SEF677Y
PURG VOL CONT/V value between A and B
100.0% Yes
0.0% No
If NG, replace the EVAP canister purge volume control sole-

noid valve.
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity.
SEF661U
Condition
between A and B

Yes
minals
No supply No
If NG, replace the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve.
EC-910
VALVE EUROPE - QG
Description
GI
ECM func-
tion
MA

EM

LC
PNP switch Park/Neutral position Idle air

IACV-AAC valve
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal FE

Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed CL

Electrical load Electrical load signal MT

level. Idle speed is controlled through fine adjustment of the AT
passage to control the amount of auxiliary air. This valve is actu- AX
nals. One step of IACV-AAC valve movement causes the respec- SU
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The BR
position of the IACV-AAC valve so that engine speed coincides with ST
mum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consid- RS
ing fan operation and electrical load). BT
HA

SC
IACV-AAC Valve NJEC1300S0201
control of auxiliary air supply. This motor has four winding phases EL
valve opens or closes to change the auxiliary air quantity, the ECM IDX
SEF937W
EC-911
VALVE EUROPE - QG

Mode NJEC1301

IACV-AAC/V

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
6 BR
[Engine is running]
7 LG
15 P
I Idle speed
16 OR
EC-912
VALVE EUROPE - QG
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC910
EC-913
VALVE EUROPE - QG

2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 6, 7, 15, 16 (IACV-AAC valve signal) and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”, wait at least 5 seconds and then “OFF”.
4. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below at least once every 10 seconds after turning
ignition switch “OFF”.
SEF756Z
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.

SEF938W
SEF343X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
EC-914
VALVE EUROPE - QG

I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between fuse and ECM relay MA
I ECM relay
I Harness for open or short between IACV-AAC and ECM relay.
© Repair harness or connectors, or replace fuse or ECM relay. EM
4 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT LC

ECM terminal 15 and IACV-AAC valve terminal 3, FE
ECM terminal 16 and IACV-AAC valve terminal 6.
Continuity should exist. CL
OK or NG
MT
OK © GO TO 5.
AT
AX
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose connected to the air control valve (Power steering) at the intake air duct.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF162Z
BT
Vacuum does not exist or slightly exist.
OK or NG HA
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace air control valve (Power steering). SC
EL
IDX
EC-915
VALVE EUROPE - QG

Check the vacuum hose for vacuum existence when steering wheel is turned.
SEF162Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 CHECK VACUUM PORT

1. Stop engine.
4. Check that air flows freely.
SEF924Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
EC-916
VALVE EUROPE - QG

1. Disconnect vacuum hoses between the air control valve (Power steering) and vacuum port, air control valve (Power GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF109L
OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Repair hoses or tubes. CL
9 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE MT

OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10. AX

SU
1. Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly.
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP? BR
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © INSPECTION END ST
INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
RS
2. Reconnect all harness connectors and vacuum hose. BT
I For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi- HA
cates less than 0.9V.
I For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
5. Stop vehicle with engine running. SC
6. Check target idle speed.
M/T: 700±50 rpm
A/T: 800±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12. IDX
NG © Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-543.
EC-917
VALVE EUROPE - QG

© INSPECTION END


20 - 24Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
3) Reconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.

4) Remove idle air adjusting unit assembly (IACV-AAC valve is
built-in) from engine.
(The IACV-AAC valve harness connector should remain con-
nected.)
AAC valve shaft smoothly moves forward and backward,
SEF605Y
SEF089X
EC-918
VALVE EUROPE - QG

opening and closing timing. Engine coolant temperature signals, GI
valve timing.
The intake camshaft sprocket position is regulated by oil pressure MA
valve, oil pressure is transmitted to camshaft sprocket. Then, intake EM
SEF095X LC
Operation NJEC1309

temperature FE
20°C (68°F) -
Above 3 msec
70°C (158°F) 1,150 - 4,600
OFF ON Advance Increased CL
Above 70°C rpm
Above 7 msec
(158°F)

MT
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor AT

Mode NJEC1310

INT/V SOL-B1 I Lift up vehicle and suitable gear Revving engine from 2,000 to SU
position ON
3,000 rpm
ECM Terminals and Reference Value BR

NJEC1311
CAUTION: ST
TERMI- RS
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BT
1 Y/R
Intake valve timing control [Engine is running] HA
solenoid valve I Warm-up condition
Approximately 0V
I Lift up vehicle and suitable gear position
I Rev engine from 2,000 to 3,000 rpm SC
EL
IDX
EC-919
VALVE EUROPE - QG
Wiring Diagram
HEC911
EC-920
VALVE EUROPE - QG
Yes or No MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
EM
LC
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operation temperature.
2. Select “INT/V SOL-B1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Lift-up the vehicle and simulate driving in a suitable gear position.
4. Check the “INT/V SOL-B1” signal under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF758Z
OK or NG AX
NG © GO TO 4. SU
3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION BR

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operation temperature.
2. Lift up the vehicle and simulate driving in a suitable gear position. ST
3. Check the voltage between ECM terminal 1 and ground under the following conditions.
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF757Z
OK or NG
EL
NG © GO TO 4.
IDX
EC-921
VALVE EUROPE - QG

SEF149X
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

I 10A fuse

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 1 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
EC-922
VALVE EUROPE - QG

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. MA
EM
LC
© INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE AT
NJEC1316S01
2. Supply intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals with AX
battery voltage.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. SU
BR
SEF159Y
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-923
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SYSTEM EUROPE - QG
Description
ECM func-
tion

Swirl con-
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Swirl control valve control sole-
trol valve
noid valve via swirl control
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed and cylinder number system
valve
control
This system has a swirl control valve in the intake passage of each cylinder.
While idling and during low engine speed operation, the swirl control valve closes. Thus the velocity of the air
in the intake passage increases, promoting the vaporization of the fuel and producing a swirl in the combus-
tion chamber.
Because of this operation, this system tends to increase the burning speed of the gas mixture, improve fuel
consumption, and increase the stability in running conditions.
Also, except when idling and during low engine speed operation, this system opens the swirl control valve.
The solenoid valve controls swirl control valve’s shut/open condition. This solenoid valve is operated by the
ECM.
Engine coolant tempera- Throttle position sensor Swirl control valve con-
Engine speed Swirl control valve
ture (Idle position) trol solenoid valve
ON —
15 - 40°C ON Closed
OFF Below 2,400 rpm*
Except above OFF Open
*: The value may vary according to accelerator pedal operation.
SEF081X

Mode NJEC1249

SWRL CONT S/V I Engine speed: Idle (104°F).

OFF
above 40°C (104°F).
EC-924

CAUTION:
GI
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR EM
NO.
[Engine is running]
(59°F) to 40°C (104°F).
0 - 1V LC
Swirl control valve control I Idle speed
104 SB
solenoid valve [Engine is running]
(104°F). (11 - 14V)
I Idle speed FE
CL
MT
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE AT
NJEC1251S01
The swirl control valve control solenoid valve responds to signals
from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the AX
solenoid valve is bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the
swirl control valve actuator. This operation closes the swirl control
valve. When the ECM sends an OFF signal, the vacuum signal is SU
cut and the swirl control valve opens.
By controlling the solenoid valve, the actuator pulls on the lever of BR
SEF098X
the swirl control valve and closes it when vacuum accumulated in
the vacuum tank is supplied.
ST
The vacuum tank is for accumulating vacuum to move the actua-
tor. The vacuum pressure is supplied through the one-way valve RS
from the intake manifold.
BT
The one-way valve, located between the intake manifold and the
vacuum tank, prevents back-flow of the vacuum tank. When
installing, the colored side should face the vacuum source. HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-925
Wiring Diagram
HEC855
EC-926
Yes or No MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
EM
LC
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
4. Make sure that the swirl control valve opens and closes by observing the lever movement.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF242Z
OK or NG AX
NG © GO TO 4. SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-927

Without CONSULT-II
2. Connect a resistor (1.5 - 2.0 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
SEF982UB
4. In idle with the swirl control valve set to CLOSE, verify by observing the lever movement that the valve changes to
OPEN when the engine rpm exceeds 2,400 rpm.
SEF242Z
OK or NG
NG © Remove resistor. GO TO 4.
EC-928
4 CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE

With CONSULT-II GI
1. Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
3. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator. MA
4. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
EM
LC
FE
SEF243Z
CL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector. MT
2. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2. AT
5. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF244Z
OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 5.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-929

1. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.

I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and fuse

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 104 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector
terminal 2 with CONSULT-II or tester.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
8 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
9 CHECK ACTUATOR
OK or NG
NG © Replace swirl control valve and actuator.
EC-930
10 CHECK HOSES
Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold, and swirl control valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection GI
or disconnection.
MA
EM
LC
SEF109L
OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 11.
CL
11 CHECK VACUUM TANK
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-931. MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12. AT
NG © Replace vacuum tank.
AX
12 CHECK ONE-WAY VALVE
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-931. SU
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END BR
NG © Replace one-way valve.
ST
RS
BT
HA

SC
Supply vacuum to actuator and check swirl control valve operation. EL
Condition Swirl control valve
Supply vacuum to actuator Close IDX

No supply Open
If NG, replace swirl control valve and actuator.

SEF103X
EC-931
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
NJEC1256S02
Check solenoid valve air passage continuity.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON” and perform “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in
“ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
SWIRL CONT SOL/V between A and B between A and C
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
SEF105X
valve.
Without CONSULT-II
Condition
12V direct current supply

2
No supply No Yes

valve.

Check one-way valve air passage continuity.
Blow air from side B to A Yes
Blow air from side A to B No
If NG, replace one-way valve.
SEF106X

Check vacuum tank leakage.
Apply vacuum −80.0 kPa (−800 mbar, −600 mmHg, −23.62 inHg,
−11.60 psi). Then keep it for 10 seconds and check there is no
leakage.
If NG, replace vacuum tank.
SEF405S
EC-932
A/T COMMUNICATION LINE EUROPE - QG
System Description

These circuit lines are used to control the smooth shifting up and down of A/T during the hard acceleration/
deceleration. GI
Voltage signals are exchanged between ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module).
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-933
Wiring Diagram
HEC912
EC-934

2. Check the voltage between ECM terminals 10, 19, 54, 55, 56 and ground.
MA
EM
LC
SEF791Z
OK or NG
FE
NG © GO TO 2. CL
2 CHECK A/T CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN MT

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM (Transmission Control Module) harness connector.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF116Y
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. ST
RS
BT
MTBL0547
HA
OK or NG SC
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair harness or connectors. EL
IDX
EC-935
3 CHECK A/T CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 10, 19, 54, 55, 56 and ground.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectos.

© INSPECTION END
EC-936
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH EUROPE - QG

position (PNP) switch is “ON”. GI
exists.
MA
EM
SEF740W LC
Mode NJEC1322
Shift lever: “P” or “N” ON
Except above OFF CL
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. MT
CAUTION:
TERMI-
NAL
WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) AX
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”] SU

I Gear position is “N” or “P” (A/T models)
42 G/OR PNP switch A/T models BR

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
M/T models ST
Approximately 5V
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-937
Wiring Diagram
HEC913
EC-938
Yes or No MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
EM
LC
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF836Z
OK or NG
AX
NG © GO TO 4.
SU
Without CONSULT-II BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF837Z
OK or NG SC
NG © GO TO 4. EL
IDX
EC-939

SEF740W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

Check the harness for open or short between PNP switch and body ground.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

Check the harness for open or short between ECM and PNP switch.
8 CHECK PNP SWITCH

Refer to MT-21, “POSITION SWITCH CHECK” or AT-184, “PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
EC-940

© INSPECTION END
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-941
INJECTOR EUROPE - QG

The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The
amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration.
Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The
ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel
needs.
SEF138X

Mode NJEC0436

INJ PULSE-B1

B/FUEL SCHDL

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
101 R/B Injector No. 1 SEF011W

107 L/B Injector No. 4 (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
SEF012W
EC-942
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC809
EC-943

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
SEF190Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
MEC703B
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
EC-944

1. Stop engine. GI
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. MA
EM
LC
SEF949X
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
CL
NG © GO TO 3.

MT
I 10A fuse AT
I Harness for open or short between injector and fuse AX
SU
3. Check harness continuity between injector harness connector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 101, 103, 105, 107.
Continuity should exist. ST
OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5. BT

HA
Check the harness for open or short between ECM and injector.
SC
6 CHECK INJECTOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-946. EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. IDX
NG © Replace injector.
EC-945

© INSPECTION END

INJECTOR NJEC0439S01
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
If NG, replace injector.
SEF807Z
EC-946
IGNITION SIGNAL EUROPE - QG

IGNITION COIL AND POWER TRANSISTOR NJEC0542S01
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the
GI
power transistor. The power transistor turns on and off the ignition
coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high MA
voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
EM
LC
Mode NJEC0543
ECM Terminals and Reference Value CL

NJEC0544
CAUTION: MT
AT
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
AX
0 - 0.2V
SU
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed BR
35 L/W Ignition signal (No. 1) SEF971W

36 PU Ignition signal (No. 2) ST
37 L/R Ignition signal (No. 3) 0.2 - 0.4V
RS
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm BT
SEF972W
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-947
Wiring Diagram
HEC810
EC-948
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC811
EC-949
1 CHECK ENGINE START

Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
II)
No © GO TO 3.
2 SEARCH FOR MALFUNCTIONING CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
2. Search for circuit which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop.
SEF190Y
© GO TO 12.
3 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

SEF366X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY, EC-625.
EC-950
4 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

MA
EM
LC
JEF121Y
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF367X
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 5.
SU
5 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III BR

RS
BT
HA
JEF100Y
3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 7 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. SC
EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
IDX
NG © GO TO 6.
EC-951

Check the harness for open or short between ECM relay and condenser.
7 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

SEF368X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.

I 15A fuse
I Harness for open and short between ECM relay and fuse
9 CHECK ECM RELAY

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
10 CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT

2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
11 CHECK CONDENSER
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace condenser.
EC-952
12 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
JEF119Y
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF122Y AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14. SU
NG © GO TO 13.
BR
Check the harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM relay terminal 7. ST
RS
14 CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. BT
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-953
15 CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 35, 36, 37, 38 and ignition coil terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
16 CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

© INSPECTION END

IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR NJEC0547S01
1. Disconnect ignition coil with power transistor harness connec-
tor.
2. Check ignition coil with power transistor for resistance as show
in the figure.
3 (+) - 2 (−) Except 0 or ∞
SEF371Q 1 (+) - 3 (−)

Except 0
1 (+) - 2 (−)
If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor assembly.
ECM RELAY NJEC0547S03

1. Apply 12V of direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and
2.
2. Check continuity between ECM relay terminals 3 and 5, and 6
and 7.
Condition Continuity

Yes
minals 1 and 2
OFF No
SEF123Y
EC-954
If NG, replace ECM relay.
GI
MA
EM
LC
CONDENSER NJEC0547S02
2. Check condenser continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
If NG, replace condenser. FE
CL
SEF124Y
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-955
START SIGNAL EUROPE - QG

Mode NJEC0441

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

41 B/Y Start signal
EC-956
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC812
EC-957
1 INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
SEF227Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “START”.
SEF613Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.
EC-958

I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between ECM and ignition switch MA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
EM
LC
© INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-959
FUEL PUMP EUROPE - QG
System Description
ECM func-
tion

Fuel pump
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed and cylinder number Fuel pump relay
control
Ignition switch Ignition signal and start signal
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine
startability. If the ECM receives a 180° signal from the camshaft position sensor, it knows that the engine is
rotating, and causes the pump to perform. If the 180° signal is not received when the ignition switch is on, the
engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The
ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the
fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second
Engine running and cranking Operates
When engine is stopped (Signal is not sent from crankshaft position sensor
Stops in 1.5 seconds
and camshaft position sensor.)
Except as shown above Stops

A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
SEF605X

Mode NJEC0445

I Engine running and cranking ON
EC-960

CAUTION:
GI
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR EM
NO.

[Engine is running]
LC
21 B/P Fuel pump relay
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I More than 1 second after turning ignition switch
(11 - 14V)
“ON”
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-961
Wiring Diagram
HEC813
EC-962

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with fingers.
MA
EM
LC
JEF133Y
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned “ON”. FE
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
MT
2. Disconnect fuel pump relay. AT
AX
SU
BR
JEF134Y ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF607X
OK or NG EL
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3. IDX
EC-963

I 10A fuse
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay
4 CHECK POWER GROUND CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
JEF135Y
3. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector terminal 3 and body ground,
terminal 5 and fuel pump relay connector terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

I Harness for open or short between fuel pump and body ground
I Harness for open or short between fuel pump and fuel pump relay

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 21 and fuel pump relay connector terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay
EC-964
8 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. MA
NG © Replace fuel pump relay.
EM
9 CHECK FUEL PUMP
LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace fuel pump.

MT
FUEL PUMP RELAY AT
NJEC0449S01

BR
SEF145X
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness con-
NJEC0449S02 ST
nector.
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 5. RS
If NG, replace fuel pump.
BT
HA
JEF136Y
SC
EL
IDX
EC-965
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH EUROPE - QG

The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load.
When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and
adjust for the increased load.
JEF137Y

Mode NJEC0452

the engine
The steering wheel is fully turned ON

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
Power steering oil pressure I Steering wheel is fully turned
46 PU/W
switch [Engine is running]
Approximately 5V
EC-966
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC814
EC-967
1 INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check “PW/ST SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
SEF311Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
SEF614Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.
EC-968

2. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between power steering oil pressure switch harness terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to wiring diagram. MA
OK or NG EM
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. LC

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 46 and power steering oil pressure switch harness terminal 1.
OK or NG
CL
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6. MT

Check the harness for open or short between ECM and power steering oil pressure switch.
7 CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SU

OK or NG
BR
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace power steering oil pressure switch.
ST
RS
© INSPECTION END
BT
HA

SC
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH NJEC0455S01
1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness con- EL
nector then start engine.
2. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
Refer to wiring diagram. IDX
Steering wheel is being fully turned. Yes
Steering wheel is not being turned. No
EC-969
If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch.
EC-970
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR EUROPE - QG
Description
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the
air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume GI
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan sys-
tem. MA
EM
JEF147Y LC
FE
CL
SEF099X MT
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. AT
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- AX
TERMI-
WIRE SU
COLOR
NO.
I Idle speed
Refrigerant pressure I Warm-up condition
74 R/L 1.0 - 4.0V
sensor I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”
(Compressor operates.) RS
111 R Sensor’s power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-971
Wiring Diagram
HEC806
EC-972
1 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION GI

2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 74 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. MA
EM
LC
SEF952XA FE
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
MT
2 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “OFF”.
2. Stop engine. AT
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
AX
SU
BR
ST
JEF147Y
5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF953X EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. IDX
NG © GO TO 3.
EC-973

I Joint connector-4
4 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

2. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

I Joint connector-3
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and refrigerant pressure sensor
6 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

8 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to HA-88 or HA-225, “Refrigerant pressure sensor”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
EC-974

© INSPECTION END
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-975
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL EUROPE - QG

Mode NJEC0548
Rear window defogger is operating

ON
and/or lighting switch is on.
LOAD SIGNAL I Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger is not oper-
OFF
ating and lighting switch is not on.
Heater fan motor is operating. ON

HEATER FAN SW I Ignition switch: ON
Heater fan motor is not operating. OFF

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Rear window defogger is operating and/or lighting
(11 - 14V)
Electric load signal switch is on
50 L/B
(Load switch) [Engine is running]
I Rear window defogger is not operating and lighting Approximately 0V
switch is not on
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
I Heater fan motor is operating
51 LG/B Heater fan motor switch
[Engine is running]
Approximately 5V
I Heater fan motor is not operating
EC-976
Wiring Diagram

SEDAN (1/2) NJEC0550S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC892
EC-977
SEDAN (2/2) NJEC0550S02
HEC893
EC-978
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC819
EC-979
Diagnostic Procedure — Load Signal —
Diagnostic Procedure — Load Signal — NJEC0584
1 INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 4.
2 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-II
2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
SEF954X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 6.
3 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-II
2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
SEF955X
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 14.
EC-980
4 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

MA
EM
LC
SEF956X
OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 6. CL
5 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II

MT
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 50 and ground under the following conditions. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF957X
ST
OK or NG
RS
NG © GO TO 15.
BT
6 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn “ON” the rear window defogger switch. HA
3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up?
Yes or No
SC
Yes (Sedan) © GO TO 7.
Yes (Hatchback) © GO TO 12.
EL
No © Refer to EL-314, “Rear Window Defogger”.
IDX
EC-981

1. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
4. Check voltage between terminal 3 (LHD models), 5 (RHD models) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF626Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Check the following and repair.
I 20A fuse
I Harness for open and short between fuse block and rear window defogger relay
8 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace rear window defogger relay.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and rear window defogger relay terminals 5 (LHD models), 3 (RHD
models).
SEF627Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10.
EC-982

I Diode M68 MA
I Harness for open and short between ECM and rear window defogger relay
EM
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-624. LC
© INSPECTION END

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. FE
2. Disconnect time control unit harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and time control unit harness connector terminal 14.
Refer to wiring diagram. CL
OK or NG
MT
OK © Refer to EL-613, “TIME CONTROL UNIT”.
NG © GO TO 13.
AT
Check the following. AX
I Harness open and short between ECM and time control unit connectors
SU
14 CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION BR

1. Start engine.
2. Turn the lighting switch “ON”. ST
Do the headlamps illuminate in both “High” and “Low” positions?
Yes or No RS
Yes (Sedan) © GO TO 16.
Yes (Hatchback) © GO TO 20. BT
No © Refer to EL-64, “HEADLAMP SYSTEM”.
HA
15 CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION
1. Start engine. SC
2. Turn the lighting switch “ON”.
OK or NG EL
OK (Sedan) © GO TO 16.
OK (Hatchback) © GO TO 20. IDX
NG © Refer to EL-64, “HEADLAMP SYSTEM”.
EC-983
16 CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-1

1. Stop engine.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and lighting switch connector terminal 10 under the following con-
ditions.
SEF619Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 17.

I Joint connector-2
I Harness for open and short between ECM and lighting switch connector
18 CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-2

1. Stop engine.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and lighting switch connector terminal 9 under the following condi-
tions.
SEF627Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 22.
NG © GO TO 19.
EC-984

I Diode M110 MA
I Joint connector-2
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EM
20 CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT LC

Without Daytime Light system
1. Stop engine.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and lighting switch connector terminal 10 under the following con-
ditions. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF161Z AX
With Daytime Light system
1. Stop engine. SU
3. Disconnect headlamp relay LH connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and headlamp relay LH connector terminal 3 under the following BR
conditions.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF445Z
OK or NG SC
OK © GO TO 22.
NG © GO TO 21. EL
IDX
EC-985

I Diode E177

© INSPECTION END
Diagnostic Procedure — Heater Control Panel

(Fan Switch) — NJEC0585
1 CHECK CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION

1. Start engine.
2. Heater fan motor switch “ON”.
SEF620Y
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
EC-986
Diagnostic Procedure — Heater Control Panel (Fan Switch) — (Cont’d)

1. Stop engine. GI
3. Disconnect heater control panel fan switch harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 51 and heater fan switch harness connector terminal 18. MA
EM
OK or NG
OK © Refer to HA-73, HA-198, “BLOWER MOTOR”.
LC
NG © GO TO 3.

I Harness connectors M94, F106 FE
I Harness for open and short between ECM and heater fan motor switch
CL
MT
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY AT
NJEC0586S01

BR
SEF145XC
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-987
MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS EUROPE - QG
Wiring Diagram
HEC894
EC-988
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) EUROPE - QG
Fuel Pressure Regulator
Fuel Pressure Regulator NJEC0467
Fuel pressure at idling Vacuum hose is connected Approximately 235 (2.35, 2.4, 34) GI
kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)
Vacuum hose is disconnected Approximately 294 (2.94, 3.0, 43)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing MA

NJEC0468
M/T: 700±50
Target idle speed* rpm
A/T: 800±50 EM
Air conditioner: ON rpm 825 or more
M/T: 8±5° BTDC LC

Ignition timing
A/T: 10±5° BTDC
Throttle position sensor idle position V 0.15 - 0.85
*: Under the following conditions:

I Electrical load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger) FE
I Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Mass Air Flow Sensor NJEC0470

CL
Supply voltage (Heater) V Battery voltage (11 - 14)
Supply voltage (Sensor) V Approximately 5 MT

Output voltage V 1.0 - 1.7*
Mass air flow 1.0 - 4.0 at idle* AT

(Using CONSULT-II or GST) g·m/sec 5.0 - 10.0 at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and idling under no-load. AX

Intake Air Temperature Sensor NJEC0480
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ SU

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38 BR
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor NJEC0471 ST

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 RS

50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 BT

Throttle Position Sensor NJEC0477
HA

SC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater (Front) NJEC0478

EL
IDX
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater (Rear) NJEC0483
EC-989
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor NJEC0485
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
EGR Volume Control Valve NJEC0560
1-2
2-3
20 - 24
4-5
5-6
EGR Temperature Sensor NJEC0472

°C (°F) V MΩ
0 (32) 4.56 0.62 - 1.05
50 (122) 2.25 0.065 - 0.094
100 (212) 0.59 0.011 - 0.015
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Valve NJEC0481
IACV-AAC Valve NJEC0474
1-2
2-3
20 - 24
4-5
5-6
Injector NJEC0475
Ignition Coil with Power Transistor NJEC0561
3 (+) - 2 (−) Except 0 or ∞
1 (+) - 3 (−)
Except 0
1 (+) - 2 (−)
Condenser NJEC0587
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] MΩ Above 1
Fuel Pump NJEC0473
EC-990
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) NJEC0558

GI
MA
EM
LC
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) NJEC0559
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-991
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX EUROPE - YD

ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC NJEC0600S01
Items DTC
MI illumination Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II ECM
ACCEL POS SENSOR P0120 0403 X EC-1079
BATTERY VOLTAGE P1660 0502 — EC-1186
BRAKE SW P0571 0807 X EC-1100
COOLANT TEMP SEN P0115 0103 X EC-1074
CRANK POS SEN (TDC) P0335 0407 X EC-1089
ECM RLY P1620 0902 X EC-1180
ECM 2 P1607 0301 X EC-1178
ECM 10 P1107 0802 X EC-1107
ECM 12 P1603 0901 X EC-1178
ECM 15 P1621 0903 — EC-1184
FUEL CUT SYSTEM2 P1202 1002 X EC-1115
MASS AIR FLOW SEN P0100 0102 X EC-1068
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0505 — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
OVER HEAT P1217 0208 X EC-1121
P1·CAM POS SEN P1341 0701 X EC-1166
P2·TDC PULSE SIG P1337 0702 X EC-1160
P3·PUMP COMM LINE P1600 0703 X EC-1172
P4·SPILL/V CIRC P1251 0704 X EC-1154
P5·PUMP C/MODULE P1690 0705 X EC-1188
P7·F/INJ TIMG FB P1241 0707 X EC-1148
P9·FUEL TEMP SEN P1180 0402 X EC-1109
VEHICLE SPEED SEN P0500 0104 X EC-1095
EC-992
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX EUROPE - YD
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC =NJEC0600S02
DTC
GI
Items
MI illumination Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM (CONSULT-II screen terms)
MA
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0505 — FURTHER TESTING —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
EM
P0100 0102 X MASS AIR FLOW SEN EC-1068
P0115 0103 X COOLANT TEMP SEN EC-1074 LC

P0120 0403 X ACCEL POS SENSOR EC-1079
P0335 0407 X CRANK POS SEN (TDC) EC-1089
P0500 0104 X VEHICLE SPEED SEN EC-1095
P0571 0807 X BRAKE SW EC-1100 FE

P1107 0802 X ECM 10 EC-1107
P1180 0402 X P9·FUEL TEMP SEN EC-1109 CL

P1202 1002 X FUEL CUT SYSTEM2 EC-1115
P1217 0208 X OVER HEAT EC-1121 MT

P1241 0707 X P7·F/INJ TIMG FB EC-1148
P1251 0704 X P4·SPILL/V CIRC EC-1154

AT
P1337 0702 X P2·TDC PULSE SIG EC-1160
AX
P1341 0701 X P1·CAM POS SEN EC-1166
P1600 0703 X P3·PUMP COMM LINE EC-1172

SU
P1603 0901 X ECM 12 EC-1178
P1607 0301 X ECM 2 EC-1178

BR
P1620 0902 X ECM RLY EC-1180
P1621 0903 — ECM 15 EC-1184

ST
P1660 0502 — BATTERY VOLTAGE EC-1186
P1690 0705 X P5·PUMP C/MODULE EC-1188 RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-993
PRECAUTIONS EUROPE - YD

WARNING:
EC-994
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System NJEC0602
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF433Z
EC-995
Precautions
Precautions NJEC0603
SEF289H
I When connecting ECM harness connectors, push in both

sides of the connector until you hear a click. Maneuver the
lever until you hear the three connectors on the inside
click. Refer to the figure at left.
SEF881Y

break).
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
SEF291H
I Before replacing ECM, perform Terminals and Reference

Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-1055.
MEF040D
I If MI illuminates or blinks irregularly when engine is

running, water may have accumulated in fuel filter. Drain
water from fuel filter. If this does not correct the problem,
perform specified trouble diagnostic procedures.
Check”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “ DTC Confirma-
completed.
SAT652J
EC-996
Precautions (Cont’d)
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and GI
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the MA
such as the ground.
I Install the break-out box between ECM and ECM harness EM
connectors when measuring ECM input/output voltage.
LC
FE
CL
SEF348N
MT
When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following: AT
I EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit AX
I GI-33, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUP IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS”
I GI-22, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT” SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-997
PREPARATION EUROPE - YD
Tool number
Description
Tool name
KV111060S0
Removal/Installation tool
kit for fuel injection pump
NT814
KV109E0010
Break-out box
NT825
KV109E0050
Y-cable adapter
NT826
EC-998
SYSTEM EUROPE - YD
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF866Y
EC-999
SYSTEM EUROPE - YD
SEF894Y
EC-1000
SYSTEM EUROPE - YD
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF316Y
EC-1001
SYSTEM EUROPE - YD
Circuit Diagram

SEDAN NJEC0608S01
HEC880
EC-1002
SYSTEM EUROPE - YD
Circuit Diagram (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC840
EC-1003
SYSTEM EUROPE - YD
System Diagram
SEF867Y
EC-1004
SYSTEM EUROPE - YD
System Chart

I Electronic control fuel injection pump Electronic control fuel injection
Fuel injection control
I Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) pump
I Engine coolant temperature sensor MA
I Accelerator position sensor Electronic control fuel injection
Fuel injection timing control
I Accelerator position switch pump
I Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch Electronic control fuel injection
EM
I Ignition switch Fuel cut control
pump
I Battery voltage
I Vehicle speed sensor Glow control system Glow relay & glow lamp LC
I Air conditioner switch
I Mass air flow sensor On board diagnostic system MI (On the instrument panel)
I Stop lamp switch
EGR volume control EGR volume control valve
Cooling fan control Cooling fan relay
Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1005
DESCRIPTION EUROPE - YD

Three types of fuel injection control are provided to accommodate engine operating conditions; normal control,
idle control and start control. The ECM determines the appropriate fuel injection control. Under each control,
the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance.
Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and electronic control fuel injection pump (control unit is built-in).
The fuel injection pump control unit performs duty control on the spill valve (built into the fuel injection pump)
according to the input signals to compensate the amount of fuel injected to the preset value.
Start Control NJEC0612S02

Fuel injection
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed control (start
injection pump
control)
SEF648S
When the ECM receives a start signal from the ignition switch, the ECM adapts the fuel injection system for
the start control. The amount of fuel injected at engine starting is a preset program value in the ECM. The
program is determined by the engine speed and engine coolant temperature.
For better startability under cool engine conditions, the lower the coolant temperature becomes, the greater
the amount of fuel injected. The ECM ends the start control when the engine speed reaches the specific value,
and shifts the control to the normal or idle control.
Idle Control NJEC0612S03
Battery Battery voltage Fuel injection

control (Idle con-
Accelerator position switch Idle position injection pump
trol)
When the ECM determines that the engine speed is at idle, the fuel injection system is adapted for the idle
control. The ECM regulates the amount of fuel injected corresponding to changes in load applied to the engine
to keep engine speed constant. The ECM also provides the system with a fast idle control in response to the
engine coolant temperature signal.
EC-1006
Fuel Injection Control System (Cont’d)
Normal Control NJEC0612S04
GI
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed Fuel injection

control (Normal
Electronic control fuel MA
injection pump
Accelerator position sensor Accelerator position control)
EM
LC
FE
SEF649S
CL
The amount of fuel injected under normal driving conditions is determined according to sensor signals. The
crankshaft position sensor (TDC) detects engine speed and the accelerator position sensor detects accelera-
tor position. These sensors send signals to the ECM. MT
The fuel injection data, predetermined by correlation between various engine speeds and accelerator positions,
are stored in the ECM memory, forming a map. The ECM determines the optimal amount of fuel to be injected
using the sensor signals in comparison with the map. AT
Maximum Amount Control NJEC0612S05
AX

SU
Fuel injection
Engine coolnat temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature control (Maxi- Electronic control fuel
mum amount injection pump BR
control)
ST
The maximum injection amount is controlled to an optimum by the engine speed, intake air amount, engine
coolant temperature, and accelerator opening in accordance with the driving conditions.
This prevents the oversupply of the injection amount caused by decreased air density at a high altitude or RS
during a system failure.
Deceleration Control NJEC0612S06
BT
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator HA

Accelerator position switch Accelerator position Fuel injection
control (Decel-
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed eration control)
injection pump SC
The ECM sends a fuel cut signal to the electronic control fuel injection pump during deceleration for better
fuel efficiency. The ECM determines the time of deceleration according to signals from the accelerator posi- EL
tion switch and crankshaft position sensor (TDC).
Fuel Injection Timing Control System IDX
The target fuel injection timing in accordance with the engine speed and the fuel injection amount are recorded
as a map in the ECM beforehand. The ECM and the injection pump control unit exchange signals and per-
form feedback control for optimum injection timing in accordance with the map.
EC-1007

Accelerator position sensor Accelerator valve opening angle Air conditioner

Air conditioner relay
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed cut control

This system improves acceleration when the air conditioner is used.
When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the air conditioner is turned off for a few seconds.
When engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the air conditioner is turned off. This continues
until the engine coolant temperature returns to normal.
speed)

Accelerator position switch Accelerator position Fuel cut control
injection pump
If the engine speed is above 2,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 2,800
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Fuel Injection Control System”,
EC-1006.
EC-1008

In this system, blow-by gas is sucked into the air duct after oil
GI
separation by oil separator in the rocker cover.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF440Z
MT
INSPECTION NJEC0617
AT
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any AX
SU
BR
SEC692
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1009
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE EUROPE - YD

CAUTION:
I Do not disassemble injection nozzle assembly. If NG,
replace injection nozzle assembly.
I Plug flare nut with a cap or rag so that no dust enters the
nozzle. Cover nozzle tip for protection of needle.
JEF443Z
Injection Tube NJEC0618S01

1. Mark the cylinder Nos. to the injection tubes, then disconnect
them.
I Marking should be made at proper locations and by the
proper method, so that they are not erased by fuel, etc.
2. Remove the clamps, then disconnect the tubes one by one.
I The intake manifold is removed for explanation in the figure.
JEF340Y
EC-1010
1. Referring to the figure and the marking which were made for
installation, connect the injection tubes to all the cylinders. GI
2. Connect temporarily the tubes to the cylinder head side only
by screwing 2 to 3 turns. Make sure that all tubes can be con-
nected to the pump side also. MA
3. Then, tighten the flare nuts of the cylinder head side and pump
side, starting from the opposite side from you.
EM
JEF341Y LC
4. Attach the injection tube clamp in the direction shown in the
figure.
5. Insert tightening bolts of the clamp (4-tube type) from the rear
to the front of the engine.
FE
CL
JEF444Z
MT
Injection Nozzle Oil Seal NJEC0618S02
AT
Using a tool such as a flat-bladed screwdriver, pry the flange of the
seal, then remove it.
Installation
AX
NJEC0618S0202
1. After the high-pressure injection nozzle assembly is installed,
push the seal from the cylinder head side until it contacts the SU
flange.
2. Make sure that the garter spring of the seal on the high-pres-
sure injection nozzle assembly side is not falling. BR
JEF343Y
I Replace the oil seal with new one when the high-pressure
injection nozzle assembly is removed. (It is not necessary
to replace the oil seal when only injection tubes are ST
removed.)
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1011
Spill Tube NJEC0618S03
Loosen and remove the mounting bolts and flare nuts in the
reverse order of the numbers in the figure.
I When the flare nuts are loosened, hold the head of hexagonal
retaining bolts (head inside) using a wrench.
1. Tighten the flare nuts and mounting bolts in the numerical
order shown in the figure.
I When the flare nuts are tightened, hold the head of the hex-
agonal retaining bolts (head inside) using a wrench.
2. To prevent interference with the rocker cover, place the spill
gasket joint within the range shown by the arrow, then tighten
the mounting bolts. (Be especially careful about No. 2 and 4
cylinders.)
I After the spill tube is installed, check the airtightness of
the spill tube.
I After the bolts are tightened, the joint of the spill tube gasket
might be broken. However, this will not affect function.
JEF344Y
High Pressure Injection Nozzle Assembly NJEC0618S04

1. Remove the nozzle support, then pull out the high-pressure
injection nozzle assembly by turning it clockwise/
counterclockwise.
2. Using a tool such as a flat-head screwdriver, remove the cop-
per washer inside the cylinder head.
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the high-pressure injection nozzle.
JEF345Y
1. Insert the nozzle gasket to the cylinder head hole.
2. Attach the O-ring to the mounting groove of the nozzle side,
then insert it in the cylinder head.
TEST AND ADJUSTMENT NJEC0619

WARNING:
When using nozzle tester, be careful not to allow diesel fuel
sprayed from nozzle to contact your hands or body, and make
sure your eyes are properly protected with goggles.
EC-1012
Inspection for Spill Tube Airtightness NJEC0619S01
Before the rocker cover is installed, perform the inspection as fol-
lows. GI
1. Connect the handy vacuum pump to the spill hose.
2. Check that the airtightness is maintained after the negative
pressure shown below is applied.
MA
Standard:
–53.3 to –66.7 kPa (–533 to –667 mbar, –400 to –500 EM
mmHg, –15.75 to –19.69 inHg)
JEF346Y LC
Air Bleeding of Fuel Piping NJEC0619S02
After the repair, bleed air in the piping by pumping the priming
pump up and down until it becomes heavy.
FE
CL
JEF347Y
MT
Injection Pressure Test NJEC0619S03
1. Install injection nozzle assembly to injection nozzle tester and AT
bleed air from flare nut.
AX
SU
BR
JEF348Y
2. Pump the tester handle slowly (one time per second) and
watch the pressure gauge. ST
3. Read the pressure gauge when the injection pressure just
starts dropping.
RS
Initial injection pressure:
New
21,476 - 22,457 kPa (214.7 - 224.5 bar, 219 - 229 BT
kg/cm2, 3,114 - 3,256 psi)
Limit
18,275 kPa (182.7 bar, 186 kg/cm2, 2,650 psi)
HA
I The injection nozzle assembly has a 2-stage pressure injection
function. However, the judgement should be made at the first SC
stage of the valve opening pressure.
Always check initial injection pressure using a new nozzle.
EL
IDX
EC-1013
Spray Pattern Test NJEC0619S05
1. Check spray pattern by pumping tester handle one full stroke
per second.
NG spray pattern:
Does not inject straight and strong (B in the figure).
Fuel drips (C in the figure).
Does not inject evenly (D in the figure).
2. If the spray pattern is not correct, replace injection nozzle
assembly.
SEF434Z

JEF350Y
Removal NJEC0620S01
1. Remove the parts shown below.
I Engine hood
I Engine coolant (drain)
I Engine cover
I Heater pipe under intake manifold
I Injection tubes
I Right splash cover (with undercover)
I Right front wheel
EC-1014
2. Disconnect the fuel hoses from the fuel injection pump.
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the fuel injection
pump. GI
I Disconnect the connector by pulling the connector stopper
fully.
I When the stopper is fully pulled, the connector will be discon- MA
nected together. For installation, push the connector half way
first, then press the stopper until it locks, so that the connec-
tor is connected together. EM
4. Remove the fuel injection pump rear bracket.
JEF351Y LC
5. Remove the front chain case.
I Move the power steering fluid reservoir tank from the bracket.
I Loosen and remove the mounting bolts in the reverse order of
the numbers shown in the figure.
I As for bolts 6, 10, and 11, remove with rubber washer because FE
there is not enough space for removing only the bolts.
CAUTION:
To prevent foreign objects from getting in the engine, cover CL
the opening during the removal of the front chain case.
JEF352Y
MT
6. Adjust the No. 1 cylinder to the top dead center position.
I Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise, then align the alignment AT
mark (punched mark) of the camshaft sprocket to the position
shown in the figure.
I There is no indicator on the crankshaft pulley. AX
I It is not necessary to mark the secondary timing chain for
removal because it can be matched by the link color for instal-
lation. However, the alignment mark on the fuel injection pump SU
sprocket is difficult to see; mark it if necessary.
BR
JEF353Y
7. Remove the chain tensioner.

a. Push the plunger of the chain tensioner, then fix it with a tool
ST
such as a push pin.
RS
BT
HA
JEF354Y
b. Using the hexagon wrench (face to face: 5 mm) (SST), remove SC

the mounting bolts, then remove the chain tensioner.
I A multi-purpose tool may also be used.
EL
IDX
JEF355Y
EC-1015
8. Remove the timing chain slack guide.
I Using the hexagon wrench (face to face: 6 mm, short-type)
(SST), remove the mounting bolts, then remove the timing
chain slack guide.
JEF356Y
9. Remove the timing chain tension guide.

10. Remove the secondary timing chain.
I Only the timing chain can be removed without removing the
sprockets.
JEF357Y
11. Fix the fuel injection pump sprocket.

a. Insert the positioning stopper pin (SST) in the 6 mm (0.24 in)
dia. hole of the fuel injection pump sprocket.
b. Using the torx wrench (SST), turn the pump shaft gradually to
adjust the hole position of the fuel injection pump sprocket.
c. Insert the positioning stopper pin through the fuel injection
pump body to fix the sprocket.
JEF358Y
I Insert the positioning stopper pin until its flange contacts the
fuel injection pump sprocket.
d. Remove the torx wrench (SST).
JEF359Y
EC-1016
(SST), remove the mounting bolts of the fuel injection pump
sprocket. GI
I It is not necessary to remove the washer of the fuel injection
pump sprocket.
MA
EM
JEF360Y LC
FE
CL
JEF361Y
MT
13. Using the sprocket holder (SST), hold the fuel injection pump
sprocket to prevent falling. AT
I When the sprocket holder is installed, if the positioning stop-
per pin interferes, pull out the stopper pin approximately 10
mm (0.39 in), then install it. AX
I After the sprocket holder is installed temporarily, insert the
extension bar (SST) and Torx socket in the three holes A. After
positioning the holes, tighten the holder mounting bolts. (Refer SU
to the step 14 about the tool.)
I The length of the sprocket holder mounting bolts should be
approximately 15 mm (0.59 in) (M6 thread length).
BR
JEF362Y
I Make sure that the a- and b-faces of the sprocket holder con-
tact the bottom side of the sprocket 15 mm (0.59 in) (small ST
diameter side).
CAUTION:
Do not remove the sprocket holder until the fuel injection RS
pump is installed.
I After the sprocket holder is installed, pull out the positioning
stopper pin (SST) from the fuel injection pump sprocket. BT
HA
JEF363Y
14. Using the extension bar [SST: whole length 43 mm (1.69 in)] SC
and the Torx socket (Q6-E12: commercially available), remove
the mounting bolts, them remove the fuel injection pump
toward the rear of the engine. EL
I Even after all the mounting bolts are removed, the fuel injec-
tion pump is still held by a dowel pin.
CAUTION: IDX
Do not disassemble or adjust the fuel injection pump.
JEF364Y
EC-1017
15. Remove the fuel injection pump mounting bolts.
I The seal washer of the mounting bolts cannot be reused.
CAUTION:
For removal, be careful not to drop the seal washer into the
engine.
JEF365Y
I It is not necessary to adjust the injection timing by changing the
installation angle which used to be performed with conven-
tional fuel injection pumps. The installation position can be
simply decided by the dowel pin and the mounting bolts.
1. Before the fuel injection pump is installed, check that the notch
of its flange and the 6 mm (0.24 in) dia. hole on the body are
aligned.
JEF366Y
2. Insert the fuel injection pump to the mounting position from the
rear of the engine.
I Adjust the fuel injection pump bracket position to the dowel pin,
then install it.
JEF367Y
3. Using the extension bar (SST) and the Torx socket, tighten the
mounting bolts of the fuel injection pump.
4. Remove the sprocket holder (SST).
JEF364Y
5. Using the torx wrench (SST), turn the pump shaft gradually to
adjust the position of the flange. Then, insert the positioning
stopper pin (SST) to the 6 mm (0.24 in) dia. hole of the fuel
injection pump sprocket through the pump flange and the
pump body.
6. Remove the torx wrench (SST).
JEF358Y
EC-1018
(SST), tighten the sprocket mounting bolt.
I When the washer of the fuel injection pump sprocket is GI
removed, install it with the marking “F” (front) facing the front
of the engine.
8. Pull out the positioning stopper pin (SST). MA
EM
JEF360Y LC
9. Install the secondary timing chain.
I Align the alignment marks of the sprockets and those of the
chain, then install it.
I The figure shows the installation state and names of the sec-
ondary timing chain and other related parts. FE
10. Install timing chain tension guide.
I The upper installation bolt is longer than the lower.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
JEF368Y
11. Using a hexagon wrench (face to face: 6 mm, short-type)

(SST), install the timing chain slack guide. ST
RS
BT
HA
JEF356Y
12. Install the chain tensioner. SC

a. Push the plunger of the chain tensioner, then hold it with a tool
such as a push pin, and install it.
b. Using a hexagon wrench (face to face: 5 mm) (SST), tighten EL
the mounting bolts.
I Installation is possible by a multi-purpose tool also.
IDX
c. Pull out the tool such as a push pin which holds the plunger.
I Make sure that the alignment marks of the sprockets and
timing chain are aligned.
JEF355Y
EC-1019
13. Install the front chain case.
a. Install the tension guide to the back side of the front chain
case.
I If the front chain case is tilted, the tension guide may fall off.
Therefore, when installing the front chain case, hold it verti-
cally.
JEF369Y
b. Apply Three Bond 1207C (KP510 00150) to both ends of the

arch area of the oil pump (contact surface of rear chain case)
c. Install the front chain case.
I Align the dowel pin of the oil pump case to the pin hole, then
install it.
I Install bolts 6, 10, and 11 (shown in the figure) with the rubber
washer to the front chain case.
JEF370Y
d. Tighten the mounting bolts in the numerical order shown in the

figure.
e. After all bolts are tightened, tighten the mounting bolts in the
numerical order shown in the figure again.
14. Install the fuel injection pump rear bracket.
I Tighten all the bolts temporarily, then tighten them securely
with the mounting face securely contacting the fuel injection
pump and the pump bracket.
JEF352Y
15. Connect the fuel injection pump harness connector.

I Insert the harness connector securely until the stopper locks.
I Push the connector half way first, then press the stopper until
it locks, so that the connector is connected together.
JEF351Y
16. Connect the fuel hoses.

I When the hoses are disconnected at the fuel gallery side,
insert until the hoses contact the valve, then install the clamp
securely.
17. Install other parts in the reverse order of removal.
EC-1020
Fuel Filter
Fuel Filter
A water draining cock is on the lower side and a priming pump for
GI
bleeding air is on the upper side.
MA
EM
LC
AIR BLEEDING NJEC0624
Pump the priming pump to bleed air.
I When air is bled completely, the pumping of the priming
pump suddenly becomes heavy. Stop the operation at that
time. FE
I If it is difficult to bleed air by the pumping of the priming
pump (the pumping of the priming pump does not become
heavy), disconnect the fuel supply hose between the fuel CL
filter and the injection pump. Then, perform the operation
described above, and make sure that fuel comes out. (Use
SEF375Y a pan, etc. so as not to spill fuel. Do not let fuel get on MT
engine and other parts.) After that, connect the hose, then
bleed air again.
I Start engine and let it idle for at least one minute after AT
performing air bleeding.
WATER DRAINING NJEC0625
AX
I If the MI lights up (not flashes) during the engine operation,
drain the water as follows.
1. Remove the fuel filter, filter bracket, protector assembly from SU
the dash panel as follows.
a. Remove the air cleaner case (upper), air duct assembly, and BR
vacuum hose for brake booster (between the vacuum pump
and vacuum pipe).
CAUTION: ST
After the duct is removed, cover the opening with gum tape,
etc. to prevent foreign object from getting into the engine
during the operation. RS
b. Disconnect the water level warning sensor harness connector.
c. Remove the mounting nuts on the dash panel, then remove the
fuel filter, filter bracket, and protector assembly from the dash BT
panel.
I It is not necessary to disconnect the fuel hose. HA
2. Using a tool such as a pliers, loosen the water draining cock
at the bottom of the water level warning sensor located under
the fuel filter. SC
EL
IDX
EC-1021
Fuel Filter (Cont’d)
3. Install the fuel filter, filter bracket, and protector assembly tem-
porarily. Then, drain the water by pumping the priming pump
with the filter standing straight.
I Extend the drain hose if necessary.
Water amount when the MI lights up:
65 - 100 m (2.1 - 3.5 Imp fl oz)
CAUTION:
When the water is drained, the fuel is also drained. Use a pan,
etc. to avoid fuel adherence to the rubber parts such as the
engine mount insulator.
JEF377Y 4. Tighten the water draining cock, then install the fuel filter, filter
bracket, protector assembly in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not over-tighten the water draining cock. This will damage
the cock thread, resulting in water or fuel leak.
5. Bleed air of the fuel filter. Refer to EC-1021.
I Start engine and let it idle for at least one minute after
performing air bleeding.
6. Start the engine, then check that the MI goes off.
EC-1022
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EUROPE - YD
DTC and MI Detection Logic
DTC and MI Detection Logic NJEC0626

When a malfunction is detected, the malfunction (DTC) is stored in the ECM memory.
The MI will light up each time the ECM detects malfunction. For diagnostic items causing the MI to light up, GI
MA
The DTC can be read by the following methods. EM
Without CONSULT-II
ECM displays the DTC by a set of four digit numbers with MI illumination in the diagnostic test mode II (Self-
diagnostic results). Example: 0103, 0807, 1002, etc. LC
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. Examples: P0115, P0571, P1202, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by ISO15031-6.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
I Output of the trouble code means that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in the Mode
II it does not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or occurred in the past and returned FE
to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.
CL
HOW TO ERASE DTC NJEC0627S02
How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II) NJEC0627S0201
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least MT
AT
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF246Z
SC
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
EL
How to Erase DTC ( Without CONSULT-II) NJEC0627S0202
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. IDX
2. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by using the data link connector. (See EC-1025.)
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by changing the diagnostic test mode.
24 hours.
EC-1023
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)
Malfunction Indicator (MI)
SAT652J
The MI is located on the instrument panel.

1. The MI will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
I If the MI does not light up, refer to EL-226, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-1216.
2. When the engine is started, the MI should go off.
If the MI remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.
If MI illuminates or blinks irregularly after starting engine, water may have accumulated in fuel filter.
The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions.
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MI bulb for damage (blown,
ON position open circuit, etc.).
If the MI does not come on, check MI circuit. (See
EC-1216.)
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When ECM detects a
WARNING malfunction, the MI will light up to inform the driver that
a malfunction has been detected.
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS This function allows DTCs to be read.
ON position
Engine stopped
EC-1024
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF878Y
*1: EC-1216 *2: EC-1024 *3: EC-1216 IDX
EC-1025
In this mode, the MI on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to EL-226,
“WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-1216.
MI Condition
OFF No malfunction.

In this mode, DTC is indicated by the number of blinks of the MI as shown below.
SEF298QA
SEF162PB
Long (0.6 second) blinking indicates the two LH digits of number and short (0.3 second) blinking indicates the
two RH digits of number. For example, the MI blinks 10 times for 6 seconds (0.6 sec x 10 times) and then it
blinks three times for about 1 second (0.3 sec x 3 times). This indicates the DTC “1003”.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC “0505” refers to no
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) NJEC0628S06
Diagnostic Test Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I. (Refer to “How to Switch Diagnostic Test Modes”, EC-1025.)
I If the battery terminal is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24
hours.
EC-1026
Relationship Between MI, DTC, CONSULT-II and Driving Patterns NJEC0628S07
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF879Y
HA
*1: When a malfunction is detected, *4: When a malfunction is detected *6: Other screens except SELF-DIAG-
MI will light up. for the first time, the DTC will be NOSTIC RESULTS & DATA
*2: When the same malfunction is stored in ECM. MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) cannot SC
detected in two consecutive driv- *5: The DTC will not be displayed any display the malfunction. DATA
ing patterns, MI will stay lit up. longer after vehicle is driven 40 MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) can dis-
*3: MI will go off after vehicle is driven times without the same malfunc- play the malfunction at the EL
three times without any malfunction. (The DTC still remain in moment it is detected.
tions. ECM.)
IDX
EC-1027
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II NJEC0629
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE NJEC0629S01
2. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.
(Data link connector is located under the driver side dash
panel.)
SEF378Y

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual.
SEF995X
SEF320Y
EC-1028
SYSTEMS APPLICATION =NJEC0629S02
GI
Item SELF-DIAG DATA MONI-
RESULTS TOR
ACTIVE TEST MA
Engine coolant temperature sensor X X
Vehicle speed sensor X X

EM
Accelerator position sensor X X

LC
Accelerator position switch X X
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) X X

INPUT

FE
Battery voltage X X

CL
Stop lamp switch X X
Glow relay X X MT
OUTPUT EGR volume control valve X X
Cooling fan relay X X X AT

X: Applicable
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE NJEC0629S03

AX
Regarding items detected in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode,
SU
DATA MONITOR MODE NJEC0629S04
Monitored item ECM BR

Main
signals
signals
CKPS·RPM (TDC) I The engine speed computed from the ST

[rpm] q q crankshaft position sensor (TDC) signal
is displayed.
CMPS·RPM·PUMP I The engine speed computed from the

RS
[rpm] q q pulse signal sent from electronic control
fuel injection pump is displayed.
BT
COOLAN TEMP/S I The engine coolant temperature (deter- I When the engine coolant temperature
[°C] or [°F] mined by the signal voltage of the sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM
q q engine coolant temperature sensor) is enters fail-safe mode. The engine cool- HA
displayed. ant temperature determined by the ECM
is displayed.
VHCL SPEED SE I The vehicle speed computed from the SC

[km/h] or [mph] q q vehicle speed sensor signal is dis-
played.
EL
FUEL TEMP SEN I The fuel temperature (sent from elec-
[°C] or [°F] q q tronic control fuel injection pump) is dis-
played.
IDX
ACCEL POS SEN I The accelerator position sensor signal
q q
[V] voltage is displayed.
OFF ACCEL SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the

q q
EC-1029
Monitored item ECM

Main
signals
signals
SPILL/V [°CA] I The control position of spill valve (sent

q from electronic control fuel injection
pump) is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT [V] I The power supply voltage of ECM is

q q
displayed.
P/N POSI SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the

q q
[ON/OFF] park/neutral position switch signal.
START SIGNAL I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the I After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
q q
[ON/OFF] starter signal. played regardless of the starter signal.
BRAKE SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the

q q
[ON/OFF] stop lamp switch signal.
BRAKE SW2 I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the

q q
[ON/OFF] brake pedal position switch signal.
IGN SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-

q q
[ON/OFF] tion switch signal.
MAS AIR/FL SE [V] I The signal voltage of the mass air flow I When the engine is stopped, a certain
q q
sensor is displayed. value is indicated.
INT/A VOLUME [mg/] I The intake air volume computed from

the mass air flow sensor signal is dis-
played.
F/CUT SIGNAL I The [ON/OFF] condition from decelera-

[ON/OFF] tion fuel cut signal (sent from electronic
q control fuel injection pump) is displayed.
OFF···Fuel is cut off.
ON···Fuel is not cut off.
GLOW RLY I The glow relay control condition (deter-

[ON/OFF] q mined by ECM according to the input
signal) is displayed.
COOLING FAN I Indicates the control condition of the

[LOW/HI/OFF] cooling fans (determined by ECM
according to the input signal).
q
I LOW ... Operates at low speed.
HI ... Operates at high speed.
OFF ... Stopped.
BARO SEN [kPa] I The barometric pressure (determined by

the signal voltage from the barometric
q q
pressure sensor built into the ECM) is
displayed.
EGR VOL CON/V I Indicates the EGR volume control value

[step] computed by the ECM according to the
q input signals.
I The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
NOTE:
EC-1030
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) GI

I Operate the cooling fan at Cooling fan moves at “LOW”, “HI”
COOLING FAN I Cooling fan motor MA
“LOW”, “HI” speed and turn speed and stops.
I Cooling fan relay
I Ignition switch: ON EM
EGR VOL I Change EGR volume control EGR volume control valve makes I Harness and connector
CONT/V valve opening step using CON- an operating sound. I EGR volume control valve
SULT-II.
LC
I Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
Glow relay makes the operating I Harness and connector
GLOW RLY I Turn the glow relay “ON” and
sound. I Glow relay
“OFF” using CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
FE
CL
MT
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODENJEC0629S06
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by AT
AX
real time.
In other words, DTC will be displayed if the malfunction is
detected by ECM.
SU
in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ... BR
SEF373Y xx%” as shown at left, and the data after the malfunction detec-
“REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched ST
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the RS
MANUAL. BT
I DTC will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT-II screen
even though a malfunction is detected by ECM. HA
SEF707X DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
SC
1) “AUTO TRIG”
I While trying to detect the DTC by performing the “DTC Confir- EL
moment it is detected. IDX
EC-1031
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction
is found the DTC will be displayed. Refer to GI-23, “Incident
Simulation Tests”.
2) “MANU TRIG”
“MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data
SEF720X
EC-1032
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION EUROPE - YD
Introduction
injection control, fuel injection timing control, glow control system, GI
etc. The ECM accepts input signals from sensors and instantly
drives electronic control fuel injection pump. It is essential that both
input and output signals are proper and stable. At the same time, MA
it is important that there are no problems such as vacuum leaks,
or other problems with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermit- EM
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
SEF858S
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the LC
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road
formed. Follow the “Work Flow”, EC-1035.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with FE
tomer can supply good information about such problems, espe-
cially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and CL
under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. MT
SEF233G
This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically
controlled engine vehicle.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF234G
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
NJEC0630S01 ST
troubleshooting faster and more accurate. RS
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is
customer complaint. BT
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one shown below in order to
organize all the information for troubleshooting.
HA
SEF907L
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1033
MTBL0533
EC-1034
Work Flow
Work Flow NJEC0631
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF880Y
HA
*1 EC-1021 *3 If the incident cannot be verified, Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
*2 If time data of “SELF-DIAG perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY”, EC-1062.
RESULTS” is other than “0”, per- FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, *5 If malfunctioning part cannot be
SC
form “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS EC-1061. detected, perform “TROUBLE
FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, *4 If the on board diagnostic system DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
EC-1061. cannot be performed, check main TENT INCIDENT”, EC-1061. EL
power supply and ground circuit.
IDX
EC-1035
STEP DESCRIPTION
STEP I
the “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET”, EC-1033.
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II) the DTC, then erase the
DTC. Refer to EC-1023.
STEP II If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-1061.
“Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. Refer to EC-1042.) Also check related service bulletins for information.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA
STEP III MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read the DTC
by using CONSULT-II.
During the DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)
STEP IV
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the DTC detection.
STEP V
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the Basic Inspection, EC-1037. Then perform inspections according to
the Symptom Matrix Chart. Refer to EC-1042.
SULT-II. Refer to EC-1055 or EC-1052.
STEP VI
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to GI-25, “Circuit
Inspection”.
If the malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT”, EC-1061.
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code (DTC P0000 or 0505) is detected. If the
STEP VII
incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method from the previous one.
(Refer to EC-1023.)
EC-1036
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION EUROPE - YD
Basic Inspection

Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical GI
loads applied;
MA
I On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set
lighting switch to the 1st position to light only small
lamps. EM
I Rear defogger switch is OFF,
I Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. LC
1 INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related problem.
2. Check the current need for scheduled maintenance, especially for fuel filter and air cleaner filter. Refer to MA-4, “Peri-
odic Maintenance”.
3. Open engine hood and check the following: FE
I Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, or improper connections
I Wiring for improper connections, pinches, or cuts CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF142I SU
© GO TO 2.
BR
2 PREPARATION FOR CHECKING IDLE SPEED
ST
With CONSULT-II
Connect CONSULT-II to the data link connector.
Without CONSULT-II RS
Install diesel tacho tester to the vehicle.
© GO TO 3.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1037
3 CHECK IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-II
2. Read idle speed.
SEF817Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check idle speed.
725±25 rpm
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
5 BLEED AIR FROM FUEL SYSTEM

1. Stop engine.
2. Use priming pump to bleed air from fuel system. Refer to “AIR BLEEDING”, EC-1021.
© GO TO 6.
EC-1038

With CONSULT-II GI
3. Read idle speed. MA
EM
LC
SEF817Y
FE
Without CONSULT-II
725±25 rpm
OK or NG
MT
NG © GO TO 7. AT
7 DRIN WATER FROM FUEL FILTER AX

© GO TO 8. SU
8 CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN BR

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “CKPS·RPM (TDC)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. ST
3. Read idle speed.
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF817Y
Without CONSULT-II
EL
725±25 rpm IDX
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 9.
EC-1039
9 CHECK AIR CLEANER FILTER

Check air cleaner filter for clogging or braks.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace air cleaner filter.
10 CHECK FUEL INJECTION NOZZLE

Check fuel injection nozzle opening pressure. Refer to “Injection Pressure Test”, EC-1013.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace fuel injection nozzle assembly.

With CONSULT-II
3. Read idle speed.
SEF817Y
Without CONSULT-II
725±25 rpm
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 12.

Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-92, “MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Follow the instruction of “MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE”.
EC-1040

With CONSULT-II GI
3. Read idle speed. MA
EM
LC
SEF817Y
FE
Without CONSULT-II
725±25 rpm
OK or NG
MT
NG © Replace electronic control fuel injection pump. AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1041
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION EUROPE - YD
SYMPTOM
ENGINE STALL
(EXCP. HA)

SYSTEM — Basic engine
control system

WHEN DECELERATING
POOR ACCELERATION
KNOCK/DETONATION
DURING DRIVING
LACK OF POWER
Reference page
LOW IDLE
AT IDLE
HI IDLE
Electronic control fuel injec-

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 4 4 — *1
tion pump mainframe
Injection nozzle 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 3 EC-1010 *2
Glow system 1 1 1 1 1 EC-1191
Engine body 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 EM section *3
EGR system 3 3 EC-1200

EC-1042
SYMPTOM
GI

MA
EM


SYSTEM — Basic engine control
LC

system

Malfunction indicator illuminates.
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
FE
Reference page
CL
MT
Electronic control fuel injection
4 4 3 4 5 4 3 3 — *1
pump mainframe
Injection nozzle 3 3 3 4 3 EC-1010 *2 AT

Glow system 1 1 EC-1191
Engine body 3 3 3 3 3 3 EM section *3 AX

EGR system 3 EC-1200

SU
(continued on next page) BR
*3: Caused mainly by insufficient compression pressure. ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1043
SYMPTOM
ENGINE STALL
(EXCP. HA) HARD TO START WHEN ENGINE IS COLD


WHEN DECELERATING
POOR ACCELERATION
KNOCK/DETONATION
DURING DRIVING
LACK OF POWER
Malfunction
Reference page
LOW IDLE
AT IDLE
HI IDLE
Electronic control fuel injection *a, *b 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 —
pump circuit
ENGINE CONTROL
*c, *d
*a, *c 1 1
*b

*a, *b 1 1 1 1 EC-1074 *1
circuit

*a: Open
*b: Short
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise
EC-1044
SYMPTOM
GI

MA
EM

Malfunction

LC

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
FE
Reference page
CL
MT
Electronic control fuel injection pump *a, *b 1 1 1
1 1 —
circuit
ENGINE CONTROL
*c, *d 1
AT
*a, *c
*b 1
AX
Engine coolant temperature sensor cir-
*a, *b 1 1 1 1 1 EC-1074 *1
cuit

SU
(continued on next page) BR
*a: Open
*b: Short
*c: Ground short ST
*d: Noise
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1045
SYMPTOM
ENGINE STALL


WHEN DECELERATING
POOR ACCELERATION
KNOCK/DETONATION
DURING DRIVING
LACK OF POWER
Malfunction
Reference page
LOW IDLE
AT IDLE
HI IDLE
*a, *c
ENGINE CONTROL

*b 1 1 1 1 *2
Accelerator position sensor circuit *a, *b 1 1 1 EC-1079
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) *a, *b

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-1089
circuit *d

*a: Open
*b: Short
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise
EC-1046
SYMPTOM
GI

MA
EM

Malfunction

LC

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
FE
Reference page
CL
MT
*a, *c 1 1
ENGINE CONTROL

*b *2
AT
Accelerator position sensor circuit *a, *b 1 1 EC-1079
*a, *b
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) circuit 1 1 1 1 EC-1089 AX
*d

SU
*a: Open
*b: Short BR
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise
*2: Engine runs on after turning ignition switch OFF. ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1047
SYMPTOM
ENGINE STALL


WHEN DECELERATING
POOR ACCELERATION
KNOCK/DETONATION
DURING DRIVING
LACK OF POWER
Malfunction
Reference page
LOW IDLE
AT IDLE
HI IDLE
Start signal circuit *a, *b 1 1 1 1 EC-1208 *3
*a, *c 1 1 1 1 1
ENGINE CONTROL
Accelerator position switch (Idle)

EC-1079
circuit *b 1 1 1 *4
*a 1 1 1 1
*b *5
*a 1 1 1 1
Power supply for ECM circuit EC-1062
*b

*a: Open
*b: Short
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise
EC-1048
SYMPTOM
GI

MA
EM

Malfunction

LC

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
FE
Reference page
CL
MT
Start signal circuit *a, *b EC-1208 *3
*a, *c
ENGINE CONTROL
Accelerator position switch (Idle) circuit EC-1079 AT

*b 1 1 *4
*a
Ignition switch circuit EC-1062 AX
*b *5
*a
Power supply for ECM circuit 1 1 EC-1062 SU
*b
1 - 5: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. BR

*a: Open
*b: Short ST
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise
*3: Start control does not function. RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1049
SYMPTOM
START/RESTART
ENGINE STALL
(EXCP. HA)
HARD/NO

WHEN DECELERATING
POOR ACCELERATION
KNOCK/DETONATION
DURING DRIVING
LACK OF POWER
Malfunction
Reference page
LOW IDLE
AT IDLE
HI IDLE
*a, *b
*c 1 1 1 *6
*a 1 1 1 1 *7
*b *8
ENGINE CONTROL
*a 1 1 1 1
*b *9
EC-1178,
ECM, Connector circuit *a, *b 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1107
*a *10
*b 1 *11
*a, *c *11
*b *12

*a: Open
*b: Short
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise
EC-1050
SYMPTOM
GI

MA
EM

Malfunction

LC

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
FE
Reference page
CL
MT
*a, *b
*c 1 *6
AT
*a 1 *7
*b *8
AX
ENGINE CONTROL
*a
*b *9
SU
EC-1178,
ECM, Connector circuit *a, *b 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1107
BR
*a *10
*b *11
ST
*a, *c *11
*b *12
RS
*a: Open
*b: Short BT
*c: Ground short
*d: Noise
*6: Does not stop operating. HA
*9: Ground short makes engine unable to stop. SC
*12: Air conditioner does not work. EL
IDX
EC-1051

Mode NJEC0634
Remarks:
CKPS·RPM (TDC) I Tachometer: Connect

CMPS·RPM- I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II value.
PUMP value.
I Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
CONSULT-II value CONSULT-II value
I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: fully released 0.30 - 0.50V

ACCEL POS SEN
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: fully depressed 3.0 - 4.3V

OFF ACCEL SW
SPILL/V I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. Approx. 12 - 13°CA
Shift lever: Neutral position ON

Except above OFF
IGN SW I Ignition switch: ON , OFF ON , OFF

BRAKE SW I Ignition switch: ON

BRAKE SW2 I Ignition switch: ON

I No-load
INT/A VOLUME I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. 150 - 450 mg/st
F/CUT SIGNAL I Engine: After warming up Idle ON
GLOW RLY I Refer to EC-1191.
EC-1052
Altitude GI
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi) MA
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
EM
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)
I Engine: After warming up After one minute at idle More than 10 steps
EGR VOL CON/V
I No-load rpm
0 steps FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1053
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode

Mode =NJEC0635
ACCEL POS SEN, “CKPS·RPM (TDC)”, “MAS AIR/FL SE” NJEC0635S01
Below is the data for “ACCEL POS SEN”, “CKPS·RPM (TDC)” and “MAS AIR/FL SE” when revving engine
quickly up to 3,000 rpm under no load after warming up engine to the normal operating temperature.
SEF321Y
EC-1054

PREPARATION
1.
NJEC0636S01
ECM is located on the left side under the cowl panel (behind
GI
the strut tower). For the inspection, perform the following pro-
cedure. MA
EM
SEF396Y LC
a. Remove the engine control harness fixing clips.
FE
CL
SEF322Y
MT
b. Remove the ventilation hose.
I To release the lock, push the quick connector. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF323Y
c. Remove the ECM cover mounting bolts, then remove the ECM
cover from the vehicle. ST
: 4.0 - 7.8 N·m (0.4 - 0.8 kg-m, 35 - 69 in-lb)
d. Remove the ECM cover bolts, then open the ECM cover. RS
: 4.0 - 6.8 N·m (0.4 - 0.7 kg-m, 35 - 60 in-lb)
e. Remove the ECM bolts.
: 4.2 - 6.7 N·m (0.42 - 0.69 kg-m, 37 - 59 in-lb) BT
f. Install in the reverse order of removal.
HA
SEF324Y
2. Disconnect negative battery terminal. SC
EL
IDX
SEF289H
EC-1055
3. Connect a break out box (SST) between the ECM and ECM
harness connectors.
I Be sure ECM unit is properly grounded before checking.
SEF883Y
SEF435Z

Remarks: Specification data are reference values and are mea-
sured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
the ground.
TERMI-
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR Signal)
NO.
104 B
[Engine is running]
105 B ECM ground Approximately 0V
I Idle speed
106 B
107 R
BATTERY VOLTAGE
108 R Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
(11 - 14V)
109 R

204 L Air conditioner relay [Engine is running]

Approximately 0.1V
switch are “ON”
214 W/B Glow relay Refer to “Glow Control System”, EC-1191.
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
EC-1056
TERMI-
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
COLOR Signal) GI
I Cooling fan is not operating (11 - 14V) MA
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0.1V
EM
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
221 LG/B Cooling fan relay (High) I Cooling fan is operating at low speed LC
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0.1V

power supply
[Engine is running] FE
I Idle speed
CL
[Engine is running]
313 L/W I Warm-up condition Approximately 0.1V
injection pump
I Idle speed
MT
[Engine is running]
314 L/R I Warm-up condition Approximately 0.4V
injection pump
I Idle speed AT
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed
AX
[Engine is running]
317 P
injection pump
I Warm-up condition Approximately 2.5V SU
I Idle speed

[Ignition switch “OFF”] BR
Approximately 0.25V
ST
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I A few seconds passed after turning ignition
(11 - 14V)
switch “OFF” RS
[Engine is running]
331 OR I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor (TDC) ground BT
I Idle speed

334 B/R [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
ture sensor ground
HA
0.1 - 14V
337 W/L
[Engine is running] (Voltage signals of each ECM
338 PU/W EGR volume control
350 GY valve
I Warm-up condition terminals differ according to the SC
I Idle speed control position of EGR volume
351 OR/B
control valve.)
EL
IDX
EC-1057
TERMI-
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR Signal)
NO.
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
SEF333Y
344 W
sor (TDC) Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
SEF334Y
347 L/B [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
ture sensor

403 R/L Air conditioner switch [Engine is running]

Approximately 0.1V
switch are “ON”

Approximately 0V

Brake pedal position I Brake pedal fully released (11 - 14V)
416 Y/B
switch [Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0V
I Brake pedal depressed
0 - Approximately 8V
[Engine is running]
SEF891Y
Approximately 6V
[Engine is running]
SEF892Y
EC-1058
TERMI-
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
COLOR Signal) GI
Approximately 0V
Park/Neutral position I Gear position is “Neutral” MA
418 G/OR
switch [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
EM
422 B/Y Start signal BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “START”]
(11 - 14V) LC
[Engine is running]
425 P/B I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor ground
I Idle speed
Accelerator position
426 BR/R
switch (Idle) ground
[Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V FE
sor power supply CL
0.30 - 0.50V
Accelerator position sen- I Accelerator pedal fully released
434 W
sor
MT
3.0 - 4.3V
[Ignition switch “ON”] AT

Approximately 0V
Accelerator position I Accelerator pedal fully released
435 W/G
switch (Idle) [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE AX
I Accelerator pedal depressed (11 - 14V)
Approximately 4.8V
SU
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition BR
I Idle speed
ST
SEF325Y
439 L/OR Tachometer
Approximately 4.6V
RS
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition BT
HA
SEF326Y

SC
505 OR/L Malfunction indicator [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
EL
(11 - 14V) IDX
EC-1059
TERMI-
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR Signal)
NO.

Approximately 1V
I Glow lamp is “ON”
508 OR Glow lamp
I Glow lamp is “OFF” (11 - 14V)
EC-1060
INCIDENT EUROPE - YD
Description
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the problem resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the custom- GI
clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the spe- MA
cific problem area.
EM
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0”.
LC
IV DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for XXXX does not indicate the problem area.
FE
CL
MT
AT
1 INSPECTION START
Erase DTCs. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE DTC”, EC-1023.
AX
© GO TO 2.
2 CHECK GROUND TERMINALS SU

Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to GI-28, “GROUND INSPECTION”. BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. ST
RS
BT
OK or NG
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1061
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY EUROPE - YD

Remarks: Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
104 B
[Engine is running]
105 B ECM ground Approximately 0V
I Idle speed
106 B
107 R
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
109 R

Approximatley 0.25V

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
“OFF”

(11 - 14V)
EC-1062
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC881
EC-1063
1 INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 11.
No © GO TO 2.

SEF895Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

I Harness connectors M21, E106 or M160, E175
I 10A fuse

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 104, 105, 106 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
EC-1064

1. Reconnect ECM harness connector. GI
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 107, 108, 109 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MA
EM
LC
SEF896Y
OK or NG FE
OK © Check electronic control fuel injection pump power supply circuit. Refer to “Diagnostic
CL
does not exist.)
NG (Battery voltage © GO TO 10. MT
few seconds.)
AT
1. Disconnect ECM relay. AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF379Y RS
2. Check voltage between relay terminals 1, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF399Y
OK or NG
IDX
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
EC-1065

I 20A fuse

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 325 and ECM relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 107, 108, 109 and ECM relay terminal 7. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
10 CHECK ECM RELAY

SEF296X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
EC-1066
11 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

MA
EM
LC
SEF379Y
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 107, 108, 109 and ECM relay terminal 7. Refer to Wiring Diagram. FE
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. MT
12 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT AT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 104, 105, 106 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13. SU
BR
ST
© INSPECTION END
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1067
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SEN EUROPE - YD

The mass air flow sensor (MAFS) is placed in the stream of intake
air. It measures the intake air flow rate by measuring a part of the
entire intake air flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with
electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is
controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the
hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air,
the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM
SEF987W

Mode NJEC0643

I No-load

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed

power supply
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
DTC Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause)
P0100 I An excessively high or low voltage from the sen- I Harness or connectors
0102 sor is sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

SEF817Y
EC-1068
turn “ON”.
4) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with GI
ECM.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1069
Wiring Diagram
HEC883
EC-1070
1 CHECK MAFS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT GI

2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF884Y
4. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminals 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF297X
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
ST
I Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM relay
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1071
3 CHECK MAFS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

SEF380Y
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

Check harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM.
5 CHECK MAFS INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 224. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
EC-1072

1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. GI
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 224 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
MA
EM
LC
SEF441Z
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAFS harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check. FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. CL
MT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-1061. AT
© INSPECTION END
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1073
DTC P0115 COOLANT TEMP SEN EUROPE - YD
Description
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Voltage* (V) Resistance (kΩ)
ture °C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.3 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 1.0 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and measured between ECM terminal 347
SEF012P (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
the ground.
P0115 I An excessively high or low voltage from the sen- I Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is
0103 sor is entered to ECM. open or shorted.)

SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
EC-1074
ECM.
4) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-1077. GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1075
Wiring Diagram
HEC823
EC-1076
1 CHECK ECTS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT GI

MA
EM
LC
SEF382Y
4. Check voltage between ECTS terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF401Y
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 2.
BR
2 CHECK ECTS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
ST
2. Check harness continuity between ECTS terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. BT
NG © GO TO 3.
HA
Check the following harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor. SC
EL
IDX
EC-1077

1. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor from the engine.
2. Check resistance between ECTS terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.

© INSPECTION END
EC-1078
DTC P0120 ACCEL POS SENSOR EUROPE - YD
Description
The accelerator work unit is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The accelerator
position sensor and accelerator position switch are built into the accelerator work unit. The sensor detects the GI
accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM uses the signal to determine the amount of fuel
to be injected.
The accelerator position switch detects Off-accelerator switch signal and send these signals to the ECM. The MA
ECM will then determine engine idle conditions. These signals are also used for diagnosing the accelerator
position sensor.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF885Y
AX
Mode SU
NJEC0680
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION BR
I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: released 0.30 - 0.50V
ACCEL POS SEN
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: depressed 3.0 - 4.3V ST
OFF ACCEL SW RS
ECM Terminals and Reference Value NJEC0681 BT

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- HA
TERMI-
WIRE SC
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] EL
425 P/B I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
I Idle speed
IDX
Accelerator position switch
426 BR/R [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
(Idle) ground

power supply
EC-1079
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

0.30 - 0.50V
434 W Accelerator position sensor
3.0 - 4.3V

Approximately 0V
Accelerator position switch I Accelerator pedal fully released
435 W/G
(Idle) [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Accelerator pedal depressed (11 - 14V)
P0120 I The relation between sensor and switch signals I Harness or connectors
0403 is not in the nomal range during the specified (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
accelerator positions. I Accelerator position sensor
I Accelerator position switch

3) Depress and release fully accelerator pedal slowly.
2) Depress and release fully accelerator pedal slowly.
SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-1080
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC884
EC-1081
1 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SENSOR FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “ACCEL POS SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “ACCEL POS SEN” signal under the following conditions.
SEF436Z
Without CONSULT-II
SEF437Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.
EC-1082
2 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SWITCH FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II GI
1. Select “OFF ACCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Check “OFF ACCEL SW” signal under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
SEF910Y
FE
Without CONSULT-II
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF911Y
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © GO TO 11. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1083
3 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect accelerator work unit harness connector.
SEF886Y
4. Check voltage between accelerator work unit terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF897Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

I Harness connectors F112, M74 or F103, M64
I Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator work unit
EC-1084
5 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screw.
MA
EM
LC
SEF380Y
3. Check harness continuity between accelerator work unit terminal 4 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
CL
NG © GO TO 6.
MT
Check the following. AT
AX
7 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT SU
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 434 and accelerator work unit terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. BR
OK or NG ST
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8. RS
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BT

I Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator work unit HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1085

With CONSULT-II
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Check the indication of “ACCEL POS SEN” under the following conditions.
SEF436Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.

Without CONSULT-II
SEF437Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
EC-1086
11 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect accelerator work unit harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF886Y
4. Check voltage between accelerator work unit terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF912Y
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
SU
NG © GO TO 12.

BR
I Harness connectors M74, F112 or M64, F103 ST
I Harness for open or short between accelerator work unit and ECM
RS
13 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
BT
3. Check harness continuity between accelerator work unit terminal 1 and ECM terminal 426. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
HA
OK or NG SC
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © GO TO 14. EL

IDX
I Harness connectors M74, F112 or M64, F103
EC-1087
15 CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION SWITCH

Check continuity between accelerator position switch terminals 1 and 3 under the following conditions.
SEF913Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.

© INSPECTION END
EC-1088
DTC P0335 CRANK POS SEN (TDC) EUROPE - YD
Description
The crankshaft position sensor (TDC) monitors engine speed by
means of signals from the sensing plate (with three protrusions) GI
installed to the crankshaft pulley. The datum signal output is
detected at ATDC 10° and sent to the ECM. The sensor signal is
used for fuel injection control and fuel injection timing control. MA
EM
SEF420Z LC
Mode NJEC0687
CKPS·RPM (TDC) I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CON-
CONSULT-II value. CL
SULT-II value.

NJEC0688 MT
CAUTION:
TERMI-
NAL
WIRE
ITEM CONDITION
DATA(DC Voltage and Pulse AX
COLOR Signal)
NO.

331 OR I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor (TDC) ground
I Idle speed
Approximately 0V
BR
I Warm-up condition
I Idle speed
RS
SEF333Y
Crankshaft position sen- BT
344 W Approximately 0V
sor (TDC)
HA
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition
SC
SEF334Y
EL
IDX
P0335 I An improper signal from the sensor is sent to I Harness or connectors

0407 ECM during engine running and cranking. (The sensor circuit is open.)
I Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
EC-1089

tery voltage is more than 10V.
with CONSULT-II.
SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-1090
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC885
EC-1091
1 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
SEF380Y
3. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (TDC) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
SEF387Y
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 331 and crankshaft position sensor (TDC) terminal 1. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between crankshaft position sensor (TDC) terminal 2 and ECM terminal 344. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
EC-1092
3 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC)-I

1. Loosen the fixing bolt and remove the crankshaft position sensor (TDC). GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF620S
OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 4.
CL
4 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC)-II
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (TDC) harness connector.
MT
2. Check resistance between crankshaft position sensor (TDC) terminals 1 and 2.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEF408Y
OK or NG ST
OK © GO TO 5.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1093
5 INSTALL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC)

1. Install crankshaft position sensor (TDC) and temporarily tighten the fixing bolt.
2. Turn crankshaft position sensor (TDC) clockwise until it stops.
3. Tighten the fixing bolt.
SEF409Y
© GO TO 6.

© INSPECTION END
EC-1094
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SEN EUROPE - YD
Description
pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the GI
MA
EM
AEC110 LC
CAUTION:
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. FE
TER-
WIRE DATA (DC Voltage and
MINAL ITEM CONDITION CL
COLOR Pulse Signal)
NO.
Approximately 8V
MT
[Engine is running]
I In 1st gear position AT
AX
SEF891Y
417 PU/R Vehicle speed sensor Approximately 6V

SU
[Engine is running]
I Lift up the vehicle. BR
ST
SEF892Y
RS
DTC Malfunction is detected when .... Check Items (Possible Cause)

BT
P0500 I The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle I Harness or connector
0104 speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle (The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or
is being driven. shorted.) HA

SC
speed sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed. EL
1) Lift up the vehicle. IDX
2) Start engine.
3) Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
SEF864Y The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should be able to
EC-1095
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suit-
able gear position.
1) Lift up the vehicle.
2) Start engine.
3) Read the voltage signal for the vehicle speed sensor with an
oscilloscope. Refer to “ECM Terminals and Reference Value”,
EC-1095.
shown at “ECM Terminals and Reference Value”, EC-1095.
EC-1096
Wiring Diagram

SEDAN NJEC0658S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC882
EC-1097
HEC843
EC-1098
1 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT GI
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 417 and combination meter terminal 39 or 57. Refer to Wiring Dia- MA
gram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. EM
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. LC
NG © GO TO 2.

FE
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. CL
3 CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION MT

OK or NG
AT
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
AX
4 CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
SU
I Harness for open or short between vehicle speed sensor and engine ground
BR
OK or NG
OK © Check vehicle speed sensor and combination meter. Refer to EL section.
ST
RS
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-1061. BT
© INSPECTION END
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1099
DTC P0571 BRAKE SW EUROPE - YD
Description
The stop lamp switch is installed to brake pedal bracket. The switch
senses brake pedal position and sends an ON-OFF signal to the
ECM. The ECM uses the signal to control the fuel injection control
system.
SEF893Y

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 0V

Brake pedal position I Brake pedal fully released (11 - 14V)
416 Y/B
switch [Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0V
I Brake pedal depressed
P1571 I An irregular voltage signal from the switch is sent I Harness or connectors
0807 to ECM. (The stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
I Stop lamp switch

SEF817Y
EC-1100
turn “ON”.
4) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with GI
ECM.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1101
Wiring Diagram
HEC887
EC-1102
1 CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT GI

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the stop lamp switch.
MA
EM
MTBL0443
OK or NG LC
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF893Y
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF435Y
OK or NG BT
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3. HA
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART SC

I 10A fuse EL
I Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and fuse
IDX
EC-1103
4 CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
SEF893Y
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 405 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

I Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
6 CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
SEF904Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace stop lamp switch.
EC-1104
7 CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect brake pedal position switch harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF893Y
4. Check voltage between brake pedal position switch terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF905Y
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
SU
NG © GO TO 8.

BR
I Harness connectors M74, F112 or M64, F103 ST
I Harness for open and short between brake pedal position switch and ECM relay
I Harness for open and short between brake pedal position switch and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. RS
9 CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT BT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 416 and brake pedal position switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Dia-
HA
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11. EL
NG © GO TO 10.
IDX
EC-1105

I Harness for open or short between ECM and brake pedal position switch
11 CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Check continuity between brake pedal position switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
SEF906Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace brake pedal position switch.

© INSPECTION END
EC-1106
DTC P1107 ECM 10 EUROPE - YD
Description
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine. GI
MA
EM
SEC220B LC
P1107 I An excessively high or low voltage from the I ECM

0802 absolute pressure sensor (built-into ECM) is sent (ECCS-D control module) FE
to ECM.
CL
MT
WITH CONSULT-II AT
NJEC0736S01
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. AX
SU
2) Start engine and wait at least 2 seconds. BR
SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
ST
ECM.
5) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-1108. RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1107
1 INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
5. Is the DTC P1107 displayed again?
Without CONSULT-II
Yes or No
Yes © Replace ECM.
EC-1108
DTC P1180 P9·FUEL TEMP SEN EUROPE - YD
Description
GI
control valve.
NJEC0672S03
AT
NJEC0672S05
BR
RS
BT
HA

Mode NJEC0673
INT/A VOLUME I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. Approx. 150 - 450 mg/st
EC-1109
Altitude
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi)
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
317 P I Warm-up condition Approximately 2.5V
injection pump
I Idle speed
DTC Malfunction is detected when .... Check Items (Possible cause)
P1180 I An improper voltage signal from fuel temperature I Harness or connectors

0402 sensor (Built-into electronic control fuel injection (Electronic control fuel injection pump circuit is
pump) is sent to injection pump control unit. open or shorted.)

least 2 seconds.)
EC-1110
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1111
Wiring Diagram
HEC825
EC-1112

MA
EM
LC
SEF390Y
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF438Y
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
ST
RS
BT
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. EL
IDX
EC-1113

MTBL0462
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.

OK or NG
EC-1114
DTC P1202 FUEL CUT SYSTEM2 EUROPE - YD
Description
GI
control valve.
NJEC0753S03
AT
CAM RING POSITION SENSOR
NJEC0753S05
BR
tance element sensor. The cam ring position sensor synchronizes
by the signal of the cam ring position sensor.
RS
BT
HA

Mode NJEC0754
EC-1115
Altitude
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi)
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
injection pump
I Idle speed
DTC Malfunction is detected when .... Check Items (Possible cause)
P1202 I Fuel cut control system does not function properly. I Harness or connectors
1002 (Electronic control fuel circuit is open or shorted.)
I Electronic control fuel

least 2 seconds.)
turn “ON”.
SEF817Y
EC-1116
2) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. GI
least 2 seconds.)
MA
turn “ON”.
4) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with EM
ECM.
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1117
Wiring Diagram
HEC825
EC-1118

MA
EM
LC
SEF390Y
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF438Y
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
ST
RS
BT
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. EL
IDX
EC-1119

MTBL0462
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.

OK or NG
EC-1120
DTC P1217 OVER HEAT EUROPE - YD
Description
GI
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed MA

Cooling fan
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Cooling fan relay
control
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal EM
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, air condi-
tioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF]. LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF421Z
AT
Mode
NJEC0661
AX

SU
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.) BR
COOLING FAN I When cooling fans operate at low speed. LOW ST

RS
CAUTION:
BT
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. HA
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO. SC
I Cooling fans are not operating (11 - 14V)
219 LG/R Cooling fan relay (Low) EL
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0.1V
I Cooling fans are operating
IDX
EC-1121
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Cooling fans are not operating
(11 - 14V)
221 LG/B Cooling fan relay (High) I Cooling fans are operating at low speed
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0.1V
I Cooling fans are operating at high speed

This diagnosis continuously monitors the engine coolant temperature.
rise.
indicated.
P1217 I Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat). I Harness or connectors
0208 I Cooling fan system does not operate properly (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
(Overheat). I Cooling fan
I Engine coolant was not added to the system using I Radiator hose
the proper filling method. I Radiator
I Radiator cap
I Water pump
I Thermostat
For more information, refer to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF
OVERHEATING”, EC-1147.
CAUTION:
“Changing Engine Coolant”. Also, replace the engine oil.
1) Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure
to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-23, “Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio”.
EC-1122
WARNING:
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Carefully remove the cap EM
by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to
escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
AEC640
WITH CONSULT-II LC
NJEC0664S01
tic Procedure”, EC-1126. FE
tic Procedure”, EC-1126. CL
SEF111X SULT-II and make sure that cooling fans operate when touch- MT
ing “HIGH” or “LOW”.
AT
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. AX
tic Procedure”, EC-1126. SU
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos- BR
SEC163BA tic Procedure”, EC-1126.
3) Start engine.
Be careful not to overheat engine. ST
6) Turn blower fan switch “ON”. RS
ating. BT
8) Make sure that cooling fans operate at low speed.
9) Turn ignition switch “OFF”. HA
MEC475B 10) Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
11) Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness con-
nector.
SC
12) Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector. EL
13) Start engine and make sure that cooling fans operate at higher
speed than low speed.
Be careful not to overheat engine. IDX
EC-1123
Wiring Diagram

SEDAN NJEC0665S01
HEC827
EC-1124
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC841
EC-1125

SEDAN NJEC0666S03
1 INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
SEF384Y
SEF646X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
EC-1126

With CONSULT-II GI
EM
LC
FE
SEF111X
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-1134.) MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1127

Without CONSULT-II
SEF384Y
SEC163BA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
EC-1128

EM
LC
FE
MEC475B CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. MT
AT
CAUTION:
SU
BR
ST
RS
SLC754A
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. HA
NG © GO TO 7.
SC
I Hose EL
I Radiator
IDX
EC-1129

SLC755A
59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
9 CHECK THERMOSTAT
SLC343
Valve lift:
More than 8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
EC-1130

MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF304X
OK or NG
AT
OK © GO TO 11.
AX
© INSPECTION END
BR
Procedure A NJEC0666S0301

ST
BT
HA
SC
SEF590X
EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
IDX
NG © GO TO 2.
EC-1131

I 10A fuse
I 40A fusible links

SEF385Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

EC-1132

Check continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF591X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
FE

CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEF405Y
OK or NG BR
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace cooling fan motors. ST

HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1133
Procedure B NJEC0666S0302

SEF384Y
SEF593X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

EC-1134

MA
EM
LC
SEF385Y
terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 7 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. FE
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 CL
terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 7 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
AT
AX
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 221 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 2. SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. ST
NG © GO TO 5.
RS
BT
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1135

SEF591X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.

SEF405Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.

1. Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-1061.
© INSPECTION END
1 INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 4.
EC-1136

With CONSULT-II GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF384Y
3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF646X
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
SU
BR
With CONSULT-II ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF111X
OK or NG
IDX
OK © GO TO 6.
EC-1137

Without CONSULT-II
SEF384Y
SEC163BA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
EC-1138

EM
LC
FE
MEC475B CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. MT
AT
CAUTION:
SU
BR
ST
RS
SLC754A
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. HA
NG © GO TO 7.
SC
I Hose EL
I Radiator
IDX
EC-1139

SLC755A
59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
9 CHECK THERMOSTAT
SLC343
Valve lift:
More than 8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
EC-1140

MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF304X
OK or NG
AT
OK © GO TO 11.
AX
© INSPECTION END
BR
Procedure A NJEC0666S0401

ST
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 2, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
BT
HA
SC
SEF899Y
EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
IDX
NG © GO TO 2.
EC-1141

I 10A fuse
I 40A fusible link
3 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

SEF385Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

1. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 5.
5 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III

1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2, 4.
2. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2 and cooling fan relays-2, 4 terminal 3, cooling fan
relays-2, 4 terminal 4 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
EC-1142
6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-2, 4

Check continuity between cooling fan relays-2, 4 terminals 3 and 4, 3 and 5 under the following conditions. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF900Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
FE
CL
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 219 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. MT
OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8. AX
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART SU

I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM BR
ST
Check continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions. RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF901Y EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. IDX
EC-1143

SEF902Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.

© INSPECTION END
Procedure B NJEC0666S0402

2. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2, 3 and 4.
SEF384Y
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2, 4 terminals 1 and ground, cooling fan relay-3 terminals 2, 3 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF903Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
EC-1144

I 40A fusible link
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2, 3, 4 and fuse
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-3 and fusible link MA
EM
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. LC
FE
CL
SEF385Y
MT
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relays-2, 4 terminal 5 and body ground, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5
and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. AT
OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 4.
SU
BR
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 221 and cooling fan relays-2, 4 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 terminal
1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ST
OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5. BT
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART HA

I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2, 3, 4 and ECM SC
EL
IDX
EC-1145

SEF900Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.

Check continuity between cooling fan relay-3 terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions.
SEF901Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.

SEF902Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
EC-1146

1. Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-1061. GI
© INSPECTION END
MA
EM
LC
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Condition Reference page

I Blocked radiator grille FE
I Blocked bumper
MENDED FLUIDS AND CL
LUBRICANTS”.
3 I Coolant level I Visual Coolant up to MAX level See LC-18, “Changing MT

4 I Radiator cap I Pressure tester 78 - 98 kPa See LC-40, “System AT

(0.78 - 0.98 bar, 0.8 - 1.0 Check”.
kg/cm2, 11 - 14 psi)
AX
Check”.
ON*2 6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and Both hoses should be See LC-43, “Thermostat” SU
lower radiator hoses hot and “Radiator”.
ON*1 7 I Cooling fan I CONSULT-II Operating See Trouble Diagnosis BR

for DTC P1217,
EC-1121.
OFF 8 I Combustion gas leak I Color checker chemi- Negative — ST

lyzer
RS
gauge when driving
I Coolant overflow to I Visual No overflow during driv- See LC-47, “Changing BT

OFF*4 10 I Coolant return from I Visual Should be initial level in See LC-48, “REFILLING
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank ENGINE COOLANT”.
HA
tor
OFF 11 I Cylinder head I Straight gauge feeler 0.1mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-135, “Inspec- SC
gauge mum distortion (warping) tion”.
12 I Cylinder block and pis- I Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-158, “Inspec-
tons walls or piston tion”.
EL
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. IDX
For more information, refer to LC-50, “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS”.
EC-1147
DTC P1241 P7·F/INJ TIMG FB EUROPE - YD
Description
control valve.
pressure chamber.
CAM RING POSITION SENSOR NJEC0727S05

Mode NJEC0728
EC-1148
Altitude GI
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi) MA
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
EM
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR MT
[Engine is running]
313 L/W
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
314 L/R
injection pump
I Idle speed

injection pump
I Idle speed
injection pump
I Idle speed
ST
DTC Malfunction is detected when .... Check Items (Possible cause) RS

P1241 I Fuel injection timing control system does not I Harness or connectors
0707 function properly. (Electronic control fuel injection pump circuit is BT
open or shorted.)
I Improper fuel quality
HA

SC
least 2 seconds.)
seconds.
SEF817Y
EC-1149
least 2 seconds.)
seconds.
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-1150
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC825
EC-1151
1 INSPECTION START
2. Perform “AIR BREEDING”, EC-1021, and “WATER DRAINING”, EC-1021.
© GO TO 2.

Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-1149 again.
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 3.

SEF390Y
SEF438Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

EC-1152
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MTBL0462
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. AT
AX
OK or NG
OK © Replace electronic control fuel injection pump. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1153
DTC P1251 P4·SPILL/V CIRC EUROPE - YD
Description
control valve.
pressure chamber.

Mode NJEC0715
EC-1154
Altitude GI
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi) MA
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
EM
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR MT
[Engine is running]
313 L/W
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
314 L/R
injection pump
I Idle speed

injection pump
I Idle speed
injection pump
I Idle speed
ST

P1251 I Spill valve (Built-into electronic control fuel injec- I Harness or connectors
0704 tion pump) does not function properly. (Electronic control fuel injection pump circuit is BT
open or shorted.)
HA

SC
least 2 seconds.)
EC-1155
least 2 seconds.)
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-1156
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC825
EC-1157

SEF390Y
SEF438Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC-1158

MA
EM
MTBL0462
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
FE
CL
OK or NG
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1159
DTC P1337 P2·DTC PULSE SIG EUROPE - YD
Description
control valve.
pressure chamber.

Mode NJEC0701
EC-1160
Altitude GI
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi) MA
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
EM
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR MT
[Engine is running]
313 L/W
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
314 L/R
injection pump
I Idle speed

injection pump
I Idle speed
injection pump
I Idle speed
ST

P1337 I Injection pump control unit input signal [Crank- I Harness or connectors
0702 shaft position sensor (TDC) signal] processing (Electronic control fuel injection pump circuit is BT
function is malfunctioning. open or shorted.)
HA

SC
least 2 seconds.)
4) If DTC P0335 is detected, go to “Diagnostic procedure”,
EC-1092.
If DTC P1337 is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
SEF817Y
EC-1164.
EC-1161
least 2 seconds.)
turn “ON”.
ECM.
5) If DTC P0335 is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-1092.
If DTC P1337 is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-1164.
EC-1162
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC825
EC-1163

SEF390Y
SEF438Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC-1164

MA
EM
MTBL0462
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
FE
CL
OK or NG
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1165
DTC P1341 P1·CAM POS SEN EUROPE - YD
Description
control valve.
pressure chamber.

Mode NJEC0694
EC-1166
Altitude GI
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi) MA
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
EM
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR MT
[Engine is running]
313 L/W
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
314 L/R
injection pump
I Idle speed

injection pump
I Idle speed
injection pump
I Idle speed
ST

P1341 I An improper voltage signal from cam position I Harness or connectors
0701 sensor (Built-into electronic control fuel injection (Electronic control fuel injection pump circuit is BT
pump) is sent to injection pump control unit. open or shorted.)
HA

SC
least 2 seconds.)
EC-1167
least 2 seconds.)
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-1168
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC825
EC-1169

SEF390Y
SEF438Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC-1170

MA
EM
MTBL0462
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
FE
CL
OK or NG
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1171
DTC P1600 P3·PUMP COMM LINE EUROPE - YD
Description
control valve.
pressure chamber.

Mode NJEC0708
SPILL/V I Engine: After warming up Approx. 12 - 13°CA
EC-1172
Altitude GI
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi) MA
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
EM
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR MT
[Engine is running]
313 L/W
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
314 L/R
injection pump
I Idle speed

injection pump
I Idle speed
injection pump
I Idle speed
ST

P1600 I Injection pump control unit receives incorrect volt- I Harness or connectors
0703 age signal from ECM continuously. (Electronic control fuel injection pump circuit is BT
open or shorted.)
HA

SC
least 2 seconds.)
EC-1173
least 2 seconds.)
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-1174
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC825
EC-1175

SEF390Y
SEF438Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC-1176

MA
EM
MTBL0462
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
FE
CL
OK or NG
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1177
DTC P1603 ECM 12, DTC P1607 ECM 2 EUROPE - YD
Description
SEC220B
P1603 I ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. I ECM

0901 (ECCS-D control module)
P1607
0301

SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-1178
DTC P1603 ECM 12, DTC P1607 ECM 2 EUROPE - YD
With CONSULT-II
5. Is the DTC P1603 or P1607 displayed again? EM
Without CONSULT-II
LC
5. Is the DTC 0301 or 0901 displayed again?
Yes or No
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1179
DTC P1620 ECM RLY EUROPE - YD

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
107 R
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
109 R

0 - 1V

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
“OFF”

(11 - 14V)
DTC Malfunction is detected when .... Check Items (Possible Cause)
P1620 I An irregular voltage signal from the ECM relay is I Harness or connectors
0902 sent to ECM. (ECM relay circuit is open or shorted.)
I ECM relay

turn “ON”.
SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-1180
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC839
EC-1181
1 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

SEF379Y
SEF399Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

1. Harness connectors E75, F36
2. 20A fuse
3. Harness for open and short between ECM relay and battery
3 CHECK ECM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 107, 108, 109 and ECM relay terminal 7. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC-1182
4 CHECK ECM OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 325 and ECM relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. GI
OK or NG MA
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EM
5 CHECK ECM RELAY LC

FE
CL
MT
SEF296X
OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace ECM relay. AX

© INSPECTION END BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1183
Description
SEC220B
P1621 I ECM input signal processing function is malfunc- I ECM

0903 tioning. (ECCS-D control module)

turn “ON”.
SEF817Y
turn “ON”.
ECM.
EC-1184
With CONSULT-II
5. Is the DTC P1621 displayed again? EM
Without CONSULT-II
LC
Yes or No
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1185
DTC P1660 BATTERY VOLTAGE EUROPE - YD

The ECM checks if battery voltage is within the tolerance range for the engine control system.
P1660 I An abnormally high or low voltage from the battery I Incorrect jump starting
0502 is sent to ECM. I Battery
I Alternator
I ECM

With CONSULT-II
I Jumper cables are connected for jump starting.
I Battery or alternator has been replaced.
If the result is “Yes” for one item or more, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-1186.
2) Check that the positive battery terminal is connected to battery properly. If NG, reconnect it properly.
3) Check that the alternator functions properly. Refer to SC-33, “Trouble Diagnosis”.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Wait one minute.
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
7) Start engine and wait one minute at idle.
Without CONSULT-II
I Jumper cables are connected for jump starting.
I Battery or alternator has been replaced.
If the result is “Yes” for one item or more, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-1186.
2) Check that the positive battery terminal is connected to battery properly. If NG, reconnect it properly.
3) Check that the alternator functions properly. Refer to SC-33, “Trouble Diagnosis”.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait one minute.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait 5 seconds and then turn “ON”.
6) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic result)” with ECM.
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
8) Start engine and wait one minute at idle.
9) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait 5 seconds and then turn “ON”.
10) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic result)” with ECM.
1 INSPECTION START
Are jumper cables connected for the jump starting?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © GO TO 2.
EC-1186
DTC P1660 BATTERY VOLTAGE EUROPE - YD
2 CHECK BATTERY AND ALTERNATOR

Check that the proper type of battery and alternator is installed. GI
Refer to SC-41, “Battery” and SC-42, “Alternator”.
OK or NG
MA
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace with a proper one.
EM
3 CHECK JUMPER CABLES INSTALLATION
Check that the jumper cables are connected in the correct sequence. LC
FE
CL
SEF439Z MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. AT
NG © Reconnect jumper cables properly.
AX
4 CHECK BATTERY FOR BOOSTER
Check that the battery for the booster is a 12V battery.
SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
BR
NG © Change the vehicle for booster.

ST
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-1186, again.
OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace ECM. BT
6 CHECK ELECTRICAL PARTS DAMAGE HA

Check the following for damage.
I Wiring harness and harness connectors for burn
I Fuses for short
SC
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END EL
NG © Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
IDX
EC-1187
DTC P1690 P5·PUMP C/MODULE EUROPE - YD
Description
control valve.
pressure chamber.

Mode NJEC0722
EC-1188
Altitude GI
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59
psi) MA
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2,
EM
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2,
11.36 psi)

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR MT
[Engine is running]
313 L/W
injection pump
I Idle speed
[Engine is running]
314 L/R
injection pump
I Idle speed

injection pump
I Idle speed
injection pump
I Idle speed
ST

P1690 I Injection pump control unit does not function I Electronic control fuel injection pump
0705 properly. BT
HA

SC
least 2 seconds.)
EC-1189
least 2 seconds.)
turn “ON”.
ECM.
1 INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
5. Is the DTC P1690 displayed again?
Without CONSULT-II
Yes or No
Yes © Replace electronic control fuel injection pump.
EC-1190
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM EUROPE - YD
Description
GI
ECM
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Func- Actuator
tion MA
Crankshaft position sensor Glow lamp,
Engine speed
(TDC) Glow Glow relay EM
Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant tem- control "
ture sensor perature Glow plugs
LC
When engine coolant temperature is more than approximately
75°C (167°F), the glow relay turns off.
When coolant temperature is lower than approximately 75°C
(167°F):
I Ignition switch ON
After ignition switch has turned to ON, the glow relay turns ON FE
for a certain period of time in relation to engine coolant
temperature, allowing current to flow through glow plug.
I Cranking
CL
The glow relay turns ON, allowing current to flow through glow
plug. MT
I Starting
After engine has started, current continues to flow through
glow plug (after-glow mode) for a certain period in relation to AT
engine coolant temperature.
The glow indicator lamp turns ON for a certain period of time in
relation to engine cooalnt temperature at the time glow relay is AX
turned ON.
SU
BR
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NJEC0760S02 ST

Glow Plug NJEC0760S0201
The glow plug is provided with a ceramic heating element to obtain
a high-temperature resistance. It glows in response to a signal sent RS
from the ECM, allowing current to flow through the glow plug via
the glow relay.
BT
HA
SEF376Y
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1191

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
214 W/B Glow relay Refer to “SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”, EC-1191.

Approximately 1V
I Glow indicator lamp is “ON”
508 OR Glow indicator lamp
I Glow indicator lamp is “OFF” (11 - 14V)
EC-1192
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC886
EC-1193
1 INSPECTION START
Check fuel level, fuel supplying system, starter motor, etc.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Correct.
2 CHECK INSTALLATION
Check that glow plug nut and all glow plug connecting plate nuts are installed properly.
SEF392YA
OK or NG
II)
NG © Install properly.

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Confirm that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates below 75°C (167°F). If it indicates above 75°C (167°F), cool down engine.
SEF013Y
turned “OFF”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 6.
EC-1194

2. Confirm that the voltage between ECM terminal 347 (Engine coolant temperature sensor signal) and ground is above
1.36V. If it is below 1.36V, cool down engine. MA
EM
LC
SEF442Z
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 5 seconds and then turn “ON”. FE
turned “OFF”.
CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
MT
NG © GO TO 6.
5 CHECK GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM OVERALL FUNCTION

AT
2. Set voltmeter probe between glow plug and engine body. AX
4. Check the voltage between glow plug and engine body under the following conditions.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF431Y
OK or NG BT
NG © GO TO 11. HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1195
6 CHECK GLOW INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector M32 or M152.
4. Check voltage between combination meter terminal 40 or 17 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF696Z
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

1. Fuse block (J/B) connector M1
2. 10A fuse
3. Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuse
8 CHECK GLOW INDICATOR LAMP OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Disconnect combination meter harness connector M36 or M152.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 508 and combination meter terminal 33 or 67. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 9.

1. Harness connectors M63, F102
2. Harness for open or short between combination meter and ECM
10 CHECK COMBINATION METER

Check combination meter and glow indicator lamp. Refer to EL-185, “Meter and Gauges”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © Repair or replace combination meter or glow indicator lamp.
EC-1196
11 CHECK GLOW RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect glow relay.
MA
EM
LC
SEF391Y
3. Check voltage between glow relay terminals 1, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF420Y
OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © GO TO 12. SU

BR
I 60A fusible link
I Harness for open or short between glow relay and battery ST
RS
13 CHECK GLOW RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 214 and glow relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
BT
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
SC
NG © GO TO 14.

EL
I Harness connectors E74, F35 IDX
I Harness for open or short between glow relay and ECM
EC-1197
15 CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN GLOW RELAY AND GLOW PLUG FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect glow plug harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between glow relay terminal 3 and glow plug harness connector. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
16 CHECK GLOW RELAY

Check continuity between glow relay terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions.
SEF433Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace glow relay.
17 CHECK GLOW PLUG

1. Remove glow plug connecting plate.
2. Check glow plug resistance.
SEF434Y
NOTE:
I Do not bump glow plug heating element. If it is bumped, replace glow plug with a new one.
I If glow plug is dropped from a height of 10 cm (3.94 in) or higher, replace with a new one.
I If glow plug installation hole is contaminated with carbon, remove it with a reamer or suitable tool.
I Hand-tighten glow plug by turning it two or three times, then tighten using a tool to specified torque.
: 17.7 - 22.5 N·m (1.8 - 2.3 kg-m, 13 - 16 ft-lb)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © Replace glow plug.
EC-1198

© INSPECTION END
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1199
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM EUROPE - YD
Description
Electronic controlled fuel injection pump Fuel injection signal

EGR volume con- EGR volume control
trol valve
to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the
ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum
by considering various engine conditions.
The EGR volume control valve remains close under the following
conditions.
I Engine stopped
I Engine starting
I High engine speed
SEF908Y

SEF411Y
EC-1200

Mode
NJEC0765
GI
MA
I Engine: After warming up After one minute at idle More than 10 step
EGR VOL CON/V
I Shift lever: Neutral position EM
I No-load Revving engine up to 3,200 rpm 0 step

LC
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
FE
COLOR
NO.
0.1 - 14V
CL
337 W/L (Voltage signals of each
[Engine is running]
338 PU/W ECM terminals differ
EGR volume control valve I Warm-up condition MT
350 GY according to the control
I Idle speed
351 OR/B position of EGR volume
control valve.)
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1201
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram =NJEC0767
HEC831
EC-1202
1 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM OVERALL FUNCTION GI

2. Set the oscilloscope probe between ECM terminals 337, 338, 350, 351 and ground.
3. Start engine and let it idle. MA
4. Check the oscilloscope screen when revving engine up to 3,200 rpm and return to idle.
EM
LC
FE
SEF247Z
OK or NG
CL
NG © GO TO 2.
MT
2 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF388Y
4. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF412Y EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. IDX
NG © GO TO 3.
EC-1203
3 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

SEF379Y
3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 5 and EGR volume control valve terminals 2 and 5. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

SEF413Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

I 10A fuse
EC-1204
6 CHECK ECM RELAY

1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF296X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. FE
CL
7 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. MT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. AT
AX
SU
MTBL0463
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1205
8 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-I

Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.
SEF414Y
OK or NG
II)

With CONSULT-II
4. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothy forward and backward according to the valve opening
steps.
SEF819Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
EC-1206

3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”. MA
4. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch
position.
EM
LC
FE
SEF560W
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. MT

AT
© INSPECTION END
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1207
START SIGNAL EUROPE - YD
Wiring Diagram
HEC834
EC-1208
1 CHECK START SIGNAL OVERALL FUNCTION GI

With CONSULT-II
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions. MA
EM
LC
SEF604X FE
Without CONSULT-II
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEF909Y SU
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END BR
NG © GO TO 2.
ST
2 CHECK START SIGNAL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. RS
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and ignition switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 422 and ignition switch terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
HA
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
SC
Check the following. EL
I 10A fuse
I Fuse block (J/B) connectors M2, E104 IDX
EC-1209

© INSPECTION END
EC-1210
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH EUROPE - YD
Description
When the gear position is in “Neutral”, neutral position is “ON”. ECM detects the position because the conti-
nuity of the line (the “ON” signal) exists. GI
Mode MA
NJEC0782
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION EM
Shift lever: Neutral ON
Except above OFF
LC

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE CL
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 0V
418 G/OR
switch [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1211
Wiring Diagram
HEC888
EC-1212

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. MA
3. Check “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
EM
LC
FE
SEF049Y
Without CONSULT-II
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEF914Y
BR
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-1213
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.
SEF393Y
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 4 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 418 and PNP switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Refer to MT-21, “Position Switch Check”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace park/neutral position switch.

© INSPECTION END
EC-1214
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL EUROPE - YD
Wiring Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC837
EC-1215
MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS EUROPE - YD
Wiring Diagram

SEDAN NJEC0787S01
HEC889
EC-1216
MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS EUROPE - YD
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HEC842
EC-1217
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) EUROPE - YD
General Specifications
General Specifications NJEC0788

Unit: rpm
Engine YD22DDT
Idle speed 725±25
Maximum engine speed 4,900
Injection Nozzle NJEC0790

Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)
New 21,476 - 22,457 (214.7 - 224.5, 219 - 229, 3,114 - 3,256)

Initial injection pressure
Limit 18,275 (182.7, 186, 2,650)
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC) NJEC0792
Glow Plug NJEC0793
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 0.8
Accelerator Position Sensor NJEC0794
Throttle valve conditions Resistance between terminals 2 and 4 kΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
Partially open 0.9 - 2.1
EGR Volume Control Valve NJEC0795
EC-1218

Ec PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Ec PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM GI

GENERAL - QG Idle Air Volume Learning ...........................................43

Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC NJEC0797

A/T COMM LINE P0600 0600 — EC-167

ECT SEN/CIRC P0115 0115 X EC-123

ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 X EC-170

HO2S1 (B1) P0130 0130 X EC-135

IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P1320 1320 X EC-188

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0100 0100 X EC-116 CL

NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER

NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER

VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0500 X EC-161

NOT DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER

NOT DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER

P0100 0100 X MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-116

P0115 0115 X ECT SEN/CIRC EC-123

P0120 0120 X THRTL POS SEN/CIRC EC-128

P0130 0130 X HO2S1 (B1) EC-135

P0325 0325 — KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-144

P0335 0335 X CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-148

P0340 0340 X CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-154

P0500 0500 X VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC EC-161

P0600 0600 — A/T COMM LINE EC-167

P1217 1217 X ENG OVER TEMP EC-170

P1320 1320 X IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY EC-188

P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 X NATS MALFUNCTION EL section

*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

Engine Fuel & Emission Control System =NJEC0800

I Do not disassemble ECM.

I When connecting or disconnecting ECM harness

I When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

I When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never

I Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

I When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

Special Service Tool NJEC0802

KV10117100 Loosening or tightening front heated oxygen sen-

Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before ST

Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

Engine Control Component Parts Location NJEC0804

Circuit Diagram NJEC0805

System Diagram — QG13DE without Three

System Diagram — Except QG13DE without

Vacuum Hose Drawing NJEC0808

System Chart NJEC0809

Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator) GI

*: QG16DE and QG18DE engine models with three way catalyst MT

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

Front heated oxygen sensor

Ignition switch Start signal

Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation

Knock sensor Engine knocking condition

Electrical load Electrical load signal

Battery Battery voltage

Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering operation

Basic Multiport Fuel Injection System NJEC0810S02

Two types of systems are used.

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

1: EC-272 2: EC-48 *3: EC-272